PDF Mitel SX 100 & 200 Gen. 205 Vol. 2

SX-100 & SX-200 Gen. 205 Vol 2 SX-100 & SX-200 Gen. 205 Vol 2

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 729

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SX-100/200 SUPERSWITCH
Generic 205 - Volume II

sx-100”/sx-200TM
SUPERSWITCH
VOLUME II (GENERIC 205) DOCUMEjNT LIST
SECTION

I-:,

-‘,
.\--.-. ._.

$-:

Tl!TLE

L O C A T O R .: :

MITL9105/9110-98-000

DOCUMENTATION INDEX

MlTL9105/9110-98-200

SHIPPING, RECEIVING AND
INSTALLATION

MITL9105/9110-98-205

INSTALLATION FORMS

MITL9105/9110-98-210

SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

MlTL9105/9110-98-215

INSTALLATION TEST
PROCEDURES

~lTL9105/9110-98-320

EXTENSION TEST PROCEDURES

‘llTL9105/9110-98-350

TROUBLESHOOTING

MITEL STANDARD PRACTICE

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-000
Issue 2, August 1980

SX=l oo*/sx-200*
SUPERSWITCH*
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGES
DOCUMENTATION INDEX
1. GENERAL

TABLE 2-l
DOCUMENTATION INDEX - VOLUME I

1.01 This section lists Mite1 Standard Practices
which have been issued pertaining to the
SX-100 and SX-200 Private Automatic Branch Exchanges.

2. DOCUMENTATION INDEX
2.01

The complete set of Practices are contained in two volumes as listed in Tables 2-1
and 2-2. Volume I basically covers the description
and operation of the PABX’s; while Volume II is
concerned with the installation and maintenance
aspects of the systems.

2.02 Sections commencing with MITL9105 and
MITLSllO- contain information specific to
the SX-100 and SX-200 PABX respectively, while
those commmencing with MITL9105/9110embrace both types of PABX.

MITL9105/9110-98-000
M lTL910598-100
MITLSllO-98-100
MlTL9105/9110-98-105

Documentation Index
General Description
General Description
Feature and Services
Description
MITL9105-98-150
Physical Description
and Ordering lnformatioi
Physical Description
M ITL911 O-98-1 50
and Ordering lnformatioi
MITL9105/9110-98-180
Engineering Information
MITL9105/9110-98-212
Multi Digit Toll Control
M ITL91051911 O-98-220 Speed Call
MITL9105/9110-98-300
Attendant Console
Description-Commercial
MITL9105/9110-98-305
Attendant Console
Description-Hotel/Motel
MITL9105/9110-98-310
Programming and
Maintenance Console
Description
MITL9105/9110-98-450
Traffic Measurement
MITL9105/9110-98-451
Station Message Detail
Recording
MITL9105/9110-98-500
General Maintenance
Information

TABLE 2-2
DOCUMENTATION INDEX - VOLUME II
MITL9105/9110-98-000
MITL9105/9110-98-200
MITL9105/9110-98-205
MITL9105/9110-98-210
MITL9105/9110-98-215
MITL9105/9110-98-320
MITL9105/9110-98-350

*;cE3

0 MITEL Corporation 1980

Documentation Index
Shipping Receiving
and Installation
Installation Forms
System Programming
Installation Test
Procedures
Extension Test
Procedures
Troubleshooting

Page l/2

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200 ’
Issue 3, June 1980

MITEL STANDARD PRACTICE

SX-lOO* Ah D SX-200*
SUPERS MITCH*
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTO MATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
SHIPPING, RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION
INFORA IATION
CONTENTS
1.

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2

IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Cabinet SX.100 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment,Cabinet SX.200 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Shelf and Card
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cables ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Fail Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Fail Transfer Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TestLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserve Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging, Dictation, and Music
On Hold Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
3
3
3
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9

REPACKING FOR RESHIPMENT . . . . . . . .18

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . .
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . .
Floor Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Cabinet Location . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.18
.I8
.I8
.I8
.18
.17

10.

CABLING AND CROSS CONNECTIONS .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . \. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Set and Trunk Cabling. . . . . . .
Cable Terminations SX-100 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Terminations SX.200 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross.Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Cross Connect Field
Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.I9
.19
.19
.19
.20
-20
.45

11.

DESIGNATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

12.

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.49
..4 9

SHIPPING AND RECEIVING . . . . . . . . . . . .I0
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO
System Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lO

APPENDIX 1 Mite1 Action Procedures . . . . .

PACKAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consoles............................1
Equipment Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserve Power Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DELIVERY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

UNPACKING AND HANDLING . . . . . . . . . .12
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Shelves and Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

APPENDIX 3 SX.100 Installation
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3.112
Unpack SX-100 Equipment
(MAP200.301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-3
Unpack Consoles (MAP200-302). . . . . . . . A3.5
Install Console Faceplate
Designations (MAP200.303) . . . . . . . . . . .A3.9
Inspect Equipment (MAP200.304) . . . . .A3.15
Install and Connect Equipment
(MAP200-305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3.19
Set Card Switches (MAP200-308) . . . A3-29130
Power-Up System (MAP200-307). . . . . . .A3.31

INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I2
Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..12
Cards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..12
Defective Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I2

APPENDIX 4 SX.200 Installation
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4.l
Unpack Equipment Cabinet
(MAP200.401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4.3
Unpack Consoles (MAP200.402). . . . . . . .A4-7

.lO
.10
2
.12
.I2
.12

Al-l

APPENDIX 2 FCC Interconnection
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.1

0 MITEL Corporation 1980
* Registered Trademark of MITEL Corporation

Page !
-.

-I

SECTION MITL910519110.98.200
CONTENTS

PAGE

Install Console Faceplate Designations
(MAP200-403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4.11
Inspect Equipment (MAP200-404) . . . . .A4.15
Connect Cables (MAP200.405) . . . . . . . .A4.19
Set Card Switches (MAP200.408) . . . A4.23124
Power-Up System (MAP200-407). . . . . . . A4-25
APPENDIX 5 Card Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . A5.1
Set CO Trunk Option and Status
Switches (MAP200-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5-3
Set E and M/Tie Trunk Option
Switches (MAP200-502) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-9
Set DID Tie Trunk Option Switches
(MAP200-503) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5.17
Set Scanner Card Baud Rate
Switch (MAP200-504) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5.23
APPENDIX 8 Additional Equipment
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A8-112
Shelf 2 Installation (MAP200.601). . . . . . . A6-3
Install New Cards (MAP200.602). . . . . . . .A6-7
Reserve Power Supply Installation
(MAP200-603) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-15
Console Interface Board Installation
(MAP200.604) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6.23
Backplane Translator Board Installation
(MAP200-605) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6-31
Installation of RCP Card (MAP200-606) . A6-39
Reserve Power Supply Installation (SX-100)
(MAP200-607) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-43

1. INTRODUCTION
General
1.01

This section provides general identification, installation, shipping, receiving and
cabling information for the SX-100 and SX-200
Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchanges
(PABXs). The systems consist of two major components, the equipment cabinet, containing the
switching equipment and power supply and the
attendant console(s).
Reason for Reissue
1.02 This section is reissued to include Generic
205 features and applicable details.
Documentation
1.03

Table l-l lists all MITEL practices,
associated with the Electronic PABX.

2. IDENTIFICATION
General
2.01 The SX-100 and SX-200 are multicustomer
electronic switching systems providing the
following capacities:
l

SX-100: Capacity of 160 ports with 112
ports available for lines, trunks and additional receivers

TABLE l-l DOCUMENTATION
Document No.
M ITL910598-100
MITLSI 10-98-100
MITLSI 0519110-98-105
M ITL9105-98-150
M ITL911 O-98-1 50
M ITL9105/9110-98-180
M ITL9105/911 O-98-200
M ITL9105/911 O-98-205
MITL9105/9110-98-210
MITL9105/9110-98-212
M ITL9105/911 O-98-21 5
M ITL91051911 O-98-220
M ITL9105/911 O-98-300
M ITL9105/911 O-98-305
MITL9105/9110-98-310
M ITL9105/911 O-98-320
MITL9105/9110-98-350
M ITL9105/911 O-98-450
M ITL91051911 O-98-451
M ITL9105/911 O-98-500
Page 2

Title
General Description
General Description
Features Description
Physical Description and Ordering Information
Physical Description and Ordering Information
Engineering Information
Shipping, Receiving and Installation
Installation Forms
System Programming
Toll Control
System Test Procedures (Installation)
Speed Call
Attendant Console Description
Attendant Console (Hotel/Motel) Description
Programming and Maintenance Console Description
Station Test Procedures
Troubleshooting Instructions
Traffic Measurement
Station Message Detail Recording
General Maintenance Information

Applicable to
sx-1 00
sx-200
H
r/
r/
c/
r/
J
J
I/
H
r/
r/
J
r/
r/
J
H
r/
r/

J
J
r/
r/
/
r/
H
J
fl
r/
fl
fl
r/
r/
r/
fl
ti
fl

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

SX-200: Capacity of 256 ports with 208
ports available for lines, trunks and additional receivers

2.02 The systems are electrically compatible
with most existing station, key telephone,
Private Branch Exchange (PBX) and Central Office
(CO) equipment. The PABXs provide:
.

service to a maximum of four individual
customers

2.05

Reserve power for the SX-200 system, if required, may be supplied from the optional
battery pack shelf located at the bottom of the
equipment cabinet. In the case of the SX-100
reserve power supply it forms a separate base
unit upon which the SX-100 can be installed.
Equipment Shelves
2.06

the use of a flexible numbering plan
the simultaneous use of DTMF and rotary
dial stations
optional use of attendant consoles - 2 maximum
the sharing of attendant consoles between
tenants
extensive selection of standard and optional features
freedom from scheduled maintenance
automatic diagnostics

six power fail transfer trunks (SX-100)

twelve power fail transfer trunks (SX-200)

optional reserve power supply

Equipment Cabinet, SX-100
2.03 The SX-100 equipment cabinet (Fig. 2-1)
consists of a metal frame enclosed by back
and top panels. Access to the equipment shelf is
provided by the front door of the cabinet. The rear
panel allows access to the line and trunk cable
plugs.
Equipment Cabinet, SX-200
2.04 The SX-200 equipment cabinet (Fig. 2-2)
consists of a metal frame which is enclosed
by side and top panels. Access to the equipment
shelves is provided by the front door of the
cabinet. The hinged rear panels hold the power
supply and allow access to the line and trunk
cable plugs.

The SX-100 is equipped with one shelf, but
the SX-200 may be equipped with one or two
equipment shelves depending on the number of
lines and trunks required. Each equipment shelf
(Fig. 2-3) is 10.75in. (273mm) high, 19in. (485mm)
wide and 16.375in. (415mm) deep. The shelves are
mounted in the equipment cabinet with the
backplane assembly towards the rear of the
cabinet. The shelves are held in position by mounting screws which locate the shelves in the main
frame.
2.07

The physical characteristics and part
numbers of the shelves, power supplies and
maintenance panel are given in Table 2-1. The
weight for each shelf is for a shelf containing a
full complement of circuit cards.
2.08 The equipment shelves used in the SX-100
and the SX-200 are identical. Fig. 2-3 shows
two views of an equipment shelf.
2.09

The equipment shelves hold up to 22 circuit
cards. Each card plugs into a connector
mounted on the shelf backplane. A locking bar
assembly which passes through the sides of the
shelf ensures that the circuit packs are seated
correctly in the backplane connectors.
2.10 A number of card positions within each
shelf are reserved for control cards. These
card positions are identified by color coded identification strips along the top and bottom edges of
the shelf. Only cards with locking clips of the
same color as the identification strip should be
plugged into that card position. Circuit card
and/or system damage may otherwise occur.
2.11

Card positions, 14, 13, and 12 on equipment
shelf 1, may be used for line, trunk or
receiver cards. These positions are marked with a
blue and black identification strip, indicating that
any card coded with either of the identification
color codes may be used in these positions.

Page 3

,!’

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

,MAINTENANCE

PANEL

PRIMARY POWER SWITCH

POWER bUPPLY

EQUIPMENT SHELF

CABINET DOOR

FRONT VIEW

PRIMARY PO’iVER

SUPPLY
CABLE CLAMPS

REAR VIEW

t7fqqqq
(31.6kg)

Fig. 2-l

Page 4

SX-100 Equipment Cabinet

( 4 2 2 m m ) ( 6 3 5 m m ) (47Omm)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

q
i@

MAINTENANCE PANEL

i EQUIPMENT SHELF 2

1 EQUIPMENT SHELF 1

Front View

RESERVE POWER SHELF

-:. ,I

.’

P‘

WEIGHT

HEIGHT

WIDTH

DEPTH

38.0in.
(96Omm)

23.5in.
(600mm)

27.5in.
(700mm)

PRIMARY

CABLE ENTRY

POWER SUPPLY

290lb
(131.7kg)

Rear View

Fig. 2-2 SX-260

.’

Equipment Cabinet

537.1

‘^

Page 5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

Fig. 2-3 Equipment Shelf
TABLE 2-l PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Shelf Type
Maintenance Panel
Equipment Shelf
Reserve Power
Primary Power

Page 8

SX-100 Part
Number
9105-025
9110-012
9105014
9105-008

SX-200 Part
Number
9110-125
9110-012
9110-014
911 O-008 o r 1 0 8

Ibs

Weight
Kg

Maximum No.
Circuit Cards

2
38
125
16170

0.9
17
57
7132

22
-

S E C T I O N

2.12 Line or trunk cards can be placed in any
position identified with black color code
strips. It is recommended that line cards be placed in the lowest numbered card positions and
trunk cards in the highest card positions for the
following reasons:

-CAUTION
NOTICE

-PARTNUMBER

the maintenance test line is permanently
wired to card position 1, hardware position
001
. separation of line and trunk cards allow
ease of identification of card type during installation and maintenance
. ease of system programming
l

NOTE:

MITL9105/9110-98.200

If more than one receiver card is used,
the second receiver card MUST be placed in card position 14, the third in position 13, and the fourth in position 12. It is
therefore recommended that these card
positions be used for trunk cards only
when all other card positions are in use.

-TRANSPARENT
FRONT PANEL

Circuit Cards
2.13

The circuit cards (Fig. 2-4) used in the equipment shelves measure loin. (254mm) high,
13in. (330mm) deep, and are manufactured from
fiberglass board. The light emitting diodes (LEDs)
mounted at the front of each card indicate the
operational status of the card. The transparent
front panel protects the LEDs while allowing their
status to be observed.

@ii
2

CARD EXTRACTOR

Fig. 2-4

Typical Circuit Card

TABLE 2-2
EQUIPMENT CODING

Type
Equipment Shelf (Note 1)
RAMlCOS Card
Memory Expander
PROM/RAM Expander
PROM/CPU Card
Scanner Card
Tone Control Card
Console Control Card
Remote Control - PABX Card (Note 2)
Receiver Card (Dual or Quad)
CO Trunk Card (4 trunk)
E&M Trunk Card (2 trunk)
DID/Tie Trunk Card (2 trunk)
Line Card (8 station)
Note:

Part
Number
9110-012
911 O-002
9110-019
9110-l 19
911 O-003
91 lo-004 o r -104
911 O-005
911 O-006
9110-017
911 O-009 o r - 0 1 6
9110-011 o r -211
9110-013
911 O-031
9110-110

Card Extractor
Color Code
White
Brown
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Green
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Black

,1. All equipment shelves are identical.
2. The RCP is supplied only if required that the PABX be accessed by RMAT facilities (see Section
MITL9105/9110-98-101
Remote Maintenance Administration and Test System).
Page 7

SECTION MITL91051911 O-98-200

Fig. 2-5 Attendant Console
2.14

On the front
part number
not be removed
power is on carry
Fig. 2-4.

panel of each card, is the card
and its type. Cards which must
or inserted while the system
a Caution notice as shown in

2.15

2.19 The console is equipped with two sets of
handset/headset jacks. These jacks will accept all standard handsets or headsets presently
in general use.

Connecting Cables

Each card is equipped with two card extractors which enable the card to be easily
removed. In the locked position the card extractors in conjunction with the locking bar ensure
that the circuit cards are held firmly in position.

2.20

Equipment Shelf and Card Identification

2.21

2.16 Table 2-2 lists all shelf and card part
numbers, types and color codes.

Features and Services
2.17

The features and service codes are entered
into the system memory through a console.
No wiring or strapping is required when assigning
features.

Attendant Console
2.18 The attendant console (Fig. 2-5) is a selfcontained unit, connected to the equipment
cabinet by a plug-ended 25 pair cable.

Page 8

All connections to the attendant console
and the equipment cabinet, are made using
plug or connector-ended 25 pair cables.

Power Fail Transfer
In the event of a major alarm condition the
power fail transfer relays located on the
Power Fail Transfer card, will connect Central Office trunks to selected station lines (maximum 6
trunks for SX-100, 12 trunks for SX-200). Power fail
transfer will take place under any of the following
conditions:
.

commercial power failure (if no reserve
power supply is used)

common

operating voltages out of accepted
tolerance

manual transfer from a console or the
equipment cabinet

control

failure

S E C T I O N
(a) Incoming Calls After a power fail transfer
has occurred, ringing of extensions for incoming calls is applied directly to the
selected extension line from the Central Office (CO).
(b) Outgoing Calls To place an outgoing call
through a ground start CO trunk, with the
system in the power fail transfer mode, the
extension originating the call must be
equipped with a ground key. When the
ground key is momentarily pressed, a
ground is applied to the Ring side of the
line, energizing the CO equipment. One
side of the ground key must be connected
to a ground and the other to the Ring conductor of the station line. Call origination
over loop start trunks does not require the
use of a ground start key.
Power Fail Transfer Reset
2.22 The system may be returned to normal
operation from power fail transfer in one of
three ways.
(a)

Major Alarm If the system was placed in the
power fail transfer mode because of a major alarm condition it will return to normal
operation and turn off the major alarm lamp
when the alarm condition is corrected.

(b) Manual Reset When the system has been
placed in the power fail transfer mode by
operation of the transfer switch, the major
alarm lamp will light, indicating that
transfer has taken place. Setting the
transfer switch to NORMAL will reset the
system to normal operation and turn off the
alarm lamp if the alarm condition has been
corrected. If the alarm condition has not
been corrected the alarm lamp will remain
lit indicating that the system has remained
in the power fail transfer mode.
(c) Reset From Commercial Power Failure The
system will automatically return to normal
operation when commercial power is
restored.
Note:

When the system returns to normal
operation from the power fail transfer
mode all connections established

MITL9105/9110-98-200

through the power fail transfer circuits
will be maintained until the completion
of the calls.
Test Line
2.23

The test line, permanently assigned to hardware position 001, has the Tip and Ring connections wired to the two terminals on the face of
the maintenance panel. The service person can:
. seize individual trunks
.

seize individual receivers

seize individual speech paths

initialize card slots

busy out selected receivers, trunks or
speech paths.
clear all alarms and raise associated busyout conditions

reset the systems (Generic 203, 204)

initiate a system dump (Generic 204)

control the printer (Generic 204)

Reserve Power Supply
2.24 The optional reserve power supply (in the
form of batteries and charging system) is
housed in the SX-200 equipment cabinet; or in a
package that forms a base for the SX-100 cabinet.
The power supply is designed to maintain system
operation for a minimum of two hours in the event
of main power failure.
Paging, Dictation, and Music on Hold Equipment
2.25 All paging, dictation and music on hold
equipment is located external to the PABX.
This equipment should be located in an environment specified by the individual supplier and connected to the PABX through the cross-connect
field.
Night Relays
2.28 Four relays are provided for use during
night service. One is operated permanently
during night service, and the other three may be
assigned to various trunks to ring night bells.

Page 9

’

SECTION MITL9105/911

o-98-200

Power, supplied from the power supply and required to operate night bells must be connected
at the cross-connect field.

4. PACKAGING

3. SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

4.01

Introduction
3.01

This part describes the procedures to be used when shipping or receiving the Electronic PABX equipment.
System Shipment
3.02

The PABX cabinet is shipped in a single carton containing the equipment cabinet. The
consoles and reserve power supply, if required are
packaged and shipped separately from the
system equipment package.

System Package
The equipment is shipped with some cards
and all shelves in position. The equipment
cabinet is enclosed in a polyethylene sheet and
positioned on the shock absorbant shipping
pallet. Foam sheet is placed around and on top of
the cabinet to protect it from damage and the
complete assembly encased in a tri-board sleeve.
Four transportation straps are then fastened to
the pallet to prevent any movement of the cabinet
package. The tri-wall cap is placed over the
sleeve, and the complete assembly secured to the
shipping pallet by two metal retaining straps.
Figs. 4-l and 4-2 respectively show the packaging
arrangements for the SX-100 and SX-200.

STYROFOAM

Fig. 4-l System Packaging

Page 10

SECTION MITLSI 05/911 O-98-200

STYROFOAM

FIBERGLASS

Fig. 4-2 System Packaging

TAPE

Page 11

i
SECTlON M ITL9105/911

o-98-200

Consoles

Shelves and Circuit Cards

4.02

Each console is wrapped in a polyethylene
sheet and placed in a cardboard packing
carton and protected with shock absorbent foam
inserts. The handset and cradle are placed in
bags and inserted in the corners of the box at one
end. The console manual is placed at the other
end of the box, and the Extension Features Operation booklets are distributed in the box to fill the
available space. The completed package is
secured with fibreglass tape (See Fig. 4-3).
Equipment Shelves
4.03

Equipment shelves, when shipped
separately, are packaged in a similar manner. A shelf, with all cards removed, is enclosed in
a cardboard protector to prevent damage to the
shelf backplane. The protected shelf is then wrapped in a polyethylene sheet and placed in a formed foam insert. The complete assembly is finally
encased in a packing carton and secured by
fibreglass tape (Fig. 4-4).
Reserve Power Shelf
The method of packaging the reserve power
shelf is the same as for equipment shelves,
except a heavy duty commercial packing carton is
used in place of the regular packing cartons, due
to the weight of the battery packs in the reserve
power shelf.

6.02

Shelves and circuit cards shipped separately from the equipment cabinet should not
be unpacked before they are required for use.
When required, the shelf and cards are to be
transported to the equipment location packaged
in their original containers when possible.

INSPECTION

Cabinet
7.01

After positioning and unpacking the equipment, a visual inspection should be performed prior to installation to ensure that:
(a)

The cabinet has not been dented or scratched during shipment.

(b) The door on the front of the cabinet opens
and closes easily.
(c) The shelves are mounted firmly in the
cabinet.

4.04

Printed Circuit Cards
All printed circuit cards, if shipped
separately, are packaged as shown in Fig.
4-5. If a large number of circuit cards are to be
shipped, they are individually packed and shipped
in groups of ten per carton.

(d) The shelves are not bent or otherwise
damaged.
(e) All cards are seated firmly in their connectors.
(f)

Rear doors open and close easily.

4.05

DELIVERY

(g) All components mounted in the rear panel
power supply are secure.
(h)

All interconnecting
secure.

cables

and

plugs

are

CHECK

5.01 At the time of delivery at the installation
site all items delivered must be checked
against the order form and packaging slip. Any
discrepancies must be reported immediately.

(j) All connections to the power supply are
tight.
Shelves
7.02

Inspect the shelf to ensure that:

6. UNPACKING AND HANDLING
(a)
Cabinet
6.01 The procedure to be used when handling
and unpacking the equipment are detailed
in Appendices 3 and 4.

Page 12

Edge connector contacts are undamaged
and do not contain any foreign matter.

(b) No circuit card guides are broken.
(c) No wires are broken.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

SX-200

CABINET
-

&-------

L
CRADLE

BAG
HANDSET IN
POLYETHYLENE

CONSOLE
WRAPPED IN
POLYETHYLENE
SHEET

8-I

TAPE

‘V

CGNSOLE
- - . - - - - PACKAGING
.-._.
__..._ (FOR SHIPMENT IN SX-200 1 - SHELF CABINET)
CRADLE j

lnl

HARDWARE/q
BAG
m
HANDSET IN
POLYETHYLENC
BUBBLE WRAP
V‘3ul

r(\

MANUAL
FOAM INSERTS (2)

WRAPPED IN
IP
CARDBOARD
/CARTON

(b) CONSOLE PACKAGING (FOR SEPARATE SHIPMENT)

Fig. 4-3 Console Packaging

Page 13

r
I

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

CARDBOARDPRO1TECTOR

POLYETHYLENESHEET

5
PACKINGCARTON

FIBERGLASSTAPE /

Fig. 4-4 Equipment Shelf Packaging

Page 14

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

Fig. 4-5 Circuit Card Packaging

Page15

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

(d) The backplane is not cracked.
(e)

quirements of 9.02, and is within the following
temperature and humidity limits:

No connector pins are broken or bent.
l

Temperature 0 - 40 “C (32 - 113 “F)

Relative Humidity 10 - 90%

Cards
CAUTION:

Hand/e Circuit Cards by their edges
only. Handling the board faces or
components may cause damage.

7.03 If printed circuit cards are shipped
separately from the equipment, inspect
each circuit card to ensure that:
(a) The fibreboard is not cracked.
(b) No loose leads or components are apparent.
(c) The card front panel is not broken.
Circuit cards shipped in the equipment do not require individual inspection unless equipment
shelf damage has been found.

Floor Space
9.02 The minimum floor space for installation
and subsequent maintenance of the SX-100
and SX-200 Electronic PABXs is shown in Figs.
9-l and 9-2 respectively.
Equipment Cabinet Location
9.03 The following requirement must be met
when selecting a location for the PABX
equipment. For cooling purposes the PABX
cabinet equipments use natural air convection
flow. For this reason the bottom areas of the
cabinets must be allowed free air flow, and must
not be obstructed, for example, by rug pile blocking the air vent entries.
The location MUST BE:

Defective Items
l

7.04

If any defective item is found it should be
tagged and returned to the supplier in accordance with accepted procedures. (See Part 8)
8. REPACKING FOR RESHIPMENT
8.01

When the PABX equipment is shipped from
one location to another, all items must be
packaged to prevent damage. Figs. 4-1 through
4-5 show how the equipment was originally
packaged. This method of packaging should be
followed as closely as possible.
8.02 If the original packaging material is no
longer available, the returned parts should
be wrapped in several layers of air-cushion type
wrap, placed in a suitable container, and surrounded with paper to minimize movement of the
items.
9. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.
.
.

dry and clean
well ventilated
well lit
easily accessible

The location MUST NOT BE:
.

near a sprinkler system, sweating pipes,
steam pipes or steam vents

in areas with extreme heat or cold

in areas where corrosive fumes or exhaust
from machinery is present

in passageways used for moving equipment

next to a reproducing or copying machine.
A minimum clearance of 10 feet (3m) must
be provided and the room should be ventilated by an exhaust fan if the reproducing
machine is not equipped with a filtering
system

Power Supply Requirements
Environmental Requirements
9.01 The PABX equipment cabinet may be installed in any location which fullfills the re-

Page 16

9.04 The customer must provide a single phase
power receptacle, with the following recom_mendations:

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

18.5in.
(470mm)
I
MINIMUM WORKING
AREA CLEARANCE

(Slpm)
“““‘IUM
2in. (51mm)
. ..‘-- ‘^ REQUIRED O N
1AT REAR

rig.

Y-I

- I -

3~.iuu Mmlmum

24in.
(610mm)
I

equipmenr

115V, 60Hz fused, and capable of delivering
4A; or 25OV, 50Hz fused, and capable of
delivering 2A
the power receptacle should be wired and
fused independently from all other receptacles
a warning tag should be attached to circuitbreaker-type fuses to prevent unauthorized
manual operation
the power receptacle must not be controlled by a switch
the live and neutral conductors at the
receptacle shall be wired to their proper
respective connections
the power receptacle must be a 3-wire type,
with the third wire connected to the ground
of the electrical system
the receptacle should be easily accessible
for the removal of the plug for maintenance

RACK MOUNT
VERSION
(23in.)

LaDme rloor space nequlremenrs
l

the receptacle location should be selected
to prevent accidental removal of the power
cord
the power cord between the cabinet and the
receptacle should not present a hazard to
the subscriber
a warning tag should be attached to the
plug end of the power cord to prevent accidental removal of the cord by the
subscriber

Equipment Grounding

9.05 The following is a description of the required PBX equipment grounding practice:
(a) All circuit commons within the cabinet
shall derive ground from a single ground
concentration point within the cabinet.
Each cabinet’s ground concentration point
shall derive ground from a single ground
concentration point serving ,-all system

Page 17

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

1 + NOTE: ,I~j~~
m 1ENTER FROM ONE 12&n.
SIDE ONLY
(711mm)
I

I’) 7ft
,Qm\

; 30in
; (762mm)
I
L-

- - - - - - - -1
t

I
(610mm)
74in

MINIMUM 2in (51mm)
,-’ cna”r’CE IS REQUIRED ON
ULLnnnlY’
EACH SID E AND AT THE REAR
OF THE EQUIPMENT CABINET

L
Fig. 9-2

SX-200 Minimum Equipment Cabinet Floor Space Requirements

cabinets and peripherals colocated with
the system.
(b) The system cabinets and all associated
ducting hardware along with all colocated
peripherals shall not be exposed to any
ground source other than the system single
point ground described in (a) above.
(c) AC service wires bringing ac power to the
cabinets shall not share an enclosure or
raceway with any other system grounds, DC
power distribution wires, or signaling wires.
All non-connectorized ac power terminations shall be enclosed by raceways and
termination boxes whether these
enclosures appear outside or within system
cabinets. This is to ensure that ac service
wires cannot fault to circuitry within system
cabinets or associated ducting hardware.

(d) All system hardware shall be provided with
an ac fault return path to the system single
point ground which in turn shall be provided
with a reliable path to the equipment grounding conductor (i.e. green wire ground or
safety ground). The path from system
equipment to system single point ground
need not be a direct dedicated path but can
be any reliable path to other system hardware which receives the above grounding
path.
(e) All sources of external ground (i.e. system
signaling ground to the approved ground
source, etc.) shall connect only to the
system single point ground. The intent of
providing for a system single point ground
is to minimize ground loops and prevent
lightning from finding a path through
,system components.
:

Page 18

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-200

Telephone Set and Trunk Cabling

(f) A separate grounding conductor (minimum
size, 14AWG) shall be separately run from
the system single point ground to the communications ground system on the crossconnect field.
10. CABLING AND CROSS-CONNECTIONS

10.02 Telephone set and trunk cabling terminates
on the building cross-connect terminal in
the normal manner. The cabling requirements and
limits for stations and consoles are shown in Fig.
10-l(a) and (b).

General

Cable Terminations, SX-100

10.01 This part details the cabling and crossconnections required when installing the
PABX.

10.03All interconnecting cables must be terminated in accordance with Tables 10-1,
10-2 and Fig. 10-2.

TWO CONDUCTOR WIRE
OR EQUIVALENT

BLOCK

CABLE CONNECTOR

CABLE

CABINET

NOTE:STATION LOOPLlMlT1200OHMS(INCLUDINGSTATlONSET)

(a) STATION CABLING & LIMITS
CABLE
CONNECTORS

INTERCONNECT

BOARD

INTFRCONNFCT

25 PAIR
PLUG-ENDED CABLE

SHELFCONNECTOR
CONSOLE INTERCONNECT
BOARD

CABINET

NOTE: CABLING LIMIT lOOOFT. (305m)- 26 AWG MINIMUM
CABLE CONSOLETO EQUIPMENT CABINET.

(b)ATlENDANTCONSOLECABLlNG&

Fig. 10-I

LIMITS

Station and Console Cabling Requirements
Page 19

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Cable Terminations, SX-200
10.04All interconnecting cables must be terminated in accordance with Fig. 10-3 and
Tables 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, and 10-5. In addition if
Shelf 2 is installed the interconnecting cables
listed in Table 10-4 must be terminated.

Cross-Connections
10.05 Jumpers should be run using Z type 24AWG
cross-connecting

cables.

P301
(14 PIN)

BOARD

10.08Connection b e t w e e n t h e e q u i p m e n t
cabinet, cross connect field, stations,
trunks and consoles should be made using
26AWG connector ended cable in accordance
with Tables IO-1 through 10-5.

10.07Cabling
connections between shelf 1, the
interconnect board, and cross connect field
are shown in Figs 10-2 and 10-3.

P302
(25 PIN)

CONNECTOR
NO.

DESTINATION

BOAR0

CONNECTOR
NO.
J13
J14
J15

NOTE: ALL PLUGS AND CONNECTORS
EXCEPT AS NOTED ARE STANDARD 25
PAIR (AMPHENOL TYPE). THE MALE AND
FEMALE DESIGNATORS REFER TO THE
CONNECTORS MOUNTED ON THE EDIJIPMENT.NOTTOTHECABLECONNECTORS.

Fig. 10-2 SX-100 Connector Locations
Page 20

PI6
P17
P16
P19
P20
P302
P301

DESTINATION
MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE 2
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE1
P6
Pi
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
PRINTER OR
RECORDING DEVICE
MAINTENANCE
PANEL

S E C T I O N

52
(6 w
piiq
P301
(liPIN)

P302
(25 PIN)

MITL9105/9110-98-200

NOTES:
1 . ALL PLUGSAND CONNECTORS EXCEPT AS NOTEDARE STANDARD 25 PAIR
(AMPHENOLTYPE).THE MALEANDFEMALE DESIGNATORS REFERTOTHE
CONNECTORSMOUNTEDON THE EQUIPMENT, NOTTOTHE CABLE CONNECTORS
2.

SEE APPENDIX 6. MAP200-604 FOR CONSOLE INTERFACEBOARD CONNECTIONS.
Pll
piq

p2-j

NOTUSED

Y
s
kf

*M*LE

SHELF 2
1

MALE

PlO

J15

n
r

P5
MALE
SHELF 1
MALE
P6

INTERCONNECT BOARD

Y2
0

CONNECTOR
SHELF
NO
Pl
P2
P3
1
P4

CONSOLE

Yus

DESTINATION

X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
P17
P16

P7
PB
P9
PlO
Pll
P12

X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
SPECIAL
FEATURES

CONNECTOR
NO.
DESTINATION
J13
MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE
INTER- J14
P25 (NOTE 2)
CONNECT J15

P20

INTERFACE

CONSOLE
hITERFACE
BOARD
2

BOARD

P2l

POWER FAILTRANSFER BOARD

;;" (NoTEX(
P16
P17
P5
P18
X-CONNECT
P19
X-CONNECT
P301
POWERSUPPLY
P302 PRINTER OR
MODEM
P303
MAINTENANCE
PANEL

CONSOLE
INTERFACE
BOARD
1

Fig. 10-3 SX-200 Connector Locations

Page 21

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
PLUG Pl (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pair
Color

Lead

Pin
26
1
27
2
26
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
GiW
W-BR
BR-W

TI reserved for
Rl test line
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
a

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

42
17
43
la
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Y-G

Designation
Line

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&M+

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 22

Tl
RI
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Card
Positions

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P2 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Fair
Color

Lead

Designation
Lines

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-EL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
14
R4

T2
R2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE E&Mt

Card
Position:

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

1
3

1
i:.
/:‘. ::.
.’

I
6

:
,-

I-For P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads

Page

!’

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
P L G P3 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pair
Color

Lead

Pin
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

TI
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

34
9
3.5
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
10
15
$1
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

$2
17
1 $3
18
$4
19
15
?O

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

$6
?l
$7
?2
$8
23
$9
24

v-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Ti
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

‘

Designation
Line

dote: Position 12 can be used for lines, trunks, or receiver

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&M:

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Ti
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

12
See Note

#4 card.

IFor 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 24

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Card
Positions

SECTION MITL91051911 O-98-200
TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P4(Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Lines

Lead Designation Trunks
co
D I D / T I E E&Mt

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

w-BL
BL-w
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

13
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Note: Position 12 can be used for lines. trunks or receiver card

Card
Positims

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

12
See Note

,-I

#4.

i-For P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 25

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P5 (Connects to Plug P17)
Pair
Color

Lead

Designation
Line

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
%R-W

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

MUSIC IN B
MUSIC IN A
SPARE
SPARE
PA1 OUT B
PA1 OUT A
PA2 OUT B
PA2 OUT A

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE E&M:

Card
Positions

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

13
See Note

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

14
See Note

RECEIVER No. 1

-I- (4
R (A)
S DATA OUT T (A)
S DATA OUT R (A)
S DATA IN T (A)
S DATA ON R (A)
PA2 Control B
PA2 Control A

ATTENDANT CONSOLE
No. 2

ATTENDANT CONSOLE
No. 1

T (A)
R (A)
S
S
S
S

DATA OUT T (A)
DATA OUT R (A)
DATA IN T (A)
DATA IN R (A)
PA1 Control B
PA1 Control A

MUSIC ON HOLD
18

SPARE
SPARE

Note: Positions 14 and 13 can be used for lines or trunks, or for receiver cards

#2 and #3 respectively.

tFor 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 28

SECTION

MITL910519110-98-200 j

TABLE 10-l SHELF 1 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P8 (Connects to Plug P18)

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Line

Lead Designation Trunks
DID/TIE
E&M?
co

Card
Positions

?6
1
?7
2
?8
3
29
4

W-EL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

Tl
Rl

Lines

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

13
See Note

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

Tl
Rl

Lines

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

RECEIVER No. 1

38
13
39
14
10
15
$1
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T (4
R (A)
S DATA OUT T(B)
S DATA OUT R(B)
S DATA IN T(B)
S DATA IN R(B)
R(Kl)
Kl

$2
17
$3
18
t4
19
$5
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T(A)
W-V
S DATA OUT T(B)
S DATA OUT R(B)
S DATA IN T(B)
S DATA IN R(B)
UART IN
UART OUT

16
21
17
22
$8
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

YW
K5
RF41
K4
WW
K3
WW
K2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

R-G
G-R

’

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

14
See Note

ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SPARE
16
NOT USED
(See Notes for Plug P18)

NIGHT BELL 1

MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE

:
-..
‘.

NIGHT BELL 1
18

NIGHT SERVICE
NIGHT BELL 3

(See Notes For Plug Pi8

NIGHT BELL 2

(See Notes for Plug P18:

SPARE
SPARE

Note: Positions 14 and 13 can be used for lines or trunks or for receiver cards

#2 and #3 respectively.

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 27

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
TABLE 10-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
CONNECTOR J13 MAINTENANCE CONSOLE
CONNECTOR J14 ATTENDANT CONSOLE NO 2
(Connected T o Maintenance Panel)
ee Note For 515)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

26
1
27
2
26
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA 0 U T
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
-~-__

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-46V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-46V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

Pair
Color

Lead

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BP
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

Page 28

Designation

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
CONNECTOR J15 ATTENDANT CONSOLE NO 1
(See Note)
NOTE:

Pair
Color

Lead

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

w-s
s-w

Desianation

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA 0 UT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

34
9
35
IO
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

v-s

s-v

-48V

Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Connector J15 connected either direct to
Attendant Console 1 or via plug P23 and
jack J22 to console. Connector J14
similarly connected either direct to attendant console 2 or via plug P25 and
jack J22.

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V

P a g e 2 9

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
TABLE 10-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P18 (Interconnect Cable to P8)

Pair
Color

Lead
Line

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

w-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
TX3
RX4
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
TX3
RX4
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
NIGHT BELL 1 B
NIGHT BELL IA

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

TIP
RING
DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
UART B
UART A

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

ALARM B
ALARM A
NIGHT SERVICE B
NIGHT SERVICE A
NIGHT BELL 38
NIGHT BELL 3A
NIGHT BELL 2B
NIGHT BELL 2A

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

tFor 2-Wire

Page 30

Designation

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&M-f
T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

RECEIVER 1

Card
Positions

See Notes for Plug P18

MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE

See Notes for Plug P18
See Notes for Plug P18

E&M Trunk operation D O NOT connect RR and TR leads

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-200
TABLE IO-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG PI7 (Interconnect Cable to P5)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead
Line

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

TI
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

TIP
RING
DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
PA1 CONTROL B
PA1 CONTROL A

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

MUSIC IN B
MUSIC IN A
MAINT TIP
MAINT RING
PA1 OUT B
PA1 OUT A
PA2 OUT B
PA2 OUT A

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

S
S
S
S

Designation

TIP (A)
RING (A)
DATA IN R (A)
DATA IN T (A)
DATA OUT R (A)
DATA OUT T (A)
PA2 CONTROL B
PA2 CONTROL A

Lead Designation Trunk
co
DID/TIE
E&M:
Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Card
Position

RECEIVER 1

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
No. 2

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
No. 1

(See Notes For
Plug P18)
,-

tFor a-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 31

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG PI8 (Miscellaneous Connections to Cross Connect Field)

‘in

Pair
Color

!6
1
?7
2
28
3
29
4

w-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

MUSIC IN B
MUSIC IN A
PA2 OUT B
PA2 OUT A
NIGHT BELL 28
NIGHT BELL 2A
PA1 OUT B
PA1 OUT A

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

NIGHT BELL 1 B
NIGHT BELL 1A
PA 1 CONTROL B
PA 1 CONTROL A
PA 2 CONTROL B
PA 2 CONTROL A
NIGHT SERVICE E
NIGHT SERVICE P

50
25

v-s
s-v

NIGHT BELL 38
NIGHT BELL 3A

Lead

Designation

Note:
(1) Night service relay operates permanently when
in night service.
Night Bell continuous rating:
Open circuit voltage 120Vrms
Closed circuit current 75mArms
See Fig. 10-7 for connections
(2) Music in 1OOmV
Impedance 600 Ohms
(3) PA Output Level 1OOmV
Impedance 600 Ohms

S E C T I O N MITL9105/9110-98-200 :
TABLE 10-2 PLUG AND JACK CONNECTlONS
PLUG PI9 ON INTERCONNECT CARD PN9110-02A
(M iscellaneous Connections to Cross Connect Field)

TO INTERCONNECT

Lead Designation Trunk
co
DID/TIE
E&M:

Pair
Color

Lead Line
Designation

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

SPARE
SPARE

27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5

w-o
o-w

31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R

T8
R8
T7
R7
T6
R6
T5
R5

T4
R4
XT3
XT4
T3
R3

35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13

R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK
BK-G
G-BK

T8
R8
T7
R7
T6
R6
T5
R5

T4
R4
XT3
XT4
T3
R3

39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17

BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y

43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21

Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V

T4
R4
T3
R3
T2
R2
Tl
Rl

T2
R2
XT1
XT2
Tl
Rl

47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
v-s
s-v

T4
R4
T3
R3
T2
R2
Tl
Rl

T2
R2
XT1
XT2
Tl
Ri

W-G
G-W
ti-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w

BOARD (CONT’D)

RECEIVER 1

CARD
POSITIONS

T2
R’

E2
M2
TR2
RR2
T2
R2

T2
R2

E2
M2
TR2
RR2
T2
R2

RECEIVER 1

Tl
Rl

El
Ml
TRl
RR1
Tl
Rl

El
Ml

TRl
Tl
Rl

RR1
Tl
Rl

13
/-

I-For P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
:
Page33

SECTION MITL910519110~98~200

TABLE IO-2 INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)

CONNECTOR P302
DATA PORT (SEE NOTES)

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Note 1.
2.

Page 34

Lead
Designation
ov
TRANSMIT DATA
RECEIVE DATA
CLEAR TO SEND
DATA SET READY
SIGNAL GROUND
CARRIER DETECT

DATA TERM READY

Connector P302 is common to the SX-100 and SX-200 PABX.
See S&.ztion MITL9105/9110-98-450, Traffic Measurement, for applications of the connector.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-3 POWER FAIL TRANSFER BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
PLUG P20
PLUG P21

(Power Fail Transfer Connections to Cross
Connect Field)

Color

Lead
Designation

Pair
Color

Lead

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-GR
GR-W
W-BR
BR-W

STATION Tl
STATION RI
LINE CARD Tl
LINE CARD Rl
TRUNK Tl
TRUNK Rl
TRUNK CARD Tl
TRUNK CARD Rl

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

STATION T7
STATION R7
LINE CARD T7
LINE CARD R7
TRUNK T7
TRUNK R7
TRUNK CARD T7
TRUNK CARD R7

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R.

STATION T2
STATION R2
LINE CARD T2
LINE CARD R2
TRUNK T2
TRUNK R2
TRUNK CARD T2
TRUNK CARD R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

STATION T8
STATION R8
LINE CARD T8
LINE CARD R8
TRUNK T8
TRUNK R8
TRUNK CARD T8
TRUNK CARD R8

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

STATION T3
STATION R3
LINE CARD T3
LINE CARD R3
TRUNK T3
TRUNK R3
TRUNK CARD T3
TRUNK CARD R3

34
9
35
IO
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

STATION T9
STATION R9
LINE CARD T9
LINE CARD R9
TRUNK T9
TRUNK R9
TRUNK CARD T9
TRUNK CARD R9

3 8
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

STATION T4
STATION R4
LINE CARD T4
LINE CARD R4
TRUNK T4
TRUNK R4
TRUNK CARD T4
TRUNK CARD R4

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

STATION TlO
STATION RlO
LINE CARD TIO
LINE CARD RlO
TRUNK TlO
TRUNK RIO
TRUNK CARD TlO
TRUNK CARD RlO

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

STATION T5
STATION R5
LINE CARD T5
LINE CARD R5
TRUNK T5
TRUNK R5
TRUNK CARD T5
TRUNK CARD R5

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

STATION Tl 1
STATION Rll
LINE CARD Tll
LINE CARD RI 1
TRUNK Tl 1
TRUNK Rll
TRUNK CARD Tll
TRUNK CARD Rll

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

STATION T6
STATION R6
LINE CARD T6
LINE CARD R6
TRUNK T6
TRUNK R6
TRUNK CARD T6
TRUNK CARD R6

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

50
25

v-s
s-v

STATION T12
STATION RI 2
LINE CARD T12
LINE CARD R12
TRUNK T12
TRUNK R12
TRUNK CARD T12
TRUNK CARD R12
,SPARE
SPARE

Pair

Note:

Designation

Plug 21 is not installed on SX-100 equipmenl t.

Page 35138

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-4 SHELF 2 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
PLUG P7 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pair
Color

Lead

Designation
Line

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

TI
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

34
9
35
IO
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
,0-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
B&V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

50
2- 5

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&M+
Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Card
Positions

. .
: .Tl
RI

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 37

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-4 SHELF 2 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P8 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Lines

Lead Designation Trunks
co
D I D / T I E E&M?

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

W-S
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
VLBR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 38

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Card
Positions

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE 10-4 SHELF 2 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG P9 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pair
Color

Lead

Designation
Line

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

TI
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

34
9
35
IO
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&Mt
Tl
RI

Card
Positions

Tl
I31
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

‘:
:.

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
Page 39

SECTION M ITL9105/911

O-98-200

TABLE 10-4 SHELF 2 EXTERNAL PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (CONT’D)
PLUG PI0 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)

Pair
Color

Lead

Pin
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

50
25
A._..

v-s
s-v
--mm-

tFor z-wrre
Page 40

Designation
Lines

SPARE
SPARE
- - _.--

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE E&MI-

SPARE
SPARE

t&M I rum operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Card
Positions

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE IO-5 CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (SX-200 ONLY)
PLUG P23
JACK 522
(Connects to Jack J15)
(Connects to Attendant Console 1)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead

‘in

Pair
Color

Lead

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

!6
1
!7
2
!8
3
!9
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA 0 U T
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

42
17
43
18
44
19
4.5
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

Designation

GROUND
GROUND

R-G

ov
-48V

Designation

Page 41

SECTION MlTL9105/9110-98-200
TABLE IO-5 CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS (SX-200 ONLY)

(CONT’D)

PLUG P25
(Connects to Jack J14)

JACK 524
(Connects to Attendant Console 2)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

‘in

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
1 ?7
2
I
‘!8
3
1?9
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

!6
1
!7
2
!8
3
!9
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

,
.

30
5
,3 1
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
-

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

50
25

v-s
S-V

ov
-48V

Page 42

GROUND
GROUND

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
IO.08 Figs. 10-4 and 10-5 illustrate typical block
and wiring diagrams for a power fail
transfer circuit. Fig. 10-6 illustrates typical night
bell wiring connections and Fig. 10-7 shows the
connections for music and PA requirements.

10.09 When backplane translator boards are used
with the lines and trunk circuits different
terminal connections result. In this case the cabling arrangements must conform to the terminat i o n c o n n e c t i o n s s h o w n i n F i g . 6052,
MAP200-605, Appendix 6.

JUMPERC

TIP

JUMPERD

COTRUNK

T;;;DK
JUMPER6

RING
/c-POWER FAIL
TRANSFER BOARD

PABX
ECIUIPMENT
CABINET

TIP

;A;;

STATION
JUMPERA

RING
-.

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER BOARD
FROM
P200rP21

JUMPER

LINE CARD RING
TRUNKCARDRING
TRUNKCARDTIP
LINE CARDTIP

A
i
D

Fig. 10-4

TO
INTERCONNECT BOARD
RlNG(LINECARD)
RlNG(TRUNKCARD)
TIP(TRUNKCARD)
TIP(LINE CARD)
261

Power Fail Transfer Block Diagram

STATION

RELAYS SHOWN IN
TRANSFER POSITION

PABX EQUIPMENT CABLE

Fig. 10-5

Power Fail Transfer Wiring Diagram

Page 43

. .

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

NIGHT BELL CONNECTION AUXILIARY RELAY
La
F

sx-200
POWER SUPPLY

CROSS
CONNECl

TB2

INTERCOt UNE C T
BOARD f' 1 8

NIGHT
BELL K

NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAX CURRENT
75mA

RINGINGSUPPLY

NIGHT
BELL R('

NIGHT BELL RELAY DIRECT DRIVE
sx-200
POWER SUPPLY

TE2
T

CROSS
CONNECT
I

I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I

1 OlA
, MAX

)

- -- -

NIGHT f 'BELL
K
'

I
1 - I NIGHT I ” I ’ %

LJBELL I7 ‘“‘La) ( %G-dNER CARD

L-------

RECONNECT

BOARD

DESTINATION

BOARDPLUG

P18

DESTINATION

NIGHT BELL 1 Kl

NIGHT BELL 2 K2

NIGHT BELL 3 K3

NIGHT BELL 1 R(K1)

NIGHT BELL 2 R(K2)

NIGHT BELL 3 R(K3)

NOTE 1. THE FACILITY IS WIREOTO EITHERTHESX-100 ORTHE
BLOCKS, AS INDICATED BY THE DASHED LINES

Fig. IO-8

Page 44

NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAX CURRENT
75mA

INTERCONNECT
PIN

r-l

NIGHT
BELL
r-l

MAX ; (NOTE 1) +,,,,,
1

j7b636

INTERCONNECl
BOARD P18

SX-ZOOTERMINAL

Night Bell Connections

ii? 3

SECTION MITLSI 051911 O-98-200

_____

INTERCONNECT
BOARD PI8

------------------~

SPEECH PATH
32

illi
I

60011

I
I
I

FROM JUNCTOR
j 60011
SEIZED FOR PA 3lII

ACTIVATE
PA1 CONTROL

CONTACT RATING
MAX 75mA

FROM JUNCTOR
j
6OOil
SEIZED FOR PA 3

ACTIVATE
PA2 CONTROL

CONTACT RATING
MAX 75mA
34

I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I
I

=42

CROSS
CONNECT

r - - - - -__----_-_I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I

MUSIC
SOURCE

\\
\\
\\

SYs'tEM
1

I
; CONTROL
, PAIR 1

,
\

I
I
I

*
*

PA
SYSTEM
2

I
I
I
I CONTROL
PAIR 2

\\
\\

CUSTOMER
’L---------------SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT

TONE CONTROLCARD:
_ _ _ _ _ --__-------- - - - - A

1268

Fig. IO-7 Music and PA Connections
FCC CROSS CONNECT FIELD
RECOMMENDATIONS
10.10 Trunk circuits must be connected to the
telephone company interface jack sequentially. A cross connect field is necessary to
separate the lines and trunks which occur in the
same cable that is connected to the shelf connector.

11.02 This part describes one method of identification. Modular cross-connecting fields
are referenced to throughout this description as
the SX-200 system crossconnection may show the
cross connect field with other PBX equipment.
This procedure for terminating the cables and
equipment are shown in Table 11-l and Fig. 11-1,
11-2 and 11-3.
TABLE II-I
TERMINATING PROCEDURE

10.11

All cables containing trunk circuit pairs
must be connectorized; thus, the cross connect field must also be connectorized. Refer to
Appendix 2 for details.
11.

DESIGNATIONS

General
11.01 Designations are an integral part of the installation
procedures.
Correct
identification of all cables and terminations improves service by reducing search time.

STEP

ACTION

1
2
3

Mount cross connecting blocks
Run and connect building cables
Identify cables using identification
tape
Attach designation strips to
required cross connecting blocks
(Fig. 11-2 and 11-3)
Run and connect equipment cables
Run and connect required jumpers

. .:

5
6

Page 45

SECTION MITL910519110-98-200

RED, GREEN &BLUE FIELDS
SPACE FOR KEY EQUIPMENT,
BUILDING CABLES &STATION
CABLING

WHITE FIELD

G R O W T H -

(1) To termmate SX-100 or Shell Number 1
(approx 60 hnes) SX-200 Equipment
Cables Pl. P2. P3. P4. P18. P19. and
P20 are required
To termmale the 2nd Shell for a lull
5X-200 system the lollawmg additional
cables must be terminated. P7. PB. Pg.
PlO. and P21
For Connector block deslgnatlon details
see Figs 11-2 and 11-3

Fig. 11-l Typical Terminal Layout

Page 46

(41 The attendant console IS cabled direct lY
lrom the equipment cabinet and is nol
X-Connected at the CK?SS connect field
(5) Mulflplmg 01 connecrmns will be made
on a 25 pair connecting block located m
the Red Field.
(6) An alternate layout may be 10 place all
connectma blocks m the Whde Field,
above or below the jumper channel

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-200

Fig. 11-2 Cross Connecting Block Designation Strips (SX-lOO/SX-200)

‘-

Page 47

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

NOTES:
1. PLUG DESIGNATION STRIPS FOR PLUGS 7 THROUGH 10 ONLY
SHELF 2 IS INSTALLED IN SX-ZOO
2

REIIUIRED WHEN

PLUG DESIGNATION STRIP FOR PLUG 21 IS APPLICABLE TO SX-ZOO ONLY

Fig. 11.3 Cross Connecting Block Designation Strips (SX-200 Only)

Page 48

‘^

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

12.

INSTALLATION

Cd)

For installation of SX-200 equipment proceed with the steps listed in Table A4-1, Appendix 4

(e)

Appendix 5 lists setting of trunk card switches which are required to be performed
during the installation of the PABX equipment

Appendix 6 lists miscellaneous installation
procedures which may be required during
the PABX installation or the installation of
additional
equipment

General
12.01 The SX-100 and SX-200 systems should be
installed in accordance with the following
steps:
(a)

Consult Appendix 1 for a review of Mite1 Action Procedures (MAP’s)

(b) Consult Appendix 2 for certain FCC interconnection
requirements
(c) For installation of SX-100 equipment proceed with the steps listed in Table A3-1, Appendix 3

Page
49
49 Pages

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

APPENDIX 1
MITEL ACTION PROCEDURES

GENERAL

Al.08 DECISION Block: Used to indicate a

Task oriented functions in this section are
implemented using MITEL ACTION
PROCEDURES (MAP’s).

decision within the level one steps which
must be made. The symbol is based on a hexagon
with the top and bottom sides extended. Decision
text is centred in the symbol.

Al.01

A MAP is a step by step procedure using a
flow chart principle, written and illustrated where necessary to a level of detail that
allows both experienced and inexperienced personnel to carry out the tasks detailed. A MAP contains two levels of information as follows:
Al.02

Al.09 START/FINISH/JUMP TO Block: Used to

indicate the start and finish of a MAP.
Also used to indicate ‘jump to’ points within the
MAP, for example “go to [r-r]” or “from [n]” or
“return to [n]“. The symbol is a rectangle with
semi circular ends. Text is centred in the symbol.

(a) For experienced personnel, a series of
steps (level one) each numbered [n] and
annotated with minimal information.

THE OPERATORS USE OF MAP’S

(b) For inexperienced personnel, each step
referred to in (a) above is amplified by a
connected series of numbered substeps
[nA] (level two).

Al.10 For the experienced operator to complete

Al.03 A typical example of a MAP is shown in

Fig. Al, with the two levels detailed

a task using a MAP, reference to the sequential short form level one steps is usually all
that is necessary. Using Fig. Al as an example,
the experienced operator would proceed as
follows.
At [l] makes a decision based on the information within the block. If the answer is
YES the operator must proceed to a different
MAP. If the answer is NO the operator is faced
with another decision at block [2].
Al.11

MAP SYMBOLS
Al.04 There are four basic symbol shapes which

may be used
defined as follows.

Experienced Operator

MAP,

and

are

Al.05 AND Block: Used to indicate a level one

Al.12 At [2] if the decision is NO there is no re-

step that must be performed. Consists of a square with the word AND centred in the
block.

quirement to proceed further and the test
is abandoned. This naturally results in a FINISH
block. If the decision is YES the operator proceeds to [3] and [4] in succession, i.e. dials the DID
station number and completes the call to the
check extension.

Al.08 OR Block: Used to indicate a choice of

level one steps, one of which must be
performed. Consists of a rectangle, with the text
centred in the block, and with the word OR appearing between the alternative operations.
Al.07 The rectangle is also used to border in-

structions which imply that the operative
must perform a task outside the scope of the
MAP. The text is centred in the rectangle.

The description of the instructions carried
out in Al.05 and Al.06 have assumed
that the level of competence of the operator is
such that short form level one steps contain sufficient information, and therefore the operator reads
only the centre column of the MAP, ,-top to bottom of the page.
Al.13

Al-l

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

SECTION

MITL9110.98.215

A3-25

Fig. Al Typical Map Page
Inexperienced Operator
Al.14 If the operator’s experience is such that
the level one instructions do not contain
sufficient information, the level two substeps
should be referred to as follows.
Al.15 Using Fig. Al as an example the path
followed should be:
(a)

At [l] and [2] make the decisions called for
at these steps as before.

(b)

At step [3] dial the DID station number by
performing substeps [3A], [3B] and [3C].

Al-2

In terms of steps and substeps, the operative
follows a decision, decision then step and
substep paths in the example shown.
TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Al.16 Any tools, test equipment or special instructions that the operator requires or
needs to know are stated on the first page of each
MAP. If the MAP is long, and contains a number of
sub procedures, these are listed in synopsis form
on the first page.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

APPENDIX 2
FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.

TELEPHONE

COMPANY

INTERCONNECTION

General
A.01

This equipment has been approved by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as not being harmful to the telephone network when connected directly to the telephone lines through the
standard 50-pin blue ribbon plug prescribed by the FCC Rule. This section is applicable to telephone interconnection in the United States.

.‘:

Notification
A.02

Prior to the interconnection of this equipment, the local telephone company is to be notified; inform the company that you have FCC-registered equipment which you wish to connect to their
trunks. Give them the following information:
The PABX being connected is a Mite1 Incorporated Model SX-100 or a Model SX-200.
The 14 digit FCC Registration Number for the SX-100 is BN285B67126PFE
The 14 digit FCC Registration Number for the SX-200 is BN285B67126PFE.
The Ringer Equivalence Number which is 2.1B.
The jacks or connectors required are RJ2lX, RJ2EX or RJ2GX as shown in Table A2-1.
Connection Limitations
A.03

Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service.

Network Changes
A.04 The telephone company may make changes to its communication service; such changes may inelude the change of trunk circuits, changes in the operational characteristics of its trunk, etc.
Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification, so that the operation of the
PABX service will not be interrupted.
Maintenance Limitations
A.05

This equipment has been registered with the FCC for direct connection to the telephone network.
Under the FCC Program, the user is restricted from making any changes or repairs and from performing any maintenance operations other than those specifically included in this Standard Practice.
A.08

Circuit cards may be removed by the user; however, replacement cards are to be supplied only by
MITEL or its authorized agent. No field repair of circuit cards by the user is authorized.

A.07

No cabling or wiring changes within the console are permitted by the user. Plug-ended cables, as
detailed in this Standard Practice, are to be used for all external connections between the console
and the telephone company interface jack.
A.08

Power supply components and cabling is only to be changed or maintained by MITEL or by an
authorized agent of MITEL.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
Trouble Corrections
A.09

Most troubles are diagnosed by the circuitry of the system, and the console read-out indicates the
circuit and card that is malfunctioning. Card replacement can be made by the user.

A.1 0

For more complex malfunctions, appropriate field service is provided by MITEL or its authorized
agents.
TABLE A2-1
USOC CONNECTOR PIN DESIGNATIONS
Pin

Zilbr

/Ki%$Z%

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

1 T

32
7
33
8
34

9
35

10
36

11
37

1 R
1 T

1 T

)

M
1 T

EL
IJ2GX

T
R
Tl
Rl
E
M
T
R
Tl
Rl
E
M
T
R
Tl
Rl
E
M
E
R
Tl
Rl
E
M

47
22
48

v-o
o-v

V-G

Remarks

The types of Universal Service Order Code (USOC) connectors shown have pin designations according
to type of interface required by the Telephone Company. Use of these connectors are determined
as follows:
RJ2lX: 2-wire loop, or ground start trunk
2-wire reverse battery (DID)
2-wire off-premises extension
(Class A through E)
2-wire Automatic Identified Outward
Dialing (AIOD)
2-wire message register
RJ2EX: 2-wire tie trunk with E and M Type I
signaling
RJ2GX:
I-wire tie trunk with E and M Type I
signaling
82-2

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

APPENDIX 3
SX-100 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
. .
: .(
!

1. GENERAL
A3.01

The MAP’s contained in this Appendix detail the procedures to be performed to complete the
installation of an SX-100 PABX.

TABLE A3-1
SX-100 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Step

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Procedure

Unpack SX-100 Equipment
Unpack Console(s)
Install Console Faceplate Designation
Inspect Equipment
Install and Connect Equipment
Set Card Switches (Appendix 5)
Power-Up System (See Note)
Program System
Perform System Tests

Reference

MAP200-301
M AP200-302
MAP200-303
MAP200-304
MAP200-305
MAP200-306
MAP200-307
Section MITL9105/9110-98-210
Section MITL9105/9110-98-215

Note: Appendix 6 lists miscellaneous installation requirements which may be required priofto powerup of system. This appendix should be reviewed for applicability.

A3-112

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

UNPACK SX-100 EQUIPMENT

WI
AT RECEIVING DOCK
[lA]
Cut and remove retaining straps
[lB]
Remove tri wall box from shipping package (Fig. 301-l)
l-

[2A]

[2B]
[2C]
[2D]

.:.:

-I

AND

Position equipment so that a
prox. ten inches of e q u i p m e n
overhangs shipping pallet (Fi
301-2)
Tip equipment so that rear 01
cabinet touches floor
Remove shipping pallet from
under equipment
&;,“y lower equipment onto

::
z.:

WARNING

I
Gloves must be worn when unpacking
equipment cabinet.
I

REMOVE EXTERNAL
P A C K I N G ( F I G . 301.1)

Care must b! taken while moving equip-

SHIPPING

PALLET

Was the shipment
improperly packaged

YES

[4A]
[4B]

NO
I

Identify type of damage by referring to the Damage Report Form
at rear of this Section
Complete appropriate portion of
Form

A3-3

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Sheet 2 of 2

STYROFOAM

FIBERGLASSTAPE

STYROFOAM

PADS
WOODEN

REMOVE

SHIPPING

A34

PALLET

SHIPPING

PALLET

SECTION
UNPACK

TOOLS

MITL9105/9110-98-200

CONSOLES

REQUIRED

1 Screwdriver 0.25 inch blade

AT CONSOLE LOCATION

[lA]

PAI

Remove fiberglass tape from top
of packing case
Open packing case and remove
foam sheet
Remove cardboard insert
Remove console accessory bag
from insert
Remove console from packing
case
Remove polyethylene sheet from
console
Place all packing material in.
P,a,c,:‘ng case for use m reshlp-

UNPACK

CONSOLE

Remove the two cradle hooks
and four panhead screws from
accessory bag
Place console face down on desk

ml
top
WI Position one cradle hook as

shown in Fig. 302-l. (Cradle hook
may be placed at other end of
console if preferred)
WI Attach cradle hook to console
using two panhead screws
WI Position remaining cradle hook
(Fig. 302-l)
[=I Attach cradle hook to console
with two panhead screws

AND

Fig. 302-l

INSTALL CRADLE HOOKS
(FIG. 302-l)

[34
1381

Remove the four screws securing
the connector cover plate (Fig.
e
302-2)
Remove connector cover plate 1
REMOVE
CONNECTOR
COVER PLATE
(FIG. 302-2)

:_:

Fig. 302.2

A3-5

SECTION MITL910598-200

UNPACK

CONSOLES

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

[5A]
[5B]

Remove the securing screw from
the console connector
Position and press home console
connector
Secure connector to console with
the securing screw
-

ATTACH

CONNECTOR

Replace connector cover plate
Replace the four cover plate
screws
iREPLACE CONNECTOR
COVER PLATE

461
[6A]

Set Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
switch to NORMAL

1 SET PFT SWTCH

[7A]

Place console in correct

I
POSlTlON CONSOLE

[8A]

;tFove handset from accessory

[8B] Place handset plug into
console jack
[8C] Place handset on cradle hook

AND

.
PLUG IN HANDSET

Insert designations as detaile
MAP200-305

DESIGNATIONS

A3-8

S E C T I O N
UNPACK

MITL9105/9110-98-200

CONSOLES

MAP200-302

Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 3 of 3

Was the shipment

[ll A] Identify type of damage by
ing to the Damage Report
at rear of this Section
[ll B] Complete appropriate portion of
Form

REPORT DAMAGE

A3-718

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
INSTALL CONSOLE
FACEPLATE

[lA]
[lB]

f~;pkekyey cap and pull upward

AND

Remove key designation tab

I
PAI

PI
WI

DESIGNATIONS

REMOVE KEY CAP

Check required console layout
(Figs 303-1, -2 or -3)
Push out required designation
tab from designation sheet
Place designation tab on top of
key
INSERT DESIGNATION TAB
(FIG. 303-1, -2 OR -3)

[3A]
[3B]

Place key cap over key checking
that locking tabs are lined up
correctly. (Fig. 303-4)
Push down on key top
IREPLACE KEY CAP
(FIG. 303-4)

LOCKINGTAB

Fig. 3034
_-

AS9

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL

CONSOLE

FACEPLATE

DESIGNATIONS

MAP200-303
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 2 of 5

Fig. 303-l

“-_I

Attendant Console Key Designations, Hotel/Motel

_Fig. 303-2

A3-10

Maintenance Console Key Designation

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98~200
t

INSTALL

CONSOLE

1 FACEPLATE

DESIGNATIONS

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fig. 303-3

Attendant Console Key Designations - Commercial

A3-11

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

INSTALL

CONSOLE

FACEPLATE

DESIGNATIONS

MAP200-303
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 4 of 5

tabs been inserted

[6A]
[SB]

_16Cl _
.16Dl .
[6E]

Remove the two faceplate securing screws (Fig. 303-5)
Insert screwdriver blade into
faceplate cutout (Fig. 303-5)
Move screwdriver to the vertical
position
Slide screwdriver to oooosite
end
. .
of console
Remove console faceplate

[6
c

REMOVE CONSOLE
FACEPLATE (FIG. 303-S)

[7A]
[7B]
[7C]

Cut required busy lamp numbers
from designation sheet
Position number so that it will be
seen clearly through busy lamp
field window (Fig. 303-5)
Press number firmly in place
I-

AND

J
ATTACH BUSY
LAMP NUMBER

DESIGNATION
WINDOWS

Fig. 303-5

A3-12

SECTION M ITL910!598.200
INSTALL CONSOLE
FACEPLATE

DESIGNATIONS

MAP266303

w ’

Issue 1, December 1979

Sheet 5 of 5

..
:.
.:: !I

1
Return to VI

[9A] Place bottom ed$ of faceplateagainst console up.
[9B] Place faceplate over keys.
[9C] Press down firmly on console
faceplate and press one corner
under the top edge of the console housing as shown in Fig.
303-6

[9D] Continuing the downward
pressure, press the remainder of
top edge of the faceplate under
the housing lip.

REPLACE CONSOLE
FACEPLATE (FIG. 303-6)

El Replace the two faceplate
screws.

Fig. 303.6

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSPECT EQUIPMENT

rack mounted

[2A]

;;;;w;

[2B]

tdJ;$ck and open cabinet front

[2C]
[2D]

keys taped to top of

-PI

Remove the vertical and horizon- tal shelf securing straps
Using the Phillips screwdriver
tighten all shelf retaining screws
-

AND

CHECK SHELVES
ARE SECURE

[4Al
[4W

YES

d31

A N D

[3A]
[3B]
[3C]

.
CHECK SHELVES
ARE SECURE

Check card complement against
invoice
Visually check cards and shelves
for damage
CHECK CARDS
AND SHELVES

Inspect shelf mounting
Using the Phillips screwdriver
tighten all shelf retaining screws
Remove the vertical and horizontal shelf securing straps

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

INSPECT EQUIPMENT
MAP200-304

I
I

Issue 1. December 1979

Sheet 2 of 4

Were any damaged
items found or

YES 1

[6A]
[6B]

INO

Tag any damaged items and cz
tinue with inspection
Enter damage details on Damage
Report form
-

TAG DAMAGED
ITEMS
1

rack mounted

[8A]
[8B]

Remove the eight 6-32 screws
from the equipment cover
Remove the equipment cover
[9D]

REMOVE THE
TOP AND BACK
PANELS

A3-16
.:

Remove four lo-32 screws from
the panel at the rear of the
cabinet
Remove the back panel
Remove four lo-32 screws from
the top panel
Remove the top panel

S E C T I O N

MITL9105/9110-98.200

INSPECT EQUIPMENT

MAP200-304

From [9]

Is power supply
free from damage

[llA]

Tag defective items and
with inspection
[ll B] Enter damage details on Damage
Report form
TAG AND REPORT
DEFECT/YE ITEMS

[12A]

Check that all cable connectors
are seated firmly and free from

[12B]

%i:??hat
all cable harnesses
are free from damage
Visually check backplane and interconnect board for damage (including fuses)
-

[12C]

CHECK BACKPLANE AND
/NTERCONNECT BOARD

[14A]
[14B]

Tag any damaged items
Enter damage details on Damage
Report form
-t

AND

TAG AND REPORT
DAMAGED ITEMS

‘I
I

A
To [15]

A3-17

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSPECT EQUIPMENT
MAP200-304
-

Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 4 of 4

l16Al

Repack tagged items a n d
to supplier

AND

RETURN TAGGED t
ITEMS
1171
/

V
t

See Damage Report and complete appropriate section

Were there other
discrepancies
during inspection
YES

[20A]

Report discrepancies on Dam
Report form

AND

REPORT
DISCREPANCIES

‘NO

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305

11 “,:;gj;: ;;;gJ~;;board
(Wall.mount

PAI
.
.
.
U Bl
PA1
V.31
WI
PDI

Terminate 25 pair cable connections at cross-connect field
Refer to Part 10 Table 10-l and
Fig. 10-l and 10-2 for line, trunk
and console connections
Refer to Part 10 Table 10-2 and
Fig. 10-5 and 10-6 for Power Fail
Transfer
connections
Refer to Part 11 Fig. 11-l and
11-2 for typical layout and
designations
Mark each cable connector or
plug with the corresponding
cabinet plug number
Run required 25 pair cables be?
ween cabinet and cross-connect
field
Run required power fail transfer
cables between cabinet and
cross-connect
field
Run required 25 pair console
cable from each console to
cabinet
Mark each cable connector with
its cabinet plug number
-

installation only)

AND
I

TERMINATE CABLES AT
CROSS-CONNECT FIELD

AND
l

RUN 25 PAIR
/NTERCONNECT/NG

CABLES

,131
Remove shipping strap from
shelf
Remove all cards from shelf
Place all cards in secure area until [34]
l-

AND
i

REMOVE CARDS
FROM SHELF

NO
rack mounted
J
YES

..
L:
”

PAI
WI

Remove two 6-32 screws from the
cable bar across the back of the
rack (Fig. 305-l)
Remove cable bar
I

::.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 2 of 10

18A1
[6B]
[6C]

Remove three lo-32 screws and
washers from the front of SX-100
IFio. 305-l)
ii&&e
the mounting bracket
Repeat steps 6A and 6B for second mounting bracket

AND

REMOVE MOUNTING BRACKETS
[7A]
[7B]

Remove four 8-32 screws and
washers from front of
maintenance panel
Remove the maintenance panel
from the front of the equipment

rng. JUJ‘l

nacn mounmg

SECTION

PA1
WI
WI
PDI

WI
WI
WI

MITL9105/9110-98-200

INSTALL EQUIPMENT

Locate the mounting area for the
mounting brackets on equipment
rack
Place mounting brackets as
shown in Fig. 305-1, with lip of
the brackets at the bottom facing
in
Place six 10-32, 0.5 inch binding
head screws in holes shown in
Fig. 305-l
Tighten all screws with a 0.25
inch slotted screwdriver
Place cable holder bar across the
bottom of the rear of the mounting brackets. The bar should
rest on the lip of the brackets
Insert one 6-32, 0.5 inch long
binding head screw in each end
of the bar (Fig. 305-l)
Tighten all screws with a 0.25
inch slotted screwdriver

INSERT CABLE HOLDER

Place SX-100 on mounting
brackets with the backplane facing the rear
Slide SX-100 back until the rear
of the faceplate makes contact
with the mounting bracket

IllAl
FlBl

AND

W
.

.
PLACE SX-100 IN
RACK MOUNT UN/T

llll~ 1
I
I

Insert 10-32, 0.5 inch long binding
head screws and finishina
washers k-r each positionshown
in Fig. 305-l
Tighten all screws with a 0.25
inch slotted screwdriver
t--r-J
INSERT AND TIGHTEN
SCREWS TO RACK MOUNT
THE SX-100

~3.21

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 4 of 10

[12A]
[12B]

Place maintenance panel in position shown in Fig. 305-l
Slide maintenance panel back
until the rear of the faceplate
makes contact with the mounting
bracket

AND
.
PLACE MAINTENANCE
PANEL IN POSlTlON

[13A]

[13B]

Insert four 10-32, 0.5 inch long
binding head screws and
finishing washers in positions
shown in Fig. 305-l
Tighten all screws with a 0.25
inch slotted screwdriver

4131

v
AND

I
INSERT AND TlGHTEN
SCREWS AND MOUNT
MAINTENANCE PANEL

mounted in a

YES

A3-22

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200305
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 5 of 10

YES

4 elk
[16A]

Secure a backboard .75in.
(14.05mm)
thick to accomodate
mounting bracket (Fig. 3052)

AND

S E C U R E
BACKBOARD

4161
[18A]

Secure mounting bracket to
backboard with eight, 0.25 inch 4
clay2)1.0 inch l o n g s c r e w s ( F i g .

[198]
[19C]

L
AND

LOCATE
sx-100

’
AND

SECURE

[19A]

I171

MOUNTING

BRACKET

Place one pivot pin on each side
at the back of the bottom of the
cabinet
Secure pin from the inside of the
cabinet with a 0.25 x POUNC
nut
Tighten nut until pin is secure
PLACE AND SECURE SX-100
PIVOT PINS

A3-23

;.
!

SECTION MITL9105.98.200

Sheet 6 of

lo
1

x 0.25in. DIA.
OOD SCREWS l.Oin. LONG

PIVOT BRACKET

4 x a-32
x 0.25lll.
UNC SCREWS

Fig. 3052

Wall Mounting

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305

[20A]

Place SX-100 in wall ‘mount
bracket, pivot pins first as shown
in Fig. 305-2
[208] Secure SX-100 pivot pins with
pivot brackets and four 8-32 slotted screws
PLACE SX-100 IN WALL
MOUNT BRACKET

[21A]

Allow SX-100 to swing down
(gently) so that the backplane IS
revealed
+-

IN CABLE /NSTALLAT/ON

[22A]

Locate interconnect board on
top of the SX-100 behind
maintenance panel (See
3053)

fOMM;E

[23A]

Locate the following cables; J18,
J19,
J20 from cross-connect, console cables 1 and/or 2, printer
cable or storage device, Jl, J2,
J3, J4, Commercial Power cable,
and ground strap (See [2D])

THE INTERCONNECT

031

AND
.
LOCATE CABLES TO BE
RUN INTO THE SX-700

(-x7=)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305

1241

Is sx-100
rack mounted

GA]
[25A]

Run all incoming cables from
beneath the SX-100 through the
cable clamp

[26B]

AND

[26C]

Run all incoming cables along
the rack vertical to a point just
under the SX-100
Run the cables up to the rear of
the SX-100 from the bottom
Secure all cables with nylon
cable ties to the rear across the
cable bar (insure there is sufficient cable inside to reach connection points)

RUN INCOMING
CABLES

J15
CONSOLE 1

FAII

TB30'2

Fig. 305-3

A3-28

Cable Connections

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305
issue 1, December 1979

[27A]
[27B]
[27C]
[27D]
[27E]
[27F]
[27G]
[27H]
[27l]

[28A]

Sheet 9 of 10

Connect console P15 to J15
Connect console P14 to J14
Connect maintenance cable from
the back of the maintenance
panel P13 to J13
Connect Jl to P l , J2 to P2, J3 to
P3, J4 to P4, J18 to P18, J19 to
P19, and J20 to P20
Connect printer or storage device
cable J302 to P302 (if required)
Connect maintenance panel
cable J301 to P301
Connect ground strap
Connect J16 to P16 and J5 to P5
Connect J17 to P17 and J6 to P6

Tighten down all connector
screws with 0.25 inch slotted
screwdriver

AND
4
TIGHTEN

CONNECTORS

[2gA] Using nylon cable straps tighten
around free end on all connec- -&-+ A N D
tors until connector is secure
I

J
T/E DOWN OTHER END
OF ALL CONNECTORS

rack mounted

[31A]
[31B]

Replace back of cabinet
Secure back with four, lo-32
screws
[31C] Replace top of cabinet
[31D] Secure top with four, lo-32
screws
[31 E] Swing SX-100 upwards and
secure with strikes
[31F]
If necessary adjust strikes by
screwing them in or out

[32A]
[32B]
[32C]

PANELS

Place cover on SX-100 with
screen in the back as shown in
Fig. 305-l
Place eight, 6-32, 0.5 inch long
;;;;s rn posrtrons shown tn Frg.
Tighten all screws with a 0.25
inch slotted screwdriver

COVER

A3-27

SECTION MITLSI 05/911 o-98-200
INSTALL EQUIPMENT
MAP200-305

I
I

Issue 1, December 1979

Sheet 10 of 10

[33A]

Complete required
tions at cross-connect field.
Refer to [iA] for references

COMPLETE CROSS-CONNECT
INTERCONNECTIONS
[34A]

Set card switches as required
(Appendix A5)
[346] Replace cards in shelf unit

FINISH

A3-28

SET CARD SWITCHES

MAP200-306
Issue 1, December 1979
Sheet 1 of 1

The setting of switches, to result in the required
mode of operation on the Trunk Cards is detailed
in the MAP’s contained in Appendix A-5. The installer should ensure that these cards are properly switched for the correct mode of operation prior
to performing “Power-Up” as detailed in
MAP200-307.

A3-29130

SECTION MITL910519110-98-200

POWER-UP SYSTEM

MAP200-307

/ ;;IItl,,

,D;;mber

1 9 7 9

START

Have MAP’s
200-301 through
200-306 been

AT FRONT OF EQUIPMENT CABINET
[2A]
Unlock and open door if fitted
[2B]
Check that all cards are seated
correctly
[2C]
Check that locking bars are
secure
[2D]
Set all Power Fail Transfer Control switches on Maintenance
Panel to “DISABLE” (See Fig.
307-l)
[2E] Set POWER FAIL TRANSFER
CONTROL SWITCHES for consoles connected to “ENABLE”
[2F]
Set Power Fail MASTER SWITCH
to “NORMAL”
[2G] Set POWER FAIL TRANSFER
SWITCHES to power supply and
common control to “ENABLE”

[3A]
Set AC Power Switch to OFF
[3B]
Plug power cord into outlet
[3C]
Set AC Power Switch to ON
[3D] Close equipment cabinet door

Complete required MAP’s

AND

CHECK CARDS
AND SET
MAINTENANCE
SWITCHES (FIG. 307.1)

AND

Fig. 307-l

A3-31

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
1 POWER-UP SYSTEM
1

MAP200-307

Wait 10 sec. Is
Power LED lit

O
)

5A
Set AC Power Switch to OFF
f 58 I G o t o MITL9105/9110-98-350

YES

[6A]

Place equipment cabinet in its
final position if required

Is Console clock

NO
I

YES

Note
Occasionally, when circuit cards are
plugged into the PABX, the logic circuits
on the card may not reset completely. In
order to guarantee complete r&et 01 all
card lo ic, a slot initialization procedure
must %e performed. This procedure
allows the service personnel to insert a
card into a shelf and intialize the card
slot. To initialize the card slot dial 555 +
5 + nn, where nn is the 2 digit card slot
number (01-17 shelf 1, 31-42 shelf 2).
Since inserting a card may cause
dia nostic errors, this rocedure is norm a fi y followed by diar rng 555 + 1 to
clear all system errors.

A3-32

Go to Section
MITL9105/9110-98-210
and Program
System

(iii&L)

S E C T I O N MITL9105/9110-98.200 :

APPENDIX 4
SX-200 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
1.

General

A4.01

The following Table A4-1 details the procedures to be performed to complete the installation of
an SX-200 PABX.
_’
i: :
IL
:

SX-200

TABLE A4-1
INSTALLATION

Procedure

Unpack Equipment Cabinet
Unpack Consoles
Install Console Faceplate Designation
Inspect Equipment
Connect Cables
Set Card Switches (Appendix 5)
Power-Up System (See Note)
Program System
Perform System Tests

Note:

‘I

Reference

MAP200-401
MAP200-402
MAP200-403
MAP200-404
MA P200-405
MAP200-406
MAP200-407
Section MITL9105/9110-98-210
Section MITL9105/9110-98-205

Appendix 6 lists miscellaneous installation requirements which may be required prior to powerup of system. This appendix should be reviewed for applicability.

A4-l/2

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
/ 1 ~~~~4~~UIPMENT

CABINET

’ issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 1 of 3

TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Set of strap cutters

I
WARNING
Gloves must be worn when unpacking
equipment cabinet.

START
I

lil$
[lA)
[lB]
[lC]

Cut and remove retaining straps
Open tri wall outer sleeve
Remove inner tri wall sleeve

Position equipment so that approx. ten inches of cabinet
overhangs shipping pallet (Fig.
401-2)
[26] Tip equipment so that rear of
cabinet touches floor
[2C] Remove shipping pallet from
under cabinet
[2D]
Gently lower cabinet onto floor

[2A]

[3A]

;;;h

AND

i
I
I

REMOVE EXTERNAL
PACKING (FIG. 401.1)

AND

REMOVE
SHIPPING PALLET
(FIG. 401-2)
REMOVE

cabinet to its required

:31

CAUTION
Care must be taken while moving
cabinet to avoid damage.
[36] r;;W;ion cabinet as shown in Fig.
[3C]

!+zmv;

l-If& 4” I-L

plastic sheet from

POSITION
CABINET (FIG. 401-3)

Was equipment

[5A]

Complete relevant entries on
Damage Report Form

- I - COMPLETE
DAMAGE
REPORT

A43

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
UNPACK EQUIPMENT CABINET
MAP200-401
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 2 of 3

STYROFOAM

FIBERGLASS

Fig. 401-l

A4-4

TAPE

SECTION MITL910519110-98-200
UNPACK EQUIPMENT CABINET
MAP200-401
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 3 of 3

I
LNOTE: CABLES
ENTERFROM ONE
SIDE ONLY

EQUIPMEN
CABINET

28in.
71 lmm)

24in.
(610mm)-

t
jOin
762mm)

24in
(610mm)

MINIMUM 2in (51mm)
CLEARANCE IS REQUIREDON
EACHSIDEANDATTHEREAR
OFTHE EQUIPMENTCABINET

Fig. 401-3

A4516

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

UNPACK

CONSOLES

MAP200-402
issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 1 o f 3

At Console Location

[1Al
11 Bl
11 Cl
11 Dl
[l El
11 Fl
PGI

WI
PBI
PC1
WI
PEI
PFI

134
[3Bl

Remove fiberglass tape from top
of packing case
Open packing case and remove
foam sheet
Remove foam inserts from ends
of console (if installed)
Remove console accessory bag
from insert
Remove console from packing
case
Remove polyethylene sheet from
console
Place all packing materials in
re\yng case for use in reship-

1
D

UNPACK
CONSOLE

Remove the two cradle hooks
and four panhead screws from
accessory bag
Place console face down on desk
top
Position one cradle hook as
shown in Fig. 402-l. (Cradle hook
may be placed at other end of
console if preferred)
Attach cradle hook to console
using two panhead screws
Position remaining cradle hook
(Fig. 402-l)
Attach cradle hook to console
with two panhead screws

Fig. 402-I

AN D

INSTALL CRADLE
HOOKS (FIG. 402.1)

Remove the four screws securing
the connector cover plate (Fig.
402-2)
Remove connector cover plate -IREMOVE CONNECTOR
COVER PLATE

Fig. 402.2

A47

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-200
UNPACK CONSOLES
MAP200-402
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 2 of 3

[4A]

[4C]

[5A]
[5B]

Remove the securing screw from
the console connector
Position and press home console
connector
Secure connector to console with
the securing screw

Replace connector cover plate
Replace the four cover plate
screws
REPLACE CONNECTOR
COVER PLATE

PI
[6A]

Set Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
switch to NORMAL

AND

-I
[7A] Place console in correct position

AND

1
POSITION

-181

’

[8A] f;;ove handset from accessory
1881

PI,” handset plug into console

[8C]

Place handset on cradle hook

AND

lPLUG IN
HANDSET

A4-8

CONSOLE

SECTION MITL91051911

O-98-200

1 UNPACK CONSOLES

:
I

&:
/
“‘-,.
:::..
:.-:,
1..

[9A]

Insert designations as detailed 3-1
in
MAP2000403

A N D

INSERT
DESIGNATIONS

Was equipment
properly packaged
and undamaged

411
[llA]

Complete relevant entries on
Damage Report Form

YES

’

AND

-I+

COMPLETE
DAMAGE
REPORT
‘t

FINISH

A4-9110

1
:

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL CONSOLE
FACEPLATE DESIGNATIONS
MAP200-403
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 1 o f 4

[lA]
[lB]

;rrapk;y cap and pull upward
Remove key designation tab

;:y:.-

I-

REMOVE KEY CAP

[2A]
[2B]
[2C]

Check required console layout
(Figs 403-1, -2 or -3)
Push out required designation
tab from designation sheet
F%ce designation tab on top of
INSERT DESIGNATION
(FIGS 403-1, -2 OR -3)

[3A]
[3B]

Place key cap over key checking
that locking tabs are lined up
correctly. (Fig. 403-4)
Push down on key top

TAB

REPLACE KEY CAP
(FIG. 403-4)

LOCKINGTAB

Fig. 403-4

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

INSTALL CONSOLE
FACEPLATE DESIGNATIONS

I--

MAP200-403

~~ -1

1 Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 2 of 4

Fig. 403-l Commercial

Fig. 403-2 Hotel/Motel

A4.12

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALL CONSOLE
FACEPLATE DESIGNATIONS

MAP200-403

Issue 1, January 1980

A4-13

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Are the busy lamp
field designations
to be inserted

YES

r-w
WI
WI
[f3W
WI

17Al
[7Bl
[7Cl

Remove the two faceplate securing screws (Fig. 403-5)
Insert screwdriver blade into
faceplate cutout (Fig. 403-5)
Move screwdriver to the vertical
position
Slide screwdriver to opposite end
of console
Remove console faceplate

Cut required busy lamp numbers
from designation sheet
Position number so that it will be
seen clearly through busy lamp
field window (Fig. 403-5)
Press number firmly in place

SCREWDRIVER

ATTACH BUSY
LAMP NUMBER
Fig. 403-5

WI
WI

Place bottom edge of faceplate
against console lip
Place faceplate over keys
Press down firmly on console
faceplate and press one corner
under the top edge of the console housing as shown in Fig.
403-6
Continuing the downward
pressure, press the remainder of
top edge of the faceplate under
the housing lip
Replace the two faceplate
screws

YES

-cl
I
PI

AND

REPLACE CONSOLE

Fig. 403-6

A4-14

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
1 INSPECT

EQUIPMENT

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 Slot l crewdriver. 114 in.
11 Slot
38# in.
Philli Screwdriver.
s Screwdriver
2 I

PAI
11 Bl
PC1

Remove keys taped to top of
cabinet
Unlock and open cabinet front

[l Dl

Using the Phillips screwdriver
tighten all shelf retamrng screws

PA1
[=I

~ ~ wwm*nt she)f, J-1 A~~i/~~i~ikvEs
Remove the shipping straps from

Check card complement
invoice
Visually check cards and shelves
for damage

CHECK CARDS
AND SHELVES

Were any damaged
items found
or items missing

[4Al
1481

Tag any damaged items and continue with inspection
Fill in relevant section of
Damage Report

c- A N D

TAG
DAMAGED
ITEMS
Y

A4-15

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSPECT EQUIPMENT
MAP200-404
1 Issue 1, January 1980

I
Sheet 2 of 4 ~~~~

[5A]

Close and lock cabinet front d

AND

FRONT DOOR

Have shipping screws
been removed from
404-l)

YES

-171
[7A]

Remove the shipping screws
from rear door

AND
REMOVE
SHlPPlNG

SHIPPING
XREWS

SCREWS

[8A]
Unlock and swing open rear door
[8B] Open power supply door
[8C]
Visually check power supply for
loose or damaged components
[8D]
Check that power supply cable
harness is secure and free from
damage
-

Fig. 401-l

INSPECT
POWER SUPPLY
(FIG. 404-l)

SECTION MITL9105/911 o-98-200

Is power supply
free from damage

YES

[10A]

Tag any defective item and continue with inspection
[loBI LW&;elevant
portion of Damage
TAG DAMAGED

[llA]

AND

Close power supply door

COMPLETE
POWER SUPPLY
/NSPECT/ON

[12A]

Check that all cable connectors
are seated firmly and free from

[12B]

%z:??hat
all cable harnesses
are free from damage
Visually check backplane for
damage. (including fuse inspection)
-

[12C]

‘I121 ’
AND

CHECK
BACKPLANE

A4-17

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

INSPECT EQUIPMENT
MAP200-404
Issue 1, January 1960

Sheet 4 of 4

Was any damage
to backplane found

D41 f
[14A] Tag defective items
items and
and continue
with inspection
[148] ;;‘$rrelevant
portion of Damage

AND
tT A G DEFECT/b
ITEMS

YES

[16A] Repack tagged items

AND

R E T U R N
T A G G E D
ITEMS
7

A4-18

SECTION
CONNECT

‘r’
START

PAI
.
.

Make required connections at
cross connect field
Refer to Part 10 Table 10-l and
Fig. 10-l and 10-3 for line, trunk
and console connections
Refer to Part 10 Table 10-2 and
Fig. 10-5, 10-6 and 10-7
Miscellaneous
connections

PA1
PBI
WI
WI

Mark each cable connector or
plug with the corresponding
cabinet plug number (Fig. 10-2
and 405-l)
Run required 25 pair cables between cabinet and cross-connect
field
Run required power fail transfer
cables between cabinet and
cross-connect
field
Run required 25 pair console
cable from each console to
cabinet

At Equipment Cabinet
[3A] Feed lowest numbered cable
through cable duct in side of
cabinet
MB]
_ _ Feed the cable through cable entry in base of cabinet[3C]
Pull through sufficient cable to
allow connector to reach required cabinet plug (Fig. 405-l)
[3D]
Attach cable connector to corresponding cabinet jack
[3E]
Tighten connector retaining
screw

--I

MAKE CONNECTIONS AT
CROSS CONNECT FIELD

PII
AND

J
RUN 25 PAIR
lNTERCONNECT/NG
(FIG. 405-l)

CABLES

CONNECT /NTERCONNECT/NG
CABLE TO EQUIPMENT
CABINET (FIG.405-1)

been made
to equipment cabinet

YES

CABLES

MITL9105/9110-98-200

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
ICONNECT

CABLES

[5A]

Dress cables down side of
cabinet (Fig. 405-l)
[5B]
Attach strain reliefs
[5C] PuEtexcess cable through cable

-----I A N D

I
ATTACH STRAIN
RELIEFS (FIG. 405-I)

WI
1681
- [6C]

Set Power Fail Transfer switch
on base of console to NORMAL
Connect attendant console cable
to console
Tighten connector retaining
screw

(61

‘I
AND

-4
CONNECT INTERCONNECTlNG
W?kE[; ATTENDANT

A4-20

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-200

J15\
PlO

J14\
/

J13-

P17-

P16P19Pl8'

/pl
/p4

P5Y
P20-

-P2

P6P 2 1 '

Fig. 405.1

A4-21122

SECTION MITLSI 05/911 o-98-200
1 SET CARD SWITCHES

.:
_‘.’
....

A4.23124

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

1 Sheet 1 of 3

Complete required MAP’s

At Front of Cabinet
[2A] Unlock and open door
[2B]
Check that all cards are seated
correctly
[2C] Check that locking bar(s) are
secure
[2D]
Set all POWER FAIL TRANSFER
CONTROL switches to DISABLE
(Fig. 407-l)
[2E] Set POWER FAIL TRANSFER
CONTROL switches for consoles
connected to ENABLE
[2F]
Set MASTER switch to NORMAL
[2G] Set POWER FAIL TRANSFER
switches for power supply and
common control to ENABLE
[2H] E&GFSYSTEM
POWER switch to

YES
Return to [l]

CHECK CARDS
AND SET
MAlNTENANCE
SWITCHES (FIG. 407-1)

At Rear of Cabinet
[3A]
Plug power supply power cord into the power outlet
[3B] AC POWER ON LED lit
[3C] ~~;CNONVERTER I N P U T s w i t c h
.

CONVERTER INPUT LED lit

( I

APPLY POWER
TO SYSTEM (FIG. 407.2).

To I41

A425

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
POWER-UP SYSTEM
MAP200-407
Issue 1, January 1960
A

Sheet 2 of 3

At Front of Cabinet
[4A] gz; SYSTEM POWER switch to
.
0;

SYSTEM POWER LED lit

AND

POWER SUPPLY
EQUIPMENT SHELF POWER ON
LED lit
-

SWTCH POWER ON

NO
required LED’s

YES

Set all Power Switches
Remove Power Cord(s).

461
[6A]
[6B]

Close and lock all doors
Position cabinet

’

AND

POSITION

CABINET

NO
Note
Occasionally, when circuit cards are
plugged into the PABX. the looic circuits
on the card may not reset coriipletely. In
order to guarantee complete reset of all
card lo ic, a slot initialization procedure
must Ii e performed. This procedure
allows the service personnel to insert a
card into a shelf and intialize the card
slot. To initialize the card slot dial 555 +
5 + nn, where nn is the 2 digit card slot
number (01-17 shelf 1, 31.42 shelf 2).
Since inserting a card may cause
dia nostic errors, this rocedure is norma 1 y followed by dia rmg 555 + 1 to
clear all system errors.

A4-28

YES

Go to SECTION
MITL9110-210
and program system

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

POWER-UP SYSTEM
MAP200-407
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 3 of 3

Fig. 407-2

A427l28

1
j

SECTION MITL91051911 o-98-200

APPENDIX 5
CARD SWITCH SETTINGS
1. General
A5.01

The MAPS contained in this Appendix (see Table A5-1) detail the procedures to be performed to
result in the correct settings of the Trunk Card switches i.e. those required to meet the particular
needs of the installation.
A502

These procedures are performed during the installation of the SX-100 or SX-200 PABX systems,
(referenced in Appendices 3 and 4).

TABLE A5-1
SETTING TRUNK CARD SWITCHES

Step

Procedure

Reference

1
2
3
4

Set CO Trunk Option and Status Switches
Set E and M/Tie Trunk Option Switches
Set DID Tie Trunk Option Switches
Set Scanner Card Baud Rate Switch

MAP200501
MAP200502
M AP200-503
MAP200-504

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
SET CO TRUNK OPTION
AND STATUS SWITCHES
1 MAP200-501

I
I

Issue 2, August 1980
Sheet 1 of 6

Note:

See Fig. 501-l for Trunk Card
Type 9105/9110-011
and Fig.
501-2 for Trunk Card T y e
9105/9110-111
o r - 2 1 1 . T rl e
notes for each Fig. should be
read in conjunction with the
installation Form data to
determine proper switch settings.

I (

Have Installation
Forms for Trunk
Card switch settings
been completed

YES

Identify trunk circuit by card
position type and unit number
(Figs 501-1, -2 and -3)

Lift card extractors at top and
bottom of card
Remove trunk card from the shelf

REMOVE
T R U N K
C A R D

Is trunk circuit

Make
[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Trunk Busy
Identify trunk circuit
Set trunk switch to Incoming Idle
Set trunk switch to Outgoing
Busy (Fig. 501-l and -2)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

Issue 2, August 1980
Sheet 2 of 6

Identify trunk circuit
Set conditions on Trunk
switch (see Note)

BUSY-~-+
1

AND
I

1
SET TRUNK
BUSY CONDITION
SWITCHES (SEE NOTE)

0
161

Is trunk to be
GROUND start

YES
(GROUND START)

[7A] identify trunk circuit
[7B] Set LOOP/GROUND start
to GND (See Note)

[8B] ~~;l’~%%&$~~start
1 l\lD F to LOOP (See Note)

SET LOOP/GROUND
START SWITCH TO 2

switch

SET LOOP/GROUND
START SWITCH TO 1

I
Is trunk used
as Dictation Trunk
or is XT lead
ive
8Ition

Set 3rd.wire switch to CLOSED

YES
(Yk-)

A5-4

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-200

SET CO TRUNK OPTION
AND STATUS SWITCHES

MAP200401
Issue 2, August 1980
Sheet 3 of 8

Set 3rd.wire

- 48VL.X

-114
(12A]
[12B]

Set 3rd-wire switch to OPEN
Set XT switch to OPEN

switch to OPEN

GND

’

-1131

- A N D

’

A N D

e
-

SET 3RD WRE
A ND XT SWTCH
TO OPEN

[13Al
[13B]

Set 3rd-wire switch to OPEN
Set XT switch to CLOSED

SET 3RD WIRE SWTCH TO OPEN
AND XT SWTCH TO CLOSED

[15A]

Set IGN REVS switch to OPE

Set IGN REVS switch to CLOSED

SET IGN REVS

AS-5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

1Issue 2, August 1980

1 Sheet 4 of 6

circuit required to
recognise release
time at 50ms

[18A] Set REL TIME switch to OPEN

AND

SET REL
TIME SWITCH
TO OPEN

[21A]
[21B]

A] Set REL TIME switch to CLOSED

SET REL
TIME SWITCH
TO CLOSED

Check extractor color code matches slot color code
Lock card in position

I
REPLACE CARD

Have all trunk
switches on all trunk
cards been set

(-A-)

85-8

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
SET CO TRUNK OPTION
AND STATUS SWITCHES

Sheet 5 of 6

SWITCHES
TRUNK1

TRUNKBUSY
SWITCHES

3RDWlRE

TRUNK1
TRUNK2

OUTGOING
/

TRUNK3
1

TRUNK4
TRUNK1

\
INCOMING

TRUNK2
TRUNK3

TRUNK4
i
BUSY IDLE

COTRUNK

CARD- SINGLE
( TYPEOll)

ASSEMBLY

NOTES:
TRUNKBUSY SWITCHES
1. OUTGOING BUSY SWlTCHES(1
PER TRUNK)CAN BE SET FOR EITHEROFTHE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
IDLE SETTING _ NORtiALTRUNKOPERATlON
BUSY SETTING -TRUNKCANNOT BESEIZED
FOR OUTGOING CALL
2.

THE"OUTGOING BUSY" CONDITION MAY BE SET EITHER BY THE OUTGOING BUSY
SWlTCH(NOTEl),OR BYTHECONSOLE"TRUNKBUSYOUT"FUNCTION.WHEN
THIS CONDITION IS IN EFFECTTHEINCOMING BUSYSWITCH AFFECTSTHETRUNK
CONDITION AS FOLLOWS:
IDLE SETTING - NO ANSWER WILL BE GIVEN TO INCOMING CO CALLS
BUSY SETTING -APERMANENT SElZURECONDlTlONISGlVENTOWARDSTHE CO

LOOP/GROUND

START

SWITCHES

3. THELOOP/GROUNDSTARTSWlTCHES(1PERTRUNK)CANBESETTORESULTINTHE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
LOOP (1)SETTlNG _ USED FOR LOOP-STARTTYPETRUNKS
GROUND(2)SETTlNG
- USED FOR GROUND-STARTTYPETRUNKS
3RD-WIRE

SWITCHES

4. THE3RD-WIRESWlTCH(1PERTRUNK)ISUSEDWHENTHETHlRDWlRE(XTLEAD)OF
ATRUNKIS REQUIREDTO INDICATE A BUSY(GROUND)CONDlTlON
ON EXTERNAL
EQUIPMENT (e.g. DICTATION TRUNK). THE SWITCH SETTINGS AREAS FOLLOWS:
OPEN SETTING RECOGNISES
GROUNDASA BUSY CONDITION
CLOSED SETTING - JRD-WIRE CONDITION IS INEFFECTIVE

Fig. 501-l

Single Assembly Card

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

1 Issue 2, August 1980

Sheet 6 of 6

NOTES.
TRUNK BUSY SWITCHES

3RD-WIRE

OUTGOING BUSY SWITCHES (1 PER TRUNK) CAN BE SET FOR EITHER OF THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
IDLE SETTING NORMAL TRUNK OPERATION
BUSY SETTING TRUNK CANNOT BE SEIZED FOR OUTGOING CALL

THE “OUTGOING BUSY” CONDITION MAY BE SET
EITHER B Y T H E O U T G O I N G B U S Y
SWITCH (NOTE 1). OR BY THE CONSOLE “TRUNK BUSY OUT” FUNCTION. WHEN
THIS CONDITION IS IN EFFECT THE INCOMING BUSY SWITCH AFFECTS THE TRUNK
CONDITION AS FOLLOWS
IDLE SETTING ND ANSWER WILL BE GIVEN TO INCOMING CO CALLS
BUSY SETTING A PERMANENT SEIZURE CONDITION IS GIVEN TOWARDS THE CO

5 . THE BRD-WIRE
SWITCHES (1 PER TRUNK) ENABLE THE XT SWITCH (NOTE 4) AND
THEIR SETTINGS GIVE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
ENAB SETTING ENABLES THE CORRESPONDING XT SWITCH
DIS SETTING MAKES THE XT SWITCH INEFFECTIVE i.e. A BUSY CONDITION
ON THE XT LEAD CANNOT BE RECOGNISED

LOOP/GROUND START SWITCHES

SWITCH

SENSE REVS SWITCH
6.

IF LINE REVERSALS ON THE TRUNK CIRCUITS ARE
REOUIRED
TO HAVE NO EFFECT
THE SENSE REVS SWITCH IS SET TO IGN (IGNORE). IF LINE REVERSALS ARE TO BE
EFFECTIVE THE SWITCH IS SET TO EFF.

RELEASE TIMING SWITCHES

THE LOOP/GROUND START SWITCHES (1 PER TRUNK) CAN BE SET TO RESULT IN THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
L O O P ( 1 ) SETTING. U S E D F O R L O O P - S T A R T T Y P E T R U N K S
GROUND (2) SETTING USED FOR GROUND-START TYPE TRUNKS

THE 3RD WIRE (XT) LEAD WHEN REQUIRED IS CONNECTED TO THE CO TO
PROVIDE CERTAIN FACILITIES. THESE INCLUDE THE RECORDING OF METER
PULSES (EXTENDED FROM THE CO); OR ANOTHER REQUIREMENT MAY BE A
BUSY CONDITION WHEN DICTATION OR CODE CALLING EQUIPMENT AT THE
CO HAS BEEN TAKEN INTO SERVICE BY OTHER TRUNKS.
THE XT SWITCH (1 PER TRUNK) IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE 3RD WIRE
SWITCH (NOTE 5) AND CAN BE SET TO PROVIDE FOR THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
- 48 SETTING THE CIRCUIT RESPONDS TO A - 4BVDC SIGNAL (i.e. WHEN
IT IS A METER PULSE OR A BUSY CONDITION). A GROUND OR
OPEN SIGNAL IS THE IDLE CONDITION
GND SETTING - THE CIRCUIT RESPONDS TO A GROUND SIGNAL (i.e. WHEN
IT IS A METER PULSE OR A BUSY CONDITION). AN OPEN OR
-48VDC SIGNAL IS THE IDLE CONDITION

RELEASE TIMING SWITCHES “A” AND “ B ” OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION TO PRODUCE
THE RELEASE TIMES SHOWN FOR THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS:
“A” SETTING
SHORT
LONG
SHORT
LONG

“B” SETTING
SHORT
SHORT
LONG
LONG

RELEASE TIME
49ms
490ms
2500ms
INFINITE (NON-RELEASE)

HI-Z SWITCH
8.

THE HI-Z SWITCH ALLOWS THE PROPER IMPEDANCE ON INCOMING CALLS. TO BE
P R E S E N T E D A C C O R D I N G T O REOUIREMENTS.
THE TWO SETTINGS FOR THE SWITCH
RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING:
HI-Z SETTING - PRESENTS THE NORMAL IMPEDANCE TO INCOMING RINGING
SIGNALS, BUT A HIGH BLOCKING IMPEDANCE TO VOICE SIGNALS
N O R M SETTING.
PRESENTS A NORMAL IMPEDANCE TO BOTH RINGING SIGNALS
AND VOICE SIGNALS

M/B RATIO SWITCH
9. THE MAKE/BREAK RATIO SWITCH SETS THE RATIO OF THE MAKE-TO-BREAK
INTERVALS OF THE OUTPULSING ON THE TRUNK. THE SWITCH SETTINGS RESULT IN
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
33166 SETTING 33% MAKE; 66% BREAK
40160 SETTING - 40% MAKE; 60% BREAK
GND
B,

HIGH 2

l
-48

NORMAL

BUSY IDLE
TRUNK 1
TRUNK 2

OUTGOING

TRUNK 3
TRUNK 4

TRUNK 3

q
\

INCOMING

H
tl

TRUNKI
TRUNK 2
TRUNK 3
TRUNK 4

TRUNK BUSY
SWITCHES

CO TRUNK CARD. MODULAR ASSEMBLIES

Fig. 501-2

Mother Board Assembly Card

DETAIL

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
SET E&M/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES
MAP200-502
Issue 2, August 1980

Sheet 1 of 7

Note: Installation Forms for trunk

Have Installation
Forms for Trunk
Card switch settings
been completed

Go to Section MITL9105/9110-98-205

-?I
YES

Locate required trunk circuit card
9110-013
Note card position
Lift card locking clips located at
the top and bottom of the card
Remove trunk card 9110-013

AND

REMOVE REQUlRED
TRUNK CARD

Set Outgoing
Busy syitch
to BUa;; #i502-1

I
I 4A]48)

Identify trunk circuit
Set conditions on Trunk BUSY
switch (see Note)

YES

(,,,,,,,)

AND
t
SET TRUNK
BUSY CONDlTlON
SWTCHES (SEE NOTE)
..:.
., ‘::
. .,.
:; :
I-:
;-ii

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

SET E&M/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES

MAP200-602

Issue 2, August 1980
Sheet 2 of 7

[5A]

Set Trunk Impedance switches to
600n or 9000 as required. Fig,
502-l or Fig. 502-2

-clI
[51

AND

SET IMPEDANCE
SWITCHES
FIG. 502.1 OR 502.2

[7A]
[7B]

Set the 2-Wire - 4-Wire switch
face of the circuit card to P-Wire
Set the 2/4-Wire switch on rear of
the circuit card to P-Wire

Set the P-Wire - 4-Wire switch on
face of the circuit card to 4-Wire
Set the 2/4-Wire switch on rear of
the circuit card to 4-Wire

SET SWITCHES FOR
Z-WIRE TRUNK

SET SWITCHES FOR
4.WIRE TRUNK
I

Do Incoming Tie
Trunk calls require
Wink Start operation

[lOA] Set the Incoming Wink switch
the face of the circuit card to
COMING WINK

Note:

I
A!%10

[lOA] results in a
signal sent as a
receive dial information” condition.
I

Set the Incoming Wink switch on
the face of the circuit card to
NOT INCOMING WINK

1121

)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Issue 2, August 1980
Sheet 3 of 7

[13A]

I+

Set the Outgoing Wink Start
switch on the face of the circuit
card to OUTGOING WINK

[14A]

SELECT OUTGOlNG
WINK START

Set the Outgoing Wink Start
switch on the face of the circuit
card to NOT OUTGOING WINK

I
Note: [13A] results in waiting period of
160 to 220ms off-hook. sigyal
;rgrn far end before sendmg dial-

YES

TN0

rW1 L
[16A]

Set Stop Dial switch on circuit
card face plate to STOP DIAL ---k-l

AND

I171
ii-dl- -I AND

[17A]

Set Stop Dial switch on the cirgiLcard face plate to NOT STOP

SELECT
NOT STOP
DJAL

A5-11

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
SET E&M/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES
MAP200602
lssue 2, August 1980

c
.

Sheet 4 of 7

From [la

”

Is trunk card
equipped with a Loop
Limit switch Fig. 502-l

Set Loop Limit switch on rear of
circuit card to the OPEN position
for short loop and CLOSED position for long loop (Fig. 502-l)

AND

L I M I T SWlTCH

[20A]

Set Gain Switches to Normal
GAIN (OdB) or SPECIAL GAIN as
required. (+ 7dB Incoming - 18dB
Outgoing). See Note

SET TRUNK
GAIN S W I T C H

-1211
[2J&I-Se.t M INVERT switch to M INV if
inversion of the M lead signal is
4
required (Fig. 502-2)
-

AND
SET M INVERT
SWITCH

AS-1 2

Special gain applies to &wire

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

1 Issue 2, August 1980
1 Sheet 5 of 7

NO
set for both

* Set switches for other trunk
4

YES

4231 '
[23A] Replace card in original card slot
[236] Check that color coded locking
4
clips match the card position color
[23C] Lock card in positionI

AND

YES

AS-1 3

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

I Issue 2. Auaust
1
Sheet 6 of 7

1980

OUTGOING
WINK
-

I
I
NOTE 1:

SPECIAL
GAIN
(NOTE 5)
-

INCOMING
WINK
-

TRUNK IMPEDANCE SWITCHES ARE LOCATEDON THE REAR
FACE OFTHETRUNK CARD.

NOTE 2:

OUTGOING/INCOMING SWITCH SETTINGS

OUTGOING BUSY INCOMING BUSY
SWITCH SET TO SWITCH SETTO

NioT NOT

OUTGOING
WINK

.7iGKz
GAIN

INCOMING
WINK

LONG
LOOP
(NOTE 3) W:RE
LOOP LIMIT
SWITCH

TRUNK1
214 WIRELOOP SWITCH

m
SHORT 4
LOOP WIRE
[NOTE 4)

RESULT

IDLE

SUSY

NORMALTRUNKOPERATION - I F
TRUNK IS MADE BUSY BYATTENDANT,OUTGOlNG BUSY, INCOMING
BUSY CONDITION RESULTS.SEE
BELOW.

BUSY

TRUNKCANNOT BESEIZEO, INCOMINGOROUTGOING FROM THE PABX.
RECOMMENDEDSETTING IFTRUNK
IS NOTCONNECTEDTO TRUNKCIRCUIT.

BUSY

IDLE

OUTGOING CALLS RECEIVE BUSY
TONE. INCOMING CALLS RECEIVE
RINGINGTONE BUTCANNOTBE
ANSWERED

IDLE

IFTRUNKIS MADE BUSY BY ATTENDANT,OUTGOlNG BUSY, INCOMING
IDLE CONDITION RESULTS. SEE
BELOW.

INCOMING BUSYSWITCH, WHEN OPERATED,WlLL PROVIDE AN OUTGOING
SEIZE SIGNAL WHENEVER THE TRUNK IS MADE OUTGOING BUSY (EITHER
FROM THE OUTGOING BUSY SWITCH ON THETRUNK,OR FROM THE CONSOLE).
NOTE 3: LONG LOOPSETTING AT LOOP LIMIT SWITCH RESULTS IN
10RRESlSTANCEIN SERIES WITH M LEAD
NOTE 4:

SHORT LOOPSETTING OF LOOP LIMIT SWITCH RESULTS IN
11OflRESISTANCE IN SERIES WITH M LEAD

NOTE5: NORMALGAIN PROVIDES 0.5dBlNSERTlON LOSSTHROUGH THE
PABX. SPECIAL GAIN PROVIDES FOR 4-WIRE OPERATION WITH
CARRIERSYSTEMSREQUIRINGSIGNALLEVELSOF
+7dBONTHE
Rx PAIR. AND -16dB ON THE TX PAIR.

OUTGOING
BUSY

600 R
:--: T R U N K 2
1 IMPEDANCE
,
,
1 SWITCH
L--A NOTE1
900 R
r-,-7
!2!11

iiJ

OPEN

Fig. 502-l

A5-14

FACEPLATE

M LEAD
NORMAL

:..

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

I
1

SET E&M/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES
MAP200302
Issue 2, August 1980
1 Sheet 7 of 7

OUTGOING
WINK

NOTE 1:

SPE(IA
IN
(NZ E:
-

INCOMING
WINK

TRUNK IMPEDANCE SWITCHES ARE LOCATED ON THE REAR
FACEOFTHETRUNKCARO.

NOTE 2:

OUTGOING/INCOMING

OUTGOING BUSY INCOMING BUSY
SWITCH SETTO SWITCH SET TO

Ni)T
OUTGOING
WINK

NOT
INCOMING
WINK

W;RE

NoriMAL
GAIN

SWITCH

SETTINGS

:_::

RESULT

IDLE

BUSY

NORMALTRUNKOPERATION -IF
TRUNK IS MADE BUSY BYATTENDANT.OUTGOlNG
BUSY,lNCOMlNG
BUSY CONDITION RESULTS. SEE
BELOW.

BUSY

TRUNKCANNOT BESEIZED,INCOMING OR OUTGOING FROM THE PABX.
RECOMMENDED SETTING
IFTRUNK
IS NOTCONNECTEDTOTRUNKCIRCUIT.

BUSY

IDLE

OUTGOING CALLS RECEIVE BUSY
TONE. INCOMING CALLS RECEIVE
RINGINGTONE BUT CANNOT BE
ANSWERED

IDLE

IFTRUNKIS MADE BUSY BYATTENDANT.OUTGOlNG
BUSY, INCOMING
IDLE CONDITION RESULTS. SEE
BELOW.

INCOMING BUSYSWITCH. WHEN
OPERATED,WlLLPROVlDEAN OUTGOING
SEIZE SIGNAL WHENEVER THE TRUNK IS MADEOUTGOING BUSY (EITHER
FROM THE OUTGOING BUSY SWITCH ON
THETRUNK,OR FROM THE CONSOLE).
NOTE 3: NORMAL GAIN PROVIDES
0.5dBlNSERTlON
LOSSTHROUGH THE
PABX. SPECIAL GAIN PROVIDES FOR
4-WIRE OPERATION WITH
CARRlERSYSTEMSREOUIRINGSlGNALLEVELSOF +7dBONTHE
Rx PAIR, AND -16dB ON THE T X PAIR.

:--7 TRUNK2
,
' IMPEDANCE
I--J1 SWITCHES NOTE1
900 0
pt7E-I
I
'
I
'
I
I
1
1
L--J
4WIRE

M LEAD
INVERT
\ FACEPLATE
600R
900 R

I32
Fig. 502-2

A5-15118

i_
\

SECTION MITL91051911 o-98-200

Installation Forms for trunk card

Have Installation
Forms for Trunk
Card switch settings
been completed

L.. _
.

c
Go to Section MITL9105/9110-98-205

YES

Locate required trunk circuit card
9110-031
[2B]
Note card position
[2C] Lift card locking clips located at
the top and bottom of the card
[2D]
Remove trunk card 9110-031
-

421

[2A]

’

REMOVE REQUIRED
TRUNK CARD

Is trunk circuit

[4A]
[4B]

Identify trunk circuit
Set conditions on Trunk BUSY
switch (see Note)

AND
.
SET TRUNK
BUSY CONDITION
SWITCHES (SEE NOTE)

[5A]

Set SWl, SW2 and SW3 Trunk
Impedance switch to 600n or
900
as required. Fig. 503-l

AND

AND
SET IMPEDANCE
SWITCH. F/G. 503-I

Set Outgoing Busy switches
to BUSY. Fig. 503-l

SECTION MITL91054911

O-98.200

9
From

[6A]

Set trunk type switches A and 6
to configuration required. Fig.
503-1, Table 503-l

AND

SET TRUNK
TYPE SWITCHES
FIG. 503-l

Do Incoming DID/TIE
Trunk calls require
Wink Start operation

[BA]

Set the Incoming Wink switch on
the face of the circuit card to INCOMING WINK

AND

A N D

[9A]

SET SWITCH FOR
lNCOM/NG WlNK
START

Set the Incoming Wink switch on
the face of the circuit card to
NOT INCOMING WINK

SET SWITCH FOR
NOT INCOMING
WINK START

(8A] results in a 200ms off-hook
receive dial information” condi-

[llA]

Set the Outgoing Wink Start
switch on the face of the circuit
card to OUTGOING WINK
I i

AND
-

A N D

[12A]

Set the Outgoing Wink Start
switch on the face of the circuit
card to NOT OUTGOING WINK

SELECT NOT
OUTGOlNG WlNK
START

WINK START
v

A5-18

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98~200 ~

SET DID/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES

(

From

[12]

)

Is trunk signaling
to be loop pulse

NO
BATTERY AND
GROUND PULSING

LOOP PULSE

[14A]

Set the PG-PULS switch to BATTERY and GROUND PULSING.
Fig. 503-l and 503-3

Set the BG-PULS switch to LOOP PULSING Fig. 503-l and 503-2

SELECT
LOOP
PULSING

BATTERY AND
GROUND PULSlNG
BATT

’ - -------PABX /_I_
I
\++-------Trunk require Stop

I#--- 4
YES
STOP
DIAL

[17A]

Set the STOP DIAL switch to
STOP DIAL Fig. 503-l

STOP DIAL

[18A]

NOT STOP DIAL

1406

Fig. 503-3

‘ N O

c- A N D

I co

Set the STOP DIAL switch to
NOT STOP DIAL. Fig. 503-l

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
SET DID/TIE TRUNK
OPTION SWITCHES
MAP200-503
Issue 2, August 1980
1Sheet 4 of 5

Set switches for other trunk

YES

[20A] Replace card in original card slot
[2OB] Check that the color coded locking clips match the card position
color
[2OC] Lock card in position

4201 v
+

AND

REPLACE
CARD

Have all switches
on all trunk cards
9110-031 been set

YES

85.20

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

Sheet 5 of 5

TABLE 503-l
SWITCH
A

TRUNK TYPE

SWITCH
R

TRUNK IMPEDANCE SWITCHES ARE LOCATED ON THE REAR FACE OF THE TRUNK
CARD.

TRUNK
2.

OPEN .-\
SEE TABLE 503-l
OUTGOING

INCOMING

SWITCH

BUSY

..
..:
:. I:

SWITCHES

OUTGOING BUSY SWITCHES (1 PER TRUNK) CAN BE SET FOR EITHER OF THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
IDLE SETTING NORMAL TRUNK OPERATION
BUSY SETTING TRUNK CANNOT BE SEIZED FOR OUTGOING CALL

THE "OUTGOING BUSY" CONDITION MAY BE SET EITHER BY THE OUTGOING BUSY
SWITCH (NOTE 2). OR BY THE CONSOLE "TRUNK BUSY OUT' FUNCTION. WHEN
THIS CONDITION IS IN EFFECT THE INCOMING BUSY SWITCH AFFECTS THE TRUNK
CONDITION AS FOLLOWS:
IDLE SETTING - NO ANSWER WILL BE GIVEN TO INCOMING TRUNK CALLS
BUSY SETTING - A PERMANENT SEIZURE CONDITION IS GIVEN TOWARDS THE TRUNK

OPEN

SW3
r---7
600 fit---j 9000

SWlI

i----J

I I
LL:
soon
600 (1
C-7-7

TRUNK 2
IMPEDANCE
SWITCHES
NOTE 1

SW21

I ;
1 I

kOiii

Fig. 503-l

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.200

) Issue 1, January 1980
1 Sheet 1 of 1

CAUTION
Do not remove Scanner Card from an active PABX without following relevant
procedures in MAP200-602.
I

[2A]

NO
I

(,,.,,,)

Identify Scanner card by card
slot position (19) in shelf 1

/DENT//V
SCANNER

CARD

SCANNER

CARD

[3A]
[3B]

Lift card extractors at top and
bottom of card
FIRz;ve Scanner card from the
-

(41
[4A]

[5A]
[5B]

Identify the required baud rate
from the circuit requirements

&a$?

[6B]

’

SYSTEM

From [lo]

l--L3

[llA] Determine settings of trunk card
switches from installation forms
and Appendix 5 (Note)
[llB] Set trunk card switches to proper
positions
-

Pll

AND

S E T DIDITIE T R U N K
CARD SWITCHES

YES

431 ’
[13A] Release card extractor and
remove card from shelf slot

AND

Mf;VE I N S T A L L E D

3-f
WI

[15A] Tag defective item
[15B] t%$age Item and return to sup-

AND

:
[16A] Place card in stock

A8-9

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

[17A]

Check proper card slot and color
codes of card extractor against
shelf slot
[178] Slide new card into shelf slot
[17C] Lock card by pressing the extractors inward

[18A] Access the test line
[186] Dial the maintenance access
code (555 used for the purpose of
this documentation)
[18C] Dial 5
[18D] :;;I card slot number (1 - 17/31 [18E]

Replace handset of test line
telephone

PLUG IN
NEW CARD

4-lI
h31

AND

INITIALIZE
NEW CARD

CAUTION note
been inserted

[20A] Access the test line
[20B] Dial the test access code (555
used for the purpose of this
documentation)
[2OC] Dial 1
[20D] Replace handset of the test line
telephone

AND

CLEAR MINOR
ERRORS

with CAUTION

YES

(-+-)
A6-10

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.200

1 INSTALL NEW CARDS

1 Issue 1, January 1980

Sheet 5 of 8

--l--f

[22A]

Set all POWER switches to the
OFF position
[226] Remove the power cord from the
power outlet

P34
[23~1

Release card extractors
Remove card from shelf slot

AND

REMOVE
INSTALLED
CARD

YES

-1251)
Tag defective item
Package item and return
plier

sup-

4261

AND

’ -

AND

RETURN
DEFECT/YE
ITEM

Place card in stock

RETURN
2OCK
Y

7
I

A6-11

SECTION MITL910519110-98-200

INSTALL NEW CARDS

--I

MAP200-602
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 6 of 8

From 1271

57
1281
[28A]

Identify proper baud rate if
RS232 port is used
Set baud rate switch to proper
rate (See MAP200-504)
l--l

[28B]

AND

SET SCANNER
CARD BAUD
SWITCH
4291 J
[29A]
12981
[29C]

Check proper card slot and color
codes of card extractor against
shelf slot
Slide new card into shelf slot
Lock card by pressing the extractors inward

AND

PLUG IN
NEW CARD

YES

%)
IS s stem

an HX.100
or SX-200

sx-200

13211

[32A]

Power up system as detailed in
Appendix 3, MAP200-307

AND

133A] Power up system as detailed in
Appendix 4, MAP200-407

l - 4 - -

A6.12

POWER UP

sx-200

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

YES

[35A]

Replace the locking bars across
the front of the shelf
[356] Slide and securely fasten the
locking device

A N D

REPLACE
LOCK/NG
BARS

YES

(

to[39]

)

TABLE 602-l

Was there
a change in
software (see
Note 1)

GENERIC AND REVISION LEVELS

YES
-203-Xx
4381’
[38A]
(3881

Perform initialization procedure
as in Steps [18] and [20]
Reprogram the system in accordance with the procedures stated
in Section MITL9105/9110-98-210

- A N D

INITIALIZE
AND
REPROGRAM

-20.5xx

-XX indicates revision
level and number

NOTES
1 . The equipment may be installed with
different software packages (Table
602-l). If the PROM/CPU and
Memory Expander (or PROM/RAM
Expander) cards installed differ in
group type from those previously installed a software change occurs,
and Step 1361 must be performed.
2 . The above cards must haye identical
generic and revision level numbers
when installed.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
) INSTALL NEW CARDS

MAP200-602
issue 1, January 1980
1Sheet 8 of 8

YES

[40A]

Add new line and trunk programs
following procedure stated in
Section MITL9105/9110-98-210

AND

SECTION

;^
MITL9105/9110-98.200 :

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-200)

Sheet 1 o f 7

Tools Required
Non
1
1
1

Note:

Predrilled Cabinet
- Electric drill
eNo. 22 (0.157 inch) twist drill
- Slot screwdriver l/z inch

This MAP applies only to
SX-200 equipment.

Predrilled Cabinet
1 - Slot screwdriver ‘/2 inch

CAUTION
Check that the BATTERY switch on
the reserve battery pack is set to
OFF.
Check that the three switches on the
battery charging unit is set to OFF.
Unpack reserve power supply
equipment
[IB] ln;$x&items
for physical
[lA]

[lC]

Check item types against invoice
-IUNPACK AND
INSPECT ITEMS

Were correct
items received

[3A]
[3B]

Complete Damage Report Form and
return with defective items to the sup.
plier.

Set ALL POWER switches to OFF
Remove power cord(s) from
power outlet(s)

/ :
i. ‘:.
.._.
.T<.!
2-z
‘.

(4Al
[4B]

Unlock and open front door
Set all power switches to OFF
position

AND

OPEN FRONT
DOOR A ND POWER DOWN

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Issue 1, January 1980

Sheet 2 of 7

EAI
[5B]

Open rear cabinet door
Check bottom of cabinet right
hand center support bar for the
charging unit mounting holes
(Fig. 603-l)

CHECK CHARGING
UN/T MOUNT/NG HOLES

[7A]
[7B]
[7C]
[7D]

Place charging unit in position
(Fig. 603-2)
Mark the position of the two
charging unit mounting holes
Mark the position of the rear
charging unit mounting hole
Remove the charging unit from
the equipment cabinet

[8A]
[8B]

Center punch the position of the
three mounting holes
Using the No. 22 drill, drill the
three mounting holes

A6-16

r”1
171

MARK CHARGING
UN/T MOUNTlNG HOLES

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION 6X-200)

[Sheet 3 of 7

CHARGING
UNIT

Fig. 803-i

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-200)
MAP200-603
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 4 of 7

(J
g !
+I in

,CHARG,NG“N,T

C------RED

LEAD

wBLACK LEAD
CABLE

RED
LEAD

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-008

POiiER
SUPPLY

GRdUND
,,j[y
ALARM CIRCUIT
CONNECTOR

STUD

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-108

Fig. 603.2

S E C T I O N

MITL9105/9110-98-200

MAP200-603
1Issue 1, January 1980

‘.

1Sheet 5 of 7

Was cabinet
predrilled

[lOA] Place charging unit in position
[lOB] Secure the charging unit to the
cabinet support bar using three
No. 10 slotted self tapping
screws

AND

[liB] Secure the charging unit to the

CAUTION
The reserve battery pack weight is
125lbs. Care must be taken when lifting
the battery pack.
I

[12A]
[12B]

[13Al

[14A]

[14B]

Slide the reserve battery pack into the bottom of the equipment
cabinet from the front
Secure the reserve battery pack
to the cabinet with four pan head
screws
l-

On the charging unit, feed the
Red and Black leads marked “TO
BATTERY” to the battery pack
Check that the BATTERY switch
on the battery pack is set to OFF 4
Connect the Red lead to the terminal marked +RED
Connect the Black lead to the
terminal marked -BLACK
On the charging unit, feed the
Red, Black and Green lead marked “TO POWER SUPPLY” to the
power supply
Connect the Red, Black and
Green leads as shown in Fig.
603-2

AND
.

,
CONNECT CHARGING UNIT
TO BATTERY PACK
:
._ ,-,-;

-[141 *
4

AND

CONNECT CHARGING UN/T
TO BATTERY PACK (FIG. 603-2)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

-fl6Al .

Run two wire cable from the
$u;, eitndicator to the equipment

Feed the cable through the
equipment cabinet cable duct.
(Fig. 603-3)
SC] Connect the two wires to the
Molex plug supplied
[16D] Insert the Molex plug into the
receptacle

YES

BATTERY
ALARM
(FIG. 603-3)

(1661

[17A]

Feed the charging unit power
lead through the cable duct
[176] ,“,“I;,:“e power lead to the power
[17C]
I&D]

Plug system power lead into
power outlet
AC power LED in on
Plug charging unit power lead into power outlet
-

1171

CONNECT

EQUIPMENT CABINET

AND

c
PLUG IN SYSTEM

I-

I
ALARM CIRCUIT
CONNECTOR

On Battery Pack
[16A] Set BATTERY switch to ON

I
On Charging Unit
[19Al Set AC switch to ON
[19B] Set DC switch to ON
[l?c] Set BATTERY switch to ON
BATTERY CHARGING LED lights

A8-20

SWITCH BA ITTERY
PACK ON

RELAY CONTACT RATING
RESISTIVE LOAD-2A. 28VOC
- lA, 1lOVAC

Fig. 603-3

601

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

‘r>
From [19]

On Power Supply
[20A] tS,e;iONVERTER
.

INPUT switch

AND

CONVERTER INPUT LED lit
RESERVE BATTERY CONNECTED LED lit

.
SWTCH POWER
SUPPLY ON

rP11 $-

On Maintenance Panel
[21A] p; SYSTEM POWER switch to

.
.

SYSTEM POWER LED lit
Power Supply EQUIPMENT
SHELF POWER LED lit

AND

Spr$lT;;;STEM

Did all LED’s

YES

[23A]
[23B]

Close and lock all cabinet
Place cabinet in final position

POSlTiON CA B/NET

Go to Section MITL9105/9110-98-500

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)

Tools Required

MAP200-604

1 Wrench ‘/2 inch
1 Slotted screwdriver l/4 inch

Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 1 of 7

7
START

tit/
11 Cl
(1 Dl
[1 El

Open front and rear doors
Set system POWER switch to
OFF
Set all other power switches on
rear of cabinet to off
Set the battery switch on the
reserve battery pack to off
Remove the power cords from
the commercial outlets

Note:

This MAP applies only to
SX-200 equipment.

11 r;That rn~~~~~ is off
Check that the three switches on the
battery charging unit are set to OFF.
If there is a reserve battery pack set it
SYSTEM POWER

PA1
WI
PC1

Remove locking bars from Shelf
Unit 1
Unscrew the shelf retaining
screws from Shelf Unit 1
Carefully withdraw Shelf Unit 1
from the cabinet by 2 inches (See
Note)

NOTE
<

A N D

Step 2 is required to make room to affix
Console card to bracket in Step 7.

MOVE SHELF
UNIT 7
,, FORWARD
\

[4Al
[4Bl
[4Cl

WI
WI

Locate 2nd console (male) A m phenol connector. D/sconnect
from J14
Check bottom right hand corner
of cabinet for first Console Interface Card. Fig. 604-l
Locate holes for second Console
Interface Card on bracket above
f6i;mt,Consoie
Interface Card. Fig.

Place Console Interface Card as
shown in Fig. 604-2
Insure the ground strap of the
Console Interface Card is at the
bottom facing the system

of cabinet for first Console Inter-

tPLACE 2ND CONSOLE
/NTEf?FACE CARD IN POSlTlON

A8-23

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)

1Sheet 2 of 7

[7A]

Insert 8 - 10 x 32 screws into
Console Interface Card affixing it
to the mounting bracket Fig.
604-2

I
SECURE 2ND CONSOLE
INTERFACE CARD JN
POSlTIO N

7181
[8A]
[8B]

Locate system ground stud loosen nut with wrench % inch
Attach ground strap for Console
Interface Card to system ground
stud and tighten lug. Fig. 604-2
-A

AND

I
[9A]
[9B]

ATTACH CONSOLE
lNTERFACE CARD
GROUND STRAP

Locate the incoming
connector of the 2nd
and install it into J24 (Fig. 604-2)
Tighten the screw on the connector with a slotted screwdriver l/4
inch
AFFIX SECOND CONSOLE
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR
TO J24 OF CONSOLE
INTERFACE CARD

A8-24

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)
MAP200.604
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 3 of 7

III

2NDCONSOLE
INTERFACE CARD
I

ISTCONSOLE
INTERFACE CARD

UND
RE

GROIJND
STUD

Fig. 804-l

Fig. 804-2

A6-25

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98~200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)
1MAP200-604

7
I

1 Issue 1, January 1960
Sheet 4 of 7

INTERCONNECT BOARD

I
Pll

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Ll2
P18

/-Q-q

[-e-j

p-j

u2
PI9

CONSOLE INTERFACE
CARD2

CONSOLE 2

P25

J24

!Y
2

5
d
z

CONSOLE INTERFACE
CARD1
P23
J22
Y
2
-

!2
ifi
F

Fig. 604.3

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)

Construct Cable in accordance with
Tables 804.1 and 604-2.

D1CONNECT
lNTERCON ECT
YES

[llA]
[llB]

Connect the Interconnect Console Interface Card cable between J14 and P25 (Fig. 604-3)
Tighten down top screws on A m phenol connectors

(d-)

CABLE JO CONSOLE /NJERFACE
CARD
[12A]
[12B]

D
I-+
REPLACE
SHELF
UN/T
[13A]
[t3B]
[13C]

Close rear door
Plug power cord into commercial
outlet
Turn all switches on

[12C]
[12D]

Replace
Replace
screws
Replace
front of
Securely

Shelf Unit 1 in cabinet
and tighten up retaining
locking bars across
shelf
fasten locking device

1
D

POWER SYSTEM UP

: :

A8-27

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Sheet 6 of 7
TABLE 604-i
INTERCONNECT BLOCK - CONSOLE INTERFACE CARD

A6-28

Pin
No.

Pair
Colour

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALRAM
TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

GROUND
GROUND

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

Y-0
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
v-BL
BL-v
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
- 48V
ov
-48v
ov
-48v
ov
- 48V
ov
- 48V
ov
- 48V
ov
- 48V

GROUND
GROUND

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
- 48V

Lead Designation

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200
CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD
INSTALLATION (SX-200)

TABLE 604-2
POSITION

LEAD

DESIGNATION

PI7

J14

P25

J24

T(A)

R (A)

SDATAOUlT(A)

CONSOLE2

SDATAOUTR(A)

S DATAINT(A)

S DATAIN

R(A)

MAJORALARMTBl-5

-48VTB301

181920 181920 181920

OVlBSOl-1

21 22 23 21 22 23 212223
24 25 24 25 24 25
.
434445 434445 434445

37 1_2

37 12

464748 46 4748 464748
49

50 49

CUT OVER SWA

35
*

35
.

CUTOVERSWB

ALL UNLISTED PINS
GO TO ESG TB301-3
P5

PI7

J15

P23

J22

T (4

42
.

R (A)

SDATAINT(A)

18 .

SDATAIN R(A)
S DATADUTT(A)

43
19 .

43
19

30
7

30 .
.7

SDATAOUTR(A)

CONSOLE1

MAJORALARMTBl-5

-48VTB301

18 19 20 18 1920 1819 20

37 12

OVTB301-1

21 2223 21 2223 212223
24

37 12 37

25 24

434445 434445 434445
46 4748 464748 464740
49

50 49

CIJTOVERSWB

CUTOVERSWA

ALL UNLISTED PINS
GO TO ESG TB301-3

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-200

START

Open front door
Open rear door (SX-200)
Set SYSTEM POWER switch to
off
Set all power switches on rear
door to off
Set battery switch (SX-200) to off
Remove power cable(s) from
power outlet(s)

(

YES

[3B]

]4Al
1481
[4Gl

)

POWER
DOWN
SYSTEM

[3A]

Goto[4]

Unscrew the 4-40 screw from the
cable connectors on the
backplane (Fig. 6051)
Remove cable connectors
-

LUSCONNECT
CABLES TO
X-CONNECT

INSTALL
BOARD

Plug the translator board into the
backplane connectors (Fig. 605-l)
Install four 6-32 screws (Fig.
605-l )
Tighten all screws with a slotted
0.25 inch blade screwdriver
TRANSLATOR

/ ‘“..rr.\

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD
INSTALLATION

Note Installation of translator boards
changes pin-out configuration on plugs.
Lines and trunks must therefore be configured to accommodate the equipment
numbers shown in Fig. 605-2.

Perform procedure outlined at
MAP200.405,
but using the data in
Tables 605-i and 605-2 and referring to
Fig. 605-2.

I
[7A]
[7B]

Reconnect connector plugs according to Fig. 605-l
Tighten connector screws

Using Tables 605.1 and 605-2 and Fig.
605-2, program the proper line and trunk
MITL910519110-96.210

[9A] Change the jumpers on the
cross-connect field to reflect the
new configuration, using Tables
605-l and 605-2 and Fig. 605-2 ---I---

(..,.,,)

/
NO

A&32

for details).

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

Sheet 3 of 7

[IlA] Run jumpers as per Fig. 6052
and reference MAP200-604

--cl
I121

[12A] Close front door of cabinet
[12B] Close rear door of cabinet
[12C] Lock rear door of cabinet

AND

[13A]
[13B]

Replace power cord(s)
Power up system in accordance
with MAP200-407
(SX-200) or
MAP200-307
(SX-100)
-

SECURE DOORS

-J
POWER UP SYSTEM

A8-33

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-200
BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD
INSTALLATION

MAP200-605
Issue 1, January 1980

Sheet 4 of 7

Pl/P7

4 X 4-40 SLOTTED RETAINING SCREWS O.751n.

2 X

BACKPLANE

PLASTIC

SPACER

SECONDTRANSLATORBOARD

Fig. 606-l Translator Board Installation

A6-34

4-40 SLOTTED SCREWS 0

LONG

751n

LONG

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD
INSTALLATION

TABLE 605.1

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD CONNECTIONS (SHELF 1)
TO CROSS-CONNECT FIELD

Line and Trunk Connections
Pin

Pair
Color

Extn

DID/Tie

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T 8
R8

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Ti
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M 2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T 2
R2
T3
R3
T4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

7:
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M 2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T 6
R6
T 7
R7
T 8
R8

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T 3
R3
XT4
XT3
T 4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M 2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Shelf 1 Translator Board Plug Numbers

E & Mt

Note: Position 12 can be used for lines, trunks or receiver #4 card.
t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads.

A8-35

SECTION MITL910519110-98-200
BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD
INSTALLATION

TABLE 605.2

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD CONNECTIONS (SHELF 2)
TO CROSS-CONNECT FIELD

Line and Trunk Connections
Pin

Pair
Color

26
1
27

W-BL
EL-W
w-o

Extn

DID/Tie

E&Mt

Ti
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRI
R/ii

W-G

Tl
Rl
T 2
R2
T3

BR-W

o-w

Shelf 2 Translator Board Plug Numbers
P7
161

iRK \

;
0

-IA:, I

P9
-t

.m\

PllI
p-

wM\

.6
32
7
33
8

BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

R-BR
Tl
BR-R
I Rl
R-S
T 2
R2
S-R
B K - B L 1 Ti
BL-BK
R3
BK-0
T 4
0-BK
R4
BK-G
T5
G-BK
I R5
BK-BR
T 6
BR-BK
R6
BK-S
T7
S-BK
I R7
Y-BL
BL-Y
R8

42
17

Y-O
Q-Y

18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

50
25

A6-36

T 7
R7

I T8
Tl
1 RI
T2
R2
T3
R3

v-d

...

T5
R5
T 6
I R6
T 7
I R7
I
TR
ki
I

I
1

I
I
I

iii“

I
I

XT;
T4
R4

TR2
RR2
E2
M 2

I
I

XT2
XT1
Ti
R2

171

“‘I;[
172

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T 4
RA

I
I

~3
R3
XT4
XT3
T 4
R4

T 2
R2

I
T2
I
R2
TR2 1
RR2 I
.E2
I
M3

174

177\

179
I”

l.-

IFII

c-2 I 3nj

1
I
I

E2
M 2

I
1
I

184

1
/

;

1 208
!

1
/

1 232
-

1 256

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.200

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD
INSTALLATION
MAP200-605
Issue 1, January 1980
Sheet 7 of 7

HARDWARE/EQUIPMENT NUMBERING
PLUG7

PLUG8

PLUG9

PLUG10

SHELF 2 (SX-200)

PLUGPl

PLUGP2

PLUGP3

PLUGP4

:
I

SHELF 1
NOTE:

12
1318

EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FORTHETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LlNECARD.TRUNK EQUIPMENT NUMBER IS
SAMEASINDIVIDUALTRUNKACCESS
CODE.

Fig. 605.2

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR BOARD PLUG APPEARANCES

A6.37138

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-200 !

1 INSTALLATION OF RCP CARD
Note:

The RCP card provides a remote
access facility. See Section
MITL9105/9110-98-101
Remote
Maintenance, Administration
and Test Description for details.

[lA]
[lB]
[lC]

Unpack card from container
Inspect card for physical damage
Check card type against invoice

AND
l

UNPACK AND
INSPECT CARD

Was correct

Tag defective item, repack in original
container and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report
I.

[4A]
[4B]

Unlock and open cabinet doors
Remove locking bars from shelf
-

1
[5A]

Release card extractor for Console Control Card (slot 16) and
remove card

-J

4
:
rote

RCP card is to be used in Shelf 1
;;;;.“,‘““‘*LnL
1
control card (If mstalled) must be

A6.39

SECTION fbllTL9105/911

O-98-200

1 INSTALLATION OF RCP CARD1
( MAP200-606
Issue 1, February 1980

I
-1

Sheet 2 of 4

[6A]

Run and terminate a 25 pair connectorized cable between J14
(cabinet) and cross-connect field

If a’ console interface card is in
stalled (MAP200-604) the cable

AND

to be connected
as extension

EXTENSlON

-PI v
I.

[8A]

[8B]

Run jumper between pins 38 (Tip)
and 13 (Ring) of cross-connect
cable (Step 16A1) to
predesignated equipment number
allotted for RCP card
Program RCP card as designated
extension. See
MITL9105/9110-98-210
for programming procedures

T R U N K

A N D

WIRE
$VpD ;iOGRAM

- [9A]

Run jumper between pins 38 (Tip)
and 13 (Ring) of cross-connect
cable (Step [6A]) to trunk line

WIRE
;fCPNAS

EXTENSION

[lOA] Set thumbwheel switches on
Tone Control card to 7772

401 f
(
I

AND
.
f$‘$R+loG

7772

A8-40

RA M
Note:

Switch settings Step [lOA] must
remain at 7772 for Generic
202/203 software - installed
PABX’s on completion of installation.

SECTION MITLSI 051911 O-98-200
INSTALLATION OF RCP CARD
MAP200-606
1 Issue 1, February 1980
Sheet 3 of 4

7)
From [lo]

[llA]

Check proper card slot and color
codes of card extractor against
shelf slot
[llB] Slide new card into shelf slot
[llC] Lock card by pressing the extrac
tors inward
.
Data LED turns on and off with
diagnostics (Table 606-l)
[llD] Verify that AL1 and AL2 LEDs are
not lit (See Note)

r-----l -I
Note:

If AL2 LED is lit at Step [llD]
replace the RCP card

[12A]
.

Dial allotted RCP number
Answer tone heard
Term LED turns on
[l;B] Verify that during a 10 second
period the answer tone increased
in level in three distinct steps
[12C]
Press RELEASE key
.
ConsolelRCP connection remov.

AND
DIAL
RCP
NUMBER

LED turns off
-

[13A]
[13B]

Replace locking bars across
front of shelf
Sl&ydi;znd
securely fasten locking

AND

--i
I
I

I
[14A]

REPLACE
LOCKING BARS

Lock cabinet doors
ICABINET DOORS

23
FINISH

A8-41

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
INSTALLATION OF RCP CARD
MAP200-606
Issue 1, February 1980
Sheet 4 of 4

TABLE 606-l
RCP LED INDICATIONS

DESIGNATION
DATA

DESCRIPTION OF INDICATIONS
1.
2.

TERM

A6-42

LED lit when the RCP is connected to the RMAT Controller and data
is being transmitted.
LED lit during diagnostic tests. Tests consist of three 10 second
periods followed by 17 seconds during which LED is off.

LED is lit when the RCP answers the RMAT Controller

AL1

Alarm LED AL1 is lit when alarm is activated by the watchdog timer

AL2

Alarm LED flashes if failure occurs during the RCP self-test diagnotics.
The LED is lit steadily if a checksum or RAM failure occurs during
initialization.

r
SECTION MITLSI 05/9110-98-200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-100)
MAP200-607

issue 1, April 80
Sheet 1 of 11

T
START

[lA]

Unpack reserve power supply
equipment
[lB] F;;.p;;items
for physical
[lC]

l-----oI
111

AND

Check item types against invoice

Note:

This MAP applies only to SX-100
equipment.

CAUTION
Check that the BATTERY switch on the
reserve battery pack is set to OFF.
Check that the three switches on the
battery charging unit are set to OFF.

UNPACK AND
INSPECT ITEMS

YES

re!urn with defective items to the sup-

FINISH

YES
(Tz--)

A643

”

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

‘r’
From [3]

SX-100 EQUIPMENT
[4A]
[4B]
[4C]
[4D]
[4E]

Switch off AC and DC
breakers
Remove AC cord from
receptacle
Remove the eight 6-32
securing the cover
Remove the cover and
the interconnect card
&I~; location of TB302

circuit
power
screws
expose
in Fig.

---u
I41

AND

DEACTIVATE
SYSTEM A ND
EXPOSE TERMINATIONS
(Fig. 607-1)

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY

WI
WI
WI

WI
F3Cl
WI

]7Al
]7Bl

Ensure all switches are off (see
CAUTION block above)
Remove cable harness from T B l
terminals (Fig. 607-2) and discard
Install Reserve Power Supply in
position near base of rack

Measure, cut and run required
lengths of cable to interconnect
TB302, SX-100 and T B l , Reserve
Power Supply. See NOTE and
Fio. 607-2
Loosen cable securing clamps at
sx-100
Feed new cable under clamps,
and terminate each end as
shown in Fig. 607-2
Tighten cable securing clamps

Replace the cover over the
SX-100 (see Step 4D)
Secure the cover with the screws
removed at Step 4C

INSTALL
RESERVE POWER
SUPPLY

Interconnecting cable must be of equal
construction to standard cable harness,
i.e. red, black and green insulated flexible strand leads of at least 14AWG
gauge.

TERMINATE
POWER CABLES
(Fig. 607-2)

AND
t-

A8.44

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION 6X-1001

J15
CONSOLE 1

FAII

Fig. 607-l Cable Connections

A845

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.200

SX-100 PABX

NOTE: SEE FIG. 607-l FOR
LOCATION OF TEl302

INTERCONNECT BOARD(PART)

-48Vdc
BK

OVdc
R

--I

Tfl Al ARM INnI,-ATnR
, -

. . _ . . , . . . I

, , . l , “ . , , l . ,

IF REQUIRED (SEE
STEP 27)

RESERVE BATTERY
SUPPLY

\
I
\
I I I
,
.I
/

INTERCONNECl
ll"P., r
LHtlU
HARNESS

-es
Q
@

i@ GROUNDSTUD

Fig. 607-2

A6-46

TBI

l-!-l

Cable Harness Interconnections

.BATTERY
CHARGER

SECTION MITL910519110~98~200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-100)

YES

d3 I
Go to [14]

SX-100 EQUIPMENT
[9A] Unlock and open front door
[9B] Switch off AC and DC circuit
breakers
[9C] Remove AC cord from power
receptacle
[9D] Close and lock front door

+I
-

’
AND

DEACTIVATE
sx-100

[IOA] Release the strikes at the top of
the SX-100 (supporting the
weight of the unit by hand)
[IOB] Allow the SX-100 to be gently
pivotted down and rest against
the backboard
[IOC] Unlock (or remove the four 10-32
gx[w; from) the top cover of the

AND

[lOD] Remove the top cover
[lOE] Remove the four lo-32 screws
from the rear panel of the SX-100
[lOF] Remove the rear panel
-

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
[ll A] Ensure all switches are off (see
CAUTION block above)
[ll B] Remove cable harness from TBl
terminals (Fig. 607-2) and discard
[11C] Install Reserve Power Supply in a
suitably protected location near
the SX-100 equipment (see NOTE)

-Ill1 ’

I
EXPOSE
sx-100
TERMlNAT/ONS

AND
.
INSTALL
z;;MyYE P O W E R

Note
The Reserve Power Supply should be in.
stalled in a location which affords protection against mechanical or en.
vironmental damage and which requires
an interconnecting cable run of no more
than 50 feet.

A8-47

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-200

I
1
I

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-100)
MAP200-607

Issue 1, April 80

Sheet 6 of 11

[12A]

Measure, cut and run required
lengths of cable to interconnect
TB302, SX-100 and T B l , Reserve
Power Supply. See NOTE and
Fig. 607-2
$o;;;
cable securing clamps at

[12B]
112Cl
_

[12D]

Feed new cables under clamps,and terminate each end as
shown in Fig. 607-2
Tighten cable securing clamps
-J

Note
4

AND
I

TERMINATE
POWER
CABLES

Replace the back panel removed
at Step 1OF
[13B] Secure the back panel with the
screws removed at Step 10E
_Il3Cl _ Replace the too cover removed at
S t e p
1OD
[13D] Lock the cover (or secure with
the screws removed at Step 1OC
[13E] Swing the SX-100 equipment up
to its normal position, and ensure that the strikes latch and
engage properly
-

[13A]

AND
i
RESTORE
;;&gA;O
POSITION

SX-100 EQUIPMENT
[15A]
[15B]
[15C]
[15D]

A848

Unlock and open front door
Switch off AC and DC circuit
breakers
Remove AC cord from power
receptacle
Close and lock front door

Interconnecting cable must be of equal
construction to standard cable harness,
i.e. red, black and green insulated flexi,
ble strand leads of at least 14 AWG
gauge.

From [21]

[16A]
connectorized
cables to be

[16B]
[16C]
[16D]

Unlock (or remove the four lo-32
screws from) the top cover of the
sx-100
Remove the top cover
Remove the four lo-32 screws
from the rear panel of the SX-100
Remove the rear panel

[23A]

Install new connectorized cables
in accordance with MAP200-305
(from Steps 22 through 29 in- - - - L elusive)

[24A]
[24B]
[24C]
[24D]

Locate the free end of the cable
harness terminated on the
Reserve Power Supply
Feed the free end under the
SX-100 cable clamp
Terminate the conductors to
TB302 of the SX-100 as shown in
Fig. 607-2
Tighten screws securing the
SX-100 cable clamp

[25A]

!$$~s~

[25B]

Secure the panel with the screws
removed at Step 16C
Fk~;k~~ the top cover on the

[25C]
[25D]

[18A]

Move SX-100 aside to make
for new power supply position
(see NOTE 1)

TERMINATE
POWER
CABLES

the rear panel on the

Lock the cover (or secure with
the screws removed at Step 16A)
-

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
[20A] Ensure all switches are OFF (see
CAUTION block)
[2OB] Place Reserve Power Supply in
required position
REPLACE
sx-100

[21A]
alarm circuit
to be connected

Place SX-100 on top of
Power Supply, ensuring
trusions in base fit into
sions on top of Reserve
Supply (Fig. 607-3)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
INSTALLATION (SX-100)
MAP200-607
Issue 1, April 80
Sheet 10 of 11

I
[27A]
[27B]

Locate T B l (Fig. 607-2) on
Reserve Power Supply
Run required leads from alarm indicator to TBI (see NOTE)
-

RESERVE POWER SUPPLY
[28A] Insert power cord into power
outlet receptacle
[28B] Set the AC switch on the charger
to the ON positon
[28C] Set the DC, then the BATT switches on the charger to the ON
position
[28D] Set the BATTERY circuit breaker
(at left of T B l ) to the ON position
.
Battery charging LED lights

SX-100 EQUIPMENT
[29A] Unlock and open front door
[29B] Insert power cord into power
outlet receptacle (see NOTE)
[29C] Switch AC and DC circuit
breakers to ON
.
CONVERTER LED lit

Alarm contacts are provided by the
charging unit. These are available for
customer-provided
alarm
indicating
equipments to indicate power-fail condit i o n s . F i g . 607-2 s h o w s t h e n o r m a l
operational condition i.e. a power-fail
condition causes the normally open (NO)
and common (COM) contacts to close.
The alarm contact electrical ratings are
as follows:
Resistive Load . 2A, 26Vdc
- 1 A, 40Vdc

CONNECT
POWER JO
RESERVE POWER
SUPPLY

-1291 ’
AND

L
*

SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY ON

ON MAINTENANCE PANEL
[30A] Set System Power switch to ON
pi
.
SYSTEM POWER LED lit

A N D

SWlTCH SYSTEM
POWER ON

A6-52

Note

Note
Ensure SX.100 circuit breakers are off
(Step 4A) prior to Step 29A.

r
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

AT SX-100 EQUIPMENT
[32A] Set AC circuit breaker to OFF

AND

4
SWITCH MAIN
POWER SUPPLY OFF

1331 ’
Does System
remain fully
operational

YES

(341

AND

[34A] Set AC circuit breaker to ON

SWITCH MAIN
POWER SUPPLY ON
!7

(351

[35A
(356

Close and lock all cabinet doors
Place cabinet in final position

AND

POSlTlON
CAB/NET

Go to Section MITL9105/9110-98.350

MlTEL STANDARD PRACTICE

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205
Issue 3, August 1980

SX-lOO* AN D SX-200*
SUPERSWITCH”
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
INSTALLATION FORMS

CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reason for Reissue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
1

INSTALLATION.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . .
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . .

1
1

2
INSTALLATION FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . .
Identification.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
CodeEntry..........................
2
Forms Included
Al-l
APPENDIX 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Error Codes . . . . . . . . . .
Al-3
Programming Confirm Codes . . . . . . .
Al -4
Extended Programming Error Codes
Al.5
Extended Programming Confirm
Al-8
Codes...........................
Speed Call Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al -7
Installation Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Card Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.02 This section is reissued to include all
Generic 205 information
2. INSTALLATION
Cabling
2.01 All connections for the line and trunk circuits are made from the cross-connect
frame to the PABX equipment cabinet through 25
pair connector ended cables. The attendant consoles are connected to the equipment cabinet
through standard 25 pair cables with a plug on the
cabinet end and a connector at the console.
Programming

2.02 The system contains ten individual programs. Each program details a different
aspect of the system configuration.
l

1. INTRODUCTION
General
installation of the SX-100 or SX-200 PABX
consists of connecting the system to the
cross-connect frame, applying power, and programming. SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200
details the system cabling requirements,
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
gives detailed instructions for programming the system and
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215
details the test
procedures to be performed after the system programming is completed. This section contains a
general description of the system installation, the
type of installation forms and the data required to
complete the installation.

Reason For Reissue

1.01

Tenant Service (Generic 203 or higher)-If
the system is to be used by multiple
tenants “Tenant Service” must be selected
when programming is started.
System Options-The system options are
those options which affect all extensions
and trunks within the system. A number of
options are provided (code numbers 100
through 234) any of which may be selected.

:-. I

Features-A number of features (code
numbers 1 through 42) require access
codes to be dialed by the extension user to
gain access to the features. The Feature
program allows the selected access codes
to be assianed.

0 MITEL Corporation 1980
* Trademark of MITEL Corporation

P a g e 1

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205

Class of Service Options-A maximum of
16 different Classes of Service (COS) may
be defined. Each COS specifies the
features and services (code numbers 33
through 94) that may be accessed by an extension or dial-in trunk assigned to that
cos.

Extension-The Extension program allows
the tenant, equipment number, directory
(extension) number, COS (the features and
services which may be accessed), toll
restrictions, and the optional busy lamp
and pick-up group assignments to be made
for each extension.

3. INSTALLATION FORMS
General
3.01

A complete set of installation forms is contained in Mite1 publication SX-lOO/SX-200
Installation Forms. For descriptive purposes a
copy of each type of installation form is included
in this section. Each installation form is divided
into a number of columns, the headings of which
serve two purposes(a) to identify the information that should be
entered into the column, and
(b) to show the actions to be performed to
enter the codes into the system memory.
3.02

Hunt Groups-This program defines the extensions within a tenant that form a hunt
group and the type of hunting to be performed. A maximum of 12 individual hunt groups
may be specified per system.

A list of features or options is included on
the relevant installation form if applicable.
These features and options, and any conflicts
(mutual exclusions), are described in Section
MITL9105/9110-98-105
Features and Services
Description.
3.03

Trunks-This

program allows the tenant,
equipment number, busy lamp assignment,
trunk type, console appearance, day and
night number assignments, COS, toll
restriction, and incoming number definitions of each trunk to be made.

In addition to the “programming” installation forms the various types of trunks require the trunk card switches to be set to meet the
proper operational configuration. This type of
form is also included at the rear of this Section.

Identification
3.04

Trunk Groups-A maximum of 12 different
trunk groups may be programmed per
system. The access code and type, the toll
restriction and the overflow group (the trunk
group to which the trunk will hunt when all
trunks in the trunk group are busy) of each
trunk group are specified.

The name of the button shown at the top of
each column identifies the type of code to
be entered in that column. The number following
the button name shows the range of codes
associated with the operation.

Code Entry
3.05

Multi Digit Toll Control (Generic 204/Up)-If
Toll Control is to be employed, refer to Section MITL9105/9110-98-212 for instructions.

Speed Call (Generic 205)-IfSpeed Call is
to be employed, refer to Section MITL9105/
911 o-98-220.

Page 2

To enter the information contained in each
table the button shown at the top of the column must be pressed and the code number dialed. An example is shown in Fig. 3-1, Typical Programming Entry.
3.08 Table 3-1 is a list of all forms included in
Mite1 publication SX-lOO/SX-200 Installation
Forms. The number of pages of each type of form
is also included.
_-

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-205

I
FEATURE

DIAL
1-42

ACCESS
CODES
I

To assign feature access codes.

(4)

(1) Press FEATURE button.

ASSIGN AND
DIAL ACCESS
CODES

ENTER
c

Dial the access code to be assigned to the
feature

(2) Dial feature number (range i-42).

(5) Press the ENTER button to store the information entered.

(3) Press ACCESS CODE button.

(6)

Repeat steps (1) through (5) as required.

Fig. 3-l Typical Programming Entry
TABLE 3-l
INSTALLATION FORMS
Title
Number of Forms
4
Customer Changes
3
System Options
1
Features
2
Class of Service Options
16
Extensions*
2
Hunt Groups
6
Non Dial-In Trunks
6
Dial-In Trunks*
6
DIDICCSA Trunks
2
Trunk Groups
Multi Digit Toll Control
Outline Forms
Toll Control
4
TCl
4
TC2
6
TC3
1
TC4
6
TC5
2
Absorb Plan (Note 1)
3
Class of Restriction (Note 1)
5
Control Plan (Note 1)
1
2
Restriction Tables (Note 1)
6
4 Entry Restriction Table
6
20 Range Restriction Table
800 Range Restriction Table
Speed Call Forms
1
SC1 (Note 2)
1
SC2 (Note 2)
2
Trunk Card Switch Settings
CO Trunks
6
Trunk Card Switch Settings
E & M/Tie Trunks
6
Trunk Card Switch Settings
DID/Tie Trunk Card
* Includes column for Multi-Digit Toll Control Generic 2041Up. For further information see Section
MITL9105/9110-98-212.
Note 1: These forms are peculiar to Multi-Digit Toll Control Generic 2041Up.
Note 2: These forms are peculiar to Speed Call Generic 205.

Page3

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-205

APPENDIX 1
EQUIPMENT AND BUSY LAMP NUMBERS
AND PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
1. GENERAL
Al.01 The equipment numbers used in the SX-100 and SX-200 are shown in Fig-Al-l,and the
field numbering in Fig. Al-2.

PLUG1
161 169 177 185

PLUG9
193 2 0 1

EL
ES

PLUG11

209 217 225 233 241 249

3.
EZ

busy Iamp

z.
f5z
I

sHELF2(%200ONLY)

DUALANDORQUAD
RECEIVER EQUIPMENT

NUMBERS

QUAD RECEIVER
EQUIPMENT NUMBERS
NOTES:

1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FORTHETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2,TRUNKEQUlPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASlNDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.
Fig. Al-l Hardware/Equipment Numbering

Al-l

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205

l
1

ooooooooo

910

l ooooo~oeo
31 32

34 35 36 37 38 39 40

l oooeoo~oo
61 62

64 65 66 67 68 69 70

ooooeoooo

91 92 9 3

94 95 96 97 98 99 100

eo9ooooooo
130
121122 1 2 3 124125126127128129

Fig. Al-2

Al.02

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

Error codes and confirm codes, which may appear as console displays during programming, are
respectively described in Tables Al-l and Al-2, Al-3, Al-4 and Al-5

Al.03 Standard and Extended Programming Overlays appear in Fig. Al-3.
Al.04

Before a system can be initially programmed, the RAM (and the extended RAM if applicable) must
be initialized. Until the RAM(s) have been initialized system diagnostics may present an error
E021---at the console.

Al.05

Refer to Fig. Al-4 for the proper initialization procedure of the RAM (Standard Programming). Refer
to Fig. Al-5 for the proper initialization procedure of the RAM (Extended Programming).

Al.08

Refer to Fig. Al-6 to enter or exit programming (Extended or Standard).

Al-2

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-205
TABLE Al-l
STANDARD PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error
code

Cause

Key
affected

Key
flashing

Invalid key pressed. ALL

None

Invalid number.

None

Key other than
LAMP TEST,
ENTER or CANCEL TENANT, OPTION
pressed.
COS DEFINE,
FEATURE
EXTN NUMBER,
HUNT GROUP,
TRUNK GROUP,
NEXT, EQPT
NUMBER

ENTER,
CANCEL

Access code has
not been entered.

HUNT GROUP
TRUNK GROUP

ACCESS
CODE

The extension
number or access
code entered is
already assigned.

EXTN,
ACCESS
CODE

None

EXTN NUMBER
Number entered
contains incorrect
ACCESS CODE
number of digits or
conflicting option
enabled in this COS.

None

Incorrect equipment EQPT NUMBER
number entered.

None

ALL

Meaning

Action Required

The last key pressed is invalid Check procedure and press
at this time.
correct key.
The number entered is out
Press key associated with
of range or contains
entry and re-enter number.
corrupted data.
An attempt was made to leavepress ENTER to transfer the
the current mode after some data to permanent store or
parameters were changed
CANCEL to remove the data
but before ENTER or CANCEL from the temporary store.
were pressed. ENTER may be
used to write the new programming information back to
the non-volatile RAM or use
CANCEL to ignore all programming changes made
since the last time ENTER
was pressed.
In Trunk mode an attempt
Press ACCESS CODE key an
is made to delete a member enter required access code.
of a trunk group.
Equipment Numbers desired
must be entered.
Check code entered.
In Trunk Group mode an at1 If code is correct, terminate
tempt is made to place a
entry, remove other appear
trunk into a trunk group while
ante of code and re-enter
that trunk is currently proall new data.
grammed into another trunk
2 If code is incorrect, press
group.
key associated with entry
Attempting to enter members
and re-enter extension
into a Hunt or Trunk group
number or access code.
before an access code has
been assigned to the group.
The extension number or
access code entered is
already assigned to an
extension, feature, hunt
group or trunk group.
Callback and Executive Override conflict, i.e. trying to
enter a Callback code while
same code assigned to Executive Busy Override and
vice-versa.
The extension number or
Check entry. Press key
access code is in conflict
associated with entry and
with the existing numbering
re-enter number.
plan. Attempting to add
an option to a COS in which
a conflicting option is enabled.
Attempting to add a System
Option when a conflicting
COS option exists.
Attempting to assign an
Remove conflicting option
equipment number that is:
(a) Assign equipment
l
undefined
number correctly
l
defined as a trunk to
(b) ,E$aa;rew equipment
an extension hunt group
or extension
l
defined as an extension to
a trunk group or a trunk
l
an extension with message
registration to hunt group
or pickup group
An equipment number assigned to an extension must be
deleted as an extension
before being programmed as
a trunk. An equipment number
assigned to a trunk must be
deleted as a trunk before being programmed as an extension (Generic 20411~~).

Al-3

SECTION MITL910519110-98-205
TABLE Al-l (Cont’d)
STANDARD PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error
code

Cause

E7 System is busy.

Extension has a
message register
that is not zeroed
or has a message
waiting, or has
Do Not Disturb
set.
Trunk or equipment
number already
assigned.

Key
affected

Key
flashing

ENTER,
TENANT

None

Action Required

(a)Attempting to initialize
system while PABX is in
use.
(b)Attempting to change data
of an extension or trunk
while that extension or
trunk is in use. It must be
idle or busied-out.
l
a valid message
register exists for
this extension
l
extension has a
message waiting or
Do Not Disturb set

(a) Wait until system is idle
(b) Wait until extension or
trunk is idle

ENTER

None

ENTER

None

Attempting to assign a
trunk or equipment
number to more than one
tenant at the same time.

(a) Key proper trunk or
equipment number
(b) Press ENTER

None

Ones and Zeros test failed
prior to initializing NonVolatile RAM.
RAM programmed in Generic
202 or 203 is used
with Generic 2041~~

Go to Section
M ITL91051911
o-98-350

In Tenant Service, pressing
the Hunt Group key when all
hunt groups are assigned to
other tenants,
In Tenant Service, pressing
the Trunk Group key when all
trunk groups are assigned to
other tenants.
In Tenant Service, attempting
to put an extension assigned
to one tenant into a hunt
group of a different tenant.
In Tenant Service, attempting
to put a trunk assigned to one
tenant into a trunk group of a
different tenant.
In Tenant Service, entering a
hunt group number assigned
to a different tenant (after
pressing HUNT GROUP).
In Tenant Service, Trunk
Group Programmrng, selecting
an overflow group that
belongs to another tenant.
In Tenant Service, entering a
trunk group number assigned
to a different tenant (after
pressing TRUNK GROUP).
Non-Volatile RAM
ENTER
error.

E022-22 At Power up

Meaning

None

Zero message register,
reset message waiting
or Do Not Disturb
and reprogram

Non-Volatile RAM must
be initialized and/or
reprogrammed

Al-4

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205
TABLE Al-2
STANDARD PROGRAMMING CONFIRM CODES
Confirm
code

Key
affected

Flashing
lamp

Attempting to assign an
equipment number for
an extension to a slot
containing a trunk card

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Attempting to assign an
equipment number for
a trunk to an empty
slot or a slot containing
an extension card.

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Attempting to assign an
extension that already
exists

EXTN
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Check assignment l if correct press CONFIRM key.
The extension number entered is
accepted as the extension number
for the equipment being defined.
ALL data associated with the
original appearance of the
extension number is removed.
l if incorrect press EXTN NUMBER
and re-enter extension number.

T h e b u s y l a m p asslgment
already exists

BUSY
LAMP

CONFIRM

Check assignment l if correct press CONFIRM key. Busy lamp
assignment is accepted for this equipment.
All data associated with original assignment
is removed
l if incorrect press BUSY LAMP and re-enter
busy lamp assignment.

Cause

Action
Check assignment l if correct press CONFIRM
key. Equipment number entered
is accepted as the number
for the equipment type being
programmed. All data associated
with the original appearance
of the equipment number
is removed
l if incorrect press EQPT NUMBER
and re-enter new equipment number

TABLE Al-3
TOLL CONTROL PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Applies to:

Error

Meaning

All modes

Invalid key pressed. Consult MAP for correct procedure.

Absorb Plan mode
Trunk Group mode
Control Plan mode

Number is not within the range of the
parameter being defined. Re-enter
parameter key defined.

All modes

An attempt was made to leave the current mode
after some parameters were changed but before
ENTER or CANCEL was pressed. ENTER may be
used to write the new programming information
back to the non-volatile RAM or use CANCEL to ignore all programming changes made since the last
time ENTER was pressed.

Al-5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205
TABLE Al-3 (Cont’d)
TOLL CONTROL PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error

Applies to:

Control Plan mode
Table mode

Table mode

Meaning

The table number entered is not valid for the
current configuration. Re-enter a number which exists for the configuration of the extended nonvolatile customer RAM.
The table entry code is invalid for the table programmed. This occurs in the following situation:

Table mode

Not used in extended programming

Configuration mode

Not used in extended programming

Configuration mode

A code of more than 3 digits in length for an
800.entry or 20-range table.

A code not in the range of 200-999 for an
800-entry table.

A code which already exists or a code which
would be ambiguous in conjunction with the
existing table entries, for a 4-entry table.

The table is full and cannot hold the entry.

Configuration is not allowed because the Tone
Control card switches are not 7776 or the system
is not idle.

A hardware failure was detected while clearing the
extended customer non-volatile RAM.

TABLE Al-4
TOLL CONTROL PROGRAMMING CONFIRM CODES
Error
C5

Applies To:

Control Plan mode
Table mode

Al -6

Table mode

Meaning

An attempt was made to assign a table which is
currently assigned elsewhere. Pressing the confirm
key will de-assign the table from wherever it was
previously assigned to assign it to the specified
place.
A request has been made to delete all entries in a
table. If CONFIRM is pressed all entries will be deassigned. The old data in the non-volatile RAM will
not be destroyed until the ENTER key is pressed,
and the table itself can be reprogrammed as
desired before the ENTER key is used.
__

r
SECTION M ITL9105/911

O-98-205

TABLE Al-5
SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error

Applies To:

Meaning

EQPT
NUMBER

The equipment number entered is outside the range of valid
numbers

NUMBER
REDIAL

An invalid number redial value was entered

TABLE

ACCESS
NUMBER

An attempt was made to enter an access number for a
common-use table

NUMBER
REDIAL

An attempt was made to enter a number redial digit for a
common-use table

ACCESS
NUMBER

The access number entered already exists for another table
assigned to the same equipment number

NUMBER
REDIAL

Number redial already exists for another table assigned to
the same equipment number, (only 1 number redial attribute
per user is allowed)

SPEED
CALL

The Configuration of the extended NV RAM does not include
the speed call feature

The table number entered is not consistent with that allowed
for the current configuration of the extended NV RAM

1’

(a) Basic Programming

Fig. Al=3 Programming Overlays

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205

(b) Extended Programming

Fig. Al-3

Al-8

Programming Overlays (cont’d)

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-205

CAUTION
ONE OFTHE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES MUST
BE PERFORMED FOR STANDARD PROGRAMMING OFTHE SYSTEM SEESECTION
MITL9105/9110-98-210.

SELECT PROGRAMMING MODESTANDARD OR EXTEND-

ED THEN PERFORM ONE OFTHE FOLLOWING STEPS IF
THESYSTEM
ISTO
BECOMPLETELY
PROGRAMMED

TO CHANGE FROM MULTI-TENANT SERVICE TO SINGLE TENANT
SERVICE OR TO ORIGINALLY PROGRAM SINGLE TENANT SERVICE (INITIALIZE)

SETTHUMBWHEEL SWITCHESTO 7776

PRESS

m H
Fd;;{%&$iON

T;;;;KI

->
SET THUMBWHEEL SWITCHESTO 777X
(WHERE XIS THE PROGRAMMING
CONSOLE)

/I,

PRESS

TO ORIGINALLY SET-UP MULTI-TENANT SERVICE OR CHANGE FROM
SINGLE TENANT SERVICE TO MULTI-TENANT SERVICE.

SET THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES TO 7776

PRESS

m m
~i?;~t;%&DN

SET THUMBWHEEL SWITCHESTO 777X
(WHEREX IS THE PROGRAMMING
CONSOLE)

PRESS

NOTEl:

LAMP
TEST

IFTENANTSERVICEIS
REQUIRED,THIS STEP MUSTBEDONE BEFOREANYOTHERSTEPS.IFA
SYSTEMISTOBECHANGEDFROM
NON-TENANTTOTENANTSERVICE,THEMEMORYMUSTBE
INITIALIZED AND ALL DATA RE-ENTERED. STARTING WITH THE ABOVE STEP. IT IS
RECOMMENDEDTHATALLDATA FOR ONETENANT BE ENTERED BEFORECHANGINGTENANTS.

Fig. Al.4

Initialization of RAM (Standard Programming)

Page

Al-.9

’

SECTION M ITL9105/911 O-98-205

CAUTION
THE DATA OF THE FOLLOWING FORMS CAN BE
ENTERED AFTER THE CONSOLE HAS BEEN PLACED
IN THE DESIRED PROGRAMMING MODE (STANDARD
OR EXTENDED)

TO ENTER STANDARD PROGRAMMING MDDE:

SET THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES TO 777X
WHERE X = THE PROGRAMMING CONSOLE

PRESS

q
LAMP
TEST

LAMP TEST LEO LIT

DIAL FEATURE ACCESS CODE FOR FEATURE NUMBER 29 FROM THE CONSOLE (GENERIC 204/lJP)

TO ENTER EXTENDED PROGRAMMING MODE:

ENTER STANDARD PROGRAMMING

PRESS

NEXT
c

LAMP TEST LED FLASHES
l

TO TERMINATE EXTENDED PROGRAMMING MODE.

PRESS

NEXT
c

LAMP TEST LEO LIT SOLID

SYSTEM IS IN STANDARD PROGRAMMING MODE

TO TERMINATE STANDARD PROGRAMMING MODE:

IF THE SYSTEM WAS PUT IN STANDARD PROGRAMMING
MODE WITH FEATURE NUMBER 29

PRESS

IF THE SYSTEM WAS PUT IN STANDARD PROGRAMMING
MODE BY CHANGING THE THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES
PRESS
SET THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES TD 7780

LAMP
TEST

LAMP
TEST
III

LAMP TEST LED UNLIT
SYSTEM OUT OF PROGRAMMING MODE

LAMP TEST LEO UNLIT
SYSTEM OUT OF PROGRAMMING MODE

.Fig. Al-5

Page Al-10

Initialization of Extended RAM (Generic 2041~~)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205

CAUTION

THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MUSTBE
PERFORMED WHEN COMPLETELY PROGRAMMING
THESYSTEM
A. THE SYSTEM MUST BE IN STANDARD
PROGRAMMING MODE
8. THE SYSTEM MUST HAVE BEEN INITIALIZED IN
STANDARD PROGRAMMING (FIG. Al-4)
C. SELECTTHE EXTENDED PROGRAMMINGOVERLAY

PRESS

NEXT
c

PRESS

SET

CONFIG
n

PRESS

THETHUMBWHEEL

SWITCHES

7776

ENTER

DIAL SINGLE DIGIT CONFIGURATION CODE-(SEE NOTE 2)
.I
.
*: I
;
x-.--

PRESS

RESET

BUTTON

THESCANNERCARD

(THE

SYSTEM

WILLEXIT

FROM

PROGRAMMING)

PRESS

LAMP
TEST
0

PRESS

THE SYSTEM IS

NOWIN

EXTENDED PROGRAMMING

NOTE 1:INITIALIZATION IS NOT POSSIBLE IF SYSTEM IS IN USE
NOTE

2:IN GENERIC
AVAILABLE:
1.

,,.*<
I

204/205

SYSTEMSTHEREARE

AUTOMATICWAKEUPANDTOLL

FOUR

CONFIGURATIONS

CONTROL STANDARD (2040NLY)

TOLLCONTROL STANDARD AND SPEEDCALL STANDARD(205ONLY)

3.' TOLLCONTROL BASIC AND SPEEDCALL
'.. _
4. TOLLCONTROL EXTENDED(204 ONLY)

Fig. Al-8

EXTENDED(205ONLY)

Enter or Exit Programming

Page Al-11

CUSTOMER CHANGES

MiTEL
CUSTOMER NAME:
CUSTOMER SITE:

DATE OF CHANGE

SERVICE PERSON

/ .,..,

.,.

TYPE OF CHANGE

REMARKS

SYSTEM OPTIONS b[

-1

0
ADD

DIAL
O P T I O N ,$;;;R

cl
OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME

DISCRIMINATING RINGING

OPTION

OPTION NAME

100

./’

ATTENDANT CO TRUNK-CO TRUNK CONNECT ENABLE

129

TRANSFER DIAL TDNF

ATTENDANT CO TRUNK-NON CO TRUNK CONNECT ENABLE

130

FLEXIBLE NIGHT SERVICE

ATTENDANT NON CO TRUNK-NON CO TRUNK CONNECT
I”3

ENABLE

TAFAS AVAILABLE DURING DAY

104

CONTROLLED OUTGOING RESTRICTION SET-UP

132’

OUTGOING TRUNK CAMP-ON

105

CONTROLLED STATION RESTRICTION SET-UP

133’

106

CONTROLLED STATION TO STATION RESTRICTION SET-UP

NIGHT SERVICE AUTOMATIC SWITCHING

OUTGOING TRUNK CALLBACK

1 CAN FLASH IF TALKING TO AN INCOMING TRUNK

107

-1

111

134’

ATTENDANT DISA CODE SET-UP ENABLE

i35

CAN FLASH IF TALKING TO AN OUTGOING TRUNK

108

LIMITED WAIT FOR DIAL TONE

136

CAN FLASH IF TALKING TO STATION

109

MESSAGE WAITING SET-UP (LAMP)

137’

CANNOT DIAL A TRUNK AFTER FLASHING

110

MESSAGE WAITING SET-UP (BELL)

138’

CANNOT DIAL A TRUNK AFTER FLASHING IF HOLDING
1OR IN CONFERENCE WITH A TRUNK

I
I

111

117

ATTENDANT TIMFD RFCAI I CAMP-IIN - 71%
..~
.-- _..^... - _.. -- ---..
1 Al ItNUANl IlMtU HtCALL - CAMP-ON 40s

(

C A L L FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER TIMEOUT

(100-234)

ATTENDANT

139
~~

I
I

118

TRUNK, CCSA)

ATTENDANT

119

CALL FORWARDING - DON’T ANSWER (SYSTEM, DID. DIAL-IN

17”
1-1

TIE TRUNK, CCSA)

121

PARK AND CALL-HOLD RECALL - 2 MINUTES

151

BELL OFF ENABLE

122

PARK AND CALL-HOLD RECALL - 4 MINUTES

152

PAGE BUTTON ENABLE

123

END’OF DIAL SIGNAL FOR OUTGOING TRUNKS (#)

153

NEW CALL TONE ENABLE

124

24 HOUR CLOCK

154

BOTH MODE STANDARD

125

CONFERENCE

CALLBACK BUTTON ENABLE

‘-,
.!

126

TRUNK BUSY-OUT ENABLE

127

BOTH BUTTON ENABLE

128

‘1

CALL FORWARDING BUSY (SYSTEM, DID. DIAL-IN TIE

ATTENDANT CAMP-ON

1 ATTENDANT BUSY OVERRIDE
I
ATTENDANT SERIAL GALL

140

’ ) ‘:

<.:

/
,’

I
\, -2 .
I

FIRST DIGIT TOLL DENY
MESSAGE REGISTRATION ENABLE

‘)

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: COUNT ADDITIONAL
SUPERVISIONS

F----/--I
,283 4
r---,,I,,

I
I,

SYSTEM OPTIONS 1OPTioN 1

OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME
MESSAGE REGISTRATION: TIMER

158'

= 20 SECONDS

AUTOMATIC WAKEUP PRINT

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: MULTIPLIER

= 2 UNITS

16P

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: SURCHARGE

= 8 UNITS

163'

PRINT ENABLE

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: SURCHARGE

= 7 UNITS

164'

IGNOREPRINTENABLE

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: SURCHARGE

= 6 UNITS

165*

REMOTF SYSTFM RFSFT

SURCHARGE = 5 UNITS

166.

MESSAGE REGISTRATION:

MESSAGE

178'

- -

CHANGE

I
19Lw

PRDTFCTION

IQ,,'
.I.

flVFRRlnF

- -. .--- .“-‘--“-‘.-.-““‘--

TRUNKTO

TRUNK CONNECT ENABLE

T,, I CnNTR”,

210t*

SYSTEM ID ENABLE

211t*

FLASH TIMING = 0.7 SECONDS

180'

NlGHTBELL3WlTH

FLASH TIMING = 0 9 SECONDS

181*

FLASH TIMING = 1.1 SECONDS
TRUNK RECALL PARTIAL INHIBIT
RESERVED
RESERVED

.I '

/.'

MINOR ALARM ENABLE

213t**

182'

WAKE-UPALARM

214"

183'

RESERVED

164
185

-.SPFFII
- - - -,r.i,.__ I FNPR,
-,.,, ILLF
SPFF”

ENABLE

CA, I PR”GRdMMINC

216t
FNdRl

186

-, -_I -I.-L ll,.. ."- ,.,,,, L I.Y,.,YLII

RESERVED

187

RESERVED

188

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING

RESERVED

189

OUTGOING CALLS

220t

AUTOMATIC WAKEUP ENABLE

190"

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING INCOMINGCALLS

221t

215

RESERVED

:?I

?fi

@. .e --

212t

PRINTOUTS: EXTRA LINE FEEDS

ATTENDANT PRINTER CONTR( IL ENABLE

“ _

k-+
\A---

19Bt'

179'

I
"1

ATTENDANT STATION BUSY-OUT ENABLE

WAITING

195"'

1 EXTENSION NON-CO
MlllTIDlRlT

1 SINGLE DIGIT DIALING TIME-OUT = 5 SECONDS

OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME

yly, L-, L,."VLL

LI",
219t

., b, :

SYSTEM OPTIONS Fi

cl
OPTION

ADD

DIAL
OPTION
NUMBER
(100-234)

OPTION NAME

NOTES
3MDR: DROPlNCOMPLETEOUTGOlNG

CALLS

TO DELETE SYSTEM OPTIONS

2257

~MDR:RECDRDONLYlNCOMlNGCOCALLS(CCSA&NONDlALTIETRUNKS)226t
jMDR: DROPCALLS OF LESS THAN 8 DIGITS

2277

XCRIMINATING

22at

DIAL TONE

SPECIAL ANI FEATURE

229t

XCOIJNT

CODEENABLE

230t

\CCOUNT CODE LENGTH:4 DIGITS

231t

\CCOUNT CODE LENGTH: 8 DIGITS

232t

\CCOUNTCODE
IARIABLE

AFTER ALL REQUIREDOPTIONS HAVE BEEN REMOVED
ENTER
c

TO REVIEW SYSTEM OPTIONS

LENGTH: 12 DIGITS

LENGTH

234t

ACCOUNTCODES
I

1
I

AFTER ALL OPTIONS ARE ADDED

I
I

'GENERIC 203/UP
**GENERIC 204 BUTNOT
t' GENERIC 204AND 205
t GENERIC 205 BUTNOT

FEATURES

H y;; lqAs;!gJD m
DESCRIPTION
ATTENDANT

FEATURE
ACCESS

CALLBACK-DON'T

NUMBER
:'

1
ANSWER

CALL FORWARD-BUSY
CALL

FORWARD

DON'T

CALL

FORWARD

ANSWER
ME

CALL RETRIEVE (REMOTE1

ROOM STATUS UPDATE(MAID

PROGRAMMING

ALARM
!: ')
..'

SECURITY

I
77’
_.

IN ROOM)

28'

CODE

ACCOUNTCODE

31tt

SPEED CALL

32tt

DIAL CALL PICKUP

DIRECTED CALL PICKUP

ASSIGN ACCESS CODES 33.42TOTRUNK
TRUNK GROUP 1lFNECESSARY

MEET-ME

TRUNKGROUP ACCESS CODE33

ACCESS

CODE

ACCESS

CODE

35*t

TRUNKGROUP

ACCESS

CODE

36.T

TRUNKGROUP

ACCESS

CODE

37*t

CODE

38't

HOLDPICKUPACCESS
PAGER 1 AND 2
pJ!(

TAFAS 1

!~,','

,s;,,

\'t;

TAFAS 3

I
I

TAFAS 2

TRUNK

TRUNKGROUP

ifi

TRUNK

I
I

ATTENDANT

FUNCTION

MAINTENANCE

FUNCTION

GROUP

DID ATTENDANT ACCESS CODE

DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS

EXECUTIVE BUSY OVERRIDE (SINGLE DIGIT)".

CAL LBACK BUSY (SINGLE DIGIT)***

,p.
.f.
4‘< :.

,.$A
'.

GROUP

ACCESS

CODE

41.t
42*t

ACCESS

CODE42

204/UP

i'
--.
I

GENERICS 204AND 205

t GENERlC204ONLY
**GENERIC

40*t

TRUNK

203/UP

34*t

TRUNKGROUP ACCESS CODE41
GROUP

39.t

'GENERIC

ACCESSCOOE39
ACCESS

I
33-t

TRUNKGROUP

TAFAS ALL

TRUNKGROUP

PAGER 2

; .,

xl*'
--

PAGER 1

.'i

29"

CALL

CALL PARK

CONFERENCE

I
I ‘2
I
7

**' FIRST DIGIT CONFLICTALLOWEDWITH

OTHER ACCESS CODES

GENERIC205

,
.

CLASS OFSERVICEOPTIONS

TO CHANGE
ANYOPTION FOR ACOS

r __--_--___-____-___________________
I
DlALOPTlONNUMBER33-94PRESS
L---------

._______

* ____________-_______________________

----- ----- -___--__---_-_--

TO REVIEW THE OPTIONS WITHIN A COS

NOTE:

AN EXTENSION OR TRUNKCAN NOT CHANGE ITS COSIFTHE EXTENSION OR
TRUNKISBUSY,HASMESSAGEWAlTlNGORDONOTDlSTURBSET.ITALSOCAN
NOT BECHANGED UNLESSTHE MESSAGE REGISTER IS CLEARED.

* GENERIC 203/UP
* GENERIC 204
t GENERIC 205

I
TOENABLE

---_ -__---__---_-___--_-___________________
REPEATFOREACHOPTIONINTHECOS

- ________________________ -

---- - -----,

---- - ---- -----_~

IN THAT COS HAVE BEEN DEFINED
- _----- - _____________--__

EXTENSIONS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AN0 ABOVE
IF TENANT SERVICE IS IN USE
ALL ENTRIES MADE ARE ASSIGNED TO THE TENANT NUMBER DIALED

c
NAME

TENANT
NUMBER
EQPT
NUMBER

DIAL
l-112
OR
161-256
(SEE NOTE 1)

TD ENTER EXTENSION PROGRAMMING PRESS
L

DIAL
CODE
c

SEEONROTES
2, 3, OR 4

cos
NUMBER

DIAL
l-16

EXTN
-

1
l

DIAL
l-150
OR

q
BUSY
LAMP
NUMBER

c
DELETE
c

NOTES’
1 . EQUIPMENT NUMBERS 161-256 APPLIES TO SX-200 ONLY

4. TO SEE THE NEXT EQPT NUMBER ASSIGNED AS AN EXTENSION:

2. TO ASSIGN NON CONFLICTING SINGLE DIGIT DIRECTORY NUMBER ENTER N#.
WHEN N IS THE SINGLE DIGIT.

5 COR 1-3 APPLIES ONLY, IF TOLL CONTROL (GENERIC 204/UP) IS USED

3. TO REMOVE EXTENSION PROGRAMMING
/

PICKUP
GROUP

DIAL
l-50
OR
l

q
DELETE

’ HUNT GROUPS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AND ABOVE
IF TENANT SERVICE IS IN USE
ALL ENTRIES MADE ARE ASSIGNED TO THE TENANT NUMBER DIALED

4'f4'

r;;;;"]

I
(EXTENSION INFORMATION MUST BE ENTERED BEFORE HUNT GROUP DATA)

TENANT
NUMBER

DIAL
CODE
OR

cl
HUNT
GROUP

DIAL
1-12

PRESS N,$f-ER BEFORE DIALING EACH
c

DELETE
l-l

TO SEETHEEOUIPMENTNUMBERS ClJARENTLYINAHUNTGROLlP

N$ER

ERUIPMENT

NUMBER ENTRY

AFTER LAST ENTRY IN EACH GROUP PRESS

q
ENTER

TO MAKEACHANGETOAHUNTGROLlP,THE LISTOF MEMBERS MUST BE RE-ENTEREDJN.
DIVIDUAL M E M B E R S C A N N O T B E DELETEDOR GHANGED.THE
EXISTING GROUP LIST IS
A U T O M A T I C A L L Y D E L E T E D W H E N Y O U S T A R T T D E N T E R A NEWONE
E

FORCIRCULAR

H U N T G R O U P S FIRSTAND

LASTNUMBERS MUST BE IDENTICAL.

I
T O S E 6 A L L H U N T GRDUPS

NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AND ABOVE
ALL ENTRIES

IFTENANT SERVICE IS IN USE
MADEAREASSIGNEDTO THETENANT NUMBER DIALED
TO

ENTERTRUNK

PROGRAMMING

PRESS

III
TRUNK

SEE NOTE 3

DIAL
Z-112
OR
162-256

LDN
NUMBER

TYPE
c

(SEENOTE4)
DIAL
1, 5, 11.
51
OR

l
DELETE
c

q
LDN
NUMBER

DIAL
1-4

(SEENDTE4)
DIAL
#O-x3
OR
x1-*12
OR
I-112
OR
161-256

El
NIGHT
1

[SEENOTE4)
DIAL
#O-#3
OR
*i-*12
OR
l-112
OR
161 256

#O-#3
OR
*i-*12
OR
l-112
16pp256

cl
BUSY
LAMP
NUMBER

NOTES:
1 EOUIPMENT
2

N U M B E R S 162.256APPLYTOSX-ZOOONLY

ONLY EVEN EOUIPMENT
TO TRUNKS

NUMBERS MAY BE ASSIGNED

3 TYPE 1 = STANDARDEOTHWAY COTRUNKVNL
TYPE 5 = NON DIAL IN TIETRUNK
(NON CO)VNL
TYPE 11 = STANDARD BOTHWAY CO TRUNK NON VNL
‘) TYPE 51 = NON DIAL IN TIETRUNK (NON CO)NON VN,

G E N E R I C 202TYPE

4 #II CONSOLEONLY
#i -CONSOLE AND NIGHT BELL 1

#2 CONSOLEANDNIGHT
BELL 2
!43 CONSOLE AND NIGHT BELL 3

5 T O REMOVEATRUNKASSIGNMENT
(NOTE. TRUNK MUST FIRST BE REMOVEDFROM TRUNK GROUP]

C O D E D I S P L A Y D E F A U L T S T O 1W H E N T R U N K I S D E L E T E D

Xl-Xl2ASSlGNSTHETRUNKTOTHE
HUNTGROUPSELECTED
1-112, 161-256 ASSIGNS THE TRUNK TO THE SPECIFIED EXTENSION
6.

TO SEETHE
AS ATRUNK:

EDUIPMENT

NUMBER

PROGRAMMED

l-15a
OR

q
ENTER

4 DIAL-IN TRUNKS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AN0 ABOVE
IFTENANTSERVICEIS
IN USE
ALL ENTRIES MADEAREASSIGNEOTDTHETENANT

NUMBER DIALED

TENANT
NUMBER

PROGRAMMING

PRESS

TRUNK
L

SEENOTE

DIAL
Z-112
OR
162-256

LDN
NUMBER

ENTERTRUNK

1
l

BUSqY

I
DIAL
2, 4, 21,
OR 41
OR
DELETE
c

cos
NUMBER
cl

DIAL
l-16

i-150
OR

r-l

LAMP
NUMBER

ENTER

NOTES:
1. EOUIPMENT

NUMBERS 162-256 APPLIES TO SX-200 ONLY

2 . E V E N EOUIPMENT

NUMBERS ONLY MAY GE ASSIGNED TO TRUNKS

TYPE 2 = DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS VNL
TYPE 4 = DIAL IN TIE TRUNK (NON CO) VNL
TYPE 21 = DIRECT INWARO SYSTEM ACCESS NON VNL
TYPE 41 = DIAL IN TIE TRUNK (NON CO) NON VNL

4 TO REMOVE A TRUNK ASSIGNMENT:
NOTE TRUNK MUST FIRST GE REMOVE0 FROM TRUNK GROUP

cl
EQPT
NUMBER

E;dk&;T

[=I

G E N E R I C 202-02 T Y P E C O D E D I S P L A Y D E F A U L T S
T O 1W H E N T R U N K I S D E L E T E D .

5. TO SEE THE NEXT EOPT NUMBER ASSIGNED AS A TRUNK

6. COR l-3 APPLIES ONLY, IF TOLL CONTROL
(GENERIC 204/UP) IS USED

..;
APPLIESTO

GENERIC

ALL ENTRIES

DIDICCSA TRUNKS

203ANDABOVE
IFTENANTSERVICE
IS IN USE
MADEAREASSIGNEDTOTHETENANT

(GENERIC 203/UP)
NUMBER DIALED
TOENTERTRUNKPROGRAMMINGPRESS
I

TENANT
NUMBER
SEE

NOTE3

DIAL

DIAL
Z-110
OR
162-254

LDN
NUMBER

TRUNK

17
I/C

3136i?61

(SEE NOTES 1
AND 2)

DELETE

DIAL
l-150
OR

DIAL
NMX CODE
(NOTE 4)

DELETE

5. TO REMOVE A TRUNK ASSIGNMENT. ( T R U N K M U S T F I R S T B E R E M O V E D F R O M T R U N K G R O U P )
1.

EOUIPMENT

NUMBERS 162-254 APPLY TO SX-200 ONLY

2. ALTERNATE EVEN NUMBERS ONLY MAY BE ASSIGNED TO OlDlCCSA TRUNKS
3.

TYPE 3 = DID VNL
TYPE 31 = DID NON VNL
TYPE 6 = CCSA VNL
‘JYPE 61 = CCSA NON VNL

N = NUMBER OF DIGITS TO BE RECEIVED AFTER TRUNK IS SEIZED (l-9)
M = NUMBER OF DIGITS TO BE ABSORBED AFTER TRUNK IS SEIZED (O-B)
X = LEADING DIGIT TO BE INSERTED, IF REWIRED.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS IS 4 (3 IF TENANT SERVICE) AFiR ABSORPTION (M)
AND ADDING A DIGIT (X).

q
EQPT
NUMBER

6. TO

.‘,‘.
5;

‘-,

SEE

ElU$k;T

m
m

THE NEXT EOPT NUMBER ASSIGNED AS A TRUNK

MITEL

TRUNK GROUPS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203ANOABOVE
IFTENANT SERVICEISIN USE
ALL ENTRIES MADEAREASSIGNEOTOTHETENANT

NUMBER DIALED
TO ENTERTRUNKGROUP PROGRAMMING PRESS
.

TENANT
NUMBER

cl
TRUNK
GROUP

BEFOREDlALlNGEACHEOUlPMENTNUMBERENTRY

DIAL
l-12

3TES
TO SEETHE TRUNKS IN

ATRUNK GROUP: ~INER[~

6. TRUNK GROUPTYPEIS
4 DIGITS
1st DIGIT
l-NO SUPERVISION
Z-ANSWER SUPERVISION
3-TOLL REVERSAL
4-OUTGOING AUDIO INHIBITED UNTIL ANSWER SUPERVISION
TIMEOUT OR # DIALLED (GENERIC203/UP)

nnn
TO

SEEALLTRUNKGROUPS

'G",","u;

I
TO

nlAI

NExTJ

4th DIGIT
I-CENTRAL OFFICE
2-NON-CO
3-IDENTIFIED
TRUNK GROUP (NON-CO)

7. IFGENERIC 2030R HIGHER IS USED.THETRUNKSWlTHlNATRUNKGROUP MAY
BE PROGRAMMED FOR EITHERTERMINALOR
CIRCULAR HUNTING, IFTERMINAL
HUNTING IS REQUIRED,ENTERTRUNK
EQUIPMENT NUMBERSIN REQUIREDSEOIIFNCF
IF CIRCULAR HUNTING IS REQUIRED MAKELASTTRUNK EQUIPMENT NUMBER
THESAMEASTHE
FIRSTTRUNK
EQUIPMENT
NUMBER.

DELETETRUNKGROUP:

TO MAKEACHANGETOATRUNKGROUP,THE
LISTOF MEMBERS MUST BE
RE-ENTEREDJNDIVIDUAL
MEMBERS CANNOT BE DELETED OR CHANGED.THE
EXCTC" I",ur~I
ISTINGTRUNKGROUP
LISTISAUTOMATICALL, \I nca
YLLLILV
VV~CIY wn,,
IUV CT&"7
.,,nno Tn
IV
ENTER A NEWONE

_____

8. DOES NOT APPLY IF TOLL CONTROL(GENERIC
204/UP)IS USED
SEE SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-212 OR TOLL CONTROL FORMSTHIS SECTION.

ORIGINALANDOVERFLOWTRUNKGROUPS MUST BETHE
SAMETYPEAND HAVE
THE SAMETOLL RESTRICTION CHARACTERISTICS.
IF GENERIC 202 IS USEDTHETRUNKSWITHIN AGROUP MAYONLY BE PROGRAMMEDFORCIRCULAR HUNTING.

;.i ::;i

3rd DIGIT
I-ROTARY DIAL OFFICE, NO WAIT FOR DIAL TONE
2-ROTARY DIAL OFFICE, WAIT FOR DIAL TONE
3-TOUCH-TONE
NO WAIT
, T",,,.II
--..- DIAL
^,., OFFICE,
AvrlAr ,.,",1
7""FOR
nl",DIAL
Tr%.lrTONE

2nd DIGIT
I-NO MESSAGE REGISTER
Z-MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 203/UP)
3-SMDRWITH
MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 205)
4-SMDR WITHOUT MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 205)

MlTEb

- - - . ,

MULTI DIGIT TOLL CONTROL FORMS
GENERICS 2041205

_’

TOLL CONTROL- CONTROL PLAN DEFINITION

TC-2

ENTER A FOR BASIC ALLOWAL AND D FOR BASIC DENIAL IN COLUMNS 2.4. 5. 7 AND 8.
ENTER A CONSECUTIVE NUMBER FOR EACH SET OF EXCEPTIONS IN COLUMNS 3.0 AND 9 IF APPLICABLE.

TOLL CONTROL - EXCEPTION LIST STRUCTURE
1. WRITE ALL NUMBERSOFTHE EXCEPTION LIST IN COLUMN 1.
2. WRITE ALL NUMBERS IN NUMERICAL ORDER OF THE FIRST THREE DIGITS (I.E. 613, 614, 615)IN

COLUMN 2.

WRITE ALL NUMBERS IN NUMERICAL ORDER OFTHE SECONDTHREE DIGITS (I.E. 592. 593, 594)IN COLUMN 3.

WRITE ALL NUMBERS IN NUMERICAL ORDER OFTHE NEXT FOUR DIGITS (I.E. 4000, 4001, 4002)IN

1 EXCEPTION LIST

CONTROLPLAN

COLUMN 4

BASIC CONDITION

SHEET
COLUMN4

TOLL CONTROL -TABLE ALLOCATION

TC-4

COMPLETE ALL REQUlREDTC3
OFTABLE3AND
4 REPRESENT

FORMS. ALL NUMBER GROUPS OF COLUMN 2 REPRESENT ONETABLE. ALL NUMBER GROUPS
ONETABLE(IFTHEY HAVE THE SAME PREVIOUS NUMBER GROUP IN COLUMN 2).

IDENTIFY NUMBER GROUPS WITH

MORETHAN

IDENTIFYREMAINING NUMBER GROUPS WHICH HAVE A FIRST DIGIT
OORl.
DIGITS DOES NOT EXCEED 4 OTHERWISEALLOCATEA 20 RANGE TABLE.

ASSIGN ALL NUMBERS WHICH REQUIRE BOO ENTRYTABLES. ENSURETHAT ALL THE LOWERTABLES (4 ENTRY, 20 RANGE)
HAVE BEEN FILLED.

3 DIGITSANDASSIGN

A4-ENTRY TABLE FOR EACH SUCH GROUP.
ALLOCATEA4-ENTRYTABLEIFTHE

NUMBER OF

TABLE ASSIGNMENTS
TOLL

CONTROL

THIS FORM IS INTENDEDTO PROVIDE AN OVERVIEWOF

THETABLE

BOOENTRY

#
I

CP
I

ZORANGE

Ll
I

STRUCTURE USED FOR A PARTICULAR SYSTEM INSTALLATION.

L2
I

L3
I

L4
I

#
I

Basic

Standard

Extended

CP....TO ENTER NIJMBEROF

CONTROL PLAN THETABLE

CP
I

LX....X

TC-5

4ENTRY

Ll
I

L2
I

L3
I

L4
I

IS USED IN

IS NUMBERDF LEVELOF EXCEPTION TABLE; ENTER TABLE NUMBERS OF
PREVIOUS EXCEPTION TABLES AND MARK AN 'X'WHEREVER THE PARTICULAR
TABLE IS USED.

I.E.

TABLE 5 IS USED IN CONTROL PLAN 5 AS AN EXCEPTION TO TABLE 22. WHICH IS AN
EXCEPTION TO TABLE 1.

73
,lSlD

coiko~ ABSORB PLAN

ABSORB
DIAL
PLAN
1 OR 2
c
l

ABSORB
REPEAT
c
l

DIAL
REPEAT
DIGITS
‘M;; 4)

DIAL
UNLOCK
DIGITS
‘M;; 4)

ABSORB PLAN NUMBER 1
ABSORB PLAN NUMBER 2

TO WE’,,

GENERIC 205/lJP

THE ABSORB PLANS’

PLAN NUMBER 1

OISPLAYEO

PLAN NUMBER 2

DISPLAYED

MITEL

CLASS OF RESTRICTION
(TRUNKGROUP)

TRUNK
GROUP
c

DIAL
1-12
l

DIAL
1-2
OR

DIAL
1-3

COR

DIAL
1-15
OR
DELETE
c

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3

q
ENTER

I\ CONTROL PLAN
ICONTROL]

q
ADD

ADD

DIAL
l-15

BASIC
COND

TABLE

DIALl-5

(NOTEZ)

DIAL
1-9 (800 ENTRY)
21-33 (20 RANGE)
51-73 (4 ENTRY)
OR

(NOTEl)

1 (0)
2 (I-XNX)
3(1-X0/1X)
4(XNX)
5(X0/1X)
l(O)
2(1-XNX)
3(1-X0/1 X)
4(XNX)
5(X 0/1X)
l(O)
Z(l-XNX)
3(1-X0/1X)

4(XNX)

ENTER

5(X O/l X)
OTE 1

q
ADD

q
DELETE

-ALLOW

ALL

COOES

OENYALLCODES

EXCEPTTHOSE

LISTED

THETABLE

THE

TABLE

SPECIFIED

REVIEW

CONTROL

PLAN

ASSIGNMENTS

SPECIFIED

BASIC

'OT;'2

N IS ANY NUMBER 2-9
XIS ANY NUMBER O-9

;,:i:..

DISPLAY
CONDlTlON

DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1 BASIC CONDITION 2 BASIC CONDITION 3

‘_
a.

‘...
/

4 ENTRY EXCEPTION TABLE
FROM BASIC CONDITION-

CONTROL PLAN __

DRTABLENUMBER-

THlSTABtELlSTS

ALLTHECODES THATAREALLOWED

THISTABLE

ALLTHE CODESTHAT ARE

LISTS

DENlED

IF AN EXCEPTION TABLE IS TO BE APPLIEDTO THIS ENTRY

TO SEARCH FOR

ASPECIFIC

H
A R E
S H OE;;;y
W N

Im
N
T H E

DISPLAYTHE NEXT ENTRY IN

AFTER

ENTRY

HAS

BEEN

TO DELETETHE ENTRY BEING

OKSPLAYED

NOTE: ANY OPERATION MAY BE PERFORMED IN ANY ORDER.

IFTHEENTRY DOES NOT EXIST DASHES
E N T R Y
D I S P L A Y

THETABLE

SELECTED

TO DELETE ALL ENTRIES

FROM

ATABLE

20 RANGE EXCEPTION TABLE
FROM

BASIC

CONDITION-

THIS TABLE LISTS ALL THE CODES THAT ARE ALLOWED

CONTROL PLAN -

OR TABLE NUMBER-

THIS TABLE LISTS ALL THE CODES THAT ARE DENIED 0

IF AN EXCEPTION TABLE IS TO BE APPLIED TO THIS ENTRY

q
ENTER

TO SEARCH FOR A SPECIFIC ENTRY

H
A
R E
S H OE;;;y
W N

I [q
N
T H E

T O &SPLAY T H E N E X T E N T R Y IN T H E T A B L E
AFTER AN ENTRY HAS BEEN SELECTED

NEXT
c

TO DELETE THE ENTRY BEING DISPLAYED
IF THE ENTRY DOES NOT EXIST DASHES
E N T R Y
D I S P L A Y .

NOTE: ANYOPERATION MAY BE PERFORMED IN ANYOROER.

TO DELETE ALL ENTRIES FROM A TABLE

800 ENTRY EXCEPTION TABLE
FROM

BASIC

CONDITION-

OR TABLE NUMBER-

THIS TABLE LISTS ALL THE CODES THAT ARE ALLOWED 0

CONTROL PLAN -

THIS TABLE LISTS ALL THE CODES THAT ARE DENIED

IFAN EXCEPTION TABLE IS TO BEAPPLIEDTO

TO SEARCH FOR A SPECIFIC ENTRY

TO DELETE THE ENTRY BEING DISPLAYED
IF THE ENTRY DOES NOT EXIST DASHES
ARE SHOWN IN THE ENTRY DISPLAY.

TO DISPLAY THE NEXT ENTRY IN THE TABLE
AFTER AN INTRY HAS BEEN SEL EC TED

THIS ENTRY

NOTE: ANYOPERATION MAY BE PERFORMED IN ANYORDER.

TO DELETE ALL ENTRIES FROM A TABLE

SPEED CALL FORMS
GENERIC 205

I’

.:.

SPEED CALL TABLE ALLOCATIONS

MITEL

TABLE
NUMBER

ENTRY ACCESS 1
NUMBERS
_COMMON
-USE PERSONAL

85-89

90-94

95-99

NOTES:

EQPT
NUMBER

FORM SC-I
CLASSOFSERVICE

REDIAL
1

9 IO

I.STRIKETHROUGH NUMBERSIN COMMON-USECOLUMN,
IFTABLE ISTO BE A PERSONALTABLE;THEN ENTER
NEWENTRYACCESS NUMBERSIN PERSONALCOLUMN.
2. CHECK (r/)IN REMAINING COLUMNS AS REQUIREDIN
RESPECTTO EACH TABLE.

PERSONALTABLEPROGRAMMING
FORMSC-2
(SYSTEM MUST BE IN EXTENDED PROGRAMMING)

MITEL

DIAL TABLE NO.

DIAL Er IUIPMENT NO.
(l-11 2 ; 161.256).
FTF_
O F1 . nFI
I___.

OIAL ACCESS NO

1
7

3
4

3. The Saved Number Redial operation is initially omitted if not required. For subsequent programming see Notes 8 and 9.

4. Personal table data is programmed in Extended Programming Mode. See Section MITL9105/9110-98-210
Appendix 2 for full details.
7

5. The ENTER button may be pressed at any time to enter data, or pressed when
all data is entered.

6. Removing a Personal table removes all its contents, Access Numbers and Redial
value (if any).

7. To remove a Personal table;

8. To add a Redial attribute:

9. To remove a Redial attribute:

10. To change a Speed Call Access Number:

SPEED CALL NUMBER RECORDS FORM SC-3 (Sheet 1 of 4)
SPEED

CALL

FEATURE

CODE

SPEEDCALL NUMBER
SPECIALSEQUENCES CAN BE ENTEREOATANY POINT IN THETELEPHONE NUMBER LISTING:
* 1 OCCUPIES 1 DIGIT SPACE AND CAUSES A 5 SEC. PAUSE IN USE
* 2 OCCUPIES 1 DIGIT SPACE AND CAUSES WAIT FOR DlALTONE(SYSTEM OPTION
136APPLIES)
ABLES MANUALLY DIALED DIGITS TO BE ENTERED.

LISTING
1.

YOUR

NUMBERS

INSTRUCTIONS

TABLES AVAILABLE FOR USE ARE INDICATED ON THE FORM
BYTHE INSTALLER.YOUR
FEATURE ACCESS CODE AND CLASSES OF SERVICE HAVE BEEN ALSO ENTERED.

OPPOSITETHE FIRST AVAILABLE ENTRY ACCESS NUMBER, WRITE IN
YOUR FIRST
TELEPHONE NUMBER,lNCLUDlNGTHETRUNKGROUPACCESSCODE.YOU
CAN USE
SPECIAL SEQUENCES (SEE ABOVE).

WRITE IN THE NEXT ENTRY ACCESS NUMBER,
UNDERTHE FIRST ENTRY NUMBER, USING A FRESH LINE AND CONTINUING WITH THE NEXTTELEPHONE NUMBER OPPOSITE
THISSECOND ENTRY NUMBER.

4. COMPLETE YOUR LIST OF NUMBERS

FOLLOWINGTHEABOVE

PROCEDURE.

HOWTO

FOR

USER(ATTENDANT)

ENTER OR CHANGE A NUMBER

5. DIAL FEATURE ACCESS CODE.
6. DIAL 0.
7. DIAL ENTRY ACCESS NUMBER REQUIRED.
8.

DIALTELEPHONE

NUMBER

FORTHAT

ENTRY

NUMBER.

9. PRESSTHE RELEASE BUTTON.
IO. REPEATTHE ABOVE SEQUENCE FOR EACH

OFTHE REMAINING ENTRIES ON THE LIST.

HOWTD DELETE A NUMBER
,h

11. PERFORM STEPS 5 THROUGH 9 BUT OMIT STEP
HOWTO

DIAL A SPEED CALL NUMBER

12. DIAL FEATURE ACCESS CODE.
SEE

CONSOLEOPERATING

INSTRUCTIONS

FOR

OTHER

DETAILS

13 DIAL ENTRY ACCESS NUMBER.
14. CALL PROCEEDSIN USUAL MANNER

MITEL

SPEED CALL NUMBER RECORDS FORM SC-3(SHEET 2 OF 4)
SPEED
SPEED

CALL

NUMBER

SPECIAL SEQUENCES CAN BE ENTEREDATANY POINT IN THE TELEPHONE NUMBER LISTING:
* 1 OCCUPIES 1 DIGIT SPACE AND CAUSES A 5 SEC. PAUSE IN USE

a
h

CALL

FEATURE

CODE

SPEED CALL NUMBER RECORDS FORM SC-3 (SHEET 3 OF 4)

MITEL

SPEED

CALL

SPEED CALL NUMBER
SPECIAL SEQUENCES CAN BE ENTEREDATANY POINT IN THETELEPHONE NUMBER LISTING.

2
2

1
50

13
,/

CODE

DIGITS

*lOCCUPlESl
DlGlTSPACEANDCAUSESA5 SEC. PAUSE IN USE
+ 2 occupies I DIGIT SPACE AND CAUSES WAIT FOR DIALTONE (SYSTEM OPTION 136 APPLIES)
*3QQ OCCUPIES 2 DIGIT SPACE AND ENABLES MANUALLY DIALED DIGITS TO BE ENTERED.
QQ REPRESENTSTHE NUMBER OF DIGITSTO BE DIALED IN RANGE OiTO16.

ENTRY
ACCESS
NUMBER

FEATURE

B
m
z
3
56

CALLED
PARTY

TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS - CD TRUNK CARDS

CARD
SLOT
NO:

,299 -*

NOTES
1.

EARLIER

IRUNK

CARDVERSIONS 00 NOT HAVE ALL SWITCHES LISTED ABOVE

CHECK APPROPRIATE COLUMN E.G. "BUSY" OR "IDLE" FOR DESIRED SETTING

3. SEE SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-ZOO APPENDIX
SETTING TRUNK CARD SWITCHES.

5 FOR PROCEDURES USED IN

TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS - DID/TIE TRUNK CARD
CIRCUIT REFERENCE NUMBERS

CIRCUIT REFERENCE NUMBERS

TRUNK 1 -___---_----- ____--_
TRUNK 2 ___---_--- ____----

TRUNK 1 _---_--__---_----_

SHELFNUMBER -------__-- -___

SHELFNUMBER

CARD SLOT NUMBER __---- ---_---.

CARDSLOT NUMBER --___--_----_

T R U N K 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ --__--__

TRUNKCARD - --__ ----__- ____
1

SWITCH SETTINGS

__-___--__---__

TRUNKCARD --__-___---_---_
I

TRUNK 1

TRUNK 2

SWITCH SETTINGS

ECIPT NUMBER

EQPT NUMBER

INCOMING CONDITIONS

BUSY

OUTGOING

TRUNK 1

SWITCH “B” SETTING
L

INCOMING WINK

INCOMING WINK
NO:;;::

‘“‘““;“*’

OUTGOING WINK

_ _____

PULSING CONDITION

STOP DIAL
NOT STOP DIAL

CLOSED
OPEN

WINK
NO WINK

WINK
NO WINK
I

DIALING CI-INI-IITI~NS

CLOSED
OPEN

TRUNK IMPEDANCE SWITCHES (3)

BATTERY/GROUND
LOOP

BUSY
IDLE

900 R
600 R

PULSING CONDITION

TRUNK 2

CONDITIONS

SWITCH “A” SETTING

“‘,“E

“,“,s: k

SWITCH “6” SETTING

BATTERY/GROU;;

I
1-1

DIALING CONDITIONS
I
t--

I
N O T % %

&j-----1

NOTES: i.TRlJNK CARD SWITCHES MUST BE SETTO ONt OFTHETWO POSSIBLE SETTINGS FOR EACHSWITCH AS DETAILED IN SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.ZOO APPENDIX

5 MAPZOO-503.

"""

TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS - E AND M/TIE TRUNK CARD
CIRCUIT
TRUNK1

REFERENCE

CIRCUIT REFERENCE
TRUNK1

TRUNK2

CARDSLOT NUMBER

CARD SLOT NUMBER

SHELFNUMBER

SHELF

EPPTNUMBER

EQPTNUMBER

OUTGOING

CONDITIONS

OUTGOING

WINK

DIALING CONDITION

M-LEAD

NUMBERS

NUMBER

CONDITIONS

DIALING CONDITION

CONDITION

NOTES:,.TRUNKCARD

SWITCHES MUST BE SETTO ONE OFTHETWO POSSIBLE SETTINGS FOR EACHSWITCH AS DETAILED IN SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-200

APPENDIX 5 MAP200-502

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
Issue 3, July 1980

MITEL STANDARD PRACTICE

SX-100” AND SX-200*
SUPERSWITCH*
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
CONTENTS

PAGE

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reason for Reissue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
2
2

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TenantMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class-Of-Setvice Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Access Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hunt Groups
..................
Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2
3
7
8
9
12
12
14

PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error/Confirm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Function Access Codes . . . . .
Maintenance Function Access Codes . . .
Timeout Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
15
15
15
15
15

EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTENTS
Program Extension Hunt Groups
(MAPSlO-207). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Non Dial-In Trunks
(MAPSlO-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Dial-In Tie Trunks
(MAPPIO-209). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program DID Trunks
(MAP21 O-21 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Trunk Groups
(MAPSlO-211). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating Programming Mode
(MAPSIO-212). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PAGE
:..
.”

A2.31
A2-37
A2-47
A2-55
A2-61
A2-69

1. GENERAL
Introduction

APPENDIX 1 - MITEL ACTION
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Al.1

APPENDIX 2 - SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
MAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2.112
System Programming
A2.3
(MAP21 O-201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Programming Mode
A2.5
(MAP21 O-202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program System Options
A2.9
(MAP21 O-203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program COS Options
A2.13
(MAP210.204) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Feature Access Codes
82.19
(MAPSIO-205). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Extensions
A2.23
(MAP210=206). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.01 The SX-100 and SX-200 PABX’s are
processor-controlled switching systems. In
order to process calls the central processor needs
to know certain information about the calling and
called equipment. This information is described
by blocks of data held in the system memories. A
number of service change programs are provided
to allow additions, deletions and changes to be
I
made to the blocks of data to reflect changes
made to the equipment configuration. The eight
service change programs provided are:
l

Tenant Mode-Defines whether the system
is to be used by single or multi tenants.
System Options- D e s c r i b e s t h e o p t i o n s -1
which may be enabled on a system basis.
::
Class Of Service Options-Each class of
service specifies the features which may be
used by stations assigned that Class Of
Service (COS). A maximum of sixteen different classes of service may be specified
for each system.
F e a t u r e A c c e s s Codes-A number of
features within the system are accessed by

0 MITEL Corporation 1979
* Trademark of MITEL Corporation

Page

;

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

dialing a special access code. This program
allows the access codes for the features to
be defined.

Part 1

Extensions-This program allows the
equipment number, extension number,
Class Of Service (features allowed), toll access, busy lamp field assignment and pickup group assignment for each extension to
be made.

Part 2 Program Description-a description of
each program and definition of each entry and possible response.
Part

Hunt Groups-This program allows the extensions within each hunt group to be
specified, together with the hunt group
master number (access code).
Trunks-This program allows each trunk to
be described in terms of the equipment
number, trunk type, listed directory number,
day and night numbers, busy lamp number,
COS and toll access.
Trunk Group-This program allows the
trunks within each group to be specified,
together with trunk group type, access code
and overflow group.

General-general description of system
programming contents and purpose of
the programming manual.

3 Programming-this part contains a
general introduction to the system programming and MITEL Action Procedures (MAP’s) which detail how to
use each program. When entering data,
the system checks each entry to ensure
that the codes entered are correct and if
an error is detected it sounds the console ringer and displays the required error code. These codes and their meaning are defined in this part.

Part 4 Examples-The examples in this part
show how the programs are used to
define a typical system.
2. PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
General

Other additional service programs, dependant upon the type of software Generic installed in the PABX, may be implemented. These
are listed below and include relevant MITEL Practice references, which should be consulted for
descriptions and programming requirements.
a) Traffic Measurement (Generic 204 only).
See Section MITL9105/9110-98-450
b)

Multi Digit Toll Control (Generic 204 or 205
only). See Section MITL9105/9110-98-212

c) Station Message Detail Recording (Generic
2050nly).
See Section MITL9105/9110-98-451
d)

Speed Call (Generic 205 only). See Section
M ITL9105/911 O-98-220

Reason For Reissue
1.03 This Section is reissued to incorporate
Generic 205 information for the SX-100 and
SX-200 PABX’s.
Purpose
1.04 This Section consists of four parts, each
part explaining a different facet of the
system programming.
Page 2

2.01

Because the PABX is controlled by a processor, data describing each extension,
trunk, feature etc. must be entered into the
system. This is done by pressing keys and dialing
codes. The codes dialed are held in the system
memories and used by the system during call processing. Eight basic programs are provided which
allow data to be entered into the system as equipment is added, or existing data to be changed or
removed as the system configuration changes.
The following paragraphs describe the eight programs (see 1.01). These programs specify the keys
to be pressed and explain the entries that may be
made. The Appendices to this section contain an
introduction to MITEL Action Procedures (MAP’s)
and the actual MAP’s which detail each step in
system programming. A complete description of
each feature and option is given in Section
MITL9105/9110-98-105
Features and Services
Description. Other types of programs are
referenced in 1.02.
Tenant Mode
2.02 The tenant program allows a user to specify
the number of the tenant for which entries
are to be made. If multi-tenant service is to be
selected the system must be placed in the pro-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
gramming mode then the TENANT key pressed
and the tenant number entered. If single tenant
service is required TENANT mode should not be
selected.

making the option available for use by the
system.
.

DELETE Pressing the DELETE key after
dialing an option code removes the code
from the active option list inhibiting further
use of that option.

CANCEL As entries are made during the
option program they are stored in a temporary memory. If after making a number of
entries an error is discovered, all new entries may be removed by pressing the
CANCEL key.

ENTER After all entries have been made
to the system option, they may be moved
from the temporary storage to permanent
storage by pressing the ENTER key. Additional changes may be made by reentering
the option program.

System Options
2.03

The system options are selected by the console keys as described below:
OPTION This key selects the option program which allows the system to set-up or
change the active option list. The code
entered (Table 2-l) after selecting the option program defines the option to be added
or removed from the active option list, but
see Table 2-2 for possible option conflicts.
ADD When pressed, this key adds the option code to the active system option list,

TABLE 2-l
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option
Number
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113*
114
114*
115
116
117
118
119*
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

Option Name
Discriminating
Ringing
Transfer Dial Tone
Flexible Night Service
Night Service Automatic Switching
TAFAS Available During Day
Outgoing Trunk Camp-on
Outgoing Trunk Ca!lback
Can Flash if on an Incoming Trunk
Can Flash if on an Outgoing Trunk
Can Flash if Talking to Station
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing
Cannot dial a Trunk After Flashing if Holding or in Conference with a Trunk
Lockout Alarm Enable
Tenant Service (set automatically when tenant service is selected when programming)
Flash Timer 0.7 seconds (Generic 202 only and REV 5 up) (See also 180-182 for Generic
20311~~)
Tenant Service - Separate Consoles
Vacant Number Intercept to Attendant
Illegal Access Intercept to Attendant
DID/Dial-InlCCSA Vacant/Illegal Access Intercept to Attendant
Attendant Camp-On
Attendant
Conference
Attendant Busy Over-ride
Attendant Serial Call
Bell Off Enable
Page Button Enable
New Call Tone Enable
Both Mode Standard
,Callback Button Enable

Page

SECTION M ITL91051911 O-9821 0
TABLE 2-1 (Cont’d)
SYSTEM OPTIONS
3ption
lumber
127
128
129
130
131
132*
133*
134*
135
136
137*
138*
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156*
157*
l58*
159*
160*
161*
162*
163*
164’
165*
166*
167*
168*
169*
170*
171*
172*
173*
174*
175*

Page 4

Option Name
Trunk Busy-Out Enable
Both Button Enable
Attendant CO Trunk-CO Trunk Connect Enable
Attendant CO Trunk-Non CO Trunk Connect Enable
Attendant Non CO Trunk-Non CO Trunk Connect Enable
Controlled Outgoing Restriction Set-Up (Room Restriction)
Controlled Station Restriction Set-Up (Do Not Disturb)
Controlled Station to Station Restriction Set-Up (Call Blocking)
Attendant DISA Code Set-Up Enable
Limited Wait For Dial Tone
Message Waiting Set-Up (lamp)
Message Waiting Set-Up (bell)
Attendant Timed Recall - Camp-On - 20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Camp-On - 40s
Attendant Timed Recall - Don’t Answer - 20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Don’t Answer - 40s
Attendant Timed Recall - Hold - 20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Hold - 40s
Night Service Timeout - 20s
Night Service Timeout - 40s
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Timeout - 20s
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Timeout - 40s
Call Forwarding - Busy (System, DID Dial-In Tie Trunk, CCSA)
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer (System, DID Dial-In Tie Trunk, CCSA)
Park and Call-Hold Recall - 2 minutes
Park and Call-Hold Recall - 4 minutes
End of Dial Signal for Outgoing Trunks (#)
24 Hour Clock
First Digit Toll Deny
Message Registration Enable
Message Registration: Count Additional Supervisions
Message Registration: Timer = 20 s
Message Registration: Timer = 40 s
Message Registration: Multiplier = 4 units
Message Registration: Multiplier = 3 units
Message Registration: Multiplier = 2 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 8 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 7 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 6 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 5 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 4 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 3 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 2 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 1 unit
DID to Non-CO Trunks via Attendant Inhibit
GUEST ROOM Button Enable
ROOM STATUS Button/Display/Change Enable
Do Not Disturb Intercept to Attendant
Do Not Disturb and Message Waiting Displays

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 2-l (Cont’d)
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option
Umber

Option Name

176*
177*
178*
179*
180*
181*
182*
183*
184
185
186
187
188
189
190**
191**
192* *
193**
194*
195**
196** *
197**
198*’ *
199** *
200**
201**
202**
203+*
204*
205**
206’
207*
208**
209**
210**
211**
212**
213**
214**
215
216t
217t
2187
219t
220t
221 t
222t
223t
224t
225t
l

l
l

Single Digit Dialing Enable
Single Digit Dialing Time-Out = 3 s
Single Digit Dialing Time-Out = 5 s
Attendant Station Busy-Out Enable
Flash Timing = 0.7 s
Flash Timing = 0.9 s
Flash Timing = 1.1 s
Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Automatic Wakeup Enable
Automatic Wakeup Print
Automatic Wakeup Music On Hold
Room Register Audit Enable
Message Register Print
Message Register & Message Waiting Change Print Enable
Ignore Print Enable
Remote System Reset - Protection Override
Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect by Extension
Toll Control Enable
Traffic Measurement Enable
Traffic Measurement Extreme Value Mode
Traffic Measurement Compact Report
Traffic Measurement Polling
Traffic Measurement Autoprint
Identified Trunk Group Enable
Inhibit Automatic Supervision
Printer Carriage Return Delay
Zero Message Register after Room Register Audit
Traffic Measurement - Console Enable
Attendant Printer Control Enable
System ID Enable
Night Bell 3 with Minor Alarm Enable
H/M Printouts: Extra Line Feeds
Automatic Wakeup Alarm
Reserved
Speed Call Enable
Speed Call Programming Enable
Speed Call: Confidential Number Display and Change Enable
Reserved
Station Message Detail Recording: Outgoing Calls
Station Message Detail Recording: Incoming Calls
SMDR: Extended Record
SMDR: Record Meter Pulses
SMDR: Indicate Long Calls
SMDR: Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls

. .:

,.,

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 2-l (CONT’D)
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option
Number

226-f
227t
228-t
229t
230t
231 t
232t
233t
234-t

Option Name
SMDR: Record Only Incoming calls (CCSA & Non-dial tie trunks)
SMDR: Drop Calls of Less Than 8 Digits
Discriminating Dial Tone
Special ANI Feature
Account Code Enable
Account Code Length, 4 Digits
Account Code Length, 8 Digits
Account Code Length, 12 Digits
Variable Length Account Codes

* Generic 203 and above
** Generic 204 only

** Generic 204 and 205
t Generic 205 only
TABLE 2-2
SYSTEM OPTION CONFLICTS

The following System Options are mutually exclusive, i.e. they cannot be simultaneously enabled on
the same PABX.
105 and
106 and
106 and
113 and
113 and
113 and
113 and
113 and
113 and
113 and
114 and
114 and

229
229
230
132
134
156
172
173
190
205
1 32
1 34

114 and 56
114 and 72
114 and 73
114and 190
114 and 205
121 and 172
121 and 173
137 and 138
191 and 203
193 and 203
194 and 203
195 and 203
203
205
207
220
221

and
and
and
and
and

Page 8

204
229
229
229
229

Outgoing Trunk Camp-On 8. Special ANI Feature
Outgoing Trunk Call Back & Special ANI Feature
Outgoing Trunk Call Back & Account Code Enable
Tenant Service & Controlled Outgoing Restriction Setup.
Tenant Service & Controlled Station to Station Restriction Setup.
Tenant Service & Message Registration Enable.
Tenant Service & GUEST ROOM Button.
Tenant Service & ROOM STATUS Enable.
Tenant Service & Automatic Wakeup Enable.
Tenant Service & Identified Trunk Group Enable.
Tenant Service-Separate Consoles & Controlled Outgoing Restriction Setup.
Tenant Service-Separate Consoles & Controlled Station to Station Restriction Setup.
Tenant Service-Separate Consoles & Message Registration Enable.
Tenant Service-Separate Consoles & GUEST ROOM Button Enable.
Tenant Service-Separate Consoles & Room Status Eanble.
Tenant Service - Separate Consoles & Automatic Wakeup Enable.
Tenant Service & Identified Trunk Group Enable.
Attendant Serial Call & GUEST ROOM Button Enable.
Room Status Enable & Attendant Serial Call.
Message Waiting Set-ups (lamp or bell)
Automatic Wakeup Print 8t Traffic Measurement Polling.
Room Audit Enable & Traffic Measurement Polling.
Message Register Print & Traffic Measurement Polling.
Message Register and Message Waiting Change Print Enable & Traffic
Measurement Polling.
Traffic Measurement Polling & Traffic Measurement Autoprint.
Identified Trunk Group Enable & Special ANI Feature
Printer Carriage Return Delay 8. Special ANI Feature
Station Message Detail Recording: Outgoing Calls & Special ANI Feature
Station Message Detail Recording: Incoming Calls & Special ANI Feature
/-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 2-2 (CONT’D)
SYSTEM OPTION CONFLICTS

In addition to the above system options, some console service features are mutually exclusive.
These features are listed below:
ROOM RESTRICT and NIGHT 2.
CALL BLOCK and HOLD 4.
ROOM STATUS and NIGHT 2.
SERIAL CALL and GUEST ROOM.
NOTE:

The Room Restriction and Room Status features utilize the same button, but are not mutually
exclusive, as the Room Status feature can be arranged to include the Room Restriction
function if System Option 132 is selected.
The entry made after selecting the program
identifies which COS is to be modified.

Class-Of-Service Options

2.04

Each system may contain up to 16 different
Classes Of Service (COS). The COS defines
which of the available options (Table 2-3) are active, and therefore available for use by any extensions assigned that COS.
2.05 The individual Classes of Service are
selected by the console keys as described
below:

OPTION

ADD Add the option to this COS.

DELETE Remove the option from the

cos.
l

The code entered (Table 2-3) after
pressing the OPTION key defines the extension option which is to be added or removed from the COS specified.

CANCEL If after entering a number of

COS DEFINE This key selects the Class

codes for a COS, an error is discovered, the
new entries may be removed from the
system by pressing the CANCEL key.

Of Service program which permits changes
to be made to any of the 16 individual COS.

TABLE 2-3
CLASS-OF-SERVICE OPTIONS
Option
Islumber

Extension Options

33
34
35
36
37
38

Automatic Callback
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Never a Forwardee
39
Directed Call Pickup
40
Executive Busy Over-ride
41
Data Security
42
Station Over-ride Security
*43
Inward Restriction (DID or CCSA)
44
Originate Only
45
Receive Only
46
Flash Disable
47
Never a Consultee
48
Broker’s Call
49
Station Conference
50
Meet-Me Conference
51
Camp-On
52
Do Not Overflow
Paging Access
53
^I.^..^
+1 uellcllb
r?r...ar:r. LULJ
onr ^^I..
* uellel
PA..,..:,Ic; LU3
oncl ai^^,.AIU auuve
ullly

Option
Number

Extension Options

54
55
56
57

TAFAS Access
Hold Pickup
Account Code Access
Manual Line
Contact Monitor

+E
59
60
61
62
‘63
*64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

Account Code Access

Non-CO Trunks via Attendant Inhibit
CO Trunks via Attendant Inhibit
No Dial Tone
Flash for Attendant
Call Blocking Applies
Message Register
Trunk Group 1 Access
Trunk Group 2 Access
Trunk Group 3 Access
Trunk Group 4 Access
Trunk Group 5 Access
Trunk Group 6 Access
Trunk Group 7 Access
Trunk Group 8 Access
Trunk Group 9 Access
I-

** Generic 204 only
Page7

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 2-3 (Cont’d)
CLASS-OF-SERVICE OPTIONS
Option
Number
74
75
76
*77
l 7a
l 79
*a0
*al
**a2
ta3
tad
ta5
w

ta7
ta8
tag

t90
t91
t92
l-93
t94

Extension Options
Trunk Group 10 Access
Trunk Group 11 Access
Trunk Group 12 Access
Message Waiting Applies
Room Do Not Disturb Setup Enable
Call Hold and Retrieve Access
Room Status Applies
Call Forward System Inhibit
Alarm Call Setup Enable
Forced Account Code Entry
No SMDR Record for This Line
Speed Call Table 1 and 2 Access
Speed Call Table 3 and 4 Access
Speed Call Table 5 and 6 Access
Speed Call Table 7 and 8 Access
Speed Call Table 9 and 10 Access
Speed Call Table 11 and 12 Access
Speed Call Table 13 and 14 Access
Speed Call Table 15 and 16 Access
Speed Call Table 17 and 18 Access
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing

Generic 203 and above
* Generic 204 only

l
l

f Generic 205 only
OPTION CONFLICTS

45
46
46
46
48
62
62
l

Receive Only
Flash Disable
Flash Disable
Flash Disable
Broker’s Call
Flash for Attendant
Flash for Attendant

and

ENTER After all entries have been made
for the COS the entries may be transferred
to permanent storage by pressing the
ENTER key.

58
48
49
62
49
49
48

code must be unique within the system. The
feature access codes are programmed from the
console keys as described below:
l

Feature Access Codes
2.06

A number of features (Table 2-4) require access codes to allow the extension users to
select and use the features. Each feature access

Page 8

Contact Monitor
Broker’s Cal I
Station Conference
Flash for Attendant
Station Conference
Station Conference
Broker’s Call

FEATURE This key selects the feature
program and allows the access codes to be
defined. The number dialed (Table 2-4) after
pressing the FEATURE key specifies the
feature to which the access code is to be
,assigned.

SECTION MlTL9105/9110-98-210

ACCESS CODE After pressing this key
the number dialed (1 to 4 digits) is assigned
as the access code of the feature selected.
The system automatically checks to see if
the code is assigned to any other equipment or feature within the system, and if a
match is found displays an error message.
CANCEL The access just assigned to a
feature may be removed by pressing the
CANCEL key. The new access code may be
assigned immediately.

DELETE Pressing this key deletes the access code assigned to the feature, rendering the feature inoperative.
ENTER Transfers all
manent memory.

new

entries

per-

Extensions
2.07 The extension program allows all data
associated with extensions to be specified,

TABLE 2-4
FEATURE ASSIGNMENTS
Feature
Number

Description

Attendant Access
1
Callback - Don’t Answer
2
Call Forward - Busy
3
4
Call Forward - Don’t Answer
Call Forward - Follow Me
5
Call Park
6
7
Dial Call Pickup
8
Directed Call Pickup
9
Meet-Me Conference
10
Pager 1
Pager 2
11
Hold Pickup Access
12
13
Pager 1 and 2
14
TAFAS-AI I
15
TAFAS-1
TAFAS-2
16
TAFAS3
17
Attendant Function
18
19
Maintenance
Function
20
DID Attendant Access Code
Direct Inward System Access
21
Executive Busy Overridet (Single Digit)
22
Callback
- Busyt (Single Digit)
23
24*
Room Do Not Disturb Setup and Cancel
25*
Call Hold
Call Retrieve (Local)
26*
Call Retrieve (Remote)
27*
Room Status Update (Maid in Room)
28*
29t*
Programming Security Code
Alarm Call
30**
Account Code
31 t
Speed Call
32t
33 - 42t* Trunk Group 1 Assign access codes 33-42 to Trunk Group 1 if necessary
t Generic 205 only
* Generic 203 and above
t*
Generic 204 and 205
l * Generic 204 only
t First digit conflicts between these codes and other access codes are allowed. See Section
MITL9105/9110-98-105 for complete description of feature operation.
Page 9

-__~-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

changed, or removed from the system memories.
The extension program is selected by the console
keys as described below:
l

TENANT The number, 1 to 4, entered after
pressing the TENANT key specifies the tenant for which the extensions are being programmed, if the system is to be used as a
multi-tenant system. If the system is to be
used by a single tenant, the TENANT key
must not be pressed.

EXTN Pressing this key enables the extension program which allows new data to
be entered or existing data to be changed or
removed.

* EQPT NUMBER The number (I-112,
161-256) entered after pressing the EQPT
NUMBER key defines the equipment
number of the line circuit serving the extension (Fig. 2-l).

49 50 51 52

SHELF 2 (-5x-200 ONLY)

RECEIVER

SHELF 1

NOTES:

NO.1

DUALANDOR QUAD
RECEIVER EQUIPMENT

QUAD RECEIVER
EQUIPMENT NUMBERS
1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FORTHETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2,TRUNKEQUlPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASlNDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.
Fig. 2-l Equipment Number

Page 10

1 SLOT NUMBER

NUMBERS

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

EXTN NUMBER The 1, 2, 3 or 4 digit

number entered after pressing the EXTN
NUMBER key specifies the extension
number of the telephone set being added or
changed. This number must not conflict
with other extension numbers or access
codes. If non-conflicting single digit dialing
is required, enter N#, where N is the single
digit.
l

COS NUMBER The number (1-16) entered,
after pressing the COS NUMBER key,
specifies the Class-Of-Service, and
therefore the features, that may be accessed by the extension. See 2.04 Class-OfService Option.

Option 199 was enabled. See also Section
MITL9105/9110-98-212
Multi-Digit Toll Control.
l

key the number entered (l-150) defines the
position (Fig. 2-2) of the busy lamp to be
associated with the extension. If the extension is not to be assigned a busy lamp, no
entry is required.
l

ooooooooo

ooooooeoo

31 32 3 3

61 62 6 3

91 92 9 3

DELETE Pressing the DELETE key

removes the existing busy lamp assignment.
l

TOLL DENY Each extension may be defin-

ed as TOLL ALLOWED-allowed to
originate calls to the toll network; or TOLL
DENIED-not allowed to make calls to the
toll network. To make the extension TOLL
ALLOWED press the TOLL DENY key then
the DELETE key. To make the extension
TOLL DENIED press the TOLL DENY key
then the ADD key. The extension will be
TOLL DENIED only if the extension and the
trunk group are TOLL DENIED. This allows
Toll Denial on a trunk group basis if System

BUSY LAMP NUMBER After pressing this

PICKUP GROUP The system may hold up
to 50 independant call pickup groups. An
extension may be made a member of any
group, by entering the pickup group number
after pressing the PICKUP GROUP key. Any
number of extensions may be assigned to a
pickup group, but an extension may only be
a member of one group at any time.
Membership in a pickup group is mutually
exclusive with message registration and
room status.
CANCEL Pressing the CANCEL key, prior

to the operation of the ENTER key, removes
any data entered during the foregoing Extension Program sequence.

34 35 36 37 38 39 40

64 65 66 67 68 69

94 95 96 97 98 99 100

121122 123 124125126127128129

130

ooooooooo

107108109110

111 112113 114115 116117 118119120

131 132133 134135 136137138 139140

141 142 143144145 146 147 148 149 150

101 102 103104 105 106

Fig. 2.2

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

Page 1 I

SECTION M ITL9105/911

O-98-21 0

ENTER Transfer all new data for the extension to permanent memory.

HUNT GROUP Allows the hunt group required to be selected by dialing the hunt
group number (1-12).

Hunt Groups
l

2.08

The system can hold up to 12 different hunt
groups. Each hunt group may contain an
unlimited number of members and be specified
as:
l

TERMINAL HUNTING The hunt group sequence starts at the first equipment
number and ends at the last number in the
hunt chain. The call is completed at the first
idle number encountered.

CIRCULAR HUNTING Hunting starts at
the last equipment number reached and
hunts over all members of the hunt group.
The call is completed at the first idle
number found.

SECRETARIAL HUNTING This is terminal
hunting where the last number is common
to two or more extension hunt groups.
DUAL NUMBER ACCESS An extension
may be programmed to allow it to be accessed by two different numbers. The first
number is assigned when programming the
extension and the second number by programming a hunt group with the extension
as the only member. The extension may
therefore be accessed by dialing the extension number or the hunt group master
number (see Section MITL9105/9110-98-105,
Single Digit Dialing).

2.11

The following console keys are activated to
program the hunt groups:
TENANT If multi-tenant service is to be
selected the number (l-4) entered after
pressing the TENANT key, specifies the tenant for which the hunt groups are being
programmed. If single tenant operation is
to be used, the TENANT key must not be
pressed.

Page 12

EQPT NUMBER This key must be pressed
before dialing the equipment number of
each extension in the hunt group. If circular
hunting is to be defined, the last entry in the
hunt group must be the same as the first entry. Membership in a hunt group is mutually
exclusive with “message registration” and
“room status” for this extension.
CANCEL Deletes all new data entered
associated with the hunt group.
ENTER Transfers all new data for the hunt
group to permanent memory.

2.10 This program allows the type, console appearances, day and night assignment, COS
and toll deny codes of each trunk to be specified.

Note: When changing the list of members
of a hunt group in any way, all members of
the hunt group must be re-entered.

DELETE Pressing this key deletes the
hunt group from the system memory.

Trunks

2.09

ACCESS CODE Allows the 1,2,3 or 4 digit
code identifying the hunt group master
number to be entered.

The following console keys are employed to
enter this program:

TENANT If the multi-tenant service is to
be selected the number (l-4) entered after
pressing the TENANT key, specifies the tenant for which the hunt groups are being
programmed. If single tenant operation is
to be used, the TENANT key must not be
pressed.
TRUNK Selects the trunk program

EQPT NUMBER The number entered
(2-112; 162-256, even numbers only)
specifies the equipment number of the
trunk circuit serving this trunk (Pig. 2-l).

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
l

TYPE The code entered, defines the type
of
trunk
being
specified.
(See
MITL9105/9110-98-105 Features and Services Description for definition of VNL)

Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
11
21
31
41
51
61

CO trunk + VNL
DISA trunk + VNL
DID trunk + VNL
Dial-In tie trunk + VNL
Non Dial-In tie trunk + VNL
CCSA trunk + VNL
CO trunk + NON VNL
DISA trunk + NON VNL
DID trunk + NON VNL
Dial-In tie trunk + NON VNL
Non Dial-In tie trunk + NON VNL
CCSA trunk + NON VNL

DELETE If this key is pressed, the information associated with this trunk is removed from the system memory.
BUSY LAMP NUMBER The number (l-150)
defines the position (Fig. 2-2) of the busy
lamp to be associated with this trunk. If the
trunk is not to be assigned a busy lamp no
entry is required.
DELETE If this key is pressed the busy
lamp assignment for this trunk is deleted.
LDN NUMBER (Types 1, 5, 11, 51 only)
This single digit entry defines the Listed
Directory Number key (LDN 1, 2, 3 or 4) on
the attendant console which is to be
associated with the trunk. If the trunk is not
to appear on the attendant console, no entry is required. DID trunk calls to the attendant always appear on LDN 4.
DAY NUMBER (Types 1,5,11,51 only) The
code entered for Day Number specifies any
special assignments of the trunk during
normal day time service. These
assignments may be:

assigned to ring bell 3, code #3

assigned to one extension - enter
equipment number of extension

assigned to a hunt group, codes
to
12

I/C (Types 3, 6, 31, 61 only) This two or
three digit entry for DID or CCSA trunks
defines the number of incoming digits, the
number of digits to be absorbed; and the
digit to be added to the incoming number
after absorbtion.
NIGHT 1 (Types 1,5,11,51 only) This entry
defines the assignment of the trunk during
Night Service 1. Assignment is made in the
same manner as for DAY NUMBER assignment.
NIGHT 2 The entry defines the assignment of the trunk during Night Service 2.
This assignment is made in the same manner as for DAY NUMBER assignment.
COS NUMBER (Types 2,4,21,41 only) The
number (l-16) entered, after pressing this
key, specifies the Class-of-Service and
therefore the features, that may be accessed by the dial-in trunk. See 2.04 Class of.
Service Option.
TOLL DENY (Types 2, 4, 21, 41 only) Each
dial-in trunk may be defined as TOLL
ALLOWED-allowed to originate calls to
the toll network; or TOLL DENIED-not
allowed to make calls to the toll network. To
make the tie trunk TOLL ALLOWED press
the TOLL DENY key then the DELETE key.
To make the tie trunk TOLL DENIED press
the TOLL DENY key then the ADD key. If
System Option 199 is enabled see also Section MITL9105/9110-98-212 Multi-Digit Toll
Control.

no assignment to bells, extensions or
hunt groups, console appearance only (Default code #0)

CANCEL Pressing this key, prior to the
operation of the ENTER key, removes any
data entered in the temporary storage.

assigned to ring bell 1, code #l

ENTER Deletes previous data associated
with this trunk and stores the new data.

assigned to ring bell 2, code #2

Page13

---_-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

Trunk Groups

2.12 The trunk group program specifies the
trunks forming the trunk group, the restrictions and options common to all trunks in the
group. The trunk group may employ terminal or
circular hunting (see 2.08). When making any
change to the list of members of a trunk group all
members of the group must be re-entered. The
following console keys are activated to program
the trunk groups:

TRUNK GROUP The number (1-12) entered
specifies the trunk group to be set-up or
changed.

ACCESS CODE Allows the 1,2,3 or 4 digit
code identifying the trunk group to be
specified.

DELETE Pressing this key deletes the
trunk group from the system memory.

TYPE The four digit code entered after
pressing the TYPE key specifies the trunk
group type parameters as detailed in Table
2-5.

TABLE 2-5
TRUNK GROUP TYPE CODES
First Digit (Note 1)
1 No supervision
2 Answer supervision
3 Toll reversal
4 Outgoing audio
inhibited until
answer supervision

Second Digit

Third Digit (Note 2)

1 No message
register
l 2 Message register
fl3 SMDR Enable
@4 SMDR Enable and
Message Register
Enable

* Available in Generic 203 and above
l
* Available in Generic 204

tl Dial pulse,
no wait for
dial tone
t2 Dial pulse,
wait for dial
tone
$3 DTMF, no wait
for dial tone
t4 DTMF, wait for
dial tone

Fourth Digit
1 CO trunk
2 Non CO trunk
**3 Identified Trunk
Group (Type XX13
only is valid)

0 Generic 205 only

15%

f If extensions are DTMF the trunk will convert to dial pulse. Early line split is not provided.
$ Trunks will repeat DTMF or dial pulse signals.
Note 1

Note 2

Page 14

If answer supervision is not required (or not provided by the CO), then use 1 - (No supervision).
If trunks provide answer supervision and tandem trunking or message registration is used,
then specify 2, (Answer Supervision).
If supervision is used to indicate toll calls, and this feature is required, then use 3 - (Toll
supervision).
If audio cut-through on tie-trunk tandem calls is required only after receipt of answer
supervision, then use 4 - (Outgoing audio inhibit until answer supervision),
If audio cut-through on tie-trunk tandem calls is required only after receipt of answer
supervision, then use 4 - (Outgoing audio inhibit until answer supervision). In addition for
_
Generic 205 the audio is inhibited until timed out or unless a # is dialed.
If “wait for dial tone” is selected then any digits dialed prior to receipt of CO dial tone
are ignored by the PABX. This prevents circumvention of the toll denial by dialing a fast
valid digit before CO dial tone is received.

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-21 0

TOLL DENY Each trunk group may be
specified as TOLL ALLOWED-allowed to
originate calls to the toll network or TOLL
DENIED-not allowed to make calls to the
toll network. To make the trunk group TOLL
ALLOWED press the TOLL DENY key then
the DELETE key. To make the trunk group
TOLL DENIED press the TOLL DENY key
then the ADD key. Toll Denial is effective
only when both the trunk group and the extension or dial-in trunk involved are TOLL
DENIED.

OVERFLOW The number entered (1-12)
specifies the trunk overflow group number.
If all trunks within the trunk group being
defined are busy, any additional calls
directed to the trunk group will be rerouted
to the overflow group. Overflow arrangements which direct the call back to
the original group must NOT be specified.

3. PROGRAMMING
General
3.01

After all installation procedures have been
completed in accordance with Section
MITL9105/9110-98-200 the system should be programmed as detailed in the MITEL Action Procedures (MAPS) contained in Appendix 1 and 2.
ErrorlConf irm Codes
3.02

During standard system programming the
console DESTINATION display may show
“error” or “confirm” codes, with the meanings indicated in Tables 3-1 and 3-2 respectively. These
tables also indicate required action when the
code is displayed. In the extended programming
mode errors may also be displayed at the console.
Figs 3-3 and 3-4 show the meanings of these errors.
Attendant Function Access Codes
3.03

EQPT NUMBER This key must be pressed
before dialing the equipment number
(2-112; 162-256) of each trunk in the group. If
circular hunting is to be defined, the last entry in the hunt group must be the same as
the first entry. If circular hunting is not required, the trunk group is terminal hunting
(see 2.08).

CANCEL Pressing the CANCEL key
removes all new data entered for the trunk
group, leaving any existing data unchanged.

Table 3-5 is a listing of the
tion access codes. To select
tendant functions the access code
must have been dialed. The code
Table 3-5.

attendant funcany of the atfor Feature 18
* is used in

Maintenance Function Access Codes
3.04

Table 3-6 lists the maintenance function access codes. To select any of the
maintenance functions the access code assigned
for the maintenance function must be dialed
(Feature Number 19). The code 555 is used in
Table 3-6, for the maintenance code and may be
dialed from the test line or console.
Timeout Information
3.05

ENTER Removes all old data associated
with the trunk group and transfers the new
data entered to permanent memory.

During programming it may be necessary to
know the timeout information with regard
to certain functions. Table 3-7 is such a listing of
the timeout information.

Page15

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 3-l
PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error
code

Cause

Key
affected

Key
flashing

E O

Invalid key pressed. ALL

None

Invalid number.

None

Key other than
LAMP TEST,
ENTER or CANCEL TENANT, OPTION
COS DEFINE,
pressed.
FEATURE
EXTN NUMBER,
TRUNK HUNT GROUP,
TRUNK GROUP,
NEXT, EQPT
NUMBER

Access code has
not been entered.

HUNT GROUP
TRUNKGROUP

ACCESS
CODE

The extension
number or access
code entered is
already assigned.

EXTN,
ACCESS
CODE

None

EXTN NUMBER
Number entered
contains incorrect, ACCESS CODE
number of digits or
conflicting option
enabled in this COS.

None

Incorrect equipment EQPT NUMBER
number entered.

None

Page 16

ALL

ENTER,
CANCEL

Meaning

Action Required

The last key pressed is invalid Check procedure and press
at this time.
correct key.
The number entered is out
Press key associated with
of range or contains
entry and re-enter number.
corrupted data.
An attempt was made to leavepress ENTER to transfer the
the current mode after some data to permanent store or
parameters were changed
CANCEL to remove the data
but before ENTER or CANCEL from the temporary store.
was pressed. ENTER may be
used to write the new programming information back to
the non-volatile RAM or use
CANCEL to ignore all programming changes made
Ssince the last time ENTER
was pressed.
Attempting to enter members Press ACCESS CODE key ant
into a Hunt or Trunk group
enter required access code.
before an access code has
been assigned to the group.
The extension number or
Check code entered.
access code entered is
1 If code is correct, terminate
already assigned to an
entry, remove other appearextension, feature, hunt
ante of code and re-enter
group or trunk group.
all new data.
In Trunk mode an attempt
2 If code is incorrect, press
is made to delete a member
key associated with entry
of a trunk group.
and re-enter extension
Equipment Numbers desired
number or access code.
must be entered.
In Trunk Group mode an attempt is made to place a
trunk into a trunk group while
that trunk is currently programmed into another trunk
group.
Callback and Executive Override conflict, i.e. trying to
enter a Callback code while
same code assigned to Executive Busy Override and
vice-versa.
The extension number or
Check entry. Press key
access code is in conflict
associated with entry and
with the existing numbering
re-enter number.
plan. Attempting to add
an option to a COS in which
a conflicting option is enabled.
Attempting to add a System
Option when a conflicting option exists.
Attempting to assign an
Remove conflicting option
equipment number that is:
(a) Assign equipment
l
undefined
number correctly
l
defined as a trunk to
(b) ,E,nE;e:ew
equipment
an extension hunt group
or extension
l
defined as an extension to
a trunk group or a trunk
l
an extension with message
registration to hunt group
or pickup group
An equipment number assigned to an extension must be
deleted as an extension
before being programmed as
a trunk. An equipment number
assigned to a trunk must be
deleted as a trunk before being programmed as an extension (Generic 204/up).

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

TABLE 3-1 (Cont’d)
PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES
Error
code
E7

E9
E022-22

Cause
System is busy.

Key
affected

Key
flashing

ENTER,
TENANT

None

Extension has a
ENTER
message register
that is not zeroed
or has a message
waiting, or has
Do Not Disturb
set.
Trunk or equipment ENTER
number already
assigned.

None

Non-Volatile RAM
error.

None

At Power up

ENTER

None

Meaning

Action Required

(a)Attempting to initialize
system while PABX is in
use.
(b)Attempting to change data
of an extension or trunk
while that extension or
trunk is in use. It must be
idle or busied-out.
l a valid message
register exists for
this extension
l
extension has a
message waiting or
Do Not Disturb set

(a) Wait until system is idle
(b) Wait until extension or
trunk is idle
:.

Zero message register,
reset message waiting
or Do Not Disturb
and reprogram

Attempting to assign a
(a) Key proper trunk or
trunk or equipment
equipment number
number to more than one
(b) Press ENTER
tenant at the same time.
In Tenant Service, pressing
the Hunt Group key when all
hunt groups are assigned to
other tenants.
In Tenant Service, pressing
the Trunk Group key when all
trunk groups are assigned to
other tenants.
In Tenant Service, attempting
to put an extension assigned
to one tenant into a hunt
group of a different tenant.
In Tenant Service, attempting
to put a trunk assigned to one
tenant into a trunk group of a
different tenant.
In Tenant Service, entering a
hunt group number assigned
to a different tenant (after
pressing HUNT GROUP).
In Tenant Service, Trunk
Group Programmtng, selecting
an overflow group that
belongs to another tenant.
In Tenant Service, entering a
trunk group number assigned
to a different tenant (after
pressing TRUNK GROUP).
Ones and Zeros test failed
Go to Section
prior to initializing NonMITL9105/9110-98-350
Volatile RAM.
RAM programmed in Generic Non-Volatile RAM must
202 or 203 is used
be initialized and/or
with Generic 2041~~
reprogrammed

Page17

’

r
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

TABLE 3-2
CONFIRM CODES
Confirm
Code

Cause

Key
Affected

Flashing
Lamp

Action

Attempting to assign an
equipment number for
an extension to a slot
containing a trunk card

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Check assignmentl
if correct press CONFIRM
key. Equipment number entered
is accepted as the number
for the equipment type being
programmed. All data associated
with the original appearance
of the equipment number
is removed
l
if incorrect press EQPT NUMBER
and re-enter new equipment number

c o

Attempting to assign an
equipment number for
a trunk to an empty
slot or a slot containing
an extension card.

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Attempting to assign an
extension that already
exists

EXTN
NUMBER

CONFIRM

Check assignmentl
if correct press CONFIRM key.
The extension number entered is
accepted as the extension number
for the equipment being defined.
All data associated with the
original appearance of the
extension number is removed.
l
if incorrect press EXTN NUMBER
and re-enter extension number.

The busy lamp assignment
already exists

BUSY
LAMP

CONFIRM

Check assignmentl
if correct pass CONFIRM key. Busy
lamp assignment is accepted for this
equipment. All data associated with
original assignment is removed.
l
if incorrect press BUSY LAMP and
re-enter busy lamp assignment

TABLE 3-3
EXTENDED PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES - TOLL CONTROL
Error

Applies to:

Meaning

All modes

Invalid key pressed. Consult MAP for correct procedure.

Absorb Plan mode
Trunk Group mode
Control Plan mode

Number is not within the range of the
parameter being defined. Re-enter
parameter key defined.

All modes

Control Plan mode
Table mode

The table number entered is not valid for the
current configuration. Re-enter a number which exists for the configuration of the extended nonvolatile customer RAM.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 3-3 (Cont’d)
EXTENDED PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES -TOLL CONTROL
E4

The table entry code is invalid for the table programmed. This occurs in the following situation:

Table mode

A code of more than 3 digits in length for an
800-entry or 20-range table.

A code not in the range of 200-999 for an
800-entry table.

A code which already exists or a code which
would be ambiguous in conjunction with the
existing table entries, for a 4-entry table.

Table mode

The table is full and cannot hold the entry.

Configuration

mode

Configuration is not allowed because the Tone
Control card switches are not 7776 or the system
is not idle.

Configuration

mode

A hardware failure was detected while clearing the
extended customer non-volatile RAM.

P a g e 1 9

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

TABLE 3-4
EXTENDED PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES - SPEED CALL

EQPT NUMBER

The equipment number entered is outside the range of valid
numbers. Check procedure and press key then redial proper

number group. Enter the proper access number.
NUMBER REDIAL

An invalid number redial value was entered. Enter the proper

The table number entered is not consistent with that allowed
for the current Configuration of the extended NV RAM.
Check the Configuration number.

common-use
NUMBER REDIAL

table.

An attempt was made to enter a number redial digit for a
common-use table.

assigned to the same equipment number.
NUMBER REDIAL

SPEED CALL

Page 20

Number redial already exists for another table assigned to
the same equipment number, (only 1 number redial attribute
per user is allowed).

SECTION MITL9105/911

O-98-21 0

TABLE 3-5
ATTENDANT FUNCTION ACCESS CODES

These codes assume the use of 3t as the Attendant Function code (Feature number 16).
To cancel all call forwarding:
a) Dial * 1
b) Dial #
c) Press RELEASE

To make trunk group attendant access:
a) Dial * 6
b ) Dial trunk group (1 through 12)
c) Dial+
d) Press RELEASE

To access an individual trunk:
a) Dial * 2
b) Dial individual trunk access number
(equipment number)
c) Dial *
d) Press RELEASE
To force-release an individual trunk:
a ) bial* 2
b) Dial individual trunk access number
(equipment number)
c) Dial # #
d) Press RELEASE
t To make flexible night service assignments:
a) Dial * 3
b) Dial individual trunk access number
(equipment number)
c ) Press Night 1 or Night 2
d) Dial extension number
e) Press RELEASE
To cancel all system callbacks:
a) Dial )c 4
b) Dial #
c) Press RELEASE
To set the clock time:
a) Dial * 5
b ) Dial time (hour plus minutes)
c ) Dial * for p.m., otherwise a.m.
d) Press RELEASE
To make trunk group dial access:
a) Dial * 6
b ) Dial trunk group (1 through -12)
c) Dial #
d) Press RELEASE

To change the Direct Inward System Access
Code:
a) Dial + 7
b) Dial DISA code
c) Press RELEASE
To cancel a minor alarm:

(Note 1)

a) Dial * 8
b) Dial #
c) Press RELEASE
t To busy out an individual trunk:
a) Dial * 9
b) Dial individual trunk access number
(equipment number)
c) Dial *
d) Press RELEASE
t To de-busy an individual trunk:
a) Dial + 9
b) Dial individual trunk access number
(equipment number)
c) Dial #
d) Press RELEASE
t To change the status of all occupied clean rooms
to occupied and needs cleaning: (Note 2)
a) Dial * 10
b) Dial *
c) Press RELEASE
tTo change the status of all occupied rooms in the
need of cleaning to occupied clean: (Note 2)
a) Dial * 10
b) Dial #
c) Press RELEASE

Page 21

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 3-5 (CONT’D)
ATTENDANT FUNCTION ACCESS CODES
To set up call forwarding:

(Note 2)

i’ To enable the printer:

a) Dial* llnnn, where nnn is the extension
number of the forwarding extension
b) Dial call forwarding code (l-3)
c) Dial nnn, where nnn is the number to which
the calls are to be forwarded
d) Press RELEASE

a) Dial )c 14 #
b) Press RELEASE
To change the date:

Dial * llnnn, where nnn is the extension
number of the forwarding extension
b) Dial #
cj Press RELEASE
.To busy out an extension:(Note 2)
a) Dial* 12nnn, where nnn is the number of
the extension to be busied out
b) Dial+
c) Press RELEASE
1 To de-busy an extension:

(Note 2)

Dial * 12nnn, where nnn is the number of
the extension to be de-busied
b) Dial #
c) Press RELEASE
tTo suspend the printer:

(Note 3)

Dial * 15 and 3 or 4 digit date (one or two
digit month, two digit day)
b) Press RELEASE

tTo print the room audit (registers):
4)

(Note 3)

(Notes 3 ant

a) Dial * 16
b) Press RELEASE
tT o d’tsplay system identity: (Note 3)
a) Dial * 17
b) Press RELEASE
tTo change the system identity:

(Note 3)

Dial* 17 nnn (where nnn is a 1 to 3 digit
ID, O-999)
b) Press RELEASE
f To print the “room status” audit:
4)

a) Dial * 14 *
b) Press RELEASE
tTo purge and ignore the printer:

(Note 3)

To cancel call forwarding for an extension:(Note 2)
a)

(Note 3)

(Notes 3 and

a) Dial 3c 18
b) Press RELEASE

a) Dial 3c 14 00
b) Press RELEASE

Note 1

The errors will be sequentially stacked in the memory and may be recalled sequentially (most recent first) by repeating the above procedure.
Note 2 Applies to Generic 203/up
Note 3 Applies to Generic 204/up
Note 4 Printer starts after RELEASE key is pressed.
t Requires system option programming

Page 22

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

TABLE 3-8
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ACCESS CODES
‘o select any of the functions the access code assigned for the maintenance function must be dialed
Feature Number 19). The code 555 is used in the following part for the maintenance code and may be
lialed from the test line or console in Generic 203/up.
Clear all errors:

**To initiate system dump (from test line):

a) Dial 555 + 1

a ) Dial 555 + 7 and hang up
b) Go off-hook
c) Dial 555 + 8 + # (or 2)

Direct trunk or station access:
a) Dial 555 + 2
b ) Dial individual equipment number (3 digit
equipment number for trunk or station)

**To initiate system dump (from console):
a) Dial 555 + 7
b) Dial * 14 #

Busy out of a receiver:
a) Dial 555 + 3
b ) Dial equipment number of receiver

**T O suspend printer:
a) Dial 555 + 8 + * (or I), or
b) Dial * 14 it (console only)

Busy out of a speech path:
a) Dial 555 + 33
b ) Dial speech path number (01-31)
De-busy a receiver:
a) Dial 555 + 4
b ) Dial equipment number of receiver
De-busy a speech path:

*To enable printer:
a)
b)

Dial 555 + 8 + # (or 2), or
Dial * 14 # (console only)

t**To purge and ignore printer:
a) Dial 555 + 8 + 00, or
b) Dial * 1400 (console only)

a) Dial 555 + 43
b ) Dial speech path number (01-31)
Initialize card slot:
a) Dial 555 + 5
b ) Dial card slot number (01-17, 31-42)
t* System reset: (Note 2)
a) Dial 555 + 6
t Requires System Option Programming
Generic 2031~~
* Generic 204/up
l
l

Notes
1. For Traffic Measurement Access Codes see MITL9105/9110-98-450.
2. System Reset requires thumbwheel switches be set to 777n (n = 0 to 9) on Tone Cont;bl card for
Genpric 20311~~.
Page23

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE 3-7
SYSTEM TIMEOUT INFORMATION
Description

Timeout

Attendant Timed Recall (Don’t Answer)

2Os, 30s or 40s

Attendant Timed Recall (Camp-On)

2os, 3os, or 40s

Attendant Timed Recall (Hold)

2Os, 3Os, or 40s

Automatic Night Switching

2Os, 3Os, or 40s

Dial Tone Timeout

15s

Interdigit Timeout (Extensions)

15s

Interdigit Timeout (Trunks)

10s

Lockout Timeout

45s

Callback Clear Timeout

8 hours

Callback Don’t Answer Reset

6 rings

Call Park Recall

2, 3 or 4 minutes

Call Hold Recall

2, 3 or 4 minutes

Call Forward - Don’t Answer Timeout

2Os, 3Os, or 40s

Switchhook Flash
Ringing Timeout

Min. 200ms
Max. 0.7s 0.9s, 1.1s or 4.5s
5 minutes

Automatic Wakeup Ringing

6 rings, 3s each

Automatic Wakeup Attempts

3 at 5 minute Intervals

Page 24

4. EXAMPLES
Introduction
4.01

This part describes the steps required to program the SX-100 and SX-200 PABX’s using the Installation Forms, and provides typical examples of completed Installation Forms.

4.02 System Options

Step

Operation

Press the OPTION key.

Dial the number of the required option.
~ (See Tables 2-l and 2-2)

Press the ADD key to add the option,
OR
Press the DELETE key to remove the
option

Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 above until all required options have been added or deleted.

Press the ENTER key to enter all options into the memory.

SYSTEM OPTIONS 1 mm 1
I

cl
OPT!ON

OPTION NAME

ion
.__

TRANSFER

I",
.-.

FLEXIBLE NIGHT SERVICE

ADD

DIAL
;l,T$R

cl
OPT'ON

(100-234)

J
_

4TTEhlndhlT
PO ITDllhlK.Pq
-I LI.Y"l.I "V
II",,,\ v.. TRUNK
nTTChl"nhlT
I no
ILI.YIIIII

rn
YY TDI,hIY.hlr
~w,.w,.JN

ATTENDANTNON

NIGHT SERVICE AUTOMATIC SWITCHING

103

ENABLE

TAFAS AVAILABLE DURING

104

CONTROLLEDOUTGOING

OUTGOINGTRUNKCAMP-ON

105

CONTROLLEDSTATION

OUTGOINGTRUNK

lOI7

.._

P"hlTD"l I Erl 9TdTlr-m
-w>.,,,vLLLY
w,n,,w,.

CAN

FLASH

CALLBACK

IFTALKINGTOAN

INCOMINGTRUNK

107

CAN FLASH IFTALKING TO AN OUTGOINGTRUNK

108
109

CANNOT

110

111

112

DIAL

ATRUNKAFTER

FLASHING

J
I/

CANNOT OIALATRUNKAFTER FLASHING IF HOLDING
OR IN CONFERENCEWITH
LOCKOUT
TENANT

ALARM

ATRUNK

ENABLE

SERVlCE(SET

CONNECT

ENABLE

CO TRUNK CONNECT ENABLE

130

REPTalrTfnhl

SE'

132'

QET.

133'

TrlIv STATION RESTRICTION SET-UP

134'
135

LIMITED WAIT FOR DIAL TONE

136

MESSAGE WAITING SET-UP (LAMP)

137'

MESSAGE WAITING SET-UI '(BELL)

138'

ATTENDANTTIMED

139

ATTENDANTTIMED
ATTENDANTTIMED

129

I 131
RESTRICTION

REGAL1 L - CAMP-ON - 20s

ATTENOANTTIMEORECALL-

AUTOMATICALLY WHEN TENANT

COTRUNK-NONCOTRUNKCONNECT

ATTENOANTOISACOOESET-UPENABLE

CAN FLASH IF TALKING TO STATION

ADD

DIAL
OPTION
NUMBER
(100-234)

OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME

102

DAY

OPTION
NUMBER

DISCRIMINATING RINGING
DIALTONE

140

CAMP-ON -40s

RECALL-DON'T

ANSWER

RECALL-DON'T

ANSWER

141

20s

142

40s

SERVICE IS SELECTED WHEN PROGRAMMING)
TENANT SERVICE. SEPARATE CONSOLES(GENERIC203/UP)OR
FLASH TIME
JACANT

144

114*

0.7SEC(GENERIC202.05/UP)

NUMBER

LLEGALACCESS

INTERCEPTTO

INTERCEPT

ATTENDANT

145
.I

146

ATTENDANT

?LIN,T

IIDIDIAL-lN/CCSA VACANT/ILLEGALlNTERCEPTTO

ARDING

ANSWER

TIMEOUT

-20s

- OON'T ANSWER TIMEOUT -40s

CALL FORWARDING - BUSY (SYSTEM, DID, DIAL-IN TIE

1
I

147

146

149

TRUNK,CCSA)
CALL FORWARDING - DON'T ANSWER (SYSTEM, DID, DIAL-IN
\TTENDANT

,-"

TIETRUNK.

\TTENDANT SERIAL CALL

BUSY OVERRIDE

121

PARK AND CALL-HOLD RECALL 2 MINUTES

IELL OFF ENABLE

122

'AGE BUTTON ENABLE

123

IEWCALLTONf ENABLE

124

IOTH MODESTANDARD

125

:ALLBACK BUTTON ENABLE

RUNK

127
rn(l

BUSY-OUTENABLE

BOTH BUTTON ENABLE

,b”

I
I

CCSA)

150

PARK AND CALL-HOLD RECALL

- 4 MINUTES

151
152

I ENI) OF DlAl SIANAl FflR OUTGOING TRUNKS (#)
I -.-- -' -..'- -'-'."- -" .
24 HOURCLOCK

154
._.

I FIRST "ICIT T", I nrhl"

155

MESSAGE

REGISTRATION

MESSAGE

REGISTRATION:

SUPERVISIONS

ENABLE
COUNT

153

156'
ADDITIONAL
157'
128,

SYSTEM OPTIONS F]
I
I
ADD
c

OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME

OPTION
NUMBER

OPTION NAME

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: TIMER =

20 SECONDS

158’

AUTOMATIC WAKEUP PRINT

191.’

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: TIMER =

40 SECONDS

159’

AUTOMATIC WAKEUP MUSIC ON HOLD

192”’

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: MULTIPLIER =

4 UNITS

160’

ROOM MESSAGE REGISTER AUDIT ENABLE

193”

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: MULTIPLIER =

3 UNITS

161’

ROOM STATUS AUDIT ENABLE

194”

MESSAGE REGISTRATION: MULTIPLIER =

2 UNITS

162’

MESSAGE REGISTER & MESSAGE WAITING CHANGE

MESSAGE

REGISTRATION:

SURCH

FLASH TIMING =

A U I UMAI II; WAKtUV tNALlLt

1YO”

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING INCOMING CALLS

221t

1x3 1

S Y S T E M O P T I O N S F[
I

DIAL
OPTION
NUMBER
(100-234)

OPTION
SMOR.
ISMDR

NAME

EXTENOEORECORO
RECORD METER PULSES

NOTES

ISMDR. INDICATE LONG CALLS
ISMDR
ISMDR.

DROP ~NCOMPLETEOUTGOING

TO DELETE SYSTEM OPTIONS

CALLS

RECORDONLY INCOMING CO CALLS

3
SMDR DROPCALLS OF

ACCOUNTCODE

LESSTHAN

8 DIGITS

ENABLE

22Eit

AFTER ALL REOUIRED OPTIONS HAVE BEEN REMOVED
I
1

229t
230t

ENTER

ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH:4 DIGITS

231t

ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH. 8 DIGITS

232t

IACCOUNT

CODE LENGTH. 12 DIGITS

IVARIABLE

LENGT H

ACCOUNT

I 234t

CODES

REVIEWSYSTEM

I OPTION

OPTIONS

204 BUTNOT
204 AND 205
't GENERIC 205BUTNOT204

AFTER ALL OPTIONS ARE ADDED

ENTER
c

I
,.,;,

,A/,(

4.03 COS Options
Step

Operation

Press the COS DEFINE key.

Dial the number of the COS required
(1 through 16).

Press the OPTION key.

Dial the number of the extension option
required to be added or deleted to the
COS selected in step 2.
(See CLASS-OF-SERVICE DEFINITIONS).

Press the ADD key to add the option to
the selected COS.
OR
Press the DELETE key to remove the option from the selected COS.

Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all required
extension options have been added or
deleted to the selected COS.

Press the ENTER key to enter all COS options into the memory.

Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the next required COS.

CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS

PRESS

DIAL
cos
cos
DEFINE NUMBER
l-16

TO CHANGE
ANYOPTION FOR A COS

(- --------------------____________________----1

- -------------------------,

I
I
DIALOPTION NUMBER33-94 PRESS ADD
TOENABLE
OR PRESS DELETE TOREMOVE j
L ___-___---_____-_-______ -------------------- - -______---_____---__-JI
REPEATFOREACHOPTIONINTHECOS

.- - _- - - _ ------ - - _ _i _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- - - - - _- - - - - - - - _q
_- - - -- ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- -- ------_ -- ----PRESS ENTER

TOENTERALLINFORMATIONINTHECOSAFTER

TO REVIEW THE OPTIONS WITHIN A COS

NOTE: AN EXTENSION OR TRUNK CAN NOT CHANGE ITS COS IF THE EXTENSION OR
TRUNK IS BUSY. IT ALSO CAN NOT BE CHANGED UNLESS THE MESSAGE
REGISTER IS CLEARED.

.., , .

*GENERIC 203/UP
* GENERIC 204
t GENERIC 205

ALL OPTIONS IN THAT COS HAVE BEEN DEFINED

4.04 Features

Step

Operation

Press the FEATURE key.

Dial the number of the required feature.
(See FEATURE ASSIGNMENTS TABLE 2-4)

Press the ACCESS CODE button.

Dial the access code to be assigned
to the feature.
OR
Press the DELETE key to remove an access
code

Press the ENTER key to enter information
into the memory.

Repeat steps 1 through 5 until all
required access codes have been assigned
or deleted.

FEATURES

‘

F;;“41
CALL

RETRIEVE

(REMOTE)

27'

ROOM STATUS UPDATE(MAIDIN
PROGRAMMING

ROOM)

28'

SECURITYCODE

29'.

ALARM CALL

30"
31
32

TRUNKGROUP ACCESS CODE 38
TRUNKGROUP

__
21

EXECUTIVE BUSY OVERRIDE (SINGLE DIGIT)

CALLBACK. BUSY (SINGLE DIGIT)

ROOM DO NOTOISTURBSETUPANDCANCEL

24'

OIRECTINWAROSYSTEM

ACCESS

CALL HOLD
CALL

CODE34

-I

25'

RETRlEVE(LOCAL)

26'

NOTES
TO DELETE A FEATURE

*GENERIC 203/UP

ACCESS

TO REVIEWACCESS CODES

**GENERIC 204

*** FIRST DIGIT CONFLICTALLOWEDWITH

OTHER ACCESS CODES
111 .I

4.05

4
f

Extensions
Step

Operation
If TENANT service is used commence at
Step 1. If TENANT service is not used, start
at Step 4 (Note 1).

Step

Operation

13.

Press the BUSY LAMP NUMBER key.

14.

Dial the number of the busy lamp which is
to be associated with the selected extension. (See BUSY LAMP POSITION NUMBERING, Fig. 2-2)

Press TENANT key.

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4).

Press ENTER key.

Press the EXTN key.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

15.

Press the PICKUP GROUP key.

Dial the required equipment number (see
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING, Fig. 2-l).

16.

Dial the number of the required pickup
group (1 through 50)

Press the EXTN NUMBER key.

Dial the required extension number

Press the DELETE key if no pickup group
assignment is required.

OR
Press the DELETE key if no busy lamp is required.

OR
Press the DELETE key to remove existing
extension information.
9.

Press the COS Number key.

IO.

Dial the required COS number (1 through
16).

Il.

Press the TOLL DENY key. (See Note 2)

12.

Press the ADD key to implement toll denial
for the extension selected
OR
Press the DELETE key to remove toll denial
for the extension selected.

17.

18.

Press the ENTER key to enter all extension
information into the memory.
Repeat steps 1 through 18 or 4 through 18
for all required extensions.

Notes:
1. All extensions in one tenant
group should be entered in
succession following the
listed steps. The next
group of extensions are
are entered in a similar
manner using the TENANT
and ENTER keys again.
2. For Multi-Digit Toll Control,
see Section MITL9105/9110-98-212
Programming Procedures.

1 EXTENSIONS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AND ABOVE

ALL ENTRIES MADE

IFTENANT SERVICEISIN USE
AREASSIGNEDTD
THE TENANT NUMBER DIALED

TO ENTER EXTENSION PROGRAMMING PRESS

TENANT
NUMBER

cl
EQPT
NUMBER

NAME

EXTN
L-

DIAL
l-112
OR
161-256
(SEE NOTE 1)

DIAL
CODE
SEEETES
2. 3. OR 4

cm/

0025

ZOI

003

202

003c

to3

cosq
NUMBER

DIAL
l-16

l-150
OR

005

z/0+

301

007

3oa

00%

303
307

2,
1

3 3

3Y-

305

- .I

cl
ENTER

006

009

i-50

5
3/
32

VOTES
i

EQUIPMENT NUMBERS

TO ASSIGN NON CONFLICTING SINGLE DIGIT DIRECTORY N
WHEN N IS THE SINGLE DIGIT.

REMOVE

161.256APPLlES

EXTENSION

TO SX-200 ONLY
--~a UifY. IF TOLL CONTRDL(GENERIC

204/UP)IS USED

PROGRAMMING

MITEL

4.06 H u n t Groups
Operation
If TENANT service is used commence at
Step 1. If TENANT service is not used start
at Step 4 (Note 1)
1.

Press TENANT key

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4)

Press ENTER key

Press the HUNT GROUP key.

Dial the number of the required hunt group
(1 through 12).

Press the ACCESS CODE key.

Dial the required ACCESS CODE (master
number).

Step
12.

Repeat steps 10 and 11 until all required
extensions have been dialed.

13.

Press the ENTER key to enter all hunt
group information into the memory.

14.

Repeat steps 1 through 13 for all required
hunt groups.

Notes:
1.

All extensions in one tenant group should be entered
in succession following the listed steps. The next
group of extensions are entered in a similar manner
using the TENANT and ENTER keys again.

If the hunt group is to be a circular hunt group, then
the first equipment number entered must be
reentered as the last number.

OR
Press the DELETE key to remove an existing hunt group.
8.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

Dial the equipment number of the first
extension in the hunt group.

10.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

11.

Dial the equipment number of the next
extension in the hunt group.

Operation

APPLIESTOGENERIC

203ANOABOVE

IFTENANTSERVICEISIN
USE
ALL ENTRIES MAOEAREASSIGNEDTOTHETENANT

(TENANTI

NUMBER DIALEO

HUNT GROUPS

TENANT

NUMBER

GROUP

L-l

(EXTENSION

TRUNK

INFORMATION

MUSTBEENTEREDBEFORETRUNKGROUPDATA)

DIAL
CODE
OR

cl
HUNT
GROUP

DIAL
l-12

BEFORE DIALING EACH EGUIPMENT NUMBER ENTRY

AFTER LAST ENTRY IN EACH GROUP PRESS

2
s?

ENTER
c

DELETE

292
192

173

TO SEETHE EOUIPMENT NUMBERS CURRENTLY IN A HUNT GROUP

cl
NEXT

TO MAKE A CHANGETOAHUNTGROUP.THE
LIST OF MEMBERS MUST BE RE-ENTERED.,N.
DIVIDUAL MEMBERS CANNOTBE DELETEDOR CHANGED.THE EXISTING GROUP LIST IS
AUTOMATICALLY DELETED WHEN YOU STARTTO ENTERANEWONE.

FOR CIRCULAR HUNT GROUPS

FIRSTAND LAST NUMBERS MUST BE IDENTICAL

TO SEEilL HUNTGROUPS

@ MITEL

:_,:,

“,

4.07

Trunks

(a) Trunk Card Settings
Before programming the trunk circuits the Installation Forms which detail the trunk card switch
settings must have been completed, and the switches on these cards set to their proper positions.
Full details of the switch setting procedures are given in Appendix 5 to Section
MITL9105/9110-98-200.
Typical configurations are shown in the following examples.
e
2

CO TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS: The example shown has the following meaning:
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk
Trunk

1
2
3
4

Trunk is active with a ground start configuration
Trunk is the same configuration as Trunk 1
Trunk is similar to Trunk 1 but is a spare trunk
Trunk is a dictation trunk with loop start and the 3rd wire condition active

DID/TIE TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS: The example shown has the following meanings:
Trunk 1 - Trunk is a loop tie trunk with no wink or “stop-dial” requirements
Trunk 2 - Trunk is a DID/Tie trunk with no wink or “stop-dial” requirements and uses loop pulsing

TRUNK CARD SWITCH SETTINGS - CD TRUNK CARDS
co
DIRECTORY
NO.
592

NO:/0

llll

SPARA
olcm~od

SHELF
NO.
1
d

CARD
TRUNK
NO.

TRUNK
EQPT.
NUMBER

INCOMING
OUTGOING
CONDITION CONDITION
BUSY IDLE BUSY IDLE

4/
\/

LOOP/GND
START
LOOP

3RDWlRE
CONDITION

GND ENAB DIS

SENSE
REVkRSALS
lGN

ssB"

RELEASETIMES
SHRT ssB>> LDNG

M/B
' RATIO

"A" "A" "A"
"A"
33166
EFF SHRT LONG SHRT LONG

40160 GND -48V

HI - 2
HI-Z NORM

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-210

LOOP/GROUNDSTART
SWITCHES
TRUNK1

TRUNKBUSY
SWITCHES

LOOP 0 GND
3RDWlRE

TRUNK1
TRUNK2
LOOP

OPEN
CLOSED

OUTGOING
GND

TRUNK1
GND

\
INCOMING

TRUNKCARD- SINGLE
(TYPEOIl)

TRUNK2
TRUNK3
TRUNK4

TRUNK4
LOOP

TRUNK3
TRUNK4

TRUNK3
LOOP

TRUNK2

BUSY IDLE

GND

ASSEMBLY

iTAlL

GND
Be

HIGH 2

1 2 HI-Z
-48

BUSY

NORMAL

IDLE
TRUNK1
TRUNK2
TRUNK3

INCOMING

TRUNK4
TRUNK1
TRUNK2
TRUNK3
TRUNK4

TRUNKBUSY
SWITCHES

COTRUNKCARD-MODULARASSEMBLIES

CO Trunk Card Switch identification
Page 41

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-21 0

N
Y
5
5
-

I
I
I

(
,
I

25
3
E

l%
\I- IN

Page 42

Non Dial-h Trunks

step

Operation

Step

If TENANT service is used commence at
step 1. If TENANT service is not used, start
at step 4 (Note 1)
1.

Press TENANT key.

Operation

10.

Dial the number of LDN key with which the
trunk is to be associated. (1 through 4)

11.

Press the DAY NUMBER key.

12.

Dial equipment number, or # (night bell
number), or * (hunt group number).

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4).

Press ENTER key.

13.

Press the NIGHT 1 key.

Press the TRUNK key.

14.

Dial equipment number, or # (night bell
number), or * (hunt group number).

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

15.

Press the NIGHT 2 key.

Dial the equipment number to be
associated with the required trunk (See
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING, Fig. 2-1)

16.

Dial equipment number, or # (night bell
number), or * (hunt group number).

Press the TYPE key.

17.

Press the BUSY LAMP NUMBER key.

Dial the required trunk type number (1
-Standard Bothway CO Trunk VNL, 5 - Non
Dial-In Tie Trunk VNL, 11 - Standard
Bothway CO Trunk Non VNL and 51 . Non
Dial-In Tie Trunk Non VNL).

18.

Dial the number of the busy lamp to be
associated with the trunk (see BUSY LAMP
POSITION NUMBERING, Fig. 2-2)
OR
Press the DELETE key if no busy lamp is required.

Press the DELETE key to delete all trunk information.

19.

Press the ENTER key to enter all trunk information into the memory.

Press the LDN NUMBER key.

20.

Repeat steps 1 through 20for all trunks required

’ Notes:
1.
2.

All trunks in one tenant group should be entered in succession following the listed steps. The next
group of trunks are entered in a similar manner using the TENANT and ENTER keys again.
For Multi-Digit Toll Control, see Section MITL9105/9110-98-212
Programming Procedures.

,-,I.:;‘,,

,‘, .‘?I

21
%

APPLIESTO

GENERIC

ALL ENTRIES

1 NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

203ANDABOVE
IFTENANTSERVICE
IS IN USE
MADEAREASSIGNEDTOTHETENANT

NUMBER DIALED

I1
TENANT
NUMBER
SEE NOTE 3

DIAL
Z-112
OR
162-256
:SEE

(SEENOTE4)
DIAL
1. 5, 11.
51
OR

DIAL
#O-#3
OR
Xl-Xl2
OR
i-112
OR
161-256

DIAL
1-4

$0
NO
ff0

I
I

ENTERTRUNK

PROGRAMMING

PRESS

I
1
1 TRUNK1

[SEENOTE4)

DELETE

NOTES
ANDZ)

SEENOTE4)
DIAL
#O-#3
OR
*i-*12
OR
1-112
OR
161-256

DIAL
I-150
OR

DIAL
#O-#3
OR
x1-*12
OR
l-112

r-l
ENTER

DELETE

16yR256

-- - ,
-EXP
d0

NOTES'
1

EOUIPMENT

ONLY EVEN EOUIPMENT
TO TRUNKS

NUMBERS 162.256APPLY

TO SX-200 ONLY

NUMBERS MAY BE ASSIGNED

3 TYPE 1 = STANDARD BOTHWAYCOTRUNKVNL
TYPE 5 = NON DlALINTIETRUNK(NON CO)VNL
TYPE ii = STANOARD BOTHWAY CO TRUNKNON VNL
TYPE 51 ='NON DIAL IN TIE TRUNK(NON CO)NON VNL

GENERIC 202TYPE CODE DISPLAY DEFAULTS TO

4. ilO_ CONSOLEONLY
#, CONSOLEANDNIGHT

BELL 1

If2 -CONSOLE AN0 NIGHT BELL 2
#3-CONSOLE AND NIGHT BELL3

5. TO REMOVEATRUNKASSIGNMENT
(NOTE
TRUNK MUST FIRST BE REMOVED FROM TRUNKGROUPi

1 WHEN TRUNK IS DELETED

*l-X12ASSlGNSTHETRUNKTOTHE
HUNT GROUPSELECTED
l-112, 161-256 ASSIGNS THE TRUNK TO THE SPECIFIED EXTENSION
6.

TO SEETHE NEXT
ASATRUNK:

EDUIPMENT

NUMBER

PROGRAMMED

MI-TEL

Dial-h Trunks
12.
Step

Operation

If TENANT service is used commence at
step 1. If TENANT service is not used, start
at step 4 (Note 1).
1.

Press TENANT key.

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4).

Press ENTER key.

Press the ADD key to implement toll denial
for the trunk selected.

Press the DELETE key to remove toll denial
for the trunk selected.
13.

Press the BUSY LAMP NUMBER key.

14.

Press the TRUNK key.

Dial the number of the busy lamp which is
to be associated with the selected trunk.
(See BUSY LAMP POSITION NUMBERING,
Fig. 2-2)

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

Dial the equipment number to be
associated with the required trunk (See
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING, Fig. 2-2)

Press the DELETE key if no busy lamp is required.

Press the TYPE key.

15.

Press the ENTER key to enter all Dial-In
Trunk information into the memory.

Dial the required trunk type number (2
-Direct Inward System Access or 4 - Dial-In
Tie Trunk).

16.

Repeat steps 1 through 16 for all Dial-In
trunks required.

Notes:

Press the DELETE key to delete all trunk information.
9.

Press the COS number key.

10.

Dial the required COS number (1 through
16).

11.

Press the TOLL DENY key.

All extensions in one tenant
group should be entered in
succession following the listed
steps. The next group of
extensions are entered using
the TENANT and ENTER keys
again.
2. For Multi-Digit Toll Control,
see Section MITL9105/9110-98-212
Programming Procedures.

APPLIESTO

GENERIC

ALL ENTRIES MADE

’ DIAL-IN TRUNKS

203ANDABOVE
IF TENANT SERVICE IS IN USE

AREASSIGNEDTOTHETENANT

NUMBER DIALED

I
TO

TENANT

ENTERTRUNK

PROGRAMMING

TRUNK

PRESS

NUMBER

DIAL

2, 4, 21,
OR 41
OR

DIAL

2-112
OR
162-256

DIAL
l-16

DELETE

(SEE NOTE 1
AND 2)

BUSY
LAMP
NUMBER
c
l

DIAL
l-150
OR

cl
ENTER

q
DELETE

2
n
4

074
07&
084

086

1 EOUIPMENT NUMBERS 162.256APPLlES
2 EVEN EQUIPMENTNUMBERSONLY
3 TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE

TO SX-200 ONLY

TO REMOVEATRUNKASSIGNMENT:
NOTETRUNK MUST FIRST BE REMOVED FROM TRUNKGROUP

5. TOSEETHENEXT

EOPT

NUMBERASSIGNEOASATRUNK

MAYBEASSIGNEOTOTRUNKS

2 = DIRECT lNWAADSYSTEM.ACCESS VNL
4 = OIAL IN TIE TRUNK (NON CO)VNL
21 =9IRECTlNWARDSYSTEM
ACCESS NON VNL
41 =blAL IN TIE TRUNK (NON CO)NON VNL

pq
GENERIC 202.02TYPE CODE DISPLAY DEFAULTS
TO 1 WHEN TRUNK IS DELETED.

6 COR I-3APPLlESONLY,IFTOLLCONTROL(GENERIC

204/UPIIS

USED

fd)

DIDKCSA Dial-In Tie Trunks

Step

Operation
If TENANT service is used commence at
step 1. If TENANT service is not used, start
at step 4 (Note 1)

Step
9.

Operation
Press the I/C key.

10.

Dial the required NMX code (N - number of
digits to be received after the trunk is seized, M - number of digits to be absorbed
after the trunk is seized, X - the actual
leading digit to be inserted, if required).

Press TENANT key.

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4).

Press ENTER key.

11.

Press the BUSY LAMP NUMBER key.

Press the TRUNK key.

12.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

Dial the number of the busy lamp which is
to be associated with the selected trunk
(see BUSY LAMP POSITION NUMBERING,
Fig. 2-2)

Dial the equipment number to be
associated with the required trunk (See
EQUIPMENT NUMBERING, Fig. 2-1)

Press the TYPE key.

Press the DELETE key, if no busy lamp is
required.

Dial the required trunk type code (3 - DID
VNL, 6 - CCSA VNL, 31 - DID Non VNL and
61 - CCSA Non VNL)

13.

Press the ENTER key to enter all DIDlCCSA
Dial-In Tie Trunk information into the
memory.

14.

Repeat steps 1 through 13 for all DID/CCSA
trunks required.

Press the DELETE key to delete all trunk information.
Notes:
1.
‘\
2.

6tD
%

'DIDICCSA

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AND ABOVE

ALL ENTRIES

IFTENANT SERVICE IS IN USE
MADEAREASSIGNEDTOTHETENANT

TRUNKS

(GENERIC 203/UP)
NUMBER DIALED
TOENTERTRUNKPROGRAMMINGPRESS

TRUNK
l-l

TENANT
NUMBER
SEE NOTE 3

DIAL

DIAL
2-110
OR
162-254

313i261

094

DELETE

(SEE NOTES 1
AND 2)

0 9 0

DIAL
l-150
OR

DIAL
NMXCODE
(NOTE 4)

0
ENTER

DELETE

3
3

NOTES.

5. TO REMOVEATRUNKASSIGNMENT: (TRUNK MUSTFIRST BE

EOUIPMENT NUMBERS 162.254APPLYTOSX-ZOOONLY

ALTERNATE EVEN NUMBERS ONLY MAY BE ASSIGNEO TO DlDlCCSA

TYPE3 = OIOVNL
TYPE 31 = DID NON VNL
TYPE 6 = CCSAVNL
TYPE 61 = CCSA NON VNL

N = NUMBER OF DIGITS TO BE RECEIVEDAFTERTRUNKIS SEIZED (l-9)
M = NUMBER OF OIGITS TO BE ABSORBEOAFTERTRUNKIS
SElZED(O-8)
X = LEADING DIGIT TD BE INSERTED, IF
REOUIRED.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS IS 4(3lFTENANT SERVICE)AFTER
ABSORPTION (M)
AND ADDING A DIGIT (X).

REMWED

FROM TRUNKGROUP)

TRUNKS

6. TOSEETHE

NEXTEQPTNUMBERASSIGNEDAS

ATRUNK

MITEL

4.08 Trunk Croups
Step

Operation

Step

If TENANT service is used commence at
step 1. If TENANT service is not used, start
at step 4 (Note 1)

Operation

Press the DELETE key if toll denial is not
required on the trunk group.
12.

Press the OVFLO GROUP key.

13.
Press ENTER key.

Dial the number of the trunk group (1
through 12) to which calls will overflow if
the trunk group is busy. You must not
overflow into the same group. (See Note 1)

Press the TRUNK GROUP key.

Dial the required trunk group number (1
through 12).

Press the DELETE key if no overflow is required.

Press the ACCESS CODE key.

14.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

Dial the required trunk group access code

15.

Dial the equipment number of the first
trunk in the trunk group.

16.

Press the EQPT NUMBER key.

17.

Dial the equipment number of the next
trunk in the trunk group.

ia.

Repeat steps 16 and 17 until all required
equipment numbers have been dialed.

19.

Press the ENTER key to enter all trunk
group information into the memory.

20.

Repeat steps 1 through 19 for all required
trunk groups.

Press TENANT key.

Dial required tenant number (1, 2, 3 or 4).

OR
Press the DELETE key to remove all trunk
group information.
a.

Press the TYPE key.

Dial the four-digit trunk group type (See
TRUNK GROUP TYPE CODES, Table 2-4).

10.

Press the TOLL DENY key.

11.

Press the ADD key to provide toll denial on
the trunk group.
OR

Note 1:

If a call to a trunk group is routed to the overflow group the restrictions of the overflow
group are in effect for that call.

22
rb

TRUNKGROUPS

APPLIES TO GENERIC 203 AND ABOVE
IF TENANT SERVICE IS IN USE
ALL ENTRIES MADE ARE ASSIGNED TO THE TENANT NUMBER DIALED

TO ENTER TRUNK GROUP PROGRAMMING PRESS
TRUNK
GROUP
cl

TENANT
NUMBER

(TRUNK INFORMATION MUST BE ENTERED BEFORE TRUNK GROUPDATA)

SEE NOTE 4 AND 7

cl
TRUNK
GROUP

DIAL
1-12

DIAL
CODE
OR
NOTE
SEE 6

q
DELETE

1 1

,T% 1

ll
I

1 DELETE 1

q-q
DIGIT DIGIT NOTE 8

DIAL
1-12
OR

OVFLO
GROUP
c

PRESS

EOPT
BEFORE DIALING EACH EQUIPMENT NUMBER ENTRY
NUMBER
AFTER LAST ENTRY PRESS ENTER
c
l
c
l

NOTE 5

6. TRUNK GROUP TYPE IS 4 DIGITS

-. 1. -,

l-NO SUPERVISION
P-ANSWER SUPERVISION
3-TOLL REVERSAL
4-OUTGOING AUDIO INHIBITED UNTIL ANSWER SUPERVISION
(GENERIC 203. 204)
OUTGOING AUDIO INHIBITED UNTIL ANSWER SUPERVISION
TIMEOUT OR # DIALED (GENERIC 205)

TO SEE THE TRUNKS IN A TRUNK GROUP:

TO SEE

ALLTRUNK GROUPS:

TO DELETE TRUNK GROUP:

Nl%&

3rd DIGIT
l-ROTARY DIAL OFFICE, NO WAIT FOR DIAL TONE
2-ROTARY DIAL OFFICE, WAIT FOR DIAL TONE
3-TOUCH-TONE DIAL OFFICE, NO WAIT FOR DIAL TONE
4-TOUCH-TONE DIAL OFFICE. WAIT FOR DIAL TONE

4th DIGIT
I-CENTRAL OFFICE
P-NON-CO
3-IDENTIFIED
TRUNK GROUP (NON-CO)

IF GENERIC 203 OR HIGHER IS USED, THE TRUNKS WITHIN A TRUNK GROUP MAY
BE PROGRAMMED FOR EITHER TERMINAL OR CIRCULAR HUNTING, IF TERMINAL
HUNTING IS REQUIRED, ENTER TRUNK EOUIPMENT NUMBERS IN REOUIRED SEOUENCE.
IF CIRCULAR HUNTING IS REOUIRED MARE LAST TRUNK EOUIPMENT NUMBER
THE SAME AS THE FIRST TRUNK EOUIPMENT NUMBER.

USE OF .I'OLL DENY KEY DOES NOT APPLY IF TOLL CONTROL
(GENERIC 204/UP) IS USED
SEE SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-212 OR TOLL CONTROL FORMS THIS SECTION.

TO MAKE A CHANGE TO A TRUNK GROUP. THE LIST OF MEMBERS MUST BE
RE-ENTERED. INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS CAN'NOT BE DELETED OR CHANGED. THE EXISTING TRUNK GROUP LIST IS AUTOMATICALLY DELETED WHEN YOU START TO
ENTER A NEW ONE
ORIGINAL I\ND OVERFLOW TRUNK GROUPS MUST BE THE SAME TYPE AND HAVE
THE SAME TOLL RESTRICTION CHARACTERISTICS.
IF GENERIC 202 IS USED THE TRUNKS WITHIN A GROUP MAY ONLY BE PRDGRAMMED FOR CIRCULAR HUNTING.

2nd DIGIT
l-NO MESSAGE REGISTER
Z-MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 203/lJP)
3SMDR WITHOUT MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 205)
4-SMDR WITH MESSAGE REGISTER
(GENERIC 205)

MITEL

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

APPENDIX 1
MITEL ACTION PROCEDURES

GENERAL
Al.01

Task oriented functions in this section are
i m p l e m e n t e d u s i n g MITEL A C T I O N
PROCEDURES (MAP’s).

Al.02

For experienced personnel, a series of
steps (level one) each numbered [n] and
annotated with minimal information.

Al.08 DECISION Block: Used to indicate a
decision within the level one steps which
must be made. The symbol is based on a hexagon
with the top and bottom sides extended. Decision
text is centred in the symbol.
Al.09 START/FINISH/JUMP TO Block: Used to
indicate the start and finish of a MAP.
Also used to indicate ‘jump to’ points within the
MAP, for example “go to [n]” or “from [n]” or
“return to [n]“. The symbol is a rectangle with
semi circular ends. Text is centred in the symbol.

THE OPERATORS USE OF MAP’S
Experienced

(b)

For inexperienced personnel, each step
referred to in (a) above is amplified by a
connected series of numbered substeps
[nA] (level two).

Operator

Al.03 A typical example of a MAP is shown in
Fig. Al, with the two levels detailed.

For the experienced operator to complete
a task using a MAP, reference to the sequential short form level one steps is usually all
that is necessary. Using Fig. Al-l as an example,
the experienced operator would proceed as
follows.

MAP SYMBOLS

Al.11

Al.04

There are four basic symbol shapes which
may be used in a MAP, and are
defined as follows.
Al.05 AND Block: Used to indicate a level one
step that must be performed. Consists of a square with the word AND centred in the
block.
Al.08 OR Block: Used to indicate a choice of
level one steps, one of which must be
performed. Consists of a rectangle, with the text
centred in the block, and with the word OR appearing between the alternative operations.
Al.07 The rectangle is also used to border instructions which imply that the operator
must perform a task outside the scope of the
MAP. The text is centred in the rectangle.

Al.10

At [l] makes a decision based on the information within the block. If the answer is
YES the operator must proceed to a different
MAP. If the answer is NO the operator is faced
with another decision at block [2].
Al.12 At [2] if the decision is NO there is no requirement to proceed further and the test
is abandoned. This naturally results in a FINISH
block. If the decision is YES the operator proceeds to [3] and [4] in succession, i.e. dials the DID
station number and completes the call to the
check extension.
Al.13

Al-l

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

SECTION MITL9110.99-215

YES

c
Go lo MAP215.15,

AT
[3A]

MAINTENANCE
Se,
tc
?. .Iswkh
..-.

,;
r3.c.
.

__
_
Slcl” 1
mng,ng tone

.__

STATlON NUMBER

ANSWER

DID

DIAL STATfON
ATTENDANT
DID

A3.25

Fig. Al Typical Map Page
Al.15 Using Fig. Al as an example the path

followed should be:
(a)

At [l] and [2] make the decisions called for
at these steps as before.

(b)

At step [3] dial the DID station number by
performing substeps [3A], [3B] and [3C].

Al.2

TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Al.18 Any tools, test equipment or special in-

structions that the operator requires or
needs to know are stated on the first page of each
MAP. If the MAP is long, and contains a number of
sub procedures, these are listed in synopsis form
on the first page.

S E C T I O N MITL9105/9110-98-210 ‘;

APPENDIX 2
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL

This appendix details the preferred order in which the SX-100 or SX-200 PABX should be programmed for features and options required by the customer. This appendix also includes procedures
for programming Multi Digit Toll Control and Speed Call.

A2.01

A2.02

Multi Digit Toll Control is available in Generic 2041~~. Speed Call is available in generic 205 only,
Note that both features require the use of the Extended Programming mode. In this appendix
MAP210-221 will cover entering the Extended mode for both features. MAP210-244 will cover exiting the
Extended mode for both features.

:.
”

A2.03

Table A2-1 details the order of the standard system programming procedures. Table A2-2 details
the order of the Multi Digit Toll Control programming procedures. Table A2-3 details the order of
Speed Call programming of the system.
TABLE A2-1
STANDARD
Title

Step

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

MAP
21 O-201
21 O-202
21 O-203
21 O-204
21 O-205
21 O-206
21 O-207
21 O-208
21 O-209
210-210
21 o-21 1
210-212

System Programming
Select Programming Options
Program System Options
Program COS Options
Assign Feature Access Codes
Program New Extensions
Program Extension Hunt Group
Program New Non Dial-In Trunks
Program New Dial-In Trunks
Program New DID Trunks
Program Trunk Groups
Terminate Programming Mode

TABLE A2-2

MULTI DIGIT TOLL CONTROL
Order

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Option

Selection of Extended Programming
Absorb Plan
Control Plan
Trunk Group Class of Restriction
Restriction Tables
Add an Entry
Displaying Sequential Entrys
Search for an Entry
Delete an Entry
Terminating Programming

MAP No.

21 o-221
21 o-222
21 O-223
21 O-224
21 O-225
21 O-226
21 O-227
21 O-228
2 1 o-229
21 O-244

: ‘.
;‘.

A2-1

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TABLE A2-3
SPEED CALL
Order

1
2
3
4

A2- 2

Option

Selection of Extended Programming
Programming Personal Tables
Convert Tables From Personal to Common Use
Terminating Programming

MAP No.

21
21
21
21

o-221
O-242
O-243
O-244

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-21 0

START
GENERIC

NUMBER

111
Is the system in
programming mode

(

YESI

)
NO

At Equipment:
[2A] Set thumbwheel switch on tone
control card (slot 18, yellow) to
8888

NUMBER

At the Programming Console:
[3A] Press LAM.P TEST key
l
Al&\~~s light, tone rmger
l

[3B]
l

OR
All displays show 8
Press LAMP TEST key
All disp&ys show 8
I&fLLis

light, tone ringer

-0

0
ATT

CLASS
0
0
RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

INTERNAL FIRMWARECODE

0
ERROR
\
CONSOLE

1
CODE

131

AND

PERFORM
LAMP TEST

Fig. 201-l

(>
Go to Sectlon MITL9105/9110-99.350

Press IDENT key
WI
. Source display shows software

generic number and its issue
Fig. 201-l)
b ESTINATION display shows the
MITEL internal issue number and
the code number for the console
(Fig. 201-l)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

bheet

2 of 2

T
From [51

YES

[7A]

Enter all system data in tha order
listed in Table 201-l

ENTER ALL
DATA
FINISH

TABLE 201-l
Step

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
l9
10
11

Title

Select Programming Mode
Program System Options
Program COS Options
Assign Feature Access Codes
Program New Extensions
Progam Extension Hunt Group
Program New Non Dial-In Trunks
Program New Dial-In Trunks
Program New DID Trunks
Program Trunk Groups
Terminate Programming Mode

* Not supplied with Generic 202

A24

MAP

21 O-202
21 O-203
21 O-204
21 O-205
21 O-206
21 O-207
21 O-208
21 O-209
210-210
21 o-21 1
210-212

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210

START

Is system
operatronal and
programmed with
SecurrtidAeccefs

Place console in pro ram mode by dialing Security Access I! ode and go to required MAPS (210-203 through -214)
I

NOTE
programmed
from a console

Place console in programming mode
[3A] Place programming console
overlav over console faceolate
(Fig. 2b2-1)
(381 Press ENTER key twice
All displays dark
[3;] Set thumbwheel switches on
tone control card (card position
18, yellow)
posi- . . to--- appropriate
_.
non (I acile 202-l)
[3D] Press LAMP TEST key
.
LAMP TEST lamp lit

Y E S

To use Pr ramming Security Access
“Bowing criteria must apply:
Code the fol
l Feature 29 (MAP210.205) is programm
ed with the code
l Generic 204/up
is installed

When using the Maintenance console
on the cabinet maintenance panel.

CONSOLE TO
PROGRAMMING I

TABLE 202.1
I

(

to[4]

)

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-210

SELECT PROGRAMMING MODE

1 MAP210-202
Issue 3, July 1980
1 Sheet 2 of 3

Multi Tenants

WI
W. I
r&
.

61
.
.
PEI
.

Set thumbwheel switches on the
Tone Control card to 7776
Press TENANT kev
TENANT lamp lit ’
SOURCE shows 1 or 0
Press ADD key
ADD key lit
DESTINATION shows 1
Press ENTER key
SOURCE display shows 00000000
DESTINATION display shows
00000000
Press RESET key on Scanner
card (card position 19, orange)
System reset, no longer in program mode

[7Al
17Bl
.

64
.
[h
.
.
MULTl TENANT

S E L E C T
S I N G L E
TENANT
SERVICE

[7El
*
-

Set thumbwheel switches on the
Tone Control card to 7776
Press TENANT key
TENANT lamp lit
SOURCE shows 1 or 0
Press DELETE key
DELETE lamp lit
DESTINATION shows 0
Press ENTER key
SOURCE display shows 00000000
DESTINATION display shows
00000000
Press RESET key on Scanner
card (card position 19, orange)
System reset, no longer in program mode

Place console in programming mode
[8A]
Place programming console
overlay over attendant console
faceplate (Fig. 202-l)
[8B]
Press ENTER key twice
All displays dark
&]
Set thumbwheel switche on tone
control card (card postion 18,
yellow) to appropriate position
(Table 202-l)
[8D]
Press LAMP TEST key
.
LAMP TEST lamp lit

lTL9105/9110-96-212

A2-6

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
SELECT PROGRAMMING MODE
MAP210-202
1 Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 3 of 3

EQPT
NUYllER

EXTN
NUMBER

cos
TOLL BUSY LAMP P,CWP
NUM8ER D E N Y N U M B E R GROUP

Fig. 202-l

Programming Console Overlay

.:
:...-:

A2-718

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

I
I

PROGRAM SYSTEM OPTIONS
MAP210-203
1 Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 1 of 4

NOTES
(1) All entries are made from the
console dial pad.
(2) OPTION lamp lit throughout
procedure.
(3) A display of EO indicates that
an incorrect key had been
pressed. Press the key
specified.

I
~

I
I
I

YES

Place console In
programming mode.

Select System Option
[3A] Press OPTION key.
l
OPTION lamp lit
SOURCE display shows 100 and
l
0 if no options enabled or the
number of the first option enabled and 1.
[3S]
l

()Go to MAP210-202

Dial option number required (100
- 234) Table 203-l

SOURCE display shows number
dialed and 1 if the option enabled or 0 if the option is not enabled

PRESS OPTION KEY

DIAL OPTION CODE
(TABLE 203-l)

A2-9

SECTION MITL9110.98-210
PROGRAM SYSTEM OPTIONS
G O - 2 0 3

1~ Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 2 of 4

TABLE 203-l
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option
Number
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113’
114
114’
115
116
117
118
119*
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132*
133*
134’
135
136
137*
138’
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149

A2-10

Option Name
Discriminating Ringing
Transfer Dial Tone
Flexible Night Service
Night Service Automatic Switching
TAFAS Available During Day
Outgoing Trunk Camp-On
Outgoing Trunk Callback
Can Flash if on an Incoming Trunk
Can Flash if on an Outgoing Trunk
Can Flash if Talking to Station
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing if Holding
or in Conference with a Trunk
Lockout Alarm Enable
Tenant Service (set automatically when tenant service is selected when programming)
Flash Time 0.7s (Only in Generic 202 and REV
5 UP)
Tenant Service - Separate Consoles
Vacant Number Intercept to Attendant
Illegal Access Intercept to Attendant
DID/Dial-InlCCSA Vacant/Illegal Intercept to
Attendant
Attendant Camp-On
Attendant Conference
Attendant Busy Override
Attendant Serial Call
Bell Off Enable
Page Button Enable
New Call Tone Enable
Both Mode Standard
Callback Button Enable
Trunk Busy-Out Enable
Both Button Enable
Attendant CO Trunk-CO Trunk Connect
Enable
Attendant CO Trunk-Non CO Trunk Connect
Enable
Attendant Non CO Trunk-Non CO Trunk Connect Enable
Controlled Outgoing Restriction Set-Up
(Room Restriction)
Controlled Station Restriction Set-Up (Do Not
Disturb)
Controlled Station to Station Restriction SetUp (Call Blocking)
Attendant DISA Code Set-Up Enable
Limited Wait For Dial Tone
Message Waiting Set-Up (lamp)
Message Waiting Set-Up (bell)
Attendant Timed Recall - Camp-On -20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Camp-On -40s
Attendant Timed Recall - Don’t Answer - 20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Don’t Answer - 40s
Attendant Timed Recall - Hold - 20s
Attendant Timed Recall - Hold - 40s
Night Service Timeout - 20s
Night Service Timeout - 40s
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Timeout -20s
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Timeout -40s
Call Forwarding - Busy (System, DID Dial-In
Tie Trunk, CCSA)

SECTION MITL9110.98-210

TABLE 203-l (CONT’D)
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option
Number
150
151
152
153
154
155
156’
157*
158’
159*
160’
161’
162’
163’
164’
165*
166”
167*
168’
169’
170’
171*
172*
173’
174*
175’
176’
177’
178’
179’
180’
181’
182’
183*
184
185
186
187
188
189
190”
191”
192**
193”
194”
195”
196”
197**
198’*
199”
200**
201”
202**
203**
204’*
205’
l

Option Name
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer (System, DID
Dial-In Tie Trunk, CCSA)
Park and Call-Hold Recall - 2 minutes
Park and Call-Hold Recall - 4 minutes
End of Dial Signal for Outgoing Trunks (#)
24 Hour Clock
First Digit Toll Deny
Message Registration Enable
Message Registration: Count Additional
Supervisions
Message Registration: Timer = 20 seconds
Message Registration: Timer = 40 seconds
Message Registration: Multiplier = 4 units
Message Registration: Multiplier = 3 units
Message Registration: Multiplier = 2 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 8 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 7 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 6 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 5 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 4 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 3 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 2 units
Message Registration: Surcharge = 1 unit
DID to Non-CO Trunks via Attendant Inhibit
GUEST ROOM Button Enable
ROOM STATUS Button Enable & Display
Enable
Do Not Disturb Intercept to Attendant
Do Not Disturb and Message Waiting
Displays
Single Digit Dialing Enable
Single Digit Dialing Time-Out = 3 seconds
Single Digit Dialing Time-Out = 5 seconds
Attendant Station Busy-Out Enable
Flash Timing = 0.7 seconds
Flash Timing = 0.9 seconds
Flash Timing = 1.1 seconds
Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Automatic Wakeup Enable
Automatic Wakeup Print
Automatic Wakeup Music On Hold
Room Register Audit Enable
Room Status Audit Enable
Message Register & Message Waiting
Change Print Enable
Ignore Print Enable
Remote System Reset - Protection Override
Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect
Toll Control Enable
Traffic Measurement Enable
Traffic Measurement Extreme Value Mode
Traffic Measurement Compact Report
Traffic Measurement Polling
Traffic Measurement Autoprint
Identified Trunk Group Enable

Generic 203 and above
** G e n e r i c 2 0 4 o n l y

* Generic 204 and 205
t Generic 205 only

Option
Number
206*
207”
208**

209*
210**
211”
212**
213**
214*’
215
216t
217t
218t

219t
220t
221t
222t
223t
224t
225t
226t
227t
228t
229t
230t
231 t
232t
233t
234t

Option Name
Inhibit Automatic Supervision
Printer Carriage Return Delay
Zero Message Register After Room Register
Audit
Traffic Measurement - Console Enable
Attendant Printer Control Enable
System ID Enable
Nightbell 3 with Minor Alarm Enable
HIM Printouts: Extra Line Feeds
Automatic Wakeup Alarm
Reserved
Speed Call Enable
Speed Call Programming Enable
Speed Call: Confidential Number Display
and Change Enable
Reserved
Station Message Detail Recording:
Outgoing Calls
Station Message Detail Recording:
Incoming Calls
SMDR: Extended Record
SMDR: Record Meter Pulses
SMDR: Indicate Long Calls
SMDR: Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls
SMDR: Record Only Incoming calls
(CCSA & Non-dial tie trunks)
SMDR: Drop Calls of Less Than 8 Digits
Discriminating Dial Tone
Special ANI Feature
Account Code Enable
Account Code Length, 4 Digits
Account Code Length, 8 Digits
Account Code Length, 12 Digits
Variable Length Account Codes

A2-11

1.
:
i:. :

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM SYSTEM OPTIONS

MAP210-203
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 4 of 4

[5A]
l

Press ADD key
SOURCE display shows opti
number dialed and 1, option
tive

[5B]
l

Are more options
to be added or

Store system options
[7A] Press ENTER key
.
ENTER lamp lit

S ENTER KEY

[8A]
.

Press LAMP TEST key
LAMP TEST lamp lit

S LAMP TEST KEY

A2-12

Press DELETE key
SOURCE display shows option
number dialed and 0, option

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM COS OPTIONS

MAP210-204

Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 1 of 6
(1) All entries are made from the
console dial pad
(2) COS DEFINE lamp remains lit
through procedure
(3)A display of EO indicates that an
incorrect key was pressed; press
key specified

SYNOPSIS
Define COS group (1 . 16)
Enter all option codes (33 . 94)
Press ADD or DELETE keys
Press ENTER key

Place console in
programming mode.

I
YES
(e)

Select COS Pro r a m

[3A] Press COki DEFINE key
. COS DEFIYE lamp lit
l
gg:FiCE display shows current
[3B] Dial class-of-service number to
. be defined (l-16).
DESTINATION display shows
COS number dialed
-

PRESS COS DEFINE KEY
DIAL COS NUMBER

(

Goto[4]

)

A2-13

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM COS OPTIONS
MAP216204
Lie 3, July 1980

[4A] Press OPTION key
l
OPTION lamp lit
[46]

SOURCE display shows COS
number dialed followed by 33
and 0 (no options assigned) or
first option assigned to the COS
followed by a 1.

AND

PRESS OPTION
KEY

COS number dialed
out of range 1-16

NO (Delete options)

Add options to COS
[74 Dial option code
be added to this
. OPTION lamp lit.
. SOURCE display shows COS
number followed by option
number dialed, followed by 0.

[8A] Press ADD key
l
ADD lamp lit
[8B] SOURCE display shows COS
number, new option code and 1
(option active)

VI
-cl
AND

DIAL OPTION
CODE (TABLE 204-l)

rI61 ’
AND

ADD OPTION

v
Go

to 191

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

TABLE 204-l
CLASS-OF-SERVICE OPTIONS
Option
Number Extension Options
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
‘43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
‘63
l 64

Option
Number Extension Options

Automatic Callback
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Never a Forwardee
Directed Call Pickup
Executive Busy Override
Data Security
Station Override Security
Inward Restriction (DID)
Originate Only
Receive Only
Flash Disable
Never a Consultee
Broker’s Call
Station Conference
Meet-Me Conference
Camp-On
Do Not Overflow
Paging Access
TAFAS Access
Hold Pickup
Account Code Access
Manual Line
Contact Monitor
Non-CO Trunk via Attendant Inhibit
CO Trunks via Attendant Inhibit
No Dial Tone
Flash for Attendant
Call Blocking
Message Register

* Generic 203 and above
** Generic 204 only

65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
‘77
l 78
l 79
l 80
*al
“82
t83
t84
t85
t86
t87
t88
t89
t90
t91
t92
t93
t94

Trunk Group 1 Access
Trunk Group 2 Access
Trunk Group 3 Access
Trunk Group 4 Access
Trunk Group 5 Access
Trunk Group 6 Access
Trunk Group 7 Access
Trunk Group 8 Access
Trunk Group 9 Acess
Trunk Group 10 Access
Trunk Group 11 Access
Trunk Group 12 Access
Message Waiting Applies
Room Do Not Disturb Setup Enable
Call Hold and Retrieve Access
Room Status Applies
Call Forward System Inhibit
Alarm Call Setup Enable
Forced Account Code Entry
No SMDR Record for This Line
Speed Call Table 1 and 2 Access
Speed Call Table 3 and 4 Access
Speed Call Table 5 and 6 Access
Speed Call Table 7 and 8 Access
Speed Call Table 9 and IO Access
Speed Call Table 11 and 12 Access
Speed Call Table 13 and 14 Access
Speed Call Table 15 and 16 Access
Speed Call Table 17 and 18 Access
Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing

t Generic 205 only

TABLE 204.2
OPTION CONFLICTS
45
46
46
46
48
62
62

Option
Receive Disable
Flash Disable
Flash Disable
Flash Disable
Brokers Call
Flash for Attendant
Flash for Attendant

and

58
48
49
62
49
49
48

Option
Contact Monitor
Brokers Call
Station Conference
Flash for Attendant
Station Conference
Station Conference
Brokers Call

A2-15

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM COS OPTIONS

Option number dialed
out of range 33.94
and El or E5

OPTION
NUMBER
AND E5

YES

Remove Option from COS
[12A]
Press OPTION key
[12B] Dial option code (33 - 82) to be
removed from the COS
l
SOURCE display shows COS
number, option code, and 1 (option active)

51
1121

ANI

PRESS OPT/ON KEY
DIAL OPTION CODE

A2-18

Conflicting option exists.
) Remove conflicting option.
Table 204-2

*
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

:
..;.

[13A]
.
l

Press DELETE key
DELETE lamp lit
SOURCE display shows COS
number, option code, and 0 (op.
tion inactive)
-

AND

DELETE OPTION
AND CHECK DISPLAYS

D o e s bell ring and
out of range 33 -

dialed and El or E5

Are more options
to be removed
from the COS

Store COS Options
[16A] Press ENTER kev
. ENTER lamp lit L
*
SOURCE display shows current
COS number

WI
<

AND

PRESS ENTER KEY

(oolollll)
A2.17

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
PROGRAM COS OPTIONS
MAP210-204
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 6 of 6

Are more COS

1181
[18A]
.

Press LAMP TEST key
LAMP TEST lamp

AND
ri
PRESS LAMP TEST KEY

A2-18

S E C T I O N

MITL9105/9110-98.210

ASSIGN FEATURE ACCESS CODES

MAP210-205
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 1 of 3

I
I

1.
2.
3.

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial pad.
FEATURE lamp lit throuahout
procedure.
.
A display ot EO indicates that an
incorrect key was pressed, check
procedure and press correct key.
SYNOPSIS
Enter feature number.
Assign or delete access code.
Press ENTER key.
Repeat for all required features.

t
Set console to
programming mode.

Programming mode

YES

f
Go to MAP210-202

SELECT FEATURE ACCESS CODE PROGRAM
[3A]
Press FEATURE key.
e
SOURCE display shows feature
number and its assigned access
code or the feature number and
----, no access code assigned to
the feature.
[3B]
l

Dial number of feature to be added or changed (Table 205-l)
SOURCE display shows feature
number and its assigned access
code or the feature number and
---*, no access code assigned to
the feature.
DESTINATION display shows
feature number dialed.

d
[31

AND

PRESSFEATUREKEY
DIAL FEATURE CODE
(TABLE 205-l)

Go to [4]

I-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

ASSIGN FEATURE ACCESS CODES
MAP210-205
Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 2 of 3

DESTINATION display shows feature
number dialed and error code.
El - feature number dialed out of
range 1 .42
Check feature number (Table 205-l)

(Y&T)
Is feature to
be removed from
system

ASSIGN FEATURE ACCESS CODE - -I
Dial new access code
WI.
ACCESS CODE lamp lit
.
SOURCE display shows new
feature number-and its access
code or the feature number
and ----, if no access code is
assigned to the feature.
e
DESTINATION display shows
access code to be assigned.
-

Press ENTER key

A2-20

SOURCE display shows
feature number and assigned
access code.

YES

[7Al
.

STORE FEATURE ACCESS CODE

Press DELETE key.
SOURCE display shows the
feature number and 0, feature
not active.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
ASSIGN FEATURE ACCESS CODES
MAP210-205
issue 3, July 1980
1 Sheet 3 of 3

Are more access
codes to be

Press LAMP TEST key
All lamps dark

TABLE 205-l
FEATURE ASSIGNMENTS
Feature
Number Description

20
21

Feature
Number Description

Cal, Forwards Lbn;t Answer
Call Forward Follow MB
Call Park
Did cau Pickup
Directed Cdl PiCkUP
Meet-Me Conference
pager 1
pager 2
HCM Pick”*ACCBSS
pager 1 and 2
TAFASAII
TAFAS.1
TAFAS-2
TAFAS-3
Attendant
Function
hlain,enance
Function
DID Attendant Access Code
Direct inward System Access

..:
:-.i:.

-~ ~~

Generic 203 and above
Generic 204 only
t First digit conflicts between these codes and other access codes are allowed. See Section
MITL9105/9110-98-105
for complete description of feature operation.
l

A2-21122

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM

EXTENSIONS

NOTES
(1)

(2)
(3)

All entries are made from the
console dial pad.
EXTN lamp lit throughout procedure.
A display of EQ indicates that an
incorrect key has been pressed.
;rps the key specrfred In the

required, this MAP is not applicable.

SYNOPSIS
Select required tenants (l-4)
Enter extension equi ment number.
Enter extension num rid er.
Enter COS number.
Enter toll allow/deny.
Enter busy lamp position number.
Enter picku group number.
Press ENT PR key.

START

)No
Have all installation
forms been completed

YES

Place console
in programming mode.

A2-23

SECTION MlTL9105/911 O-98-21 0
PROGRAM

EXTENSIONS

MAPPlO-206
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 2 of 7

Is multi tenant
service to be used

(SINGLE
TENANT)
[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Press TENANT key
Dial tenant number (l-4)
Press ENTER key

SELECT EXTENSION PROGRAM
[5A] Press EXTN key
.
EXTN lamp lit

PRESS

EXTN

KEY

NOTE
E uipment number 001 is reserve ii for the test line and should
not be assigned to a working extension.
J

ENTER EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[6A] Press EQPT NUMBER key
.
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows lowest
assigned equipment number or
001 if no equipment number is
assigned
[6B]
.
l

Dial equipment number to be
defined, Fig. 206-l. (l-1121161-256)
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
SOURCE display shows current
equipment number
DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed

P R E S S ECWPMENT
NUMBER KEY
DIAL E Q U I P M E N T N U M B E R
( F I G . 206.7)

DESTINATION display shows equipment
number and error code. El number dialed out of range l-1121161-256.
Check number. Fig. 206-l

A2-24

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM

EXTENSIONS

---I

MAP210-206

1 issue &July 1980

1 Sheet3 of 7

SHELFZ(SX-2000NLY)

PLUG1

PLUG3

PLUG5

001 0 0 9 0 1 7 0 2 5 0 3 3 041

0 4 9 0 5 7 0 6 5 0 7 3 081 089

5
g

002 010 018 026 034 042

0 5 0 0 5 8 0 6 6 0 7 4 0 8 2 090

0 0 3 011

051

004 012 020 028 036 044

019 027 035 043

-I-

0 5 9 0 6 7 0 7 5 0 8 3 091

099 1071

0 5 2 0 6 0 0 6 8 0 7 6 0 8 4 092

100 1081

005 013 021 029 037 0451053 061 069 077 085 093

101 1091

006 014 022 030 038 0461054 062 070 078 086 094
S 1007 015 023 031 039 0471055

063 071 079 087 095

g 1008 016 024 032 040 0481056 064 072 080 088 096
2

PLUG2

PLUG4

19 20 21 22

1 CARD POSITION

1 SLOTNUMBER I

PLUG6

SHELF1

NOTES:

1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FOR THETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2.TRUNKEQUlPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASlNDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.
Fig. 206-l Hardware/Equipment

Numbering

A2-25

1.
:

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM EXTENSIONS

1 MAP210-206
1 Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 4 of 7

ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER
[8A] Dial extension number
. EXTN NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment number and existing extension number if assigned
l DESTINATION display shows
dialed extension number
-

EXTENSION

NUMBER

DESTINATION display shows El, E4 or E5

Cl Numbering plan conflict, check entry.
If entry is correct, press CONFIRM key
and continue, the original assignment is
deleted. If entry is incorrect, return to [A.

El -bad data received by CPU.
E4-extension number exists.
E5-extension
number in conflict
with existing numbering plan.

ENTER COS NUMBER
[lOA] Dial COS number (l-16)
l
COS NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display sho.ws equiprn;-n;;;mber and exrstmg COS
.

DESTINATION display
COS number dialed

shows
COS NUMBER

Press TOLL DENY
key. Does bell ring

DESTINATION
display shows COS
number and error code. El-COS
number out of range (1.16).

NO
(-Qk-)

A2-26

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210

See CAUTION at start of MAPSlO-206.
I-

TOLL AALLOWED
TOLL
LL

TOLL DEN/E
DEN/ED
r
[14A]
[l
.

ASSIGN TOLL ACCESS
[13AJ Press DELETE key
.
DELETE lamp lit
l
SmOJK$ display
SOURCE
display shows equipment number and existing Toll
Allow/Deny code
coae (0
(u == HIIOW,
Allow,
1 = Deny)
.
DESTINATION display shows
O-Toll Allow

t- A N D

A N D

.
PRESS
DELETE
KEY

PRESS
ADD
KEY

Press BUSY
LAMP NUMBER
key. Does bell ring

DESTINATION display shows Toll Allow
or Deny code and error code. El, bad
data received by CPU.

-TNO

ASSIGN EXTENSION TO BUSY LAMP
FIELD
[16A] Dial BUSY LAMP NUMBER
(l-150) to be assigned to extension (See Fig. 206-2
.
BUSY LAMP NUMB ER l a m e lit
l
SOURCE disolav shows eq’uipment numbed
and existin 9 BUSY
Lamp assignment
.
DESTINATION display shows
new Busy Lamp Number

Press ADD key
ADD lamp lit
SOURCE display shows equipment number and the existing
toll access code
DESTINATION display shows
code 1 (Deny)

(y&F)

m[161

AND
7
I

DIAL REQUIRED BUSY
LAMP NUMBER
(FIG. 206-2)

A2-27

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
1 PROGRAM

EXTENSIONS

EMAP210-206

1 Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 6 of 7

I I

l
31

l
61

l
91

ooooooooo
32

l
41

l
51

ooooooooo
54

*eeaeoeoo
64

ooooooooo
94

100

ooooooooo

121122 123 124 125126127128129

130

101 102 103104 105 106 107108 109 110

111 112 113 114115 116117 118119120

131 132133 134 135 136 137138 139140

141 142 143144145146

Fig. 206-2

A2.28

ooooooooo
42

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

147 148149 150

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

DESTINATION display shows Busy
Lamp Number and error code.
El - number entered out of range (1.150).
Check entry and return to [15].
C2 . position dialed already assigned. If
this IS a valid change press the CONFIRM key and continue. If Busy Lamp
position is in error return to [15].

ASSIGN EXTENSION TO PICKUP
GROUP
f1SA1
Dial Pickup Group number to
.
which extension i s assigned
.
PICKUP Group lamp lit
e
SOURCE display shows equipment number and current pickup
group assignment, 0 is displayed
if no assignment IS made
.
DESTINATION display shows
new pickup group assignment
-

Sheet 7 of 7

-If
I I
NO

[181

AND

DIAL PICKUP
GROUP NUMBER

DESTINATION

display

shows

pickup

Press ENTER
key. Does bell ring
i7 y extension has a used message
register. Clear message register.
.
I

(Returnfollll)

Are other
Tenant extensions
to be programmed

NO
.: ,:
.‘.

YES

[22A] Press LAMP TEST key
.
LAMP TEST lamp lit
.
All lamps except LAMP TEST go
dark
-

A2-29130

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
1 PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS 1
1 MAP210-207

1Issue 3, July 1980
1Sheet

(1)

(2)
(3)

(4)

of 6

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial pad.
HUNT GROUP lamp remains lit
throughout rocedure.
A display oP EO indicates that an
incorrect key has been pressed.
Press the key specified in the
MAP.
If any e uipment number is to be
change iI wrthin a hunt group, the
hunt group must be re-entered.

SYNOPSIS
Select required tenant.
Enter hunt group number (l-12).
Enter master hunt number.
Enter all required equipment
numbers.
Determine type of hunting
Press ENTER key.

installation forms
been completed

Complete

installation

Has console
programming mode

programming mode.

Go to MAP210-202

Go to MAP210.206

A2-37

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS
MAP2107207
Issue 3, July 1980
1Sheet 2 of 6

Is multi tenant
service to be

~!%GLE
TENANT)
[5A]
[5B]
[5C]

Press TENANT key
Dial tenant number (l-4)
Press ENTER key
I-

TENANT/NG

SELECT HUNT GROUP PROGRAM
[6A]
Press HUNT GROUP key
l
SOURCE display shows hunt
group 1 and access code if
assigned
[6B] lI?\;equired
hunt group number
\’

-161
-

’
AND

‘-I

SOURCE display shows hunt
group 1 and master number if
assi ned
DES%NATlON display shows
new hunt group number

PRESS HUNT GROUP KEY
D/AL HUNT GROUP NUMBER

Press ACCESS

;;;lzE;
[8A)
l
l

HUNT GROUP MASTER

;ioae;unt

group master code (See

ACCESS CODE lamp lit
SOURCE display shows hunt
group number and existing
master number
DESTINATION display shows
master number dialed

P
PI

DIAL MASTER
CODE NUMBER

(xi-)
:

()
Return to [6]

AND

A2-32

DESTINATION display
shows hunt group
number dialed and error
code. El -number out of
range 1-12.

NOTE The master number is the
number which when dialed will
access the hunt group. This
number cannot be assigned to
an extension.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS

MAP210-207

1Issue 3, July 1980
1Sheet 3 of 6

7
From [8]

ASSIGN EXTENSIONS TO HUNT GROUP
[lOA] Dial equipment number of first
extension in this hunt group
.
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows hunt
group n u m b e r and existing equipment number if one is assigned
or the hunt group number alone
if no equipment number is
assigned to the hunt group
.
DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed

DESTINATION display shows hunt
roup master number and error code.
I!l-bad data received by CPU
E4-access code already assigned
Efi-numbering plan conflict

r
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS

DESTINATION display shows equipmenf
number dialed and error code.
El - number entered out of range
l-112/161-256 return to [9]
E3 - master number not entered,
return to (71
E6 - equipment number dialed is not
defined as an extension or extension has a used message register.
Check equipment number; if incorrect return to 191. If correct, press
LAMP TEST key and go to
MAP210-206 and enter extension information.
If message register shows a non-zerc
content, clear the register and ensure
COS of extension does not include Op
tion 64 (Message Register).

[12A]
l
l

Dial equipment number of next
extension in this hunt group
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
SOURCE display shows hunt
group number and existing equip
tieni number
DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed
EOPT

A2-34

114)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS
MAP210-207
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 5 of 6

ASSIGN TYPE OF HUNTING

ClRCULA R
HfJNTlNG

DESTINATION display shows equipment
number dialed and error code
El - number entered out of ran e
I-112/161-256, return to [II 7.
56 - equipment number dialed is not
defined as an extension or
extension has a used message
re ister. Check equipment number,
if Bncorrect return to [II . If
correct, press LAMP TE sT key and
go to MAP210-206 and enter
extension information.

EWIFtCE display is as shown in Step

.Il6Al .
l

Dial first equipment number on
this hunt giotip
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
SOURCE display shbws hunt
group and last equipment
number entered
DESTINATION display shows
first equipment number entered

-1161 ’
l

AND
I

23
Go to (171

A2-35

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM EXTENSION HUNT GROUPS

MAP210-207

klssue3,

July 1980

Sheet 6 of 6

Incorrect Number Dialed
DESTINATION display shows equipment
number dialed and error code
El - number entered out of ran e
l-112/161-256, return to 111 3
E6 - equipment number dialed is not
YES
defined as an extension or
extension has a used message
register, return to 1151

STORE HUNT GROUP DATA

~~~IRCE

display is as shown in Step
I

1161
f

N O

YES

.
[20AI
.
.

Press LAMP TEST key
All displays dark
All lamps dark except LAMP
TEST lamp

AND
b
PRESS
LAMP TEST
v

FINISH

KEY

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

1 MAP210-208

Issue 3, July 1980
Issue 1 of 10

(1)

(2)
(4

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial pad
TRUNK lamp remains lit
throughout rocedure
A display oPEO indicates that an
incorrect key was pressed. Press
the key specified in MAP and
proceed.

SYNOPSIS
Select tenant service if required
Enter equipment number
(2-1121162-256)
Enter Trunk type number (1 or 5,11 or 51)
Enter LDN assignment
Enter DAY assignment
Enter NIGHT 1 assignment
Enter NIGHT 2 assignment
Enter Busy Lamp Position number
Press ENTER key

Have all
installation forms
been completed

Complete all installation forms.

YES

Has console

Set console to programming mode.

programming mode
YES

1
Go to MAPPlO-202

A2-37

i
:

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

MAP210-298
Issue 3, July 1980

Issue 2 of 10

Is multi tenant
service to be
used

(EVG‘E
SELECT TENANT SERVICE
[4A]
Press TENANT key
[4B] Dial tenant number (l-4)
[4C] Press ENTER key

TENANT)

-I-

SELECT TRUNK PROGRAM
[5A] Press TRUNK key
l
TRUNK lamp lights and remains
lit throughout procedure.
-

+-tfJ

PRESS TRUNK KEY

ENTER EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[6A] Press EQPT NUMBER key
.
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows current
equipment number
[6B]
Dial equipment number of trunk
(Fig. 208-l)
.
EQPT number lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows current
equipment number
.
DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed

ICO C o , n NO
f i r/
m

e n t r y

NOTE

E uipment number 001 is reset-v
e 1 for the test line and must not
be assigned to a trunk.

s e e

N O T E

b e l o w .

NOTE
The equipment number dialed is either
assigned to an extension or does not
contain a trunk card.
Check equipment number and card slot.
If you wish to remove the previous
assignment and assign this equipment
osition to the trunk press CONFIRM
R ey and return to [S]. If you wish to
change the equipment entry, return to
141.

A2-38

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM

NON

DIAL-INTRUNKS

.-..
:
.’

SHELF 2 (SX-200 ONLY)

PLUG1

PLUG3

PLUG5

0 0 5 0 1 3 021 0 2 9 0 3 7 0 4 5

0 5 3 061 0 6 9 0 7 7 0 8 5 0 9 3

101 1 0 9

006 014 022 030 038 046

054 062 070 078 088 094

102 110

;

0 0 7 0 1 5 0 2 3 031

039 047

0 5 5 0 6 3 071 0 7 9 0 8 7 0 9 5

1 0 3 111

008 016 024 032 040 048

056 064 072 080 088 096

1 0 4 1121

2 .

1
1

2
3

4
4

PLUG2

5
5

6
6

PLUG4

1 7 18

22 1

CARD POSITION

17 18

SLOT NUMBER

PLUG6

642

SHELF 1
NOTES:

1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FOR THE TEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2,TRUNKEQUIPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASINDIVIDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.

Fig. 208-l Hardware/Equipment Numbering

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS
MAP210-208
Issue 3, July 1980
Issue 4 of 10

TABLE 008-l
Code
1
5
11
51

SELECT TRUNK TYPE
[8A]
Dial trunk type code, Table 2087
l
TYPE lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment number of trunk and its
current type
.
DESTINATION display shows
new trunk type entered

Type
Both way CO Trunk VNL
Non Dial-In Tie Trunk VNL
Both way CO Trunk Non VNL
Non Dial-In Tie Trunk Non VNL

DIAL TRUNK TYPE
TABLE 208-l

G;;;)E-j,
DESTINATION display shows trunk type

ASSIGN TRUNK TO LDN KEY
[lOA] Dial LDN key number (l-4) to be
assigned to trunk
.
LDN lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment number and current LDN
key assignment
.
DESTINATION display shows
new LDN assignment

+---j ANDII
DIAL LDN
ASSIGNMENT

A2-40

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

From [lo]

DESTINATION displa shows equipment
number and error cox8.
El-LDN assignment out of range (l-4),
check assignment.

Press DAY NUMBER
key. Does bell ring

(-Y&-)

ENTER DAY ASSIGNMENT
[12A] Dial DAY assignment of trunk.
See Table 208-2
.
DAY lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment number and current day
assignment (Table 208-2)
.
DESTINATION display shows
new day assignment (Table 208-2)
i

-wd

TABLE 208-2
1 Code Assignment

AND

DIAL DAY
A S S IlG N M E N T
T A B L E 208.2

#O
#l
#2
#3
nnn

Attendant
Bell 1 plus Attendant
Bell 2 plus Attendant
Bell 3 plus Attendant
Equipment number
of extension
+r aa Hunt group number 1-12

I
Display 1
JO
-I1
J2
J3
nnn
Las

NOTE
The # Key is displayed as J on the console display. The * Key is displayed as
L on the console display.

(Yz--)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS
lMAP210-208
1Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 6 of 10

Press NIGHT 1 key.

I
NO

Is this
this Trunk to be
be
assigned to NIGHT
service 1

NO
ENTER NIGHT 1 ASSIGNMENT
[18A] Dial code of equipment to which
&u&is to be connected (Table
l
l

NIGHT 1 lamp lit
SOURCE display shows current
a s s i nment of trunk
DESB INATION display shows
code dialed

TABLE 2063
Code Assignment
TABLE 208-3

#O
Attendant console
#I Bell 1 plus Attendant
#2 Bell 2 plus Attendant
#3 Bell 3 plus Attendant
nnn Equipment number
of extension
+aa Hunt group number l-12

Display
JO
Jl
5
nnn
Las

NOTE
The # Key is displayed as J on the console display. The * Key is displayed as
L on the console display.

Go to 1161

A2-42

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS
MAP210-208
1 Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 7 of 10

DESTINATION
display shows night
assignment dialed and error code.
El -assignment entered incorrect,
check assignment.

(Y&T-)
Is this trunk
to be assigned to
NIGHT service 2

YES
ENTER NIGHT 2 ASSIGNMENT
[18A] Dial code of equipment
to which trunk is to be
connected. Table 208-4
.
NIGHT 2 lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows
current assignment of
trunk
.
DESTINATION display
shows code dialed

1181
TABLE 208-4

AND

Code Assignment

Display

ASSIGN
NlGHT 2
T A B L E 208-4

NOTE
The # Key is displayed as eon the con.
sole display. The * Key is displayed as
L on the console display.

Go to [I91

A243

SECTION MITL910519110~98-210
PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

DESTINATION display shows Night
assignment dialed and
El -assignment entered incorrect,
check assignment.

Press BUSY LAMP

Is this trunk to
busy lamp position

YES I- NO

ASSIGN TRUNK TO BUSY LAMP FIELD
[21A] Dial busy lamp position assigned
to the trunk (Fig. 208-2)
.
BUSY LAMP number lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment number of trunk and current busy lamp assignment
.
DESTINATION display shows
new busy lamp assignment

Press ENTER key
Does bell ring

YES

DESTINATION display shows busy lamp
osition dialed and
4 1 -position number dialed out of range
1.150
CZ-position assigned see NOTE below
t

NOTE
lamp position dialed already
dialed is correct,
IRM key, this will remove
the original assignment and assign the
busy lamp positron to this trunk. The
busy lamp will therefore, indicate multile numbers. Multiple appearances may
!Ie removed by proceedmg through this
MAP.

h2-44

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM

NON

DIAL-INTRUNKS

lMAP210-208

lssue3,July1980
Sheet9of 10

l
31

l
61

l
4

ooooooooo

3 3 34 35

6 3 64

9 2 93

3 6 37

3 8 39

ooooooooo
44

4 6 47

ooooooooeo
51

53 54

5 6 57

ooooooooo
65

oooeooooo
9 4 95

9 7 98

99 100

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

121122 123 124125126127128129 130

ooooooooo

101 102 1 0 3 1 0 4 105 106 107108109 110

ooooooooo

1 1 1 112 113 1 1 4 1 1 5 116117 118119120

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
142135 143144145
yj 131 141
132133 134
136 137138 139140 146 147 148 149 150

Fig. 208-2

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

A245

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

I
I

PROGRAM NON DIAL-IN TRUNKS

MAP210-208

1Issue 3, July 1980
ISheet 10 of 10

Are trunks
to be programmed
for other
tenants

[25A]
.
.

Press LAMP TEST key
All displays dark
All lamps dark except LAMP
TEST lamp
PRESS
K E Y

LAMP

TEST

A246
.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial pad
(2) TRUNK lamp remains lit
throughout rocedure
(3) A display oP EO indicates that
an incorrect key was pressed.
Press the key specified in
MAP and proceed.
(4)

(1)

CAUTION
If Multi-Digit Toll Control
(Generic 204) is required this
MAP is not applicable. Trunks
must be programmed in accordance
with Section MITL9105/9110-96-212.

SYNOPSIS
Select tenant service if required.
Press TRUNK key.
Enter Equi ment number (2.112/162-256)
Enter Trun R type number 2 or 4, 21 or 41
Enter Trunk COS
Enter Toll Allow/Deny code
Enter Busy Lamp Position number
Press ENTER

START

Complete all installation forms.
been completed

YES

Has console
Set console to programming mode.
programming mode

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

r
r

PROGRAM DIAL-IN TRUNKS

MAP210-209

Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 2 of 8

Is multi tenant

SELECT TENANT SERVICE
[4A]
Press TENANT key
[4B] Dial tenant number (l-4)
[4C] Press ENTER key

SELECT TRUNK PROGRAM
[5A] Press TRUNK key
l
TRUNK lamp lights and remains
lit throughout procedure.

ENTER EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[6A]
Press EQPT NUMBER key
.
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE displav shows current
equipment number
[6B]
Dial equipment number of trunk
(Fi,g. 209-l)
l
EQPT number lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows current
equipment number
.
DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed

A2-48

PRESS TRUNK KEY

yoss;gned to equipment numbers 001
=iS EQPT NUMBER KEY
DIAL EQPT NO.
(FIG. 209-l)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PLUG7

1 7 4 1 8 2 1 9 0 1 9 8 206 214 2 2 2 2 3 0 2 3 8 2 4 6 2541

1 6 7 175
g

1 8 3 191

168 176 1 8 4 1 9 2

5
1

PLU

1 9 9 2071215
200 208

6
36

PLUG8

2 2 3 231

239 247 255

216 224 232 240 248 256

PLUG10

PLUG12

21
51

22
52

I
4

CARD POSITION
1

SLOT

PLUG1
0 0 9 0 1 7 025

PLUG3

I
0 3 3 0411049

0 5 7 065

1051

ri2 010 018 026 034 0421050 058 066 074 082 0901098

1061

i ~019 027 035 0431051 059 067 075 083 091[099

1071

t
8

D O 6 0 1 4 0 2 2 030

038 046

0 5 4 0 6 2 0 7 0 0 7 8 086 0 9 4

102

D O 7 0 1 5 0 2 3 031

0 3 9 047

0 5 5 0 6 3 071

087 095

1 0 3 111

5
2

D O 8 016

0 2 4 0 3 2 0 4 0 048

0 5 6 0 6 4 0 7 2 0 8 0 0 8 8 096

1 0 4 112

2
2

4
4

5
5

6
6

079

110

PLUG2

PLUG4

z
zjd
z=
EL
fi=

PLL

0 7 3 081 0891097

SHELF 2 (SX-200 ONLY)

001

NUMBER 1

P
=z
z=
3:
gz
2s

P
cz
zs
=I=ct
22

1211111
-

RESERVED

I31

FOR
COMMON

14121

CONTROLS

7
18141
15
15

CARD POSITION

SLOT NUMBER

PLUG6

209-l

Hardware/Equipment

642

.._..
. ‘ -:z
-: i:_

1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FORTHETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2,TRUNKEQUIPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASINDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.

Fig.

SHELF 1
NOTES:

I
1

Numbering

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

[BA]

DESTINATION display shows
equipment number dialed and
El-number out of range
2-112/162-256,
return to [4]
EG-trying
to program an extension
with message registration, return to

- A N D

[41

CO-Confirm

entry

see

NOTE
The equipment number dialed is either
assigned to an extension or does not
contain a trunk card.
Check equipment number and card slot.
If you wish to remove the previous
assignment and assign this equipment
osition to the trunk press CONFIRM
R ey and return to [A. If you wish to
change the equipment entry return to 161.

.
CORRECT

NOTE
-

Remove Trunk

[lOA] Press DELETE key
.
DELETE lamp lit
.
SOURCE display shows equipment number and its current
class
.
DESTINATION display shows 0

AND
TABLE 209-l
Code

SELECT TRUNK TYPE
[llA] Dial trunk code. Table 209-l
l
TYPE lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows the
equipment number of the trunk
and its current type
.
DESTINATION display shows
trunk type entered

TRUNK

DATA

AND

Type
@c.t

Inward System Access

4 Dial-In Trunk VNL
21 Direct Inward System Access
Non VNL
41 Dial-In Trunk Non VNL

D/AL T R U N K T Y P E
CODE. TABLE 209.1

Press

COS NUMBER

(+l)
(-T&q
A2450

DESTINATION display shows the trunk
t pe code and error code
P1 - code is not 2, 4, 21 or 41

SECTION MITL91051911

ENTER COS NUMBER
[13A] Dial COS number (l-16)
.
COS NUMBER lamp lit
.
SOURCE display shows equipment number of trunk and its existing COS number
.
DESTINATION display shows
COS number dialed

O-98-21 0

AND
.
DIAL COS
M/MBER
must be programmed in accordance
with Section MITL9105/9110-98-212.
DESTINATION displa shows equipment
number and error coJe
El - COS number dialed out of range l-18

TOLL ALLOWED

TOLL DENIED

ASSIGN TOLL ACCESS
[16A] Press DELETE key
* DELETE lamp lit
SOURCE displav shows eauiol
ment .numbei and the existing
toll Allow/Deny code (0 = Allow,
1 = Denv)
. DESTINATION display shows 0
TOLL ALLOWED

7A]
.
.

Press ADD key
ADD lamp lit
SOURCE display shows equipment number and the existing
toll access code
DESTINATION display shows
code 1 (Deny)

,
Press BUSY LAMP

DESTINATION display shows Toll
fjllow/Deny code and El, out of range 0

A2-51

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-210

Is this trunk to

ASSIGN TRUNK TO BUSY LAMP FIE
[2OA] Dial busy lamp position assign
to the trunk (Fig. 209-2)
l
BUSY LAMP NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows equipment numbei of trunk and-current busy lamp assignment
l DESTINATION display shows
new busy lamp assignment

AND

ASSIGN
BOW LAMP
POSlTlON
(FIG. 209.2)

A2-52

SECTION

ooooooooo

l 92 93
91

o94o95
oo
96 o
97o98
o99
oo
100

ooooooooo

31 32 3 3

61 62 6 3

MITL9105/9110-98-210

‘.

34 35 36 37 38 39 4 0

64 65 66 67 68 69

121122 123 124125126127128129

.
.
pxxG7-p 101
..o
102 103104 .105 .
. .
106 107108109 110 111 112113 114115 116117 118119120

130

Fig. 209.2

131 132133 134 135 136 137138 139140 141 142 143144145146 147 148149 150

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

:
I
:-:
: :,-

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM DIAL-IN TRUNKS

MAP210-209
Issue 3, July 1980
1 Sheet 8 of 8

Press ENTER key

YES

AND

CoNzlz

CoNzlz
7 ASSlGNMl
ASSIG NM1

NOTE
The busy lamp position dialed is already
assigned to an extension or trunk.
If you wish to remove the previous

l-I

tenants trunks

[25Al
.
.

-1251'
Press LAMP TEST key
All displays dark
All lamps dark except LAMP
TEST lamp

AND
.
P R E S S
LAMP TEST KEY
v

FINISH

DESTINATION display shows
busy lamp position dialed and
El position number dialed out of
range 1.-!50
;il:;rtron
Assigned see NOTE

(1)
(2)
(3)

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial pad.
Trunk lamp remains lit
throughout rocedure.
A display oPEO indicates that an
incorrect key has been pressed.
Press the key specified in the
MAP and proceed.

SYNOPSIS
Select re uired tenant.
Enter equ9 pment number
2-l 121162-256
Enter trunk t pe code 3, 31, 6, or 61.
Enter I/C code.
Enter Bus Lamp assignment.
Press EN JER.

I
1

S E C T I O N

MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM DID TRUNKS

MAP210-210
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 1 of 6

must be programmed in accordance
with Section MITL9105/9110-96.212.

I]
Complete all installation forms

Set console to programming mode.

Go to MAP210-202

Is multi tenant
service to be

NO
SELECT TENANT SERVICE
[4A
Press TENANT key
[4B
Dial tenant number (l-4)
[4C
Press ENTER key

(SINGLE
TENANT)

A2-55

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PLUG9

pz u, z-YN
E!t
XL
YD

PLUG11

2:
ozo
l-z

161 1 6 9 1 7 7 186 1 9 3 201 2 0 9 2 1 7 225 233 241 2 4 9
1 ,I162 170 178 186 194 2021210 218 226 234 242 2501

20;
l-z

1 El163 171 179 187 195 2031211 219 227 235 243 2511

I Ei I
3:
2

1 6 4 1 7 2 180

108

196

204

212 220 228 236 244 252

174 1 6 2 1 9 0 1 9 8 2 0 6 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 3 0 2 3 8 2 4 6 2 5 4
167 175 183 191 199 207 215 223 231 2 3 9 2 4 7 2 5 5
168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 2 3 2 2 4 0 248

~ --I

1 El165 173 181 189 197 2051213 221 229 237 245 2531

I
3

256

CARD POSITION

SLOT NUMBER

PLUG8

PLUG10

PLUG12

SHELFZ(SX-2000NLY)

19 20 21 22

SLOT

NUMBER
642

SHELF1
NOTES:

1. EQUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FOR THETEST LINE ANn MIIST
THEREFORE BE EQUIPPED WITH A LINE CARD.
2.TRUNKEQUlPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASlNDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.
Fig. 210-l Hardware/Equipment Numbering

A2-58

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM DJD TRUNKS

MAP210-210

Issue 3, July 1980
1Sheet 3 of 6

__ cFr;-’

From 141

SELECT TRUNK PROGRAM
[5A] Press TRUNK key
l
Trunk lamp lights and remains lit
throughout procedure

ENTER EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[6A] Press EQPT NUMBER key
. EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows current
equipment number
[6B] Dial equipment number of trunk
(Fig. 210-l)
l
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
l
SOURCE disDlav shows current
equipment number
. DESTINATION display shows
equipment number entered

NOTE
The equipment number dialed is either
assigned to an extension or does not
contain a trunk card.
Check equipment number and card slot.
If you wish to remove the previous

AND
+-i
PRESS

TRUNK

KEY

L
P R E S S E Q P T NUMBER KEY
E Q P T N U M B E R

DESTINATION display shows equipmenl
number dialed and
El - number out of range 2-1121162-256.
Return to [3].
CO - confirm entry see NOTE.
Remove Trunk

CAUTION
Trunks MUST be removed from trunk
groups before being removed from the
s stem. Trunks cannot be deleted or
c 7l anged while they are in use.

Is this trunk to
be removed from

NO
+
Go to [lo]

[QA] Press DELETE key
.
DELETE lamp lit
’
! SOURCE display shows equipment number and its current
class
.
DESTINATION display shows 0
IVE

K
ENTER TYPE CODE
[lOA] Dial type code. Table 210-l
l
TYPE lamp lit
l SOURCE displa
shows equipment number o Y the trunk and its
current type code
l DESTINATION display shows
new trunk type code

TABLE 210-l

DID Non VNL
CCSA Non VNL
DIAL

TRUNK

TYPE

CODE

A2-57

SECTION MITL910519110-98-210

Issue 3,

July 1980

r Sheet 4 of 6

DESTINATION display shows trunk type

ENTER I/C CODE

[12A] Enter number of digits to be
received after the trunk has been
seized (l-9)
[128]1 Enter number of digits to be absorbed after the trunk is seized
( O - 8 )

[12C] If a leading digit is to be inserted, dial the actual digit to be
inserted. See Note.

DIAL UC CODE

1131

’

Press BUSY
LAMP NUMBER key.
Does bell ring

DESTINATION display shows
code entered and
El - digit length incorrect

Is trunk to
be assigned to a
Busy Lamp

7
YES

ENTER BUSY LAMP ASSIGNMENT
[15A] Dial the busy lamp position
assigned to the trunk (Fig. 210-2)
l
BUSY LAMP lamp lit
l SOURCE displa
shows the
equipment num L er of the trunk
and its current busy lamp assignment
. DESTINATION display shows the
new busy lamp assignment
-

A2-58

ASSIGN BUSY
LAMP POSITION

the

I/C

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
PROGRAM DID TRUNKS

MAP210-210

issue 3, July 1980

1 Sheet 5 of 6

l
31

l
61

ooooooooo

ooooooooo
64

ooooooooo
94

100

101 102 103104 105 106 107108 109110

111 112113 114115 116117 118119120

131 132133 134135 136137138 139140

141 142 143144145146

ooooooooo

121122 1 2 3 124125126127128129

130

147 148149 150

Fig. 210-2

Busy Lamp Position Numbering

.._.

A2-59

r
SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM DID TRUNKS
MAP210-210
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 6 of 6

DESTINATION display shows busy lamp
osition assigned and
ii 1 - number dialed out of range (l-150),
rem to [lo]
- position already assigned. See
Note.

Press ENTER
Does bell ring

The Busy Lamp PosItion dialed already
exists. If the assi nment is correct,
ti
press the CONFIRM ey, this will remove
the old assignment and assign the osition to this trunk. If the assignment sr incorrect, return to 114).

trunks for all
tenants been

YES

[17Al Press LAMP TEST key
l
All indicators go dark except
LAMP TEST lamp

A2-80

S E C T I O N

I
I

MITL9105/9110-98.210

PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS

MAP210-211

1 Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 1 of 7

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

NOTES
All entries are made from the
console dial ad.
TRUNK GROeP lamp remains lit
throughout rocedure.
A display oP EO indicates that an
incorrect key has been pressed,
pAv the key specified in the
If an equipment number is to be
changed all trunks within the
trunk group must be re-entered.

CAUTION
If Multi-Digit Toll Control
(Generic 204) is required this
MAP is not applicable. Trunks
must be programmed in accordance
with Section MlTL9105/9110-99212.

SYNCPSIS
Select required tenant.
Set up trunk group and access code.
Assi n trunk roup type, Toll Deny
and 8 verflow 8 roup codes.
Enter all trunk equipment numbers
assigned to the trunk group.

H a v e a l l instal-

Complete installation
forms.

YES
(OotD)

Has all trunk

NO
* Enter all trunk Information.

I
Go to MAP210-208
MAP210-209

A241

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS
MAP210-211
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 2 of 7

Is multi tenant
service to be

NO
SINGLE
TENA NT
SELECT TENANT SERVICE
[5A]
Press TENANT key
[5B] Dial tenant number (l-4)
[5Cl P r e s s E N T E R

AND
I

SELECT
TENANT
SERWCE ‘+-

SELECT TRUNK GROUP PROGRAM
[6A] Press TRUNK GROUP key
l
TRUNK GROUP lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows trunk
group 1 and its access code if
assigned or trunk group 1 and
----if no access code assigned
[6B]
Dial number of trunk group (1-12)
l
SOURCE display shows current
trunk group number and its access code if one is assigned or
trunk group 1 and ---- if no access
code assigned
l
DESTINATION display shows
trunk group number dialed
1

S TRUNK GROUP
DIAL TRUNK
IP NUMBER

DESTINATION display shows trunk

Press
Access Code key
Does bell ring

[8A]
l
l

~~~rKi?&$le~

Dial access code to be assigned
to this trunk group
ACCESS CODE lamp lit
SOURCE display shows new
trunk group and existing access
code if assigned or the new trunk
group and ---- if no access code
assigned.
DESTINATION displa
CODE

23
Go to (91

A2-62

of range I-X2.1

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98~210
PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS
MAP210-211
Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 3 of 7

DESTINATION display shows equipment
number dialed and
El -bad data received by CPU
E4-access code already assigned
E5-first digit conflict
Check entry.

T
NO

ASSIGN TRUNK TYPE
[TOAl
Dial trunk type code (Table 211-1)
l
TYPE lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows trunk
group number and current type
.
DESTINATION display four digit
type code dialed

TABLE 211.1
Description

Entry Code
First
digit
Note
(1)

1 No Answer Supervisior
2 Answer Supervision
3 Toll Supervision
4 Outgoing audio inhibited until answer
supervision

econd
digit

1 No message register
2 Message register
3 SMDR without messagr
register
4 SMDR with message
register
tl

rhird
digit
Note

(2)

‘ourth
digit
Note
(3)

Rotary dial office, no
wait for dial tone
t2 Rotary dial office, wait
for dial tone
$3 DTMF dial office,
no wait for dial
tone
$4 DTMF dial office,
wait for dial tone
tone
1 CO trunk
2 Non-CO trunk
3 Non-CO with
identification

_t,

-I I
AND

DIAL TYPE CODE
T A B L E 271-7

r
YOTE1
.
If answer supervision is not
required (or not provided by
the CO), then use 1 - No
Answer Supervision.
.
If tandem trunking or
Message Re istration is used,
then use 2. Bnswer Supervision.
.
If supervision is used to indicate toll calls, and this
feature is required, then use 3
. Toll Supervision.
.
If audio cut-through or tie
trunk tandem calls is required
only after receipt of answer
supervision, then use 4
*Outgoin Audio Inhibit until
Answer 8 upewision.
VOTE 2
.
If “wait for dial tone” is
selected then any digits dial.
ed prior to recei t of CO dial
tone are ignore 8 by the PABX.
This prevents circumvention
of the toll denial by dialing a
fast valid di it before CO dial
tone is rece Bved.
NOTE 3
.
If the fourth digit selected is
3, the third digrt must be 1.
t

If extensions are DTMF
the trunk will convert to dial
p;fs;deyrly line split is not

Yrunks iill repeat DTMF
or dial pulse signals.

A2-63

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS
MAP210-211

l-Issue 3, July 1980

I-

Sheet 4 of 7

1
-1

DESTINATION display shows trunk type
code dialed.
Check code.
N O

DENY
-

ASSIGN TOLL ACCESS
[13AJ PRESS DELETE key
l
DELETE lamp lit
. SOURCE disolav shows trunk
group number and existing Toll
Allow/Deny code (0 = Allow,
1~ Denv\
.
DESTitiATION display shows
0 - Toll Allow
-

A2.64

1 14A]
.
.

AND

A N D

+
.

.
PRESS
K E Y

DELETE

PRESS
K E Y
I

ADD

Press ADD key
ADD lamp lit
SOURCE display shows trunk
group number and existing Toll
Allow/Deny code (0 = Allow,
1 = Denv\
DESTIgATION display shows
1 - Toll Deny

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS

MAP210-211
issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 5 of 7

7
From 1141

-DESTINATION diseiag shows toil
allow/deny code and 1, ad data received by CPU.
I

ASSIGN OVERFLOW GROUP
[16A] Dial overflow group number (1-12)
l
OVFLO group lamp lit
l
SOURCE display shows trunk
grou number and assigned
overPlow group number
l DESTINATION display shows
new overflow group number
[16B] If no overflow group required
press DELETE

(dz-)
NOTE
Overflow roup number must not be the
same as tile current trunk group number.
if a call to a trunk group is routed to the
overflow group, the restrictions of the
overflow group are in force for that call.

A2-85

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAM TRUNK GROUPS

IP210-211
Issue 3, July 1980!r

Sheet 6 of 7

1171

(

Press EQPT NUMBER
key. Does bell ring

DESTINATION display shows trunk
group number and El . overflow group

ASSIGN EQUIPMENT NUMBERS
TO THIS TRUNK GROUP
[18A] Dial equipment number of trunk
in trunk group (2-112/162-256)
.
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
.
SOURCE display shows the trunk
group number and existing equipment number
-

()
Return to (151

L-J
I
AND

DIAL EQUIPMEN
NUMBER

A2.86

DESTINATION display shows equipment
number dialed and
El - number out of range, return to [17)
E8 - equipment number dialed not
1assi ned to a trunk. If equipment
num tier is correct, press LAMP TEST,
return to required trunk programming
MAP, if equipment number is incorrect
return to (171
E 3 - trunk grou access code not
entered, return to P7j

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
PROGRAMTRUNKGROUPS
MAP210-211
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 7 of 7

[22A]
.
.
.

Dial first equipment number on
this trunk group
EQPT NUMBER lamp lit
SOURCE display shows trunk
group number and last equipment number entered
DESTINATION display shows
first equipment number entered

AND
*

DIAL
EQPT
NUMBER

Press ENTER
key. Does bell ring

YES
P

DESTINATION display shows equipment
number dialed and
E; - number out of range, return to [17]
equrpment n u m b e r draled n o t
to a trunk. If equipment
er is correct, press LAMP TEST,
return to required trunk programming
MAP, if equipment number is incorrect
access
Eurn
- trunk
to m grou
entered, return to Pfl

code

not

Are any more
trunk groups for
this tenant to be
programmed

(,,.,,,,,,)

STORE TRUNK GROUP DATA
[26A] Press LAMP TEST key
.
All displays dark
.
All lamps dark except LAMP
TEST

A2-87168

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-210
TERMINATING

PROGRAMMING

MODE I

MAPPlO-212

Issue 3, July 1980

Sheet 1 of 1

Press LAMP TEST button

handset removal

[3A]

Set thumbwheel switches on
Tone Control card (card position
18, yellow) to 8888
-

[6A]

Press SYSTEM MASTER RESET
button on Scanner card (card
position 19, orange)
It-

[7A]

Close and lock cabinet doors

AND

[4A]
[48]

Remove
Replace

console
console

handset
handset

AND

AND
CLOSE AND LOCK
CABINET DOORS

A2-69170

/
i

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

SELECTION OF EXTENDED
PROGRAMMING
I

Sheet 1 of 2

[2A]

;?I?;;

VI
Is the system
in standard
progfo7ring

YES

RELEASE button several

Set thumbwheel switches on
Tone Control card (card position
18 yellow) for console to be used
in programming (Table 221-1)
[2C] Press LAMP TEST button
LAMP TEST LED lit
[2b] Alternately enter Programming
Security Code from console
(Feature 29)

TABLE 221-l

[2B]

CODE

CONSOLE

I I

7770
Maintenance
7771 Attendant 1
7772 Attendant 2

1 SELECT
STANDARD
PROGRAMMIN(:
MODE

Is the complete

YES

NO
MULTI-DIGIT TOLL
CONTROL ONLY

[4A]

Place Extended Programming
console overlay over console buttons

SELECT EXTENDED
PROGRAMMING OVERLAY

Press LAMP TEST button
Press NEXT button
;P TEST LED flashes for tg+-[Fi
duration of Extended Programm-

1
(T-)
SELECT

EXTENDED

PROGRAMMING

A2-71

i’

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

ISheet 2 of 2

TABLE 221-2

I
:ONFIGURATI~N
CODE
From [S]

Is all new data to
be entered for

17Al
1761
[7Cl
[701
1h

[7Fl
17Gl

Set the thumbwheel switches 07
the Tone Control Card (Card
Position 18 yellow) to 7776
Press CONFIG button
Dial single digit configuration
code (Table 221-2)
Press ENTER button
Display shown in Fig. 221-1 I
Return the thumbwheel switches
on the Tone Control card to the
Standard Programming console
designation (Fig. 221-l)
Press the MASTER RESET button
on the Scanner card
Repeat Steps 2, 4 and 5

Enter all extended programming
data in the order shown in Table
221-3

DESCRIPTION

Automatic Wakeup
Toll Control Standard

Toll Control Standard
and Speed Call
Standard

Toll Control Basic and
Speed Call Extended

Toll Control Extended
(No Automatic
Wakeup)

NOTE
To have Automatic Wakeup and Multi.
Digit Toll Control, select Configuration
code 1 (Table 221.2)
I

CONFIGURATION
COPE

--III
AND

I-l 17 171-i 1-l 17 In 1-i
1-.--.a.-.-.-.-.
I)
1.)
0
0
0
0
0
1

ENTER EXTENDED
PROGRAMMING

NUMBER

CLASS

UISPLAY

AFTER ENTER
BUTTON
PRESSED

TABLE 221-3

Trunk Group Class of Restriction

A2-72

Fig. 221-l

S E C T I O N

MITL9105/9110-98-210

ABSORB PLAN

MAP210-222

,, :::

‘..
:‘.
.

forms completed
in MITL9110.98.212

To Installation Forms
MITL9110.98.212

YES

[3A]
.

Press TOLL CONTROL button
Toll Control LED lights

SELECT

ABSORB

PLAN

ABSORB

REPEAT

451
[5A] Press ABSORB REPEAT butto

AND

SELECT

(+-)

A2-73

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210

[7A]

Di&igits

Press DELETE button (Fig. 222-2)

N O A B S O R B
REPEAT DIGITS
REQWRED

[9A]

Press

ABSORB

UNLOCK

button

to be absorbed (Fig.

ABSORB
REPEAT
DIGITS REQUIRED

AND

Are any absorb
to be defined

[ll A] Press DELETE button

N O A B S O R B
U N L O C K DlGlTS
REQUIRED

A2.74

AND

[12A]

A B S O R B U N L O C K
DIGITS REQUIRED

:;;13Tbsorb

Unlock Digits (Fig.

SECTION M ITL91051911

O-98-21 0

::
.:
‘.’

YES

[14A] Press the ENTER button

ENTER ABSORB
DATA

ABSORB
PLAN
NUMBER

ABSORB
REPEAT

SORI 3 PL
NUM BER
5

NUMBER

0
ATT
.

CLASS
0
INT

00
RCL
SOURCE

00
DID

00
MAN

DELETE
INDICATION

NUMBER

AB\SORB
UNLOCK
DIGITS

Fig. 222.2

ABSORB
UNLOCK
DIGITS
(4 DEFINED)

Fig. 222.3

A2-75176

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
CONTROL PLAN

START

NO
tables completed
in MITL9110-99-212

I
[3A]
.

Press TOLL CONTROL button
Toll Control LED lights

[4A]

Press CONTROL PLAN button
Control Plan LED lights
Dial Control Plan number
DESTINATION Display shows
Control Plan Number

[4::B]

YES

ENTER CONTROL PLAN

(dz-)

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-210

CONTROL PLAN

Sheet 2 of 4

YES

[6A]
[6B]

Press DENY TOLL REV button
Press DELETE button (Fig. 003-l)

DENYON TOLL
CONTROL REVERSAL DISABLE
PLAN
INDICATION
NUMBER
\

FIRST
BASIC
CONO.
NUMBER

FIRST BASIC
COND. NUMBER
ALLOWED (1)
OR DENIED (0)

[7A]
[7B]

Press DENY TOLL REV button
Press ADD button (Fig. 003-2)

CONTROL
PLAN
NUMBER

FIRST
BASIC
DENYON TOLL
REVERSALENABLE COND.
INDlCATlON
NUMBER

FIRST BASI
COND.NUME
ALLOWED(
OR DENlED(

CLASS
0

-i
r7
--1’

NUMBER

TABLE
NUMBER ALLOWEDOR
DENIED

NUMBER

Fig. 223-l

A2-78

Fig. 223-2

SECTION MfTL9105/9110-98-210
CONTROL PLAN

[8A]
[8.B]

Press B + S l C COND button
Dial !3as!c Cord. number
Destlnatlon Display shows Basic
Cond. number

AND

ENTER BASIC CONDlTlON

Basic Condition
to be allowed

[lOA] Press ADD button (Fig. 223-2)

[llA]

Press DELETE button (Fig. 223-2)

ziLi+~~E

WI
[12A]

Press TABLE button

AND

SELECT TABLE

[14A]

Dial Table number (Fig. 223-l)
7

[15A]
c

Press DELETEbutton

(Fig. 223-l)

A2-79

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

CONTROL PLAN

MAP210-223
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 4 of 4

YES

NO
required Control
Plans programmed

YES

[18A]

Press ENTER button

A2-80

SECTION MITL91051911

O-98-21 0

TRUNK GROUP CLASS OF

RESTRICTION

MAP210-224

July 1980

1 Issue 3,

Sheet 1 of 3

START

NO
tables completed
in MITL9110-98-212

Return to [2]

--u
I

YES

I31

[3A]
.

Press TOLL CONTROL button
Toll Control LED lights
7

AND

SELECT TOLL CONTROL

[4A] P r e s s T R U N K G R O U P b u t t o n
[4B] Dial Trunk Group number

SELECT TRUNK GROUP

[5A] Press ABSORB PLAN button -+Yq

-I-

SELECT ABSORB PLAN

(-+-)
A2-81

SECTION MITLSI 051911 O-98-21 0

1 Sheet 2 of 3

From 151

161
Is an Absorb
Plan to be applied

YES

l I61
[7A]

Press DELETE button (Fig.

A N D
I
NO ABSORB

TRUNK
GROUP
NUMBER

ABSORB
PLAN
NUMBER
APPLIED

:OR
MBEI

[8A]
--IC

Dk!2;BSORB

PLAN 1 or 2 (Fig.

:.
ABSORB
PLAN
APPLIES
TRUNK
GROUP
NUMBER

ABSORB
PLAN
NUMBER

COR
NUMBER

NUMBER
0

A::

Ri;T,NAT~~

/ERROR

CONiROL
PLAN
NUMBER

Fig. 224-l

CONTROL
PLAN
NUMBER

Fig. 224.2

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

:.
-j
[9A]
[9B]

Press COR button
Dial COR number

._.
._.-;
:-;.:

AND

SELECT COR
WI

AND

[lOA] Press CONTROL PLAN button

+ SELECT CONTROL PLAN

Control Plan

[12A]

;IH2&ntrol

Plan number (Fig.

A N D

[16A]

[13A]

Press DELETE button (Fig. 224-l)

Press ENTER button

ENTER TRUNK GROUP DATA

A2-83184

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
RESTRICTION

TABLES

111

installation
Tables completed
in MITL9110-98-212
(

JNO

(+I

(7)
PI

[3A] Press the TOLL CONTROL button
.
Toll Control LED lights

[4A] Press TABLE button
[4B] Dial Table number

AND

SELECT
+

TOLL CONTROL

~“z-l
t

If !he wrong table number is entered by

SELECT TABLE

A2-85

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
RESTRICTION TABLES

MAP210-225

[6A]
[6B]
[6C]

Press DELETE button
Press CONFIRM button
Press ENTER button

AND

Press DISPLAY ENTRY button

N O T E : U s e t h e s e MAPS
u desired modifications.

TABLE 225-l

A2-88

to perform

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
NOTE 1:

rADD ~~AN ENTRY

If the wrong entry digits are keyed by mistake, attempt to add the entry as it was keyed. If the entry is
accepted remove it with the delete key. If an error is
given no further action is required, as the entry was
ignored.

Sheet 1 of 1

START

(-Tik-)

[2A] Press ADD button
[26] Dial ENTRY digits (See Note 1)
-

Y AND I
I

I
ADD AN ENTRY

Restriction
Table to apply

[4A] Press TABLE button
[4B] Dial Table number

AND
ENTER

I
RESTRICTION TABLE

YES

Refer to Table 005-l

[6~] Press ENTER button

AND
ENTER ADDfTlONS

A2-87188

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
DISPLAYING SEQUENTIAL ENTRIES

iiij=q

Have steps 1 to 617
of MAP210.225
been completed

[2A]
.

Press NEXT button
Next sequential entry displayed

AND

YES
1

NOTE

;i;;m

to get back to the start of the

A2-89190

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-210
SEARCH FOR AN ENTRY
1 MAP210-228

:
:.
:-.:

[2A] Press DISPLAY ENTRY button
[26] Dial Entry digits

[3A]

Push DISPLAY ENTRY button ,4--~[31zq

DISPLAY

ENTRY

(T$g--)

-<
..

N O

.
-.
.

..:

A2-9,,92

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

I DELETE AN ENTRY

Sheet 1 of 1

MAP210-225
been completed

[2A]

Press

DELETE

button

AND
l

DELETE

DATA

YES

To MAP210.225

[4A]

Press

ENTER

button

AND

ENTER

DELETION

DATA

The entry deleted is the entry which was
dlsplayed. If the dashes were dlsplayed
in the entry columns no change occurs
when the Delete button is pressed.
v

A2-93194

/.
1

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210

1 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL TABLES 1

NOTES
1. Prior to making programming entries on this MAP, Form SC-2 must
have been completed. The completed
form is used in conjunction with the
relevant steps noted in this MAP.
2. After digit entries are made (e.g.
Step (4)), the bell may ring and an error code may a pear in the DESTINATION display wPI en the key in the next
sequence is pressed. In this event
refer to Tables 242-l or 242.2, and
repeat the sequence, i.e. the relevant
function key and its digit entries, in
order to correct the previous entry.
Fig. 242-2 shows a typical error code
entry.

START
TABLE 242-l

11
The equipment number entered is

Place System In Extended
Programming Mode (MAP210-221)

The table number entered is not
valid for the current size CON-

NOTE
The SPEED CALL LED remains lit during
programming in the Speed Call mode.

[3A]

Press SPEED
CALL key. Does
bell ring

YES

DESTINATION display shows E6. Refer
to Table 242-l
I

u
NO

Press TABLE key

PRESS

TABLE

A2-95

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

PROGRAMMING PERSO.NAL

TABLES

MAP210-242

1Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 2 of 4

[4A]

Enter Table number required (See
Form SC-2)
DESTINATION display shows
number entered (Fig. 242-l)
When a subsequ&i Key operation occurs the number is
transferred to the SOURCE
display and three hyphens appear as shown in Fig. 242-l)
-

Error E3 (Table 242-l) may occur at;;
a subsequent key operation.
Note 2 and Fig. 242-2

DIAL TABLE
NUMBER

SPEED CALL
TABLE NUMBER

b-4
o,l - - -

NUMBER
0
INT

0
ATT

CLASS
0
RCL

0
DID

0
MAN

Go to[12]
ECHOED
DIGITS

Fig. 242-l

Typical Entry Displays

III
i7p1

Press EQPT NUMBER key
EQPT NUMBER LED is lit

A ND

PRESS EQPT
NUMBER KEY

Fig. 242.2

A2-98

Typical Error Code Display

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210

.
Sheet 3 of 4

PAI
.
.

[9A]

Dial equipment number digits for
selected table
DESTINATION display shows
dialed digits
SOURCE display shows digits
entered (Fia. 242-3) when a
subsequeni
key operation occurs

I
I

NOTE
Error El (Table 242-l) may oCcur after a
subsequent key operation. See Note 2
and Fig. 242-2.
I

D/AL EQUIPMENT
NUMBER DIGITS

Press ACCESS NUMBER key +qlAg

PRESS ACCESS
NUMBER KEY

[lOA] Dial first speed call access
number diaits for the selected
table (see Form SC-2)
.
DESTINATION display shows
dialed digits (Fig. 242-3) in first I
two positions which go to the
last two positions when a subsequent key operation occurs

NOTE
Error El (Table 242-l), or Error E5
may occur after Step
)e Note 2 and Fig. 242-2

DIAL ACCESS
NUMBER DiGiTS
Table 242-2

/ [111 1
Is Number
Redial to be
used for this
Station

ERROR
CODE

DESCRIPTION

Indicates attempt to enter access
number (Step 10) for a common-use
table

Indicates attempt made to allocate
number redial digits in a c o m m o n use table (Step 12)

It-

Indicates number redial already exists for another table (Step 13)
assigned to the same equipment

Indicates access number (Step 10)
already exists for another table
assigned to the equipment

ll2Al
Press Number Redial Key

[l3A] Press ADD key
.
fX~T;NATION
display shows
-a-.

SOURCE display shows digit 1
where a subsequent key operation occurs

NOTE
Error E5 (Table 242-3) may o6cur after
Step (13). See Note 2 and Fig. 242.2

A2-97

. _..

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210

Are all tables
entered for this

YES

-1151
[15A]

Press ENTER key

TABLE
NUMBER

AND

EOUIPMENT
NUMBER

NUMBER
REOIAL CODE

CLASS
0

0
RCL
SOURCE

0
DID

0
MAN

SPEEd CALL
ACCESS NUMBER

Fig. 242-3 Completed Entries Dislay

A2-98

’

PRESS
K E Y

ENTER

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.210
CONVERT TABLE FROM PERSONAL TO
COMMON-USE

COMMON-USE TABLES DO NOT REQUIRE PROGRAMMING. THIS MAP IS
THE PROCEDURE U S E D T O CONVERT
A PERSONAL TABLE TO A COMM-USE
TABLE.

NOTES
1. Prior to makin programming entries on this MA 8 Form SC-2 must
have been compleied. The completed
form is used in conjunction with the
relevant steps noted in this MAP.
2. After digit entries are made (e.g.
Step (4)), the bell may ring and an er.
ror code may a pear in the DESTINATION display wrl en the key in the next
sequence is pressed. In this event
refer to Table 243-1, and repeat the
sequence, i.e. the relevant function
key and Its digit entries, in order to
correct the previous ent
Fig. 243-2
shows a typical error co 7.e entry.

TABLE 243-l
ERROR
CODE

DESCRIPTION

The table number entered is not
valid for the current size CONFIGURATION

The CONFIGURATION (MAP210-221)
entered does not include Speed Call

NOTE
The SPEED CA.LL L-ED remains lit durinidP,‘Ogrammmg n-r the Speed Call

Place System in Extended Programming
* M o d e (MAP210-221)

( cF;tpes p+Izl-y
DESTINATION display shows E6. Refer

Pi
[3A]

Press TABLE key

PRESS
K E Y

TABLE

A2-99

.-- _

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
CONVERT TABLE FROM PERSONAL TO
COMMON-USE

MAP210-243

Issue 3, July 1980
0

Sheet 2 of 2

DIALED DIGITS.

[4Al
.

Enter Table number required (See
Form SC-2)
DESTINATION display shows
number entered (Fig. 243-l).

DIAL TABLE
N U M B E R

Fig. 243-l Table
Number Display

NOTE
Error E3 (Table 003-l) may occur after
Step (4). See Note 2 and Fig. 243.3

SPEED CALL
TABLEt?JMEER

EQUIPMENT
NUMBER

NUMBER
REDIALCODE

WI
.
.

Press EQPT NUMBER key
SOURCE display shows the data
associated with the table (Fig.
243-l)
DESilNATlON display shows the
first access number of the table,
and the table number (Step 4)
disappears
-

PRESS EQPT
NUMBER KEY

Press DELETE key
DELETE LED is lit

PRESS
K E Y

DELETE

,.."

DIALED
DIGITS

Fig. 243-2

NUMBER
0
ATT

Typical Entry Displays

CLASS
0
0
0
RING
BUSY
ERROR
DESTINATION J

Fig. 243-3 T y p i c a l E r r o r C o d e
Display

[8A]

Press ENTER key
-I-

AND
0

PRESS

ENTER
17

Fig. 243-4

A2-100

Completed Entry Display

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-210
TERMINATING PROGRAMMING
MAP210-244
Issue 3, July 1980
Sheet 1 of 1

[lA]
[lB]
.

Press the LAMP TEST button
Press the NEXT button
LAMP TEST LED solid

ENTER STANDARD
PROGRAMMlNG MODE

[2A]

Set the thumbwheel switches on
Tone Control card (card position
18, yellow) to 7780

AND

T’

;;;oSWITCHES

[3A] Press SYSTEM MASTER RESET
button on Scanner card (card
position 19, orange)
.
System is taken out of the programming mode
-

RESET SYSTEM

,lt1
- 141 ’

[4A] Enter time on console display
[4B] Close and lock the cabinet doors
7

- -

AND

CLOSE
AND
LOCK CAB/NET

A2-101

MITEL STANDARD PRACTICE

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-215
Issue 2, July 1980

SX-lOO* AND SX-200*
SUPERSWITCH”
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES
CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2
Reasonforlssue........................2

DETAILED TEST PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2
System Test Procedures - Generic 202
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
System Test Procedures - Generic 203
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
System Test Procedures - Generic 204
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

APPENDIX 1 MITEL ACTION PROCEDURES .Al-1
APPENDIX 2 GENERIC 202 SYSTEM TESTS. .A2-1
Set Up Test Equipment (MAP215201). . . . A2-3
Test Extension Options (MAP215202) . . . A25
Test Console Features (MAP215.203) . .A2-7/8
Broker’s Call (MAP215-204). . . . . . . . . .A2-9/10
Call Forwarding - Busy (MAP215-205) A2-11112
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
(MAP21 5.208) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-13/14
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
(MAP21 5-207) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-15/18
Call Park (MAP215-208) . . . . . . . . . . . .A2-17118
Call Pick-up (MAP215-209) . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.19
Camp-On (MAP215-210). . . . . . . . . . . .A2-21/22
Consultation Hold/Transfer/Add-On
(MAP215-211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-23124
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
(MAP215-212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2-25/28
Automatic Callback - Busy
(MAP21 5-213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-27128
Meet-Me Conference (MAP21 5-214) . . A2-29130
Executive Busy Override
(MAP215-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-31132
Paging (MAP21 5-218) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-33134
Answer Incoming Call (MAP215-217) . . . A2-35
Automatic Callback (MAP215-218). . .A2-39/40
Extending Internal Calls
(MAP21 5-219) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2.41/42

CONTENTS

PAGE

Answering Recall (MAP215.220) . . . . . . .A2-43
Override (MAP215-221) . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-45/48
Flexible Night Service (MAP215-222) . A2-47/48
Trunk Busy Operation (MAP215-223). . . .A2-50
Trunk Group Attendant Access
(MAP21 5-224) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-51152
Trunk Group Dial Access
(MAP21 5-225) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-53/54
Test Termination (MAP215-226). . . . . . . .A2-55
APPENDIX 3 GENERIC 203 SYSTEM
TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-l/2
Test Extension Options (MAP215-300). : A3-3/4
Do Not Disturb (MAP215-301) . . , . . . . . .A3-5/6
Call Block (MAP215-302). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Call Hold (MAP215-303) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3=9
Single Digit Dialing (MAP215-304). . . . . .A3-13
Transfer Into Busy (MAP215-305) . . . .A3-15/16
Common Alerting Devices
(MAP215-306) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-17118
Test Console Features (MAP21 5-350) A3-19/20
Answer Incoming CO Trunk Call
(MAP215-351). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-21
Answer DID Trunk Call (MAP215-352) . . . A3-25
Attendant Do Not Disturb (MAP215-353) A3-27
Message Waiting (MAP215-354) . . . . . . .A3-29
Attendant Call Forwarding - Busy
(MAP21 5-355) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-31
Attendant Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
:
(MAP215-356) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3-33134
I
Attendant Call Forwarding - Follow Me
;.
1”
I,:;’
(MAP21 5.357) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-35/36
Attendant Controlled Conference
(MAP21 5-358) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-37
Attendant Station Busy-Out
i
(MAP21 5-359) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-39140
Test Console Features (H/M)
(MAP21 5-300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-41
Attendant Do Not Disturb (H/M)
(MAP21 5-360) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,< . . . . A3-43

0 MITEL Corporation 1980
l

Trademark of MITEL Corporation

Page

i
I

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

CONTENTS

PAGE

Message Waiting (H/M) (MAP21 5-361) A3-47148
Message Registration
(MAP21 5362) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-49150
Controlled Outgoing Call Restriction (H/M)
(MAP215-363). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-51
Room Status (H/M) (MAP215-364) . . . . . . A3-53

APPENDIX 4 GENERIC 204 SYSTEM
TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.A4-112

Test Extension Option (MAP215-400). . . A4-314
Automatic Wake-Up (Alarm Call)
(MAP215-401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4-5/6
Enable Non-CO Trunk to
Trunk Connect (MAP215-402) . . . . . . . . . A4-718
Test Extensions Options (MAP21 5-450)A4-9110
Console Date Display and
Date Utility (MAP215-451) . . . . . . . . . .A4-11112
Customer Program Dump/Load
(MAP215-452) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4-13114
Room Audit (MAP215-453). . . . . . . . . .A4-17/18
Automatic Wakeup (MAP215-454) . . .A4-19120
System ldentifier(MAP215.455) . . . . .A4-21/22

Reason for Issue
1.02 This section is issued to incorporate procedures for Generic 205 information.
1.03

It should be noted that a particular system
test is valid only if the required option(s)
has been programmed to satisfy the system test
result.
2. DETAILED TEST PROCEDURES
General
2.01

All test procedures in this Section are performed in accordance with MITEL Action
Procedures (MAPS). An outline of the purpose and
use of MAPS is contained in Appendix 1. Actual
system test procedures to be used for the PABX
are as detailed in the following paragraphs.
System Test Procedures - Generic 202 Equipment
2.02

The system test procedures for Generic 202
equipment are detailed in Appendix 2. Procedures are performed in a set order as follows:
0

APPENDIX 5 GENERIC 205 SYSTEM
TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A5-1

Test Extension Options (MAP21 5-500). . A5-3/4
Use a Personal Speed Call
(MAP21 5-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-5/6
Use a Common Use Speed Call
(MAP21 5-502) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-718
Test Console Options (MAP215-504) . . A5-9/10
Speed Call (MAP215-505). . . . . . . . . . .A5-11/12

INTRODUCTION

General

Set up the required test conditions

0 Perform the tests required for extension
features
0 Perform the tests required for console
features
l

Remove the test conditions

0 Perform a final console “lamp-test”
verification
These procedures are listed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2
in addition to appearing in Appendix 2.
System Test Procedures - Generic 203 Equipment
2.03

1.01 This Section details the system test procedures to be performed after the system
installation (Section MITL9105/9110-98-200)
and
programming (Section MITL9105/9110-98-210)
have been completed. Upon completion of the
tests listed in this Section all programmed system
options and features will have been checked.

Page 2

The system test procedures for Generic 203
equipment are detailed in Appendix 3. Procedures are similar to those performed for
Generic 202 equipment, but are modified due to
the fact that Generic 203 equipment can provide
three basic configurations which are:
0

A standard single customer configuration

SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-21 5

A system configured for use with more than
one customer (tenant)
A system configured to provide facilities
which are peculiar to a hotel or motel environment

2.04 The pattern of test procedures for Generic
203 equipment closely parallels that shown
in 2.02, with the exception, that in so far as the
console tests are concerned a choice of procedures is given; ie. the choice is dependant upon
whether the system has been programmed with or
without “hotel/motel” features. Tables 2-3 and 2-4
list the procedures to be followed with Table 2-4
listing the choice of console features.
System Test Procedures - Generic 204 Equipment
2.05

The system test procedures for Generic 204
equipment are detailed in Appendix 4. Procedures are similar to those performed for
Generic 203 but are modified for the additional
features in Generic 204.

2.08

The system test procedures for Generic 205
equipment are detailed in Appendix 5. Procedures are similar to Generics 203 and 204 but
are modified for the additional features in Generic
205.
2.07

Where several customers (tenants) share
one PABX (Generic 2031~~) then the test
procedures to be performed (listed in Tables 2-3,
2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 and 2-8) are in respect to the “NonHotel/Motel” options, ie. they are the same as for
a single customer configuration. It should be
noted however that the console SOURCE and
DESTINATION displays, during the test procedures, will reflect the fact that a multi-tenant
configuration is in effect. These displays will
show the “tenant” digit which prefixes the extension number. A typical example of this difference
is illustrated in Figs. 2-1 and 2-2, respectively
showing a single customer extension display, and
a display which indicates that the calling extension (333) forms part of Tenant group 2.

TABLE 2-l
GENERIC 202 EQUIPMENT - EXTENSION OPTIONS
TEST ORDER

Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer.
Call Forwarding - Follow Me

Automatic
Automatic
Meet-Me
Executive

Callback - Don’t Answer
Callback - Busy
Conference
Busy Override

MAP215-205
MAP215-206
MAP215-207
MAP215-208
MAP215-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP215-212
MAP215-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215

Page3

SECTION MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5

TABLE 2-2
GENERIC 202 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE OPTIONS
TEST ORDER

Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Option
Test Console Features
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination

MAP No.
MAP215203
MAP215217
MAP215218
MAP215219
MAP215-220
MAP215-221
MAP21 5-222
MAP21 5-223
MAP21 5-224
MAP21 5-225
MAP215-226

TABLE 2-3
GENERIC 203 EQUIPMENT - EXTENSION OPTIONS
TEST ORDER

Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Page 4

Option
Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Call Pick-Up
Camp-On
Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic Callback - Busy
Meet Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Paging
Do Not Disturb
Call Block
Call Hold
Single Digit Dialing
Transfer Into Busy
Common Alerting Devices

MAP No.
MAP215-201
MAP21 5-300
MAP21 5-204
MAP215-205
MAP21 5-206
MAP21 5-207
MAP215-208
MAP215-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP215212
MAP215-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215
MAP215-216
MAP21 5-301
MAP215-302
MAP215-303
MAP215-304
MAP215-305
MAP21 5-306

SECTION M ITL9105/911

3 ,I‘I( 73

NUMBER

0
ATT

Fig. 2-l

0
INT

O-98-21 5

CLASS
0
RCL
SOURCE

0
DID

0
MAN

Single Customer Display

Fig. 2-2 Multi-Tenant Display

TABLE 2-4
GENERIC 203 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE OPTIONS
TEST ORDER
OPTION

MAP NO.

ORDER
NONH/M

Test Console Features
Test Console Features
Answer CO Trunk Call
Answer DID Trunk Call
Attendant Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Attendant Controlled Conference
Attendant Station Busy-Out
Attendant Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Message Registration
Controlled Outgoing Restriction
Room Status
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination

MAP215350
MAP215300
MAP215351
MAP215-352
MAP215353
MAP215-354
MAP21 5-355
MAP21 5-356
MAP215-357
MAP21 5-358
MAP21 5-359
MAP215-360
MAP21 5-361
MAP21 5-362
MAP21 5-363
MAP21 5-364
MAP215-217
MAP215218
MAP215-219
MAP215-220
MAP215-221
MAP215-222
MAP215-223
MAP215-224
MAP215-225
MAP21 5-226

NOTES

H/M

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15

375
495
5
5
5
6

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Page 5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

TABLE 2-5
GENERIC 204 EQUIPMENT - EXTENSION OPTIONS
TEST ORDER

Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me

MAP215001
MAP215300
MAP21 5-204
MAP215205
MAP21 5-206
MAP215-207
MAP215-208
MAP21 5-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP21 5-212
MAP215-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215
MAP215-216
MAP215-301
MAP21 5-302
MAP215-303
MAP215-304
MAP21 5-305
MAP215-306
MAP21 5-401
MAP215-402

Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic Callback - Busy
Meet Me Conference
Executive Busy Override

Single Digit Dialing
Transfer Into Busy
Common Alerting Devices
Automatic Wake-Up (Alarm Call)
Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect

TABLE 2-8
GENERIC 204 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE OPTIONS
TEST ORDER
OPTION

MAP NO.

ORDER
NONH/M

Page 6

MAP21 5-350
MAP215-300
MAP21 5-351
MAP21 5-352
MAP21 5-353
MAP215-354
MAP215-355
MAP21 5-356
MAP215-357
MAP215-358
MAP215-359
MAP21 5-360

NOTES

HIM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11

1
1
2
3
4

3,5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

TABLE 2-8
GENERIC 204 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE OPTIONS
TEST ORDER
OPTION

MAP NO.

ORDER
NONH/M

Message Waiting
Message Registration
Controlled Outgoing Restriction
Room Status
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination
Console Date Display and Date
Utility
Customer Program Dump/Load
Room Audit
Automatic Wake-Up
System I.D.

MAP21 5-361
MAP21 5-362
MAP215363
MAP215364
MAP21 5-217
MAP215-218
MAP215-219
MAP215-220
MAP215-221
MAP21 5-222
MAP215-223
MAP21 5-224
MAP21 5-225
MAP215-226
MAP215-451
MAP215-452
MAP21 5-453
MAP21 5-454
MAP215-455

NOTES

HIM
12
13
14
15

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

20
21

24
25
27
28

435
5
5
5
6

7, 8

NOTES
1.

“NON-H/M” and “H/M” column. MAP215-302
applies only to a Hotel/Motel environment as
it tests the use of the “Hotel/Motel” console
keys.

The Generic 203 console features to be
tested depend on whether the equipment is
programmed with or without Hotel/Motel
features, and respectively refer to columns
“H/M” or “NON-H/M” in the above Table.
DID Trunks (see MAP215-352) are not provided for Hotel/Motel use.
The “Attendant Do Not Disturb” facility
(MAP215-353) i s a p p l i c a b l e i n t h e
“NON-H/M” and “H/M” column. MAP215-301
applies only to a Hotel/Motel environment as
it tests the use of the “Hotel/Motel” console
keys.
The
“Message
(MAP215-354) i s

Waiting”
facility
applicable in the

MAPS 215-301 through -305 inclusive are applicable only to Hotel/Motel options.

MAP215-016 tests are performed on Generic
2021~~ equipment. Generic 2021~~ equipment tests are listed in Table 2-4 starting at
MAP215-151 incorporating the use of the
SERIAL/GUEST ROOM key.

A printer is required for use with some
Generic 204 options.

A storage device is required for use with
some Generic 204 options.

Page 7

:...

i
r

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

TABLE 2-7
GENERIC 205 EQUIPMENT - EXTENSION OPTIONS
TEST ORDER

Order

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Page 8

Option

Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Cal I
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Call Pick-Up
Camp-On
Consultation Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic Callback - Busy
Meet Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Paging
Do Not Disturb
Call Block
Call Hold
Single Digit Dialing
Transfer Into Busy
Common Alerting Devices
Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect
Use a Personnel Speed Call
Use a Common Use Speed Call

MAP No.

MAP215201
MAP215500
MAP21 5-304
MAP215-205
MAP215-206
MAP21 5-207
MAP215-208
MAP215-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP215-212
MAP215-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215
MAP21 5-216
MAP215-301
MAP215-302
MAP21 5-303
MAP215-304
MAP215-305
MAP215-306
MAP215-402
MAP21 5-501
MAP21 5-502

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.215

TABLE 2-8
GENERIC 205 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE OPTIONS
TEST ORDER
OPTION

Test Console Features
Answer CO Trunk Call
Answer DID Trunk Call
Attendant Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Attendant Controlled Conference
Attendant Station Busy-Out
Attendant Do Not Disturb
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination
Console Date Display and Date
Utility
Customer Program Dump/Load
System I.D.
Speed Call
Notes 1.
2.
3.

MAP NO.

ORDER

MAP215504
MAP21 5-351
MAP21 5-352
MAP215-353
MAP21 5-354
MAP215-355
MAP215-356
MAP215-357
MAP215-358
MAP21 5-359
MAP215-360
MAP21 5-217
MAP215-218
MAP215-219
MAP215-220
MAP215-221
MAP215-222
MAP215-223
MAP215-224
MAP215-225
MAP21 5-226

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

MAP21 5-451
MAP215-452
MAP215-455
MAP21 5-505

22
23
24
25

NOTES

. : .: :

2, 3

MAP 215-216 tests are performed on Generic 2021~~ equipment. Generic 2021~~ equipment
tests are listed in Table 2-4 starting at MAP212-351 incorporating the use of the
Serial/Guest Room key.
A printer may be used.
A storage device may be used.

Page 9

: ;

SECTION

APPENDIX

MITL9105/9110-98-215

MITEL ACTION PROCEDURES

Task oriented functions
implemented
using
PROCEDURES (MAP’s).

Al.01

in this section are
MITEL
ACTION

A MAP is a step by step procedure using a
flow chart
principle,
written
and illustrated where necessary to a level of detail that
allows both experienced
and inexperienced
personnel to carry out the tasks detailed. A MAP contains two levels of information
as follows:
Al.02

(a)

DECISION
Block:
Used to indicate
a
decision within the level one steps which
must be made. The symbol is based on a hexagon
with the top and bottom sides extended. Decision
text is centred in the symbol.
Al.08

GENERAL

TO Block:
Used to
indicate the start and finish of a MAP.
Also used to indicate ‘jump to’ points within the
MAP, for example “go to [n]” or “from [n]” or
“return to [n]“. The symbol is a rectangle with
semi circular ends. Text is centred in the symbol.
Al.09

START/FINISH/JUMP

For experienced
personnel,
a series of
steps (level one) each numbered
[n] and
annotated
with minimal information.

THE OPERATORS

For inexperienced
personnel,
each step
referred to in (a) above is amplified
by a
connected
series of numbered
substeps
[nA] (level two).
example of a MAP is shown in
with the two levels detailed

For the experienced
operator to complete
a task using a MAP, reference to the sequential short form level one steps is usually all
that is necessary. Using Fig. Al as an example,
the experienced
operator
would
proceed
as
follows.

There are four basic symbol shapes which
may be used in a MAP, and are
defined as follows.

(b)

Al.03

A typical
Fig. Al,

MAP SYMBOLS
Al.04

Used to indicate a level one
step that
must
be performed.
Consists of a square with the word AND centred in the
block.
Al.05

AND Block:

Used to indicate a choice of
level one steps, one of which must be
performed.
Consists of a rectangle, with the text
centred in the block, and with the word OR appearing between the alternative operations.
Al.06

OR Block:

The rectangle is also used to border instructions
which imply that the operative
must perform a task outside the scope of the
MAP. The text is centred in the rectangle.

Al.07

Experienced

USE OF MAP’S

Operator

Al.10

Al.11

At [2] if the decision is NO there is no requirement to proceed further and the test
is abandoned.
This naturally results in a FINISH
block. If the decision
is YES the operator proceeds to [3] and [4] in succession,
i.e. dials the DID
station number and completes
the call to the
check extension.
Al.12

The description
of the instructions
carried
out in Al.05 and Al.06 have assumed
that the level of competence
of the operator is
such that short form level one steps contain sufficient information,
and therefore
the operator
reads only the centre column of the MAP, top to
,bottom of the page.
Al.13

Al-l

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

START

*TTEND*NT DID

Fig. Al
Inexperienced

Typical

Operator

Al.14

If the operator’s
experience
is such that
the level one instructions
do not contain
sufficient
information,
the level two substeps
should be referred to as follows.

Al.15

Using Fig. Al as an example
followed
should be:

the

(a)

At [l] and [2] make the decisions
at these steps as before.

called

(b)

At step [3] dial the DID station number by
performing
substeps [3A], [3B] and [3C].

Al-2

Map Page
In terms of steps and substeps,
the operative
follows
a decision,
decision
then
step andsubstep paths in the example shown.

TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTIONS

AND SPECIAL

path
Al.16

for

Any tools, test equipment
or special instructions
that the operator
requires or
needs to know are stated on the first page of each
MAP. If the MAP is long, and contains a-number of
sub procedures,
these are listed in synopsis form
on the first page.

SECTION

MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5

APPENDIX 2
GENERIC 202 SYSTEM TESTS
General
A2.1

The SX-100 or SX-200 programmed
with
Generic 202 is tested in the order shown in
the following
Tables using the MAPS shown
which appear in Appendix 2:
TABLE A2-1
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

OPTIONS

Option

MAP No.

Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Call Pick-up
Camp-on
Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic
Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic
Callback - Busy
Meet-Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Paging
TABLE A2-2

Order

EXTENSION

CONSOLE

Option
Test Console Features
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic
Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination

MAP21 5-201
MAP21 5-202
MAP215204
MAP21 5-205
MAP215-206
MAP21 5-207
MAP215-208
MAP215-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP215-212
MAP21 5-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215
MAP215-216

OPTIONS
MAP No.
MAP215-203
MAP215-217
MAP215-218
MAP215-219
MAP215-220
MAP21 5-221
MAP215-222
MAP21 5-223
MAP215-224
MAP21 5-225
, MAP215-226

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.215

I SET UP TEST EQUIPMENT

MAP215201

Issue 2, July 80

I
I

Sheet 1 of 2

TEST EQUIPMENT
Maintenance
Handset (Bun IN)
Console
2 Telephone Sets (Check Extensions
7 and 2 located within reach of equip.
merit cabinet)

[l A]

Unlock and open cabinet door on
cabinet versions
ON MAINTENANCE PANEL
[l B] Connect maintenance handset
Tip lead to TIP stud (Fig. 001-l)
[lC]
[l D]

f
\

START
+

f-l
PI

Connect maintenance handset
Ring lead to RING stud

AND

Insert console connector into
MAINTENANCE CONNECTOR

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
(1 E] Connect check extension Tip and
Rin lead to TIP and RING pins
on 8 ROSS CONNECT FIELD

Note: Check extension must have access to all features to be tested.

CONNECT TEST
EQUIPMENT
(FIG.207.7)

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[2A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
.
Dial tone
[2B]
.
.

Dial 0
Ringing tone
Console rings

AT CONSOLE
[2C] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE display shows number
and class-of%e&ce
of test line,
ATT lamp lit
[2D]

Note number of test line

[2E]

Press RELEASE

[2F]

Set maintenance
to ON-HOOK

Fig. 201-l

DETERMINE NUMBER
OF TEST LINE

handset switch

Go
c

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

SET UP TEST EQUIPMENT
MAP215-201
Issue 2, July 80’
Sheet 2 of 2

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3A] Lift handset
.
Dial tone
[38]
.
.

Dial “0”
Ringing tone
Console rings

1
AT CONSOLE
[3C] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE display shows number
and class-of-service
of check extension, All lamp lit
(3D]

Note number

of check extension

[3E]

Press RELEASE

[3F]

Replace check extension

DETERMINE
OF CHECK

NUMBER
EXTENSION

DETERMINE
OF CHECK

NUMBER
EXTENSION

handset

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[4A] Lift handset
.
Dial tone
[4B]
.
.

Dial “0”
Ringing tone
Console rings

AT CONSOLE
[4C] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE display shows number
and class-of-service
of check extension, ATT lamp lit
[4D]

Note number of check extension

[4E]

Press RELEASE

[4F]

Replace check extension

A24

handset

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98~215

If any test fails, check that the
check extension’s
COS allows the op

[2A]

Test all options
202-l

as listed in Ta

AND
4
TEST GENERIC
202 OPTIONS

See System Test Procedures

A2-5

SECTION

MITL91051911

O-98-21 5
,

TEST

EXTENSION

OPTIONS

MAP215-202
issue
Sheet

2, July

2 of 2

TABLE
EXTENSION

Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
i
10
11
12

A2-6

OPTIONS

Option

202-l
- TEST

Name

Broker’s
Call
Call Forwarding
- Busy
Call Forwarding
- Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding
- Follow
Me
Call Park
Call Pick-up
Camp-On
Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic
Callback
- Don’t Answer
Automatic
Callback
- Busy
Meet-Me
Conference
Executive
Busy Override
Paging

ORDER

MAP

No.

215-204
215-205
215-206
215-207
215-208
215-209
215-210
215-211
215-212
215-213
215-214
215215
215-216

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

Sheet 1 of 2

1 YES

PAI Test all options
203-l

as listed in

AND

TEST

GENE/?/C

202 OPTIONS

+-)

Are Generic

Are Generic
205 options
programmed

See System
Test
MAP215250 or - 300.

Procedures

See System
MAP21 5-400.

Procedures

Test

See System Test Procedures

A2-7

SECTION
1 TEST

MITL9105/9110-98.215

CONSOLE

FEATURES

1 MAP215-203
1

Issue

1 Sheet

2, July

2 of 2
TABLE
CONSOLE

Order

:
3
4
5
6
ii
9
10

A2-8

OPTIONS

Option

203-l
- TEST

Name

Answer
Automatic An Callback
Incoming
Call
Extending
Internal
Calls
Answering
A Recall
Override
Flexible
Night
Service
Trunk
Busy Operation
Trunk
Group
Attendant
Access
Trunk
Group
Dial Access
Test Termination

ORDER

MAP

No.

215217
215218
215219
215-220
215-221
215-222
215-223
215-224
215-225
215-226

SECTION

Sheet

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[lb]
_. _ Dial number of check extension
Ringing
tone
Check
extension
1 rings
[l*C]
Lift check
extension
1 handset
.
Conversation
between
maintenance
handset
and check
extension
1

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[2A]
Set switch
to ON-HOOK
then
OFF-HOOK
Transfer
dial tone
[2:B]
Dial number
ot check
extension
Ringing
tone
Check
extension
2 rings
[2:C]
Lift check
extension
2 handset
Private
two way conversation
between
maintenance
handset
and check
extension
2
.
Check
extension
1 on hold

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[3A]
Set switch
to ON-HOOK
then
OFF-HOOK
.
Check
extension
2 on hold
.
Private
conversation
with check
extension
1
[36]
Set switch
to ON-HOOK
then
OFF-HOOK
.
Private
conversation
with check
extension
2
.
Check
extension
1 on hold

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Replace
check
sei
Set maintenance
to ON-HOOK
Replace
check
set

extension
handset
extension

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 of 1

.:
,-.

AND
.

.
ESTABLISH
MAINTENANCE

CHECK
EXTENSION
SET CALL

-7121 v
2

AND

.
HOLD
ORIGINAL
CALL CHECK
EXTENSION
2

131

CALL

AND
+--u

ALTERNATE
BETWEEN

1 hand-

CALLS

[41

switch
2 hand-

TERMINATE

CALLS

SECTION
1 CALL

MITL9105/9110-98.215

FORWARDING

- BUSY

1 MAP215205
Issue
Sheet

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
PAI Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
Dial Call Forwarding
- Busy
lh
+ number
of check
extension
Dial tone
Set switch
to ON-HOOK
[h

I
80

1 of 1

code

:.
:.
I
I

AND

-1

SET UP CALL
FORWARDING
Set maintenance
handset
to OFF-HOOK
Dial test line number
from
sole
Check
extension
rings
Press console
RELEASE

2, July

- BUSY

switch
con-

CHECK
CALL
BUSY-NUMBER

FORWARDING
BUSY

CHECK
CALL
BUSY-NUMBER

FORWARDING.
IDLE

[3Al
1381
.

&I
[iE/

Set maintenance
handset
to ON-HOOK
Dial test line number
from
sole
Busy lamp field shows
test
number
busy
Check
extension
idle
Set maintenance
handset
to OFF-HOOK
Two way call with console
Press console
RELEASE
Set maintenance
handset
to ON-HOOK

switch
con-

switch

switch
-

[4Al
[4Bl
[4Cl

Set maintenance
handset
switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial Call Forwarding
- Busy code
Set maintenance
handset
switch
to ON-HOOK

Set maintenance
handset
to OFF-HOOK
Dial test line number
from
sole
Busy tone
ATT and BUSY lamps
lit
Press console
RELEASE
Console
idle
Set maintenance
handset
to ON-HOOK

-cl
I31

line

AND

-I

switch

CANCEL
CALL
FORWARDING

-v

con-

AND

switch

- BUSY

,
TEST CALL
FORWARD
BUSY INACTIVE

‘I

FINISH

A2-11112

i :
i

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

( CALL FORWARDING

- DON’T ANSWER 1

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[I\]
Dial Call Forwarding - Don’t
Answer code + number of check
extension
Dial tone
[;C] Set switch to ON-HOOK

AT CONSOLE
[2A] CIX$stest line number from con.
.
.
[2B]
.
.
.

[;C]
.

Ringing tone
DESTINATION display shows the
test line number and its class,
ATT and RING lamps lit
Busy Lamp Field shows test line
number busy
After time-out (205, 30s or 40s)
Check extension rmgs
Busy Lamp Field shows test line
number idle check extension
busy
DESTINATION display shows
number of check extension and
its class
ATT and RING lamps lit
Press
console RELEASE
Console idle

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[3A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[3\]
Dial Call Forwarding - Don’t
Answer code
[3C] Set switch to ON-HOOK

CHECK
CALL
;fMREW;$lNG

431
4

AFTER

’
AND

1
CANCEL
CALL
FORWARDlNG
ANSWER

- DON’T

AT CONSOLE
_[4A)_ Dial test line number
.
Ringing tone
.
DESTINATION disolav shows
number of test line and its class
ATT and RING lamps lit
[:B] Wait 45s - no chanoe
[4C] Press console RELEASE
.
Console idle

A2-13114

SECTION
CALL

MITL9105/9110-98-215

FORWARDING

- FOLLOW

MAP215-207

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[IL]
Dial Call Forwarding
- Follow
Me
code
+ number
of check
extension
Dial tone
[;C]
Set switch
to ON-HOOK

*[ll
*

Issue

2, July

Sheet

1 of 1

t
AND
.
SET UP CALL
FOR WARDlNG

AT CONSOLE
[2.A]
Dial number
of test line
Check
extensron
rmgs
.
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
of check
extension
and
its class
ATT and RING lamps
lit
(2&
Press console
RELEASE
.
Console
rare
-

CHECK
CALL
FORWARDlNG
ME ACT/YE

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[3A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[TS]
FF;eCall
Forwarding
- Follow
[3C]

Set

switch

to ON-HOOK
FOLLOW

- FOLLOW

AT CONSOLE
[4.A]
Dial test line number
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
of test line and its class
ATT and RING
lamps
lit
[4\]
Press console
RELEASE
.
Console
idle
-

CHECK
CALL
FORWARDlNG
lNACT/VE

A2-15118

SECTION
CALL

MITL9105/9110-98.215

PARK

MAP215-208
Issue
Sheet

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[lA]
Dial number
of check
extension
.
Ringing
tone
.
Check
extension
rings

2, July

1 of 1

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[lB]
Lift handset
.
Two way conversation
with
maintenance
set
[lC]
Flash
switchhook
.
Maintenance
set on hold
Transfer
dial tone
[l*D]
Dial Call Park code
Dial tone
[lk]
Replace
handset

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[2p]
Lift handset
Two way conversation
with
maintenance
set
[2B]
Flash
switchhook
Maintenance
set on hold
&C]
Dial Call Park code
Transfer
dial tone
[;D]
Replace
handset

-121
AND

4
.

*
RiEL/--;;;E

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[3p]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[3B]
Dial Directed
Call Pick-Up
code
+ number
of check
extension
1
.
Two way conversation
with
maintenance
set
I

pi31

AND

RETRlEYE
-REMOTE

[4A]
[4B]

Replace
check
perr-rrntenance

CALL

extension
switch

TERMINATE

CALL

A2-17/18

SECTION

MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5

1 CALL PICK-UP

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial number of check extension
.
Check extension rings
.
DESTINATION display shows
number and class of check extension
.
ATT and RING lamps lit

I
rf211-7

D/AL CHECK
EXTENSION
NUMBER
FROM
CONSOLE

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[2A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[;B]
Dial Call Pick-Up code
.
Check extension stops ringing
.
Two wav conversation with console
-

AND

MAINTENANCE

[3A]

Set maintenance
handset
to ON-HOOK
I3Bl Press console RELEASE

Note: Check extension and test line
must be in the same pickup group.

HANDSET

switch

3-1

AND

AT CONSOLE
[4A] Dial number other than that of
test line or check extension
.
DESTINATION display shows
number dialed and class of extension dif lled
.
ATT and R ING lam s lit
.
Busy Laml > Field s 1 ows called
SC.,
number bu=,

DIAL NUMBER
FROM
CONSOLE

(F)

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[5A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[5\]
Dial Directed
Call Pickup
code
+
number
dialed
in [43
[5C]
l%;
way conversation
with con-

AND

PlCKUP
CALL
FROM
MAINTENANCE
SET

161
[6A]
[6B]

Set maintenance
to ON-HOOK
Press console

handset

switch

’

AND

RELEASE

.
TERMINATE
CALL

A2-20

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 CAMP-ON

:
I

MAP215210
Issue
Sheet

AT CONSOLE
[l.A]
Dial number
of check
extension
DESTINATION
drsplay
shows
number
and class
of .check
extension
.
ATT and RING lamps
lit
Check
extension
rings
[l*B]
Lift check
extension
handset
.
Two way conversation
with con.
sole

[3Al
138
[3C I

Set maintenance
to ON-HOOK
Replace
check
Press console

handset
extension
RELEASE

1 of 1

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
Dial number
of check
extension
1
&I
Busy tone
I& After 10s check extension
receives
BEEP tone
RELEASE
PDI Press console
1 hand[=I Replace check extension
sei
Check
extension
rings
Lift check
extension
handset
1&
.
Two way call with maintenance
handset

PAI

2, July

ESTABLISH
CONSOLE
CHECK
EXTENSlON

TO
CALL

CAMP-ON
CHECK

1
.

AND

TO
EXTENSlON

switch
handset

-1
TERMlNA
CALL

A2.21122

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

CONSULTATION
HOLDTTRANSERIADD-ON

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[l*B] Dial number of check extension
.
Ringing tone
.
Check extension 1 rings

l-cl

1 *

AND

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A] Lift handset
.
Two way private conversation
with maintenance handset
[26] Flash switchhook
.
Maintenance
handset on hold
Transfer dial tone
[;C] Dial number of check extension 2
.
Ringing tone
Check extension 2 rings
[2b] Lift check extension 2 handset
.
Private conversation, check extension 1 and check extension 2

ESTABLISH
HANDSET
EXTENS/ON

MAlNTENANCE
A ND CHECK
7 CALL

AND

CONSULT
WTH
CHECK
EXTENSlON

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[3A] Flash switchhook
.
Three way call, check extension
1, check extension 2, and
maintenance
handset
[3B] Replace check extension 1 handset
.
Two way call, maintenance
handset and check extension 2

[4A]
[4B]

Set maintenance
handset switch
to ON-HOOK
,R,eplace check extension 2 hand-

TRANSFER
TO CHECK

AND
--i

J
TERMINATE
CALL

CALL
EXTENSION

SECTION
;;;WF;TIC

MITL9105/9110-98.215
CALLBACK

- DON’T

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[IL]
Dial test line number
.
Ringing tone
.
Console Busy Lamp Display
shows check extension and test
line busy
-

AT CHECK EXTENSION
Flash switchhook
y1
Dial tone
[=I Dial Automatic Callback
Answer code + number
line
Dial tone
Replace handset
&I

[3Al

[+I
.
[3Cl
.

Don’t
of test

AND

.
-

I
ACTIVE
AUTOMATIC
CALLBACK

Set handset switch to OFFHOOK then ON-HOOK
Check extension rings
Lift check extension handset
Ringing tone
Console Busy Lamp Field shows
check extension and test line
kifYmaintenance
to OFF-HOOK
Two way call

handset switch
DON’T

ANSWER

Beplace check extension handset
Set maintenance
handset switch
to ON-HOOK
TERMlNA
CALL

A2-25128

SECTION
EI-;;,““BA~K

Sheet

AT MAINTENANCE
SET
[lA]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
(l*B]
,“i’b”:, ;he number
of check
.
(I:]

_f&I [;D]

[3A]
[3B]
.

Busy tone
Dial automatic
code
Dial tone
Replace
handset

Set maintenance
to ON-HOOK
Replace
check
set
Check
extension

- BUSY

1 of 1

exten-

Ringing
tone
Check
extension
1 rings
Lift check
extension
1 handset
Two way conversation
maintenance
set and check
extension
1

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[2.A]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[2B]
Di)iA t,he number

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AND

ESTABLISH
CALL,
MAINTENANCE
SET
CHECK
EXTENSION

AND
1

2
of check

exten-

AND
callback

busv

I
OBTAIN
AUTOMATIC
BUSY CONDlTlON
CHECK
EXTENSION

handset
extension

CALLBACK
FROM
1

switch
1 hand-

2 rings
1

[4.A]
]4:B]

Lift check
extension
handset
Ringmg
tone
Check
extension
1 rings
Lift check
extension
handset
Two way conversation
check
tension
1 and 2

exCHECK
EXTENSION
2 ANSWERS,
RINGS
CHECK
EXTENSION
1
AND SPEAKS

[5A]

,R,eplace

check

extension

1 hand-

[5B]

Replace
set

check

extension

2 hand-

TERMINATE

CALL

A2-27128

/:
[

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

MEET-ME CONFERENCE

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[I’B] Dial Meet-Me Conference
.
Call on hold

,111
AND

code

ACCESS MEET-ME
CONFERENCE
MAINTENANCE

FROM
HANDSET

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[;B] Dial Meet-Me Conference code
.
Two way conversation
with
maintenance
set

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3!]
yeI ll”,“,se’
[3B]
.

‘--cl
RI

AND

ENTER
FROM

CONFERENCE
CHECK
EXTENSION

ENTER
FROM

CONFERENCE
CHECK
EXTENSION

Dial Meet-Me Conference code
Conference call maintenance set,
check extension 1 and 2
-

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[4A] Replace check extension 1 and
check extension 2 handsets
[4B] Set maintenance
handset switch
to ON-HOOK
1

TERMINATE

CONFERENCE

A2.29130

/
!

SECTION
EXECUTIVE

MITL9105/9110-98-215
BUSY

OVERRIDE

1 MAP215215
issue
Sheet

2, July

I
80

1 of 1

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[lA]
Dial number
of check
extension
1
.
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
and COS of the check
extension,
ATT and RING lamps
lit
Check
extension
rings
[IL]
Lift check
extension
handset
.
Two way conversation
with console
I-

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[2A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[2\]
Dial number
of check
extension
1
Busy tone
[2>]
Dial override
code
.
All parties
hear warning
tone
.
Three
way call, maintenance
handset,
check
extension
1, and
extension
2

[3A]

,ReePslace

check

[3B]

perr~intenance

extension
switch

. .

OVERRIDE
CALL
FROM
MAlNTENANCE
HANDSET

hand-

AND

to ONt----i

TERMINATE
CALL

FINISH

A2-31132

i -’

SECTION

MITL9105/911

O-98-21 5

PAGING

i-’

START

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[IA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[I\]
Dial paging
access
code
.
Beep heard
.
Check
extension
connected
pag.ing equipment

to
ACCESS

[3A]

Repeat
Step
ing codes

1 for

remaining

pag---I-

CODE

YES

431

PAGING

’

AND
I

ACCESS
PAGlNG

REMAINING
CODES

A2-33134

SECTION
’ ANSWER

MITL9105/911

INCOMING

O-98-21 5

CALL

MAP215-217
t Issue 2, Julv 80

Sheet 1 of 4

I
Abandon

trunk and an

Test

YES

AT CONSOLE
[3A] ANSWER and LDN lamps flash,
ringer sounds
[3B] Press LDN
.
ANSWER, LDN and SOURCE
lamps light
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 017-l)
shows number of calling trunk
and ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and maintenance
set

AND

-131
<

[-;a :

AND
ANSU IER
LDN C:ALL
(FIG. 217.1)

,
[4A]
.

Press SERIAL CALL
SERIAL CALL lamp lights

p Fig.017.1

4
Note: Equi ment number displayed IS
same as Ind vidual Trunk Access Code.
SET UP
SERIAL
CALL

A2-35

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 Sheet 2 of 4

AT CONSOLE
[5$] Dial number of check extension
ANSWER. LDN and DESTINATION lambs lit
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 217-2)
shows the eauioment number of
the calling trunk
.
DESTINATION display shows the
number and COS of the check
extension
.
ATT and RING lamps lit

l-l 7 l-l
LI I l-l
-

AND
.

CLASS

ATT

INT

RCL
SOURCE

DID

0
MAN

1; 1; 1;
---

EXTEND
CALL
TO TEST STAT/ON
(FIG. 217.2)

NUMBER

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[6A] Lift check extension handset
.
;T; way conversatron wrth con-

AT CONSOLE
[7A] Press SOURCE
.
ANSWER, LDN and SOURCE
lamps lit
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 217-3)
shows the number of the calling
trunk, ATT lamp lit
.
DESTINATION disolav shows
number and COS of check extension
.
Two way private call with
maintenance set
-

NUMBER

0
ATT

CLASS
0

RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

ERROR

Fig. 217-2

-NUMBER

(

SPLIT
CALL
TO
SOURCE
(FIG. 217.3)

0
ATT

CLASS
0
INT

0
SOR;;cE

0
DID

0
MAN

)

NUMBER
0
FO

0
0
RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

Fig. 217-3

Note:
same

A2-38

I
Equipment
as lndlvidual

number
Trunk

displayed
is
Access
Code.
I

SECTION
1 ANSWER

MITL9105/9110-98-215

INCOMING

CALL

From [7j
AT CONSOLE
[8A] Press DEST
.
:tNSWER, LDN and DEST lamps
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 217-4)
shows the eauioment number of
the calling trunk)
.
DESTINATION display shows the
number and COS of the check
extension
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way private call with check
extension

SPLIT CALL
TO DESTINA
(FIG. 217.4)

AT CONSOLE
[9A] Press BOTH
.
ftNSWER, LDN and BOTH lamps
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 217-5)
shows equipment number of calling trunk
.
ATT lamp lit
.
DESTINATION display shows
number and COS of check extension
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Three way call check extension,
maintenance set and console

[lOA] Press console RELEASE
.
Console idle
.
Two way conversation, check extension and maintenance set

PI t
PI

.
.
.

.%hiRCE display .(Fig. 217-6)
shows the equipment number of
the calling trunk
ATT, RCL lamps lit
Two way conversation console
and maintenance set
-

Fig. 217-4
qote:

I
;gL;m;LL
(FIG.

Equipment number displayed is
same as lndlwdual Trunk Access
Code.
’ ’
1

217-S)

AND
t-

[ll A] Replace check extension handset
.
Console rin er sounds
ANSWER L% N RCL lamps flash
1; B] Press co&sole kCL
.
SERIAL CALL, SOURCE
.
ANSWER, LDN and RCL lamps

TION

’

AND

RELEASE
CONSOLE

-3 11’3

NUMBER
0
0
0
All
RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

AND
I
I

Fig. 217-5

RETURN
CALL TO
CONSOLE
(FIG. 27 7-6)

(,,,.,,)

Fig. 217-6

r
13
CLASS
0
ERROR

SECTION
ANSWER

MITL9105/9110-98-215
INCOMING

CALL

MAP215-217
rlssue

2, July

rziSheet -4 of 4

1121.t

[12A] Press HOLD 1
l
Console idle
l
HOLD lamp lit
l
Call held

AND
ti

HOLD
CALL

[13A] $.;ty recall time-out (20, 30, or
.
HOLD lamp flashes
l
Ringer sounds
[13B] Press HOLD 1
l
;:h:WER and SOURCE lamps
l

[14A
[14B

SOURCE displa shows equipment number o Y calling trunk

Press cpnsole
penytenance

AND

HOLD

RECALL

RELEpsE
switch to ON- ’

TERMINATE
CALL

A2-38

S’ECTION MITL9105/911

O-98-21 5

PI
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift handset
.
Dial tone

lMAKE CHECK
EXTENSION
BUSY

AT CONSOLE
[2p] Dial number of check extension
DEST and ANSWER lamps Irt
.
DESTINATION display (Fig. 218-l)
shows number and COS of check
extension
.
ATT and BUSY lamps lit
Busy tone
(2@B] Press CALLBACK
[2C] Press RELEASE
.
Console idle

A UTOMA

[3A]

Replace check extension

AT CONSOLE
.
RCL and ANSWER
.
Ringer sounds
[3B]
.
.

handset

AND

Press RECALL
ANSWER, DEST and CALLBACK
lamps light
DESTINATION display shows
number and COS of check extension, ATT and RING lamps lit

AT CHECK EXTENSION
.
Ringer sounds

-0

Fig. 218-1

131

lamps flash

-I

[4p]

T/C

ANSWER
CALLBACK

CONSOLE

AND

Lift handset
Two way call
ANSWER
CHECK

CALL AT
EXTENSION

,,
t51

Replace check extension
Press console RELEASE
Console idle

handset

AND

TERMINATE
CALL

A2.39140

SECTION
EXTENDING

MITL9105/9110-98-215
INTERNAL

CALLS

MAP215-219

START

Issue

2, July

Sheet

1 of 1

Terminate

Test

(,,.,,,)

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[2.A]
Lift handset
Dral tone
[2B]
Dial 0
.
Ringing
tone

AT CONSOLE
.
ANSWER
and DIAL 0 lamps
flash
Ringer
sounds
[iA]
Press
DIAL 0
.
ANSWER,
DIAL 0 and SOURCE
lamps
light
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 219-l)
shows
number
and COS of check
extension
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation

.
.
.
.

;Fn;k

access

--Cl

NUMBER
0
0
A7T
INT

0
RCL
SOURCE

AND

0
DID

CLASS
0
MAN

0
DID

CLASS
0
MAN

Fig. 219-1

ANSWER
DIAL 0
CALL
(FIG. 219.1)

code

ANSWER,
DEST and DIAL 0
lamps
lit
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 219-2)
shows
number
and COS of check
extension
DESTINATION
disolav
shows
trunk
access
code’
ATT lamp lit

DIAL

131

J
AT CONSOLE
[4.A]
1331d~.

EI
AND

ACCESS
TRUNK

0
CO
(F/G.

0
RCL
SOURCE

219-2)

151
[5A]
.
.

Press
console
Console
idle
CO dial tone
tension

RELEASE
heard

at check

ex---I--

AND

RELEASE

CONSOLE

f
ct61 t
[6A]

Replace

check

extension

han

Fig. 219.2

z----j
Note:
displayed

AND

TERMINATE

Individual
is same

Trunk
Access
as equipment

Code
number

TEST

A2-41142

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

) ANSWERING
1

2, July

Sheet

1 of 2

,
’

Ill

---c

MAP2157220
Issue

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift check
extension
Dial tone
[l*B]
Dial 0
.
Ringing
tone

RECALL

1 handset

AT CDNSOLE
.
DIAL 0, and ANSWER
lamps
flash
Ringer
sounds
[2:]
Press DIAL 0
.
DIAL 0. ANSWER
and SOURCE
lamps
fight
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 220-l)
shows
number
and COS of check
extension
1
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation

AT CONSOLE
[3p]
Dial number
of check
extension
2
DIAL O,.ANSWER
and DEST
lamps
Irt
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 220-2)
shows
number
and c;uS OT check
extension
e
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
and COS of check
extension 2, ATT and RING lamps
lit

I-

DIAL

II
0

IT:
ll
CLASS
0

0
DID

Fig. 220-l

14
1

CHECK
EXTENSION
(FIG. 220-2)

333
--NUMBER

PI41
[4A]
[4B]

Check
extension
Press console
Console
idle

2 rings
RELEASE

0
MAN

0
ATT

0
INT

0
RCL
SOURCE

AND

RELEASE
CONSOLE

Fig. 220-2

0
DID

CLASS
0
MAN

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ANSWERING

RECALL

MAP215220
Issue

July 80

Sheet 2 of 2

AT CONSOLE
[5A] t;$r time out period (20, 30 or
.
RCL and ANSWER lamps flash
Ringer sounds
[&]
Press RECALL
.
RCL, ANSWER and SOURCE
lamps light
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 220-3)
shows the number and COS of
check extension 1
.
ATT and RCL lamps lit
.
DESTINATION display shows
number and COS of check extension
-

[6A]
[6\
[6C

A2-44

Press console CANCEL
Console idle
Replace check extension
F’r%sso~~~rele RELEASE

by
AND

ANSWER
RECALL
(FIG. 220-3)

-PI
handset

‘I
AND

-1 ‘I 3
--NUMBER
0
0
ATT
INT

e
RCL
SOURCE

Fig. 220.3

0
DID

CLASS
0
MAN

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

OVERRIDE

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[lA]
Lift check
extension
1 handset
Dial tone
[I\]
Dial number
of check
extension
Ringing
tone
[l:C]
Lift check
extension
2 handset
Two way conversation

AT ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
[2A]
Dial number
of check
extension
1
.
Busy tone
.
DEST and ANSWER
lamps
lit
.
DESTINATION
display
(Fig. 221-1)
shows
number
and class
of
check
extension
1
.
ATT and BUSY lamps
lit

[3A]
.
.

[4A]
[4B]

Press

and

hold

down

Release
Replace
sets

console
check

SET-UP
TWO WAY
CALL

-cl
PI

AND

Fig.

OVERRIDE

Ali parties
hear warning
Three
way conversation,
check
extensions
1 and

tone
I-[?
console,
2

OVERRIDE

TERMINATE

TEST

:;
‘+

221-l

SECTION

FLEXIBLE

MITL9105/9110-98.215

NIGHT

SERVICE

1 MAP215222
Issue
Sheet

-cl

AT CONSOLE
WI Dial *, 3
ANSWER
and DEST lamps
lit
Dial INDIVIDUAL
TRUNK
ACh
CESS CODE
(equi
ment number)
.
ANSWER
and DE t T lamps
lit
.
D.ESTlNATlON
display
shows
inclrr$r~,“l’
trunk
(equipment)

.
WI

[3Al

AND

.
.

Press
NIGHT
1
ANSWER
and DEST lamps
lit
SOURCE
display
shows
individual
trunk
number
Dial number
of check
extension
ANSWER
and DEST lamos
lit
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 222-l)
shows
individual
trunk
number
and night assignment
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
of check
extension
1
Press
RELEASE

Press NIGHT
1 button
selected
ste
[2A]
NI l HT lamp lit
Night
trunk
is connected
to
check
extension

ACCESS

NlGHT

NUMBER

(

ATT

CLASS
INT ,,","d-,,

DID

MAN

SERWCE

I-

Lift check
Two way
extension

Replace
check
extension
1 and
handsets
Press NIGHT
button
associated
with NIGHT
lamp

Fig. 222-l

I
1

t----l

AND

1
check

SERVICE

Individual
I

SERVICE

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[4A]
Lift handset
Dial tone
Dial outside
line trunk
access
bl
code
CO dial tone
Dial listed
directorv
number
of
ih
console
.
Ringing
tone
.
Check
extension
1 rings

with

NIGHT

SELECT
NIGHT

extension
conversation
2

1 of 1

Ill

WI
.
.

(xii--)

PA1
.
.

2. Julv

Trunk Access Code

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AT CONSOLE
[l A]
Dial *. 9 Individual
Trunk
number,
*
.
ANSWER
and DEST lamps
light
.
DESTINATION
display
(Fig. 223-l)
shows
number
dialed
L, ATT lit
11Bl Press RELEASE

A
CLASS
0

ERROR

Fig. 223-l
Dial*,
2, Individual
Trunk
Numb&dialed
in lA] *
ANSWER
and DE 4 T lamps
lit
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
dialed.
ATT lit
Busy tone
’
Press
RELEASE

I
Note:

Individual

Trunk

Access

Code

TRUNK-BUSY

[3Al
.
.
1381

Dial *, 9. Individual
Trunk
Numbbr,f
ANSWER
and DEST lamps
lit
DESTINATION
display.(Fig.
223-2)
shows
number
dialed
, Al I Ilt
Press RELEASE

tMAKE
TRUNK
NON-BUSY
(FIG. 223-2)

I-I I3 13
l,ll-II -- I

[4Al
.
.

Fig.

223-2

JERMINA

J
I

A2-49150

SECTION

MITL9105/9110.98-215

TRUNK GROUP ATTENDANT

ACCESS

MAP215-224
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 1

AT ATTENDANT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial *, 6, trunk group number,*
.
ANSWER and DEST lamos lit
.
DESTINATION display (Fig. 224-l)
shows trunk group followea my L
11. Bl Press RELEASE
TRUNK GROUP STATUS display
(Fig. 224-2) shows trunk group attendant access

MAKE

TRUNK

tOUP ATTENDANT

AT CHECK EXTENSION
Lift handset
'2~1 Dial CO trunk access code
Ringing tone
.
Console rings
.
“Dial 0” and ANS lamps flash
.
Call is interceptea to tne console
-

TRUNK CALL

AT ATTENDANT CONSOLE
[3A] Press console “Dial 0” key
.
“Dial 0” lamp lit
.
Two way conversation with check
extension

Fig. 224-l

AND

ANSWER
INTERCEPT

AT ATTENDANT

CONSOLE

.
I481
.
[‘&.

Xal CO trunk access code
bial tom
ANSWEF ; and DEST lamps lit
ATT lamp lit
sress
-^___I_RELEASE
:A‘I,,,,,,,
I”lt:

d41

_-.._-.- .-.-

Fig. 224-2

AND

.
-

CHECK
ACCESS

ATTENDANT
TO TRUNK

.::::
...-1
:;‘t

A2-51152

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

TRUNK GROUP DIAL ACCESS
MAP215225
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 5

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial access code of trunk group
.
Dial tone
-

CHECK
TRUNK-GROUP
ATTENDANT

$4
[2A]
.
.

Dial*, 6, Trunk Grou Number, #
ANSWER and DEST Pamps lit
DESTINATION display (Fig. 225-l)
shows Trunk Group Number
,
ATT lit

ACCESS

AND

MAKE
TRUNK
GROUP
DIAL
ACCESS

(FIG. 225-l)

[3Al
.

Dial access code of trunk group
Dial tone

Fig. 225-l

CHECK
GROUP
ACCESS

-141 t
I4A]

Press RELEASE

TRUNK
DIAL

AND

TERMINATE
TEST

A2.53154

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

TEST TERMINATION
MAP215226
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 5

AT MAINTENANCE PANEL
[lA]
Sg4c;sole
switches
IlBl
‘--’

Set_ PO-kER SUPPLY and COMFiiBCENTROL
switches to

_[lCl _ Set MASTER SWITCH to NOR[lD]

MAL
Remove console from
maintenance panel

SET TRANSFER
SWITCHES,
REMOVE
MAINTENANCE
CONNECTOR

connected

Connect required attendant consoles as detailed in MAP200-202

YES

-1

AND

Is attendant
console No. 1 to be

[5A]

gtA;r$.SOLE

No. 1 switch to

I..:
I?--.
._
..-.
:_ ~.,

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-215

Issue

2, July

Sheet

2 of 5

From [5]

Is attendant console
No. 2 to be used

YES
.

PI
[7A]

g;tA%$SOLE

No.

2 switch

to
k-

AND
.

t
ENABLE
CONSOLE

AT FIRST ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
[8A]
Press LAMP TEST
.
All LED’s
light
Tone ringer
sounds
[8&
Release
and press
LAMP TEST
[8\]
.

PA1
.

%%~plays
Release
Console

Dial*
ApISWFR

show

dark

A2-58

PERFORM
LAMP
TEST

5
lamn

lit

DEST lamp lit
DESTINATION
display
shows
Dial hours
Dial two digit minutes
DESTINATION
display
shows
time
Dial*
if p.m.
Press RELEASE
Correct
time is displayed

N’AI

Check
that all installation
records
are complete
Lock equipment
cabinet
Place equipment
cabinet
final position

doors
in its

-------1

1
I-

ANC

L-r’
*I101
SET

*‘:

AND

COMPLETE
CONSOLE

CAB/NET
AND
/NSTALLAT/ON

SECTION
TEST

From Check
Extension
[ll A] Lift handset
[llB]
Dial 0
.
Ringback
tone

MITL9105/9110-98-215

TERMINATION

returned
I-

--J
-

\t Console
2Aj Tone rin er sounds,
DIAL 0 and
ANSWE 8 lamps flash busy lamp

DIAL 0 FROM
EXTENSION

lights.

281 Press DIAL 0
l
Dial 0 and ANSWER
lamps light
l
SOURCE
display shows number
and
class of callin
extension,ATT
lamp lit.
l
BUSY LAMP t IELD shows calling
extension
number busy
l
Connection
established
-

a-1

AND

ANSWER
CALL
AT CONSOLE

YES

Note Symptom
Refer to Section

and continue
test
MITL9105/9110-96-360.

A2-57

;.
:

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

Issue

2, July

Sheet

4 of 5

[16A]

Replace

[16B]

Press

extension
console

handset.

RELEASE

CALL

AT CONSOLE
[13A] Dial extension
number displayed
in [8].
.
DESTINATION
display shows number
and class of called extension,
ATT and
RING lamps lit.

FROM

I1381
.

At extension
handset.
Connection

under

test lift extension

established

ANSWER

Is console

CALL

display

Is connection

free

YES

A2-58

CONSOLE

Note symptom
Refer to Section

and continue
with
MITL9105/9110-98.350.

test.

SECTION

) Sheet

MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5

5 of 5

[17A]

Replace

extension

[17B]
.

Press console
Console
idle

handset.
RELEASE

AND

RELEASE
CALL

Have all extensions
been checked

Go to new
[l l] through

extension
[22].

and

repeat

steps

YES

Were
numbers,

all extensions,
class, and busy

YES

Go to Section
9105/9110-98-200

Were connections
free from noise

YES

(+-)
A2.59

;:
i”

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-215

APPENDIX 3
GENERIC 203 SYSTEM TESTS
General
A3.1

The SX-100 or SX-200 programmed
with Generic 203 is tested
Tables, using the MAPS shown which appear in Appendix 3.

TABLE A3-1

Order

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

EXTENSION

Option

Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Call Park
Call Pick-Up
Camp-On
Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic Callback - Busy
Meet Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Do Not Disturb
Call Block
Call Hold
Single Digit Dialing
Transfer Into Busy
Common Alerting Devices

in the order shown

in the following

OPTIONS

MAP No.

MAP215201
MAP21 5200
M AP215204
MAP215-205
MAP215-206
MAP21 5-207
MAP215-208
MAP21 5-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-212
MAP215-213
MAP215-214
MAP215-215
MAP215-216
MAP215-301
MAP21 5-302
MAP21 5-303
MAP215-304
MAP215-305
MAP215-306

I-.
:
:

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

TABLE A3-2

CONSOLE

OPTIONS
ORDER

OPTION

MAP NO.
NONHIM

Test Console Features
Test Console Features
Answer CO Trunk Call
Answer DID Trunk Call
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Attendant Controlled Conference
Attendant
Station Busy-Out
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Message Registration
Controlled Outgoing Restriction
Room Status
Automatic
Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination

A3-2

MAP215350
MAP21 5-300
MAP215351
MAP21 5-352
MAP21 5-353
MAP215-354
MAP215-355
MAP215-356
MAP21 5-357
MAP215-358
MAP215-359
MAP215-301
MAP215-302
MAP215303
MAP21 5-304
MAP215-305
MAP215-318
MAP215319
MAP215-320
MAP215-321
MAP215322
MAP21 5-323
MAP215-324
MAP21 5-325
MAP215-326

H/M

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

a
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

SECTION

M ITL91051911 O-98-21 5

) TEST EXTENSION

Test all options
300-l

listed in Table
-

1 MAP215300

1 Issue 1, January 80

L..Sheet

[2A]

OPTIONS

1 of 1

+
I

I
TEST GENERlC
203
EXTENSlON
OPTIONS

YES

(QLEk-)

TABLE
Drder

:
3
4
:
i
9
;:
;:
14
2
:i

Option

Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Call Park
Call Pick-up

300-l
Name

- Busy
- Don’t Answer
- Follow Me

%&%ition
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic Callback - Busy
Meet-Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Do Not Disturb
Call Block
Call Hold
Single Digit Dialing
Transfer into Busy
Common Alerting Devices

MAP

No.

215-204
215-205
215-206
215-207
215-208
215-209
215210
215211
215-212
215-213
215-214
215-215
215-301
215-302
215-303
215-304
215-305
215-306

A3-314
I

SECTION
1

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[lA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[l*B] Dial Do Not Disturb access code
followed by digit 1
[lC] Replace handset

extension
Lamp Field lit

AT CHECK

[2p]

[2B]

EXTENSION

[;D]

.‘1.

.:-:
.:.:..
ENABLE
FEATURE
FROM
EXTENSION

Lift handset
Dral tone
pial number of Check Extension

-PI
a

’
AND

Press ANSWER
SOURCE display shows number
of Check Extension 2 and class
ATT and INT lamps lit (Fig. 101-l)
Two way conversation, Check Extension 2 and console
Press console RELEASE
Replace handset at Check Extension 2

VERIFY
ENABLED
FEATURE

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[3A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[3*B] Dial Do Not Disturb access code
followed by digit 2
[3C] Replace handset

AND

AT CONSOLE
.
Check Extension 1 lamp in Busy
Lamp Field goes off

AT CHECK

[4A]
(4&
.

Ringing

AT CHECK

[dc]
.
[4D]

EXTENSION

Lift handset
Dial tone
pial number

tone
-141

Bell rings
Lift handset
Two way conversation, Check Extension 1 and 2
Fttace
Check Extension hand-

AT CONSOLE
[4E] Press DO NOT DSTB key
.
Check Extension 1 lamp in Busy
Lamp Field is not lit
[4FJ
.

CANCEL
DO NOT
FEATURE

of Check Extension

EXTENSION

Release

DO NOT

Console

idle

1 lamp in Busy

.
Ringing tone (NOTE 1)
.
Console rings
AT- CONSOLE
.
ANSWER and DIAL 0 lamps flash
[2C]
.

DO NOT DISTURB

AND

AT CONSOLE
.
Check

MITL9105/9110-98-215

DSTB

key

AND

VERIFY
CANCELLED
FEATURE

Fig. 301-l

DISTURB

SECTION

MlTL9105/9110-98-215

CALL BLOCK

1 MAP215302
I

Issue 2, July 80

1 Sheet 1 of 2

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[lA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[I’B] l$al number of Check Extension

r[ll

Ringin tone
A’; CHECK EIT ENSION 2
Bell rings
[;C] Lift handset
.
Two way conversation
between
console and Check Extension 1
-

’

-AND

AT CONSOLE
[2A] Press CALL BLOCK
.
CALL BLOCK lamp lights

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[3A] Check that conversation is still
effective with Check Extension 2
[3B] Replace handsets of both extensions
AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[4A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[;B] Dial Check Extension 2
.
Ringing tone (NOTE 1)
Corisofe rings.
A; CONSOLE
[4C] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE disolav shows extension number’and
class-of-service
ATT and INT lamps lit
Press RELEASE
Replace handset check extension
1

AND
.
VERIFY
EXISTING
CALL MAINTAINED

-141
4

AND

VERIFY
CALL BLOCK
AND
INTERCEPT

Note 1:

Procedure applies if S stem
Option 116 is in e r feet. If
System Option
116 is not
enabled then reorder tone is
obtained
et Step [4B], and
T
[4C] and [4D] do not app

A3.7

SECTION

Ieet

MITL9105/9110-98.215

of 2

AT CONSOLE
[5A] Press CALL BLOCK
.
CALL BLOCK lamp off

CANCEL
CALL BLOCK

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[6A] Lift handset
Dial tone
(;B] Dial number of check extension
.
Ringing4one

AT CHECK EXTENSION 2
Bell rings
I&]
Lift handset
.
Two way conversation, check extension 1 and 2
[SD] ;e&$Tapdn;set
check exten-

A3-8

461
4

‘I

AND

VERIFY
CANCELLAUON
OF CALL BLOCK

SECTION MlTL9105/9110-98-215
1 CALL HOLD

MAP215303
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 3

START

‘r’

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[lA] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[I;]
Dial number for Check Extension
.

Ringing

Ill

--I

tone

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
Bell rings
[I&
Lift handset and establish conversation with Maintenance
Handset

AND

ESTABLISH
TWO-PARTY

’.
l
CALL

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A
Flash switchhook
_f2B _I Dial HOLD access code
.
Dial tone
.
Maintenance set on hold (may
receive music if customer provided)
[2C] Replace handset

-I21
l

AND

SET

FIRST

%EY

PI-~

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[3A] Dial RETRIEVE code
.
Call reconnected to maintenance
set

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
4A
Flash switchhook
Dial HOLD access code
f 4B
I
.
Dial tone
.
Maintenance set on hold (may
receive music if customer provided)
[4C] ;ial number of Check Extension
.
Ringing tone
AT CHECK EXTENSION 2
Bell rings
[4&
Lift handset and establish conversation with Check Extension 1

-A
AND

RETRlEVE
FIRST
PARTY

141c
a-

AND

;;T;;;;T
CALL

PARTY
THlkD

PARTY

A3-9

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
5A
Flash switchhook
Dial HOLD code
I 58
I
.
Call reconnected to maintenance
set
.
Check Extension 2 placed on
hold (with music if provided)

:+-cl
161

[6A]

z;@ace

Check Extension

[6B]

p;e;intenance

1 hand-

switch to ON-

AND

TERMINATE
FIRST
AND
SECOND
PARTY
CALL

AT CHECK EXTENSION 2
.
Ringing tone after HOLD timeout
period (2, 3 or 4 minutes)
AT CHECK EXTENSION
.
Bell rings
[7A]
.

Lift handset
C$lln ynnected

-VI
4

to Check Exten-

AND
6

A
YERlFY
THIRD
PARTY
TIMEOUT
RECALL

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
6A
Flash switchhook
Dial HOLD access code
I 68
. 1 Dial tone
.
Check extension 2 set on hold
(may receive music)
[6C] Replace handset

’

AND

-I
HOLD
PARTY

A3-10

THIRD

SECTION

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[9A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[9\]
Dial REMOTE
RETRIEVE
code
[9C]
Dial number
of check
extension
.
Conversation
established
between Maintenance
Set and
Check
Extension
2

]

CALL

MAP215-303

MITL9105/9110-98-215

HOLD

Issue

2, July

Sheet

3 of 3

I
I
80

RETRIEVE
FIRST

THIRD

PARTY

[lOA]
[lOB]

Replace
check
extension
set
Set switch
on Maintenance
to ON-HOOK

2 hand-

Set
-

AND
4

.
TERM/NATE
FIRST
A ND
THIRD
PARTY
CALL

A3-11112

’

SECTION
1

SINGLE

MITL9105/9110.98-215
DIGIT

DIALING

MAP215-304

Note:

Issue

2, July

Sheet

1 of 2

80
I

To conduct
the following
system
tests, check
extension
1 must be
programmed
as a “SERVICE”
extension
with
code
“n”
(a
single
digit
code).
Alternatively
check
extension
1 may be temporarily
connected
in parallel
on
the cross-connect
field to an ex.
tension
which
has a “SERVICE”
code,
for the test duration.

DTMF
AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[2p]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[2B]
Dial “n” (see above
note) followed immediately
by “#”
.
Ringing
tone
.
Check
extension
1 bell rings
[2.C]
Lift handset
at check
extension
1
Two way conversahon,
check
extensions
1 and 2
[2D]
Replace
handsets
on check
extensions
1 and 2

Note:
DIAL SERVICE
NUMBER
(n#)

Ste
[2] is for DTMF
telephones
an cr gives immediate
ring. Step
[3] is for DTMF
or rotary
dial
telephones
and tests
programmed timeout
interval
(3, 4 or 5s).

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[3A]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[;B]
Dial “n” (see above
note)
.
Ringing
tone
.
Check
extension
1 bell rings
[3.C]
[3D]

Lift handset
at check
extension
1
Two way conversahon,
check
extensions
1 and 2
Replace
handsets
on check
extensions
1 and 2
I-

AT CONSOLE
[4A]
Dial keypad
digit “n”
.
DESTINATION
disolav
shows
digit “n” (in Fig. 304-l
“n” is
.
No ringing
tone heard
ATT lamp lit
[:B]
Wait at least 10 seconds
No ringing
tone heard
[:C]
Press RELEASE

“5”)

DIAL SERVICE
NUMBER
(n - pause)

AN
.
CHECK
SlNGLE
DIALING

CONSOLE
D/G/T
Fig. 304-l

SECTION MITL910519110-98-215

[5A]
.
.
.

Dial keypad digits “n #”
DESTINATION display shows
check extension number 1 (NOTE
1) and class (Fig. 304-2)
ATT and RING lamps lit
Ringing tone

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
Bell rings
[;B]
Lift handset
.
Wi way conversation
:;pnly

[5D]
.

Press RELEASE at console
Both parties idle

A3-14

handset

with con-

[%I

at check exten-

VERIFY
CONSOLE
ACCESS

SECTION
TRANSFER

MITL9105/9110-98-215
INTO

BUSY

MAP215-305
Issue
Sheet

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[lA]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[AL]
DiDi; ;he number
of check
.

Ringback

1 of 1

exten-

tone

AND

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
Bell rings
[I’C]
Lift handset
.
Two way conversation
maintenance
handset

with

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
f2A]
_ - Lift handset
.
Dial tone
f2Bl
Dial number
of check
extension
-. - Ringback
tone
[2C]
Establish
two way connection,
check
extensions
2 and 3
AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[2D]
Flash
switchhook
.
Maintenance
handset
(may receive
music)
Transfer
dial tone
]2:E]
;;$
ptn;ber
of check

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[3A]
Replace
handset

2, July

ESTABLISH
HANDSET
EXTENSION

Pl-

AND

on hold
extension

MAINTENANCE
AND CHECK
7 CALL

SET MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
ON HOLD
AND CHECK
EXTENSlON
2 AS BUSY

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2 AND 3
[3B]
Check
extension
2 and 3 receive
camp-on
“beep”
tone
PC]
Rep!ace
handsets
Check
extension
2 bell rings
[;D]
Lift handset
check
extension
2
.
Two way conversation
between
check
extension
2 and
maintenance
handset
[3E]
Replace
handset
on check
extension 2, and set switch
to ONHOOK
on maintenance
handset
-

TFfANSFER
HANDSET
EXTENSION
CAMP-ON

MAINTENANCE
TO CHECK
2 AS
BUSY

A3-15/16

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Press
Night
Service
1 or 2 button
[lB]
Remove
handset
from console

I SELECT
AT TEST LINE
[2A]
Dial 9
Dial tone
(2;)
Di$;irnsole
.

Common

local
alerting

NlGHT SERVlCE

directory
device

rings

DIAL NIGHT SERVICE
FROM TEST LINE

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[3p]
Lift handset
Dral tone
[3B]
Dial TAFAS
code
.
Check
extension
connected
[3C]
Replace
handset

clI
131

AND

and

test

line
-

ANSWER CALL FROM
CHECK EXTENSION

YES

[5A]

Repeat
Steps
2 and 3 for remaining night bells to be tested

AND

A3-17118

SECTION

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 of 2

Note: In the console option test MAPS
the Check Extension
Number
1 is
displayed as 333 and COS as 6. Check
Extension Number 2 is displayed as 222
and COS as 5. Attendant Access code is
defined as 9 (displayed as L). End of dial
code is # (displayed
as J )
[lA]

Test all options
350-l

as listed

in Ta

TEST GENERIC
203
CONSOLE
OPTIONS

(xi--)
TABLE
CONSOLE

OPTIONS.
Option

Answering
Answering

350-l
TEST ORDER

Name

Incoming
DID Call

MAP No.
CO Call

215-351
215-352

Message
Waiting
Do Not Disturb
Call Forward
Busy
Call Forward
Don’t Answer
Call Forward
Follow
Me
Attendant
Controlled
Conference
Attendant
Station
Busy Out

215353
215-354
215-355
215-356
215-357

Extending
Automatic
Answering
Override
Trunk
Flexible

215-218
215-219
215-220
215-221
215-222
215-223

Internal
Callback Calls
A Recall
Night Service
Busy Operation
Group
Attendant

Trunk
Access
Trunk
Group
Dial
Test Termination

Access

215-258
215-259

215-224
215-225
215-226

A3-19

SECTION MITL9105/911

[lA]

lk&t,all

options

O-98-21 5

as listed

in Table

AND

Note:
In the console
option
test MAPS
the
check
extension
number
1
is displayed
as 333 and COS as 6.
Check
extension
number
2 is displayed
as 222 and COS as 5.
Attendant
Access
Code
is defined
as *
(displayed
as L).
End of dial code is # (displayed
as J ).

TEST GENERIC
203 (HIM)
CONSOLE
OPTIONS

CONSOLE
Order

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

A3-20

TABLE 300.1
OPTIONS - TEST ORDER
Option

Answer CO Trunk Call
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Cal I Forwarding
Busy
Call Forwarding
Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding
Follow Me
Attendant
Controlled Conference
Attendant Station Busy Out
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Message Registration
Controlled Outgoing Restriction
Room Status
Automatic
Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering A Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination

MAP No.

215-251
215253
2 15-254
215-255
215-256
215-257
215-258
215-259
215-360
215-361
215-362
215-363
215-364
215-218
215-219
215-220
\ 215-221
I 215-222
215-223
215-224
215-225
215-226

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

(“‘4”>

(Ool.M*P211312)

[PI

r 131

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[3A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[3@B] Dial CO trunk
access
code
CO dial tone
[3\]
Di$;~rsole
listed
directory

YES

AND
*

*
DIAL

AT CONSOLE
[4A]
ANSWER
and LDN lamps
flash,
ringer
sounds
[4B]
Press LDN
.
ANSWER,
LDN and SOURCE
lamps
Ii ht
.
SOURC -i display
(Fig. 351-l)
shows
number
of calling
trunk
and ATT lamps
lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and maintenance
set

-141

’

LDN

AND

Fig.

.
-

351-l

A NSWEfl
LDN CALL
(FIG. 357-7)

Note:
same

Equipment
as lndwidual

number
Trunk

displayed
is
Access
Code.

YES

(G-)

A3-21

SECTION

[6A]
.

MITL9105/9110-98-215

Press SERIAL
SERIAL
lamp

AND

lights

k
AT CONSOLE
[7A]
Dial number
of check
extension
.
ANSWER,
LDN, and DESTINATION lamps
lit
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 351-2)
shows
the eauioment
number
the calling
trunk
.
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
and COS of the check
extension
.
ATT and RING lamps
lit

I
of
the

I
AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[8A]
Lift check
extension
.
Two way conversation
sole

handset
with

con-

AT CONSOLE
[9A]
Press SOURCE
.
ANSWER,
LDN and SOURCE
lamps
lit
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 351-3)
shows
the number
of the calling
trunk ATT lamp lit
.
DESTINATION
display
shows
number
and COS of check
extension
.
Two way private
call with
maintenance
set

SET UP
SERIAL
CALL

TO TEST

STATION

FIG.351-2)

Fig. 351-2

111
same

f---

Equipment
as lndwdual

number
Trunk

displayed
is
Access
Code.

AND
l

SPLIT
CALL
TO
SOURCE
(FIG. 351.3)

NUMBER

Fig.

Note:
same

A3-22

Equi ment
as Ind Pvidual

351-3

number
Trunk

displayed
is
Access
Code.

SECTION

AT CONSOLE
[lOA] Press DEST
.
ANSWER LDN and DEST lamps
lit
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 351-4)
shows the equipment number of
the callin
trunk
.
DESTINA 8 ION display shows the
number and COS of the check
extension
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way private call with check
extension

SPLIT CALL
TO DESTINATION
(FIG.351-4)

AT CONSOLE
[llA] Press BOTH
.
ANSWER. LDN and BOTH lamps
lit
.
SOURCE display (Fig. 351-5)
shows equipment number ot call*
.

Fig. 351-4

Note:
same

%T,‘Z!
lit
Three way call check extension,
maintenance
set and console

number
displayed
is
Trunk
Access
Code.
I

3 1 ,7
dJ-l
NUMBER

RELEASE
CONSOLE

0
ATT

Equipment
as lndwidual

SPLIT CALL
TO BOTH
(FIG. 351-S)

[12A] Press console RELEASE
.
Console idle
.
Two way conversation, check extension and maintenance set
-I-

Replace check extension handset
g; ;;;;nance
set swatch to

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AND

11
CLASS

0
0
RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

Fig. 351-5

0
ERROR

SECTION
ANSWER

[15A]
.
p&q
.
.
.
.

MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5
INCOMING

CO TRUNK

CALL

Replace
check
extension
handset
Console
ringer
sounds
ANSWER
LDN
RCL lamps
flash
Press console
RELEASE
SERIAL
CALL,
SOURCE
ANSWER,
LDN and RCL lamps
!%!RCE
display
(Fig.
shows
the equipment
the calling
trunk
ATT, RCL lamps
lit
Two. way conversation,
and check
extension

(7)

cl
1151

AND

351-6)
number

console

RETURN
CALL
TO
CONSOLE

(FIG. 357-6)
Fig.
[16A]
.
.
.

[17A]
.
[I&]
c
.

Press HOLD
1
Console
idle
HOLD
lamp.lit
Call held

$ft$r

recall

time-out

(20, 30, or

HOLD
lamp flashes
Ringer
sounds
Press HOLD
1
ANSWER
and SOURCE
light
shows
SOURCE
displa
ment number
o Y calling

lamps
equiptrunk
HOLD

Press console
Set maintenance
HOOK

RELEASE
switch

oi+-..--

RECALL
.

AND

TERMlNA
CALL

A3-24

351-6

SECTION
( ANSWER

MITL9105/9110-98-215
DID

TRUNK

CALL

MAP215352
1 Issue

2, July

1 Sheet

1 of 2

(“T”‘)
YES

Go to MAP215-351

Abandon

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[3A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[;B] Dial CO trunk access code
CO dial tone
[{C] :fit; YID number for check exten.

Ringing

tone

Test

DIAL DID
STATION

NUMBER

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[4A] Lift check extension 1 handset
.
Two way conversation, check extension 1 and maintenance set
[4B] p&y
handset on check exten[4C]

;raa;nance

set switch to

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
_f5Al_ Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
ftB1 Dial CO trunk access code
CO dial tone
$Z]
p,i)ia;,91p number for Station

Ringing

tone

IAt-

Y---

AND

r-l

1
I

DIAL
fETEh’/l

STATION
NT DID

A3-25

’

SECTION
ANSWER

MITL9105/9110-98-215
DID

TRUNK

CALL

MAP215-352
issue

2, July

Sheet

2 of 2

AT CONSOLE
[6A]
ANSWER
and LDN 4 lamps
flash,
ringer
sounds
[6B]
Press LDN 4
.
ANSWER,
LDN 4 and SOURCE
lamps
light
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 352-l)
shows
number
of calling
trunk
.
ATT and DID lamos
lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and maintenance
set
[6Cl
Press RELEASE
[6D]
E$d-;;rFnance
set switch
to
-

\ I

Fig.

352-l

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[7A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[7*B]
E$ld~~
;rou”,” access
code
[;C]

Dial DID number
sion 1 but omit
diait
Ringing
tone

for check
dialing
the

extenlast
-

VERIFY
CONSOLE
lNTERCEP
T OF
MISSING
DIAL TRAIN

NUMBER
e
ATT

AT CONSOLE
[9A]
Dial 0 and ANSWER
lamps
flash,
ringer
sounds
[9B]
Press DIAL 0 key
c
ANSWER,
DIAL 0 and SOURCE
lamps
lit
.
SOURCE
display
(Fig. 352-2)
shows
number
of tailing
trunk
.
ATT, INT and DID lamps
lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and maintenance
set
[9C]
Press
RELEASE
.
Console
idle

A3.26

e
INT

0
RCL
SOURCE

Fig.

Reorder
tone
Fd-Hmgaignsnance

TERMINATE

obtained
set

switch

352-2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ATTENDANT

DISTURB

DO NOT

DISTURB

when console

is active

(CotoMiiPlliJO1

dAT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[2A]
Lift handset
at check
Dial tone
[2*B]
Dial attendant
access
.
Ringing
tone

extension

AND

code

CALL
CONSOLE

AT CONSOLE
DIAL 0 and ANSWER
lamps
flash
[{A]
Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE
display
shows
check
extension
1 number
and class of
service
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and check
extension
1
1381
Press DO NOT DSTB key
DO NOT DSTB lamp lit
@C.
Press RELEASE
[3D I Replace
handset
at check
extension 1

PI31

AND
s

4
SET UP
DO NOT DISTURB
AT CONSOLE

NUMBER
0
ATT

AT CONSOLE
[4Al
Press
DO NOT DSTB
.
SOURCE
display,
Fig. 353-l.
shows
all rooms
with “do not
disturb”
feature
activated
[4B]
Release
DO NOT DSTB
.
Console
idle

CLASS
0
INT

Fig.

0
RCL
SOURCE

0
DID

0
MAN

353-l

DISPLAY
ALL
ROOMS
WITH
;~AtV;;XTllRB
ACTIVATED

(y-z-)
,
A3-27

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ATTENDANT

DO NOT

DISTURB

MAP215-353

lssue2,

July80

1
AT CHECK
[5.A]
;ft,
[5.B]
.

EXTENSION
2
ha;zset
of check

extension

Dial number
of check
extension
Ringing
tone (NOTE
1)
Console
rings

AT CONSOLE
ANSWER
and DIAL 0 lamps
flash
[S’c]
Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE
display
shows
number
of check
extension
2 and class
ATT and INT lamps
lit
[sb]
Two way conversation
console
and check
extension
2
[5E]
Press console
RELEASE
[5F]
Replace
handset
at check
extension 2
-

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[6.A]
~ft,h;;~set
at check

extension

[6.B]

code

Dial attendant
Ringing
tone

access

1
YEWI FY
DO N :;;EDISTURB
FEA T

AT CONSOLE
ANSWER
and DIAL 0 lamps
flash
[S’C]
Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE
display
shows
check
extension
1 number
.
ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation,
console
and check
extension
1
[6D]
Verify
DO NOT DSTB lamp is lit
[6E]
E:;s
DO NOT DSTB
if lamp
[QF]
[6;]

DO NOT DSTB
Press
RELEASE
Console
idle
Replace
handset
sion 1

lamp

goes

at check

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[7A]
Lift handset
at check
Dial tone
[7*B]
Dial number
of check
.
Ringing
tone

\ND
4
CANC
DO NI

out

FEAT
CONS

exten-

extension

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
Bell rings
[7\]
Lift handset
at check
extension
1
.
Two way conversation,
check
extensions
1 and 2
[7D]
Replace
handset
at check
extension 1
[7E]
Replace
handset
at check
extension 2

\ND

I
v
:ELLATlON

;RNEOT DISTURB

SECTION

I MESSAGE

M ITL9105/911

O-98-21 5

WAITING

1 Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 2

(

START
/Ill

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[;B] Dial number of check extension
.
Ringing tone

AT CONSOLE
[4A] c’&;;CMISGE WAIT
.
: display shows all rooms
with messages waiting, Fig.
Release MSGE WAIT
Console idle

Is Generic
203
aroarammed
with
tellMotel

4-l

AND

AT CONSOLE
[3A] Dial number of check extension 1
.
Busy tone
.
DESTINATION display shows
number of check extension 1 and
class of service
4
ATT and BUSY lamps lit
[;B]
Press MSGE WAIT
MSGE WAIT lamp lit
&]
Press RELEASE
.
Console idle

[4B]
.

AT CHECK EXTENSION 2
Bell rings
&C] Lift handset, check extension 2
.
Two way conversation, check extensions 1 and 2

354-I

Pressing
MSGE
1 WARNING:
WAIT when console
is active
with an extension
may activate
I:;tg~~;
the feature
at the

)

-T-

-0

ESTABLISH
EXTENSION
EXTENSION

TO
CALL

I41

CLASS
0

AND
1~

DISPLAY
ROOMS
WlTH
MESSAGES
WAITING

Fig. 354-l

:
z.;

A3-29

SECTION
MESSAGE

MITL9105/9110-98-215
WAITING

--.__

MAP215354

7
From

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[5A]
Fe&lye
handset

2
at check

exten-

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[5B]
Replace
handset
at check
extension 1
.
Bell rings within
a period
of 10
seconds
at check
extension
_15Cl _ Lift handset
Dial tone
[sb]
~h&number
of attendant
access
.

Ringing

tone

AT CONSOLE
.
ANSWER
and DIAL 0 lamps
flash,
ringer
sounds
[6A]
Press ANSWER
.
ANSWER
and DIAL lamps
go off
and ringer
stops
.
Two way conversation,
console
and check
extension
1
.
MSGE WAIT
lamp lit
.
SOURCE
display
shows
number
of extension
and class of service,
ATT lamp lit
[6B]
Press MSGE WAIT
MSGE WAIT
lamp goes off
(6:]
Press RELEASE
Console
idle
[sb]
;Il$ce
handset
at check
exten-

A3-30

[4]

---L
AND

VERIFY
WAlTlNG

MESSAGE
FACILITY

ANSWER
MESSAGE
WA/T/NG
CALL, CANCEL
MESSAGE
WAlTlNG

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

AFUTTYDANT CALL FORWARDING

AT CONSOLE
[IA]
Dial * 11333
.
SOURCE disolay shows check
extension 1 number and “-I’ (no
‘,o:,Fd code), ATT lamp lit (Fig.
[IB]
.
s
[lC]
.

Dial i222
SOURCE display shows check
extension 1 number and “1”
(busy code) (Fig. 355-2)
DESTINATION display shows
check extension 2 number. ATT
CALL
BUSY

%%s’iELEASE
Console idle

FORWARDING
(CONSOLE)
Fig. 355-l

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[2.A] Lift handset
Dial tone

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[2B] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
(2&
Dial number of check extension 1
Check extension 2 rings
[2&
Replace check extensron 1 handset and place maintenance
handset switch to ON-HOOK

AT MAINTENANCE

HANDSET

_13Al_ Set switch to OFF-Hot
(3\]
.

Dial tone
Dial number of check extension
Check extension 1 rings

AT CONSOLE
[4A] Dial * 11333
.
SOURCE display shows check
extension 1 number and “busy”
code (I), ATT lamp lit
.
DESTINATION shows check extension 2 number, ATT lamp lit
(See Fig. 355-2)
[4B
Dial #(RELEASE)
[4C I Press RELEASE
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[4D] Lift handset
.
Dial tone

VERIFY
CALL FORWARDING
BUSY - NUMBER
BUSY

VERIFY
CALL FORWARDING
BUSY - NUMBER
IDLE

CANCEL
CALL
FORWARDING

BUSY

Fig.

355-2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ATTENDANT
- BUSY

CALL

FORWARDING

1 MAP215355
( Issue
FSheet

2, July

2 of 2

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
(5A]
Set switch
to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
[&]
Dial number
of check
extension
1
Busy tone
[S’c]
Replace
check
extension
1 handset, place maintenance
handset
switch
to OFF-HOOK
VERFY
CANCELLAWON
CALL FORWARDlNG

~43-32

BUSY

SECTION

MITL91051911

O-98-21 5

Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 1

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial * 11333
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and ‘I-” (no
forward code) (See Fig. 356-l),
ATT lamp lit
[lB]
Dial 2 222
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and digit 2
(Don’t Answer code (Fig. 356-2)
.
DESTINATION disp 1ay shows
number of check extension 2,
ATT lamp lit
[lC] Press RELEASE
.
Console idle

START

SET UP
CALL FORWARDING
DON’T
ANSWER
(CONSOLE)

Fig. 356-l
AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[2A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
&B]
Dial number of check extension 1
Ringing tone
[;C] After timeout (20s 30s or 40s)
.
Check extension 2 rings
.
BUSY LAMP FIELD shows check
extension 1 lamp idle, check extension 2 lamp busy
[2D] Set switch to ON-HOOK

AT CONSOLE
[3A] Dial * 11333
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and “Don’t
Answer code “2”(Fig. 356-2))
.
DESTINATION display shows
number of check extension 2.
(Fig. 156-2)
Press # (REL) key

’

AND

*
VERIFY
CALL FORWARDING
DON’T
ANSWER

PI31
4

AND
4

4
CANCEL
CALL FORWARDlNG
DON’T
ANSWER

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
14Al Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
$B]
Dial number of check extension 1
Ringing tone
[JC] Check extension 1 rings for at
least 1 minute without forwarding to check extension 2
4D Set switch to ON-HOOK
I 4E I Check extension 1 stops ringing
-

I41

AND

Fig. 356-2

VERIFY
CANCELLATlON
CALL FORWARDING
DON’T
ANSWER

(GE-)
A3-33134

!
I

SECTION MITL9105/9110~98-215
1 ATTENDANT

CALL FORWARDING

1 MAP21 5-357
1 issue 2, July 80

1 Sheet 1 of 1

Note:

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial *~ 11333
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and I‘-” (no
forward code) (See Fig. 357-l)
118) Dial 3 222
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and “3”
.
~$;N,AMT”lo”;d;/$&
~cO~7-2’

hl.

number of check extension
ATT lamp lit
Press RELEASE
Console idle

’

AND
*

This feature also ap ears as an
extension set-up an 8 test optlon.
See MAP21 5304 for details.
I

SET UP
CALL FORWARDlNG
FOLLOW
ME
(CONSOLE)

Fig. 357-i

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[2A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
(2\]
Dial number for check extension
.
&]

Ainging tone
Check extension 2 rings
Set switch to ON-HOOK

VERIFY
CALL FORWARDiNG
FOLLOW
ME

AT CONSOLE
[3A] Dial * 11333
.
SOURCE shows check extension
1 number and “Foiiow Me” code

--clI
I31

-t s-1-1
ZI
3

2
1

NUMBER
0
ATT

0
INT

CLASS
0

RCL
SOURCE

DID

MAN

AND

;B
t 3C I

tension 2 number
ATT lamp lit (Fig. 357-2)
Dial #
Press RELEASE

CANCEL
CALL FORWARDiNG
FOLLOW
ME

AT MAINTENANCE HANDSET
[4A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
.
Dial tone
[4B] Dial number of check extension
.
Ringing tone
Check extension 1 bell rings
Id;C] Set switch to ON-Hook ;

AND

Fig. 357.2

VERiFY
NORMAL
CALL RESTORATiON

--I

(-TlG--)
A3-35138

SECTION

MITL9105/911

O-98-21 5

ATTENDANT CONTROLLED
CONFERENCE

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[I\]
Dial digit “0”
.
Ringing tone
.
Console rings

AT CONSOLE
[lC]
Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE display shows number
and class of service of check ex.
tension 1
ATT lam lit (See Fig. 358-l)
[I\]
Press C 8 NF
.
CONF lamp lit
.
SOURCE display cleared
.
DESTINATION display shows letter C (Fig. 358-2)

AND

SET UP
CONFERENCE
FEATURE

Fig. 358-l

AT CONSOLE
[2A] Press RELEASE
.
CONF lamp remains lit
.
Console idle
.
Check extension 1 receives
music-on-hold
if customerprovided

AND
.
CONSOLE
WlTHDRA
WS
FROM
CONFERENCE

AT CONSOLE
[3A] Dial number of check extension 2
.
Ringing tone
.
DESTINATION display shows
number of check extension 2 and
class
ATT and RING lamps lit
TE? Check extension 2 lifts handset
Press CONF
I 3C
. I One second beep tone heard by
check extension 1
.
Console and check extension 2
hear shorter burst of beep tone
[3D] Verify console and two extensions can speak to each other
[3E] Press RELEASE
e
Console idle
.
CONF lamp lit

Fig. 358-2
131 ’

AND

NEW EXTENSlON
TO CONFERENCE

A3-37

‘.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-215

ATTENDANT
CONFERENCE

CONTROLLED

MAP215358
Issue

2, July

Sheet

2 of 2

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[4A]
Flash switchhook
.
Ringing
tone applied
fereince

to con-

AT CONSOLE
.
CONF
lamp flashes
.
CW display
shows
1 more
.
Console
bell may ring

call
-

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[5A]
Flash
switchhook
.
Ringing
tone removed
ference
AT CONSOLE
b
CONF
lamp lit
.
Console
bell silent
.
CW display
drops

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
[6A]
Replace
handset

count

AT CONSOLE
.
RECALL
and ANSWER
flash
.
CONF
lamp goes off
.
Console
bell rings

con-

by 1

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[6B]
After
a period
of one
.
Ringing
tone

[7Al
.

from

minute

AND
lamos

CHECK
EXTENSION
LEA YES
CONFERENCE

Press ANSWER
ANSWER,
SOURCE
and RECALL
lamos
lit
SOURCE
display
shows
check
extension
2 number
and class
number.
ATT lamp lit
Speak
to check
extension
2
Press
RELEASE
~~;;;e~tensron
2 replaces
CHECK
EXTENSION
2
AND CONSOLE
TERM/NATE
CONFERENCE

(

A3-38

FINISH

)

SECTION
ATTENDANT

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Dial * 12 333 *
[lB]
Press
RELEASE
.
Check
extension
1 lamp
BUSY LAMP
FIELD

MITL9105/9110-98-215
STATION

lit in
1Fig.

BUSY OUT ON
CHECK
EXTENSlON

AT CONSOLE
[2p]
Dial number
of check
extension
1
DESTINATION
drsplay
shows
“00”
in CLASS,
ATT and ERROR
lamp lit (Fig. 359-l)
[2B]
Check
extension
1 does not ring
[2C]
Press ALARM
RESET
.
Check
extension
1 lamp remains
lit
[2D]
Press
RELEASE

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[3;]
Lift handset
Dral tone
[3B]
Dial number
of check
Reorder
tone
[;C]
Replace
handset

BUSY-OUT

359-l

121

AND

VERIFY
FROM

FEATURE
CONSOLE

31
-9
extension

AND

I
VERIFY
BUSY OUT
CONDWONS
FROM
CHECK
EXTENSlON

AT CONSOLE
[4A
Dial * 12 333 #
[4B
Press
RELEASE
.
Check
extension
1 lamp
LAMP
FIELD goes off

AND
in BUSY

-T-

CANCEL
FEATURE
FROM
CONSOLE

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[5A]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[&
Dial number
of check
extension
.
Ringing
tone
.
Check
extension
1 bell rings
.
Two way conversation
between
check
extensions
1 and 2
[5C]
Replace
handsets
on check
extensions
1 and 2

151

AND

i
VERIFY
FROM

CANCELLATION
CHECK
EXTENSlON

FINISH

/Xl-39140

”

SECTION

MITLSI 05/9110-98-215

1 Sheet 1 of 3

active with an extension

AT C iONSOLE
Press GUEST ROOM
y1
GUEST ROOM lamp lit
Dial number of check extension 1
y1
SOURCE display shows check
extension number and message
re ister, ATT lamp lit
.
D I! STINATION displav shows
room status code ’ Fig. 360-l)
Press DO NOT DS i B
19
DO NOT DSTB lamp lit
.
Check extension 1 lamp lit in
Busy Lamp Field
Press RELEASE
y
Console idle

DISPLAY
GUEST
ROOM
STA TfJS
AT CONSOLE

AT CHECK EXTENSION 2
[3A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[;B] Dial number of check extension 1
.
Ringing tone (NOTE 1)
.
Console rings
.
DIAL 0 and ANSWER lamps flash
AT CONSOLE
[3C] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 2 and class
of service
ATT and INT lamps lit
Two way conversation, console
h
and check extension 2
3E Press RELEASE
Replace check extension 2 handId3
set

Fig. 366-l

may ac-

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ATTENDANT

DO NOT

DISTURB

(H/M)

MAP215-360
Issue
Sheet

2, July

2 of 3

AT CONSOLE
[4A]
Press DO NOT DSTB
.
SOURCE
display.
Fia. 360-2.
shows
total huri&er%t
roonis
with “do not disturb”
facility
[4B]
Release
DO NOT DSTB
.
Console
idle
~ISS~A~‘IUMBER
W/TN DO NOT
DISTURB
ACTIVATED

AT CONSOLE
[5A]
Dial check
extension
1
.
ERROR
lamp lit in DESTINATION
displa
DO N 8 T DSTB lamp flashes
[;B]
Press DO NOT DSTB
.
ERROR
and DO NOT DSTB
lamps
go off
.
Ringing
tone
AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
[5C]
Check
extension
1 rings
[5D]
Lift handset
.
Two way conversation,
check
extension
1 and console
Press DO NOT DSTB
[5E]
DO NOT DSTB lamp lit
-15& - Press RELEASE
Console
idle
[5&
,R,eplace
check
extension
1 hand-

Fig.

AT CONSOLE
[6A]
Press GUEST
ROOM
GUEST
ROOM
lamp lit
[;B]
Dial check
extension
1 number
.
SOURCE
display
shows
check
extension
number
and message
l

[6C]
.
.

[6D]
.
.
[6E]
.

A342

%$i%~~l0N
display
shows
room status
code
See Fig. 360-l)
Press DO NOT DS f B
DO NOT DSTB lamp lit
E;;.slon
lamp Ilt In Busy Lamp
Press DO NOT DSTB
DO NOT DSTB lamp goes off
Extension
lamp in BUSY LAMP
FIELD
aoes off
Press RELEASE
Console
idle

CANCEL
;gANpT~~~

360-2

SECTION
ATTENDANT

MITL9105/9110-98-215
DO NOT

DISTURB

(H/M)

MAP215360

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
2
[7p]
Lift handset
Dlal tone
[7B]
Dial number
of check
.
Ringing
tone

extension

I Issue

2, July

80
~_____

) Sheet

3 of 3

AT CHECK
EXTENSION
1
Check
extension
1 rings
[;C]
Lift handset
*
Two way conversation
between
extensions
[7D]
Replace
handsets
on check
extensions
1 and 2

I
A343144

SECTION
MESSAGE

MITL9105/9110-98.215
WAITING (H/M)

MAP215-361
issue 2, July 60
Sheet 1 of 1

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift handset
.
Dial tone

AT CONSOLE
[lB]
Press GUEST ROOM
GUEST ROOM lamp lit
[;C] Dial check extension 1
.
Busy tone
Extension busy lamp lit
[TD] Press MSGE WAIT
.
MSGE WAIT lamp lit
.
Extension busy lame lit
VEI Press RELEASE
’

-TSET UP
MESSAGE

WAITING

Fig. 361-l
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3B] Lift handset
Dial tone
[&I
Dial “0”
.
Ringing tone
.
Console rings

AT CONSOLE
[3D] Press ANSWER
.
SOURCE disDlav shows number
and class of ‘seivice of check extension 1, ATT lamp lit
[3E] Two way conversation between
console and check extension 1

AT CONSOLE
[4A] Press MSGE WAIT
MSGE WAIT lamp goes off
;B
Press RELEASE
I 4C I Replace handset at check extension 1

Note 1: The lamp flash facility to flash
~telephone fitted with lamp is available
on PABX line cards bearing part number
9110-010. Either option 137 for lamp
flash or option 136 for bell ring may be
i programmed, but not both.
,
EXTENSION
CALL 10
CONSOLE

SECTION
1 MESSAGE

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Press GUEST ROOM
GUEST ROOM lamp lights
[I’B] Dial number of check extension 1
.
SOURCE display shows room
number and message registration, (Fig. 362-l)
.
DESTINATION display shows
room status code ‘(and period if
maid in room )
[lC]
Dial “#”
.
Message register reverts to zero
registration
[lDl
Press RELEASE

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A] /iI :a,;set
.
[2B] Dial CO trunk access code
CO dial tone
[2;]
Dial console listed directory
number

;Wo’E”

handset

[4C]
.

(H/M)

Fig. 362-l

111 5
-1 A -’

CLASS

NUMBER
0
0
ATT

l-i =I ,1
I-1 -I I-

INT

RCL
SOURCE

DID

0
MAN

on check exten-

AT CONSOLE
[4A] Press GUEST ROOM
GUEST ROOM lamp lights
[4\]
Dial number of check extension
.
SOURCE display shows room
number and new message
l

REGISTRATION

ND ZERO

AT CONSOLE
[3A] ANSWER and LDN lamps flash,
ringer sounds
[3B] Press LDN
.
ANSWER, LDN and SOURCE
lamps Ii ht
.
SOURC I! display shows number
of calling trunk, ATT lamp lit
.
Two way conversation, console
and check extension 1
[3C] Wait 1 minute
,“i”,l,“”

MITL9105/9110-98-215

J
Fig. 362-2

~&~~~~(#gdj~$f)&ows

room status code
Press RELEASE
SOURCE and DESTINATION
displays are extinguished

A3.47148

SECTION
CONTROLLED
RESTRICTION

Note:

START
AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Press GUEST ROOM
GUEST ROOM lamp lit
[lk]
Dial check extension 1
.
SOURCE display shows number
and message register count
.
DESTINATION display shows
room status code (and period if
maid in room) (See Fig. 363-l and
Table 363-l)

MITL9105/9110-98.215
OUTGOING
(H/M)

CALL
I

This
MAP applies
when
console
has
ROOM
RESTR.
If ROOM
STATUS
see MAP21 5364.

111
AND
--I

’

VERIFY
ROOM
STATUS

Fig.

AT CONSOLE
[3A] Dial di it 1
.
SOURCE display shows room
number and messa e registration
.
DESTINATION disp Bay changes
to read diqit “1” for room status
(Fig. 363-l)
[3B] Press ROOM RESTR
ROOM RESTR lamp lit
&]
Press RELEASE
.
SOURCE and DESTINATION
displa s are cleared
ROOMRESTR lamp cleared
[{D] Press NIGHT 1
.
NIGHT 1 lamp is lit

363-l

ROOM
RESTRICTION
(OUTGOING
CALLS)

TABLE

363-l

ROOM

STATUS

CODES

Room is vacant but requires cleaning
Room is occupied but requires cleaning

A349

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 2 of 2
From

[3]

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[4A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[4&
Dial trunk access code
Reorder tone (NOTE 1)
(4& Replace handset
RESTRICTION

AT CONSOLE
[5Al Press GUEST T3OOM
- GUEST ROOM
I&. 1 Dial
s( number of ‘%%dextensic
3URCE and DESTINATION
displays repeat information
shown in Fi . 366-l
ROOM RESQR lamp lit
[5&
Press ROOM RESTR
ROOM RESTR lamp off
;D] Press RELEASE
5E] Press NIGHT-1
.
NIGHT 1 lamp goes off

)n 1

AND

CANCEL
RESTRICTION

i
AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[6A] Lift handset
Dial tone
[6&
y;;ky$
ycss
code
[6;]

A3-50

Replace

handset

-T-

L
I61
AND

VERIFY
CANCELLATION
OF RESTRICTION

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ROOM STATUS (H/M)
MAP215-364
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 4

NOTES

(1) The single-digit codes in the
procedures have meanings
Tables 364-l and 364-2.
(2) Maid codes are dialed from
ly, after the “Maid Access”
been dialed liable 364-2).

I
following
shown in
room oncode has

TABLE 364-l
ROOM STATUS CODES

Room vacant, requires cleaning
Room occupied, requires cleaning
TABLE 364-2
MAID-DIALED CODES
MAID
CODE

I
AT CONSOLE
[lA
Press GUEST ROOM
flB
_ I_ Dial the number of check extension 1
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1 and
message re ister count
e
DESTINATI 8 N display shows
room status code (Table 364-l)
[lC]
Dial digit 3
.
DESTINATION display shows
room status code 3 (Fig. 364-l)

:
3

INDICATION

Maid in room, requires cleaning
Maid left room, status unchanged
Maid left room, room ready

SET AND VERIFY
ROOM
STA TVS

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[2A] Lift handset
Dial tone
12;) Dial “Maid Access” code then
digit 1 (Table 364-2)
[2C] Replace handset
AT CONSOLE
.
Period sign appears after status
code in DESTINATION display
[2D]
.

Press RELEASE
SOURCE and DESTINATION
displays extinguished

Fig. 364-l
SET EXTENSION
FOR MAID-IN-ROOM
CONDITION

(NOTE 2)

I
1J

Go to [S]

A3-51

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

) ROOM STATUS (H/M)

‘r’
From [2]

AT CONSOLE
f3Al Press ROOM STATUS
[3Bj Press and hold digit 0
.
Check extension 1 lamp lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
.
SOURCE display shows total
number of rooms with maids present Fig. 364-2
[3C] Release key pad digit 0
[3D] Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold diait 3
-13El
. _ Check extension 7 lamp lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
.
SOURCE display, Fig. 364-2,
+J
changes to reflect total number
of vacant rooms which require
i
cleaning
[3F] Release key pad digit 3
.
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal indications
[3G] Press RELEASE

169

t6D6E. 1
.
[6F]
.
]6G1

A3-52

CLASS
0
INT

0
RCL
SOURCE

Fig. 364.2
VERIFY
ROOM
STATUS
ON
BUSY LAMP FIELD

AND

dR’egd:&e handset

AT CONSOLE
[5A] Press GUEST ROOM
[5B] Dial the number of check extension 1
.
SC3URCE display shows number
Of ’ check extension
1, and
message re ister count
. DESTINATI 8 FJ display shows
room status code .“I” (Fig. 364-3)
[5C] Press RELEASE
.
SOURCE and DESTINATION
displays extinguished

.o
ATT

AND

SET

[6A]
[6B]
.

I 7
II,-

NUMBER

131

AT CHECK EXTENSION 1
[4!]
Lift handset
Dral tone
1481 D.ia! “Maid Access” code then
[4C]

1-1
1-l

Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 0
Check extension 1 lamp not lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
Repeat same entry per top riaht
previous page
”
Release key pad digit 0
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal indications
Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 1
Check extension 1 lamp lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
SOURCE display, Fig. 364-2,
changes to reflect total number
of rooms which are ready for oc%?&?zlkey
pad digit 1
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal lamp indication
Press
RELEASE

EXTENSION

r
SET AND VERIFY
ROOM
STATUS
ON
DESTINATION
DISPLAY
(VACANT/READY)

PI-

+---I

AND

VERIFY
ON BUSY

ROOM STATUS
LAMP

FIELD

Fig. 364-3

DID

MAN

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.215
1 ROOM STATUS (H/M)
MAP215364

I
I

Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 3 of 4

AT CONSOLE
7A] Press GUEST ROOM
I 781 Dial the number of check extension 1
.
SOURCE display shows number
of check extension 1
.
DESTINATION display shows
room status “1” (Fig. 364-2)
Dial digit 2
[7Cl
.
DESTINATION display shows
room status code “2”
Press REL key
170
.
SOURCE and DESTINATION
displays extinguished

I tt I
.
.

WI.
ml

AND

SET AND VERIFY
ROOM
STATUS
ON
DESTlNATlON
DISPLAY
(OCCUPIED/CLEAN)

Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 2
Check extension 1 lamp lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
SOURCE display, Fig. 364-2,
changes to reflect total number
of rooms which are occupied and
cleaned
Release key pad digit 2
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal lamp indications
Press REL key

WAND
I
VERlFY
ROOM
STATUS
ON BUSY LAMP FIELD

AT CONSOLE
9A Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 2
I 9B
. I Check extension 1 lamp lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
[9C] Release key pad digit 2
.
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal lamp indications
Press ROOM STATUS key
Press and hold key pad digit 2
.
Check extension 1 lamp is not lit
.
SOURCE display reflects total
number of rooms with “condition
1)1)
P,Hl helease key pad digit 2
BUSY LAMP FIELD resumes normal indication
Press RELEASE
Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 4
.
Check extension 1 lamp is lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
.
SOURCE display reflects total
number of rooms with “condition
A”

[9M]
.

Release key ad digit 4
All lamps in i USY LAMP FIELD
resume normal indications

t
VERIFY
STATUS
CHANGE
BY CONSOLE,
ALL
OCCUPIED
ROOMS
FROM
“CLEAN”
TO “REQUIRES
CLEANING”

I-

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 ROOM STATUS (HIM)

I MAP215-364

Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 4 of 4

AT CONSOLE
-Dial x 10 #
Press REL key
Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 4
Check extension 1 lamp is not lit
in BUSY LAMP FIELD
Release key pad digit 4
Press REL key
Press ROOM STATUS
Press and hold key pad digit 2
Check extension 1 lamp is lit in
BUSY LAMP FIELD
.
SOURCE display reflects total
number of room with “condition
2”
WJI Release key pad digit 2
.
All lamps in BUSY LAMP FIELD
resume normal indications
VW Press REL key

A3-54

AI101
AND

--L

VERIFY

STATUS

BY CONSOLE,
ROOMS,
CLEANING”

CHANGE

ALL OCCUPIED

FROM
“REQUIRES
TO “CLEAN”

SECTION

MITL9110.98.215

APPENDIX 4
GENERIC 204 SYSTEM TESTS
General

The SX-100 or SX-200 programmed
with Generic 204 is tested in the order shown in the following
Tables, using the MAPS shown which appear in Appendix 4. These tests should be done after completing all required tests for Generic 202 and 203 options in 204 (see table 2-9).

A4.1

TABLE A4-1

EXTENSION

OPTIONS

OPTION

ORDER

MAP NO.

Set Up Test Equipment

MAP21 5-001

Test Extension

MAP21 5-400

Automatic

Options

Wake-Up

(Alarm Call)

MAP215401

L-Y

Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect

TABLE A4-2
OPTION

CONSOLE

MAP215402

OPTIONS

MAP NO.

H/M

NON H/M

Test Console
Console
Utility

Date Display

Customer
Message

Options

Program
Register

MAP215-450
and Date

Dump/Load
Print

Room Audit
Automatic
System

Wake-Up
I.D.

Test Termination

ORDER

(Alarm Call)

MAP215-451
MAP215-452

MAP215-453

MAP21 5-454

MAP215-455

MAP21 5-456

MAP215-226

I::‘

A4-112

SECTION

I
I

Generic
been

202 and
tested
ES

[2A] Perform
test procedures
listed
in
Table
A4-1, Appendix

f--

AND
I

procedures
enerlc

[4A]

Perform

tests

in Table

400-l

been
204 option

AND

TEST GENERIC
204 OPTIONS

there

Generic

to be tested

TABLE

Automatic

Wake-Up

400-l

(Alarm

Call)

YES

TEST

MITL9105/9110-68.215

EXTENSION

OPTIONS

MAP215400
Issue

1, January

Sheet

1 of 1

I
I

SECTION

MITLSI 05/911 O-98-21 5

( AUTOMATIC

WAKE-UP

j
I

1 MAP215401
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 1

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Lift handset
Dial tone
[I;]
Dial Automatic Wake-Up Access
I;oorgarrd Wake-Up time (24 hour
[I\]

i.:.i
.,‘;.‘:
.-.- -.
:: ”
.. ..
..: :.
.

Dial tone
Replace handset

ENTER
CHECK

WAKE-UP
EXTENSION

TIME

FROM

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[2A] Check extension rings at requested time
WAKE-UP
CALL RINGS
CHECK
EXTENSlON

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3A] Repeat steps 1A + 1B
Dial tone
[3\] ~~;b~r~ma;gc
Wake-Up Access
[3&

et31
4

Dial tone
Replace handset

’

AND
6

a
CANCEL
CHECK

r I41 t
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[4A] Check extension does not rina at
time requested steps

WAKE-UP
EXTENSION

CALL

FROM

AND

,
WAKE-UP

CALL

CANCELLED

A4-518

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

,
ENABLE NON-CO TRUNK
TO TRUNK CONNECT
MAP215402
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 1

:-.
,..
: ..
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[lA]
Dial trunk
.
Connection between
check extension

trunk and
-

AND
s

a
SET UP CONNECTION
TRUNK
AND EXTENSION

[2A]
[2\]
[2;]
.

Extension flashes switchhook
Dial tone
Extension dials Non-CO Trunk
Non-CO Trunk answers
Extension hangs up
Trunk and Non-CO Trunk connected
-

BETWEEN

J
TRANSFER

TRUNK

FINISH

A4-718

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

1 TEST CONSOLE

OPTIONS

MAP215450
Issue 2. July 80
Sheet 1 of 1

START

Generic
been

202 and
tested

IES

[2A] Perform test procedures listed in
Table A4-1, Appendix 3
7

Complete
Installation
and
in Section
MITL9110.98-200,

Programming
Section

1NO
[4A]

Perform tests in Table 450-l

TEST GENERIC
204 OPTIONS

YES

TABLE
OPTION

Console
Customer

Date Display and Date Utility
Program

Dump/Load

Room Audit
Automatic

Wake-Up (Alarm Call]

System I.D.

450-l
[

MAPNO.

REMARKS

MAP215451
MAP21 5-452
MAP215-454

HIM ONLY

MAP215-455

HIM ONLY

MAP215-456

A4-9110

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215

START

.-+
I

.:’

AT CONSOLE
(1AJ Dial * 15
ANS and DEST lamps light
[l&
Enter date as three or four digits
(one or two digit month and 2
digit day)
[lC]
Press RELEASE

[2A]
[2&
.

Press IDENT (Fig. 451-l)
Date appears in time display
Release IDENT
Time returns to time display
DISPLAY DATE
(FIG. 457-7)

Fig. 451-l

A411112

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

CUSTOMER

PROGRAM

MAP21

5-452

Issue

2, July

Sheet

;

DUMP/LOAD

1 of 2

START.

-Ill
AT STORAGE
[lA]
to-;iuII
[l B]

DEVICE
blank

Place storage
start condition

tape
device

into

storage

’

.-.-i“-

Note:
When
dumpin
insure
that the
storage
device
is not B n the local mode.
If the load is not successful.
thestorage
device
will not have a correct
program.

AND

in ready-toJPREPARE

STORAGE

DEVICE

Busy

tone

indicates

RS232

port

e
Code

+ 7

\
ACCESS
RS232 PORT
AT CONSOLE
[3A]
Dial * 14 Jc Press RELEASE
.
Printer
function
suspended
AT CABINET
[3B]
Remove
printer
on Interconnect
[3C]
Fn;;t
storage

AT STORAGE
[4A]
Place
(write)
[4B]
Start

plug from P302
Card
device
plug into

DEVICE
storage
device
condition
storage
device

SUSPEND
PRINTER

AND REPLACE
BY STORAGE
DEVICE

in record

AT CONSOLE
[4C]
Dial ~14 # , Press RELEASEA
.
LED No. 4, Extended
Memory
Card, is lit during
recording.
goes out when program
is
dumped

and
DUMP
DATA

PROGRAM

A413114

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

CUSTOMER

PROGRAM

DUMP/LOAD

I MAP215452

-1

Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 2 of 2

i-’

From 14)

AT STORAGE DEVICE
[5A] i;lntch off record (write) condi[5B]
[5C]

Place in rewind mode
Remove cassette when rewound,
label and place in secure storage

AT CABINET
[6Aj Remove storage device plug from
P302 on Interconnect board
[6B] Replace the printer plug

t
STORE

t--i

AND

AT STORAGE DEVICE
I7AJ ;z;zirogram
tape into storage

PROGRAM

RESTORE
PRINTER
CONNECTIONS

[7B]

Ensure program tape is at start
of program, i.e. rewound
AT CABINET
[7C] Disconnect printer plug from
P302 on Interconnect board
[7D] g;;Scanner
card switches to
[7E]
.

Press RESET button on Extended
Memory card
LED’s
on Scanner card show
“AA,,

. .. .

Console
452-l

PREPARE
FOR
PROGRAM

I LOAD

shows code as in Fig.
-I

AT STORAGE DEVICE
[8A] Place storage device in play
read) mode
[SB] 6 tart storage device
.
Scanner card LEDs show successive readin s from 01 through
~~gt~t;d(l) 00 tR rough (1) 30 durJ[9A]

Switch off storage

LOAD

PROGRAM

Fig. 452-l

device

AT CONSOLE
[9B] Dial z(c14 * , Press RELEASE
AT CABINET
[9C] ;;r20ve
[9D]

storage

Insert printer
required)

plug into P302 (if

AT CONSOLE
[9E] Dial * 14 #
[9F] Press RELEASE

AND

device plug from
c
RESTORE
SYSTEM
TO NORMAL

FINISH

SECTION

MITL910549110~98~215

ROOM AUDIT
MAP21 5-453

Nazi

Printer
connected

YES

[2A]
.
.
[;B]

Printer must:
Meet EIA RS232 requirements
Be capable of 66 characters per
line
Be capable of 110 or 300 baud
;o$nect Printer to system RS232

Ensure Printer is not in local

AND

CONNECT
PRINTER

Fig. 463-l
AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3A] Complete a number of calls to
local directory numbers

1
ENTER VALUES IN
CHECK EXTENSION
MESSAGE REGISTER
(FIG. 453-l)

AT CONSOLE
[4A] Dial* 16 (Fig.453-1)
[4B] Press RELEASEn
Printout of entries produced
.

AND
J-i

A4-17118

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-215
AUTOMATIC

WAKE-UP

MAP215-454
Issue 2, July 80
Sheet 1 of 2

AT CONSOLE
[lA]
Press Guest Room button
Guest Room lamp lights
[I>]
Dial check extension number
.
Destination display shows wakeup time if one has been requested. Display blank if no
wake-up requested (Fig. 454-l)

NUMBER
0
0
ATT
INT

AND

TO SET AUTOMATIC
WAKEUP
FROM
CONSOLE

[2A]
.
[2B]

0
RCL
SOURCE

NUMBER
,3
0
0
ATT
RING
BUSY
DESTINATION

Fig. 454-l

TO SET AUTOMATIC
FROM
CONSOLE
(FIG. 454-2)

KJI
131

WAKE-UP

AND

CHECK

EXTENSION

RINGS

r I41

AT CONSOLE
4A
Repeat steps [i A] and [l B]
48
Dial * #
.
Wake-up time clears from
Destination display
[4C] Press RELEASE

-7

AND
I
CANCEL
WAKE-UP
FROM
CONSOLE

T/ME

,
Note: If a printout is requested
occur at steps 28,4C, 5C.

it will

Fig. 454.2
\

Got>

CLASS
0
MAN

-1
3

Dial *, wakeup time, then # (or +
if p.m., 12 hour format)
Destination display shows wakeup time (Fig. 455-2)
Press RELEASE

AT CHECK EXTENSION
[3A] Check extension rings at desired
wake-up time

0
DID

CLASS
0
ERROR

SECTION

MITL91051911

AUTOMATIC

O-98-21 5

WAKE-UP

MAP215454
issue
Sheet

2, July

2 of 2

[5Al
[5Sl
[5Cl

[5Dl

Repeat
steps
1 and 2
Allow check
extension
to ring at
all 3.5 minute
intervals
unanswered
At the end of the third attempt
console
minor
alarm
LED will
light and the console
ringer
will
sound
Press the ALARM
RESET display
should
be similar
to (Fig. 454-3)

CHECK

WAKE-UP

ALARM

64
tW
.
.

Press
Press

* 8 #
RELEASE

Source
display
shows
the
system
ID (Fig. 455-l)
Destination
display
shows

current
L17
~ CANCELLING
ALARM

A420

THE

MINOR

SECTION
SYSTEM

MITL9105/9110-98-215

IDENTIFIER

MAP215455
1

AT CONSOLE
[IA]
Dial * 17
.
Source
display
system
ID (Fig.

shows
355-l)

the

current

Issue

2, July

Sheet

1 of 1

DISPLAY
ID
(FIG. 455-l)

YES

AT CONSOLE
[3A]
l$in;w
.

system

New ID appears
display

identifier

(1-3

-131

1.
4

in Destination
-

’

AND
c

I CHANGE

t41

AND
NUMBER

CLEAR

DISPLAY

Fig.

355-l

A4-21122

:.
:

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.215

:
::

APPENDIX 5
GENERIC 205 SYSTEM TESTS
General
A5.1

The SX-100 or SX-200 programmed
with Generic 205 is tested in the order shown in the following
Tables, using MAPS shown which appear in Appendix 5. These tests should be done after cornpleting all required tests for Generics 202, 203 and 204 option tests that are used in 205 (see Table
A51 and A52).

GENERIC

Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

TABLE A51
205 EQUIPMENT - EXTENSION
TEST ORDER

Option
Set Up Test Equipment
Test Extension Options
Broker’s Call
Call Forwarding
- Busy
Call Forwarding
- Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding
- Follow Me
Call Park
Call Pick-Up
Camp-On
Consultation
Hold/Transfer/Add-On
Automatic
Callback - Don’t Answer
Automatic
Callback - Busy
Meet Me Conference
Executive Busy Override
Paging
Do Not Disturb
Call Block
Call Hold
Single Digit Dialing
Transfer Into Busy
Common Alerting Devices
Enable Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect
Use a Personnel Speed Call
Use a Common Use Speed Call

OPTIONS

MAP No.
MAP215-001
MAP21 5-500
MAP21 5-204
MAP21 5-205
MAP215-206
MAP215-207
MAP21 5-208
MAP21 5-209
MAP215-210
MAP215-211
MAP21 5-212
MAP215-213
MAP215214
MAP215-215
MAP215-216
MAP21 5-301
MAP21 5-302
MAP215-303
MAP21 5-304
MAP215-305
MAP215-306
MAP21 5-402
MAP215-501
MAP215-502

A5-1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

GENERIC
OPTION
Test Console Features
Answer CO Trunk Call
Answer DID Trunk Call
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Message Waiting
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding - Follow Me
Attendant
Controlled Conference
Attendant
Station Busy-Out
Attendant
Do Not Disturb
Answer Incoming Call
Automatic
Callback
Extending Internal Calls
Answering a Recall
Override
Flexible Night Service
Trunk Busy Operation
Trunk Group Attendant Access
Trunk Group Dial Access
Test Termination
Console Date Display and Date
Utility
Customer Program Dump/Load
System I.D.
Speed Call

Notes 1.

2.
3.

A5.2

TABLE A5-2
205 EQUIPMENT - CONSOLE
TEST ORDER

OPTIONS

MAP NO.

ORDER

MAP21 5-504
MAP215351
MAP215-352
MAP21 5-353
MAP21 5-354
MAP215-355
MAP21 5-356
MAP21 5-357
MAP21 5-358
MAP21 5-359
MAP215-360
MAP215-217
MAP215218
MAP215-219
MAP21 5-220
MAP215-221
MAP21 5-222
MAP215-223
MAP21 5-224
MAP215-225
MAP215-226

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

MAP215-451
MAP215-452
MAP215-455
MAP215-505

22
23
24
25

MAP 215-216 tests are performed on Generic 20211~~ equipment.
tests are listed in Table 2-4 starting at MAP212-351 incorporating
Serial/Guest
Room key.
A printer may be used.
A storage device may be used.

NOTES

2, 3

Generic 20211~~ equipment
the use of the

4..

MAP215500
Issue

1, July

Sheet

1 of 1

I
80

Have all Generic
202,203
and 204

[2A]

Perform
test procedures
Table A5-1 Appendix
5.

[4A]

Perform

tests

in Table

listed

500-l

AND

[

TEST

GENERIC

205

OPTIONS
I

TABLE
Order
1
2

Option
Use a Personal
Use a Common

500-l

Name
Speed
Call
Use Speed

Map

Call

No.

MAP215501
MAP215502

A5-314

SECTION
USE

A PERSONAL

MITL9105/9110-98-215
SPEED

CALL

(“4”)

AT THE CHECK
EXTENSION
[lA]
Go off hook
[l B]
Dial the Speed
Call Access
Code
[lC]
Dial 0
[lD]
Dial all digits
including
pauses
and manual
digit insertions
(Table 501-l)
[lE]
Dial Speed
Call Personal
Code
(personal
table number)
[lF]
Go on hook
-

PI
L1
AND

I
TO PROGRAM
NUMBER

A PERSONAL

USE

[2A]
[2B]
[2C]
.

Go off hook
Dial the Speed
;$he
Speed

Call
Call

Tone

(busy

returned

Access
Personal

Code
e

or ringback)
TO USE

[3A]
[3B]
[3C]
[3D]

Go off hook
Dial the Speed
Dial 0
t&allhe
Speed

[3E]

Go on hook

Call

Access

Call

Personal

A PERSONAL

Code

TO CANCEL

TABLE

USE

A SPEED

CALL

ENTRY

501-l

FINISH

A5-518

i:
:/

SECTION
1 USE

MITL9105/9110-98-215

A COMMON

USE

SPEED

CALL

1 MAP215502
Issue

1, July

Sheet

1 of 1

I
80

AT THE CHECK
EXTENSION
[lA]
Go off hook
[lB]
Dial the Speed
Call Access
Code
[lC]
Dial the Speed
Call Entry
Code
(Dial manual
digits
if necessary)
.
Tone returned
(busy or ringback)

A5-718

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

Have all Generic
202,203
and 204
options
been tested

[2A]

Perform
test procedures
Table A51 Appendix
5

listed

in
II--

Complete
installation
and programming
in SECTIONS
MITL9105/9110-98-200,
9105/9110-98-210
and 9105/9110-98-205.

[4A]

Perform

test

in Table

504-2

TEST GENERK
205 OPT/O NS

TABLE
Option

Order
1

Speed

Call

504.2

Name

Map

No.

MAP215605

I
(-GF-)

AS-9110

:1.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

of 1

Eikt; zpeed

Call

Access

Code

Dial Speed
Call Entry Code
Dial all digits,
pauses
and
manual
insertion
points
(Table
505-l)
Destination
display
shows
digits
entered
(most
recent
the right
(Fig. 505-l),
ATT lamp lit
Source
display
shows
Speed
Call
Entry Code,
ATT lamp lit
Press RELEASE

Dial Speed
Call Access
Code
Dial #
Dial Speed
Call Entry Code
Dial #
Destination
display
shows
all
digit,
pauses
and manual
insertion digits
(Fig. 505-2)
Continue
to dial # until the
number
has been reviewed
Press
RELEASE

TO PERFORM
A SPEED
NUMBER

CALL

W]
Setup

Fig.
Speed

505-l
Call

I(
Number

TO REWEW
A
SPEED
CALL
NUMBER

-R
Dial Speed
Call
Dial 0
Dial Speed
Call
Press
RELEASE

Access
Entry

Code

Code
-i-

TABLE
Digits
l1
::

(NN)

,
TO CANCEL
A SPEED
CALL
ENTRY

505.1

Meaning
5 Second
pause
Wait for dial tone
Allows
the required
number
manual
digits
to be dialed
(NN denotes
the required
number
of defined
digits)

AND

JI191t

I
Review

Fig. 505-2
Speed
Call

Number

I
L

FIN,,,)

A5-11112
.f

MITEL STANDARD

SECTION

PRACTICE

M ITL91051911 O-98-320
Issue 3, July 1980

sx-100 */sx=200 *
SUPERSWITCH*
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
EXTENSION TEST PROCEDURES

CONTENTS

PAGE

GENERAL ............................
Reason for Issue. ......................

1
1

TEST AND OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES . 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating Procedures
.................. 1

;;
-:.
‘7

GENERAL

1.01

This section describes the extension
test
operating
instructions
for
the
SX-lOO/SX-200 PABX’s. These procedures
should
be performed as operational
tests upon installation of extensions after the initial system installation. See SECTION
MITL9105/9110-98-200
for
system installation
instructions.
Reason for Issue

Chart 2-l
Chart2.2
Chart 2-3
Chart2-4
Chart 2-5
Chart 2.6
Chart 2.7
Chart 2.8
Chart 2.9
Chart 2.10
Chart 2.11
Chart 2-12
Chart 2.13
Chart 2.14
Chart 2.15
Chart 2-16
Chart 2.17
Chart 2-18
Chart 2-19
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart

2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23

Station-to-Station
Call ...........
....................
Hunt Group
Broker’s Call ...................
Call Hold .......................
Call Forwarding.
Busy ...........
Call Forwarding.
Don’t Answer ....
Call Forwarding.
Follow Me ......
Override .......................
Dial Call Pick.Up ...............
Camp.On .....................
Automatic Callback. Busy. ......
Do Not Disturb. ................
Call Park/Pick.Up ...............
Paging .......................
Trunk Answer From Any
Station .......................
Consultation
...........
Hold/Transfer/Add.On
Automatic Wake.Up
(Alarm) Call. ...................
...........
MeetMe Conference.
Automatic
Call back . Don’t
Answer........................2
Directed Call Pick.Up ...........
Station Conference .............
Speed Call ....................
Saved Number Redial ...........

2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10

.ll
,12
.13
.14
.15
.16

1.02

This has been reissued
to include
all
Generic 205 information
requiring an extension test procedure.

TEST AND OPERATIONAL
PROCEDURES
General
2.01

Satisfactory
completion
of the operating
procedures
tests confirms
that the apparatus has been installed and programmed
carrectly.

2.02

If any operating procedure cannot
pleted as described, verify that:

be com-

.17
l

.18
.20
.21
2
.23
.24
.25
.26

the procedure
is applicable
to the extension (ie. the feature being tested is assigned to the extension)
the apparatus
which provides
(eg. music on hold) is correctly

Operating

the feature
installed

Procedures

2.03

Chart 2-1 should be performed on each extension. Charts 2-2 through 2-26 should be
performed once per system.

0 MITEL Corporation

1960
,

Registered

Trademark

of MITEL Corporation

Page 1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

STATION

STEP

CALL

ACTION

Called Station

Dial tone returned

Lift handset

Dial any extension

Called extension

Called and calling
replace handsets

number

Lift handset

Dial originating

Dial Callback

Replace

Busy extension

Original

Called extension

Dial tone removed after first digit; ring-back
heard after completion
of dialing

answers

Ring-back

tone removed;

two-way

tone

conversation

extensions

Busy (Enable Callback

Called Station

VERIFICATION

Idle

Called Station

Page 2

CHART 2.1
. TO - STATION

Busy)
Dial tone returned

extensions

number

code

Busy tone returned
Dial tone returned

handset
goes on-hook

extension

answers
answers

Busy (Member

Original
Ringback

extension

rings

tone returned.

Called extension

rings

Two way conversation

of a Hunt Group)

Lift handset

Dial tone returned

Dial Hunt Group Access

Free extension

Extensions

Code

answers

replace

handset

Dial tone removed after first digit; ring back tone
heard; next free extension of group is rung
Ring back tone removed;

two way conversation

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-2
HUNT GROUP

ACTION

STEP

?rst Station

iunt

Idle
Dial tone returned

Lift handset

Dial Hunt Group access

First extension

zirst Station

Dial tone removed after first digit; ring-back tone
heard upon completion
of dialing. First extension in group hears ringing
Ring-back

tone removed;

two-way

conversation

Busy (Terminal)
Repeat

Next idle extension

code

answers

Groups

VERIFICATION

1 and 2 above
answers

Next idle extension
Ring-back

in group hears ringing

tone removed,

2 way conversation

(Circular)
Repeat steps 1 and 2

Hunting starts at the extension after the last extension rung in the group. System will ring first
idle extension in the hunt group, if no idle extension is found, busy tone is returned

Page 3

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.320

CHART 2-3
BROKER’S CALL
ACTION

STEP
Extension

in conversation

wishes

VERIFICATION
a private

alternative

conversation

after flashing

switchhook.

Flash switchhook

Transfer

Extension dials number
of third party

Third party phone rings

Third party answers

Extension
private

and third party may now converse

Extension

returns

Third party is on hold. Extension
may alternate between conversa
tions by flashing switchhook

Page 4

flashes

switchhook

dial tone returned

to original

(1st) party

The three parties can NOT be joined
together in one conversation

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-4
CALL HOLD
STEP

ACTION

VERIFICATION

To set up a CALL HOLD:
1

Extension in conversation
wishes to put call on hold, flashes
switchhook

No tones or sound heard by extension
on hold unless MOH is provided. Flashing
extension receives transfer dial tone

Extension

dials CALL HOLD code

Dial tone returned

Extension

replaces

Extension

To retrieve

handset

the call at the original
Extension

lifts handset

Extension dials CALL HOLD local
retrieve code
a call at another

calls

extension:

To retrieve

is now free to make or receive

Dial tone returned
Extension

connected

to call on hold

extension:

Extension

lifts handset

Extension dials CALL HOLD
Remote Retrieve code

No tones or sound

Extension dials Call Holding
extension’s
number

Extension

Dial tone returned

connected

heard

to call on hold

To use CALL HOLD as a Broker feature:
9

Perform steps 1, 2 and 3 under
“To set up a CALL HOLD”

Extension

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

Extension

dials third party

Ring-back
ringing

Third party answers

Extension

flashes

Extension

dials CALL HOLD code

tone heard, third extension’s

Conversation
switchhook

Transfer

phone is

takes place

dial tone is returned

Third party is placed
retrieved

on hold, second

party is

Page5

SECTION

nmTL9i05/9110-98.320

CHART 2-4 (Cont’d)
CALL HOLD*
ACTION

STEP

Controlling
extension may
repeat steps 13 and 14 as
often as required

To join all three parties
16
17

18
Note:
* Generic

Page 6

VERIFICATION

Each repetition exchanges the
party on hold with the one in
the conversation

into one conversation:

Extension
cn second
Extension
RETRIEVE

flashes switchhook
extension
dials CALL HOLD
code

Transfer

Extension

flashes

Three parties

A conference
2031~~

switchhook

Extension

can NOT be put on CALL HOLD.

dial tone returned
connected

to third party

in conversation

SECTION

CHART 2-5
CALL FORWARDING

To set up CALL FORWARDING

VERIFICATION

- BUSY:

Forwarding
handset

Extension dials CALL
FORWARDING
- BUSY code, and
number of extension to which calls
are to be forwarded
(calls may also
be forwarded
to the attendant)

Extension

To cancel

- BUSY

ACTION

STEP

extension

replaces

lifts

Dial tone returned

Dial tone heard; forwarding
successful

handset

a CALL FORWARDING

- BUSY:

Extension

lifts handset

Extension dials CALL
FORWARDING
- BUSY code

No tones or sound

Extension

Cancellation

replaces

MITL9105/9110-98-320

handset

Dial tone returned
heard

complete

Page7

SECTION

MITL9105/911

O-98-320
CHART 2-6
CALL FORWARDING
- DON’T ANSWER

STEP

ACTION

To set up CALL FORWARDING

- DON’T ANSWER:

Extension

Extension dials CALL
FORWARDING
- DON’T ANSWER
code and number of extension to
which calls are to be forwarded
(calls may also be forwarded to the
attendant)

Extension

To cancel

lifts handset

replaces

CALL FORWARDING

Dial tone returned;
successful

forwarding

- DON’T ANSWER:

Extension

Extension dials CALL
FORWARDING
- DON’T ANSWER
code

Extension

Page 8

Dial tone returned

handset

lifts handset

replaces

VERIFICATION

handset

Dial tone returned
No tones or sound heard.
Cancellation
complete

SECTION

CHART 2-7
CALL FORWARDING
- FOLLOW

ACTION

STEP

To set up CALL FORWARDING

VERIFICATION

- FOLLOW

ME:

Extension

Extension dials CALL
Dial tone heard; forwarding
FORWARDING
- FOLLOW ME code successful
and number of extension to which
calls are to be forwarded (calls may
also be forwarded to the attendant)

Extension

To cancel

lifts handset

replaces

CALL FORWARDING
extension

Dial tone returned
:
:-.
..”

handset

- FOLLOW

ME:

Originating
handset

Originating
extension dials CALL
FORWARDING
- FOLLOW ME code

Extension

replaces

MITL9105/9110-98-320

lifts

Dial tone returned
No tones or sound heard.
Cancellation
complete

handset

j
I

Page 9

SECTION

MITL91051911 O-98-320

CHART 2-8
OVERRIDE
STEP

ACTION

Establish

a two party call

Extension

Dial busy extension

Calling extension
OVERRIDE code

lifts handset

VERIFICATION
Talking

connection

Dial tone returned
Busy tone returned

dials

Parties in conversation
hear a
one second warning tone unless the COS of one
or more of them prevents being over-ridden.
After beep, calling extension is in conversation.
All extensions will hear a short warning tone
every six seconds

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-9
DIAL CALL PICK-UP
ACTION

STEP

I 1
L

1 Any extension

VERIFICATION

in the Pick-Up group is ringing.
Idle extension
handset

lifts

Extension dials DIAL
CALL PICK-UP code

Dial tone returned
Extension is connected
calling party

Page 11

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.320

CHART 2.10
CAMP-ON
STEP

ACTION

VERIFICATION

Establish

Extension

Dial busy extension

Busy tone returned

Calling extension remains
off-hook for more than ten
seconds

a) Calling extension after ten
seconds receives a change in
busy tone
b) The dialed extension receives a
short warning tone

Busy extensions

Page 12

a two party call
lifts handset

hang up

Dial tone returned

Dialed extension

is rung

SECTION

CHART 2-11
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK

- BUSY
VERIFICATION

ACTION

STEP

Dial tone returned

Extension

lifts handset

Dial busy extension

Busy tone returned

Calling extension dials
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
code

Dial tone returned

Calling

extension

Called extension
handset

replaces
replaces

MITL9105/9110-98-320

- BUSY
handset
a) Calling extension rings
b) Called extension rings when calling
extension answers
c) Calling extension hears ringback tone
d) Conversation
- 2-way

-.:.:’
.
.I;

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-12
DO NOT DISTURB
STEP
Extension

VERIFICATION

sets up DO NOT DISTURB:

Extension

Extension
DISTURB

Extension

Extension is not called while
in the DO NOT DISTURB mode

Extension

Page 14

ACTION

cancels

lifts handset
dials DO NOT
code followed by 1
replaces

Dial tone returned
Dial’ tone returned

handset
A calling extension
receives
tone or attendant
intercept

reorder

DO NOT DISTURB:

Extension

Extension
DISTURB

Extension

lifts handset
dials DO NOT
code followed
by 2
replaces

handset

Dial tone returned
No tone or sound, DO NOT
DISTURB is cancelled
Calling
original

extensions
extension

can ring the

SECTION

MITLSI 051911 O-98-320

CHART 2-13
CALL PARK/PICK-UP

ACTION

STEP

‘o park an established

VERIFICATION

call:

Flash switchhook

Transfer

Extension dials CALL
PARK code

Dial tone returned to parking extension. No
tones or sound heard unless music provided
parked extension

Extension

replaces

Extension

handset

‘o Pick-Up a parked call from the parking
4

dial tone returned

extension:

lifts handset

‘o Pick-Up a parked call using an alternate

Extension

connected

to parked call

extension:

Lift handset
extension

of alternate

Dial tone returned

Alternate extension dials CALL
PARK/DIRECTED
CALL PICK-UP
code and number of parking extension

Alternate extension
parked call

connected

Page 15

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-14
PAGING
ACTION

STEP

Repeat

VERIFICATION

Extension

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

Extension
code

dials paging zone

Extension receives a short warning
tone. Extension may now page

Extension

replaces

for each of three codes

handset
if assigned.

SECTION

TRUNK
STEP

To answer

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-15
ANSWER FROM ANY STATION

ACTION

VERIFICATION

a TAFAS call

Extension

user hears night bell

Extension

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

Extension

dials TAFAS night code

Extension

;

is connected

..~.
:: :.:
.’

to trunk call

Page17

I
\

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CONSULTATION
STEP

ACTION

CONSULTATION
Established

CHART 2-16
HOLD/TRANSFER/ADD-ON
VERIFICATION

HOLD:

Call

Extension

flashes

switchhook

Extension which flashed,
dials third extension

Third extension

Effecting extension and third extension connected. Second extension remains on HOLD

answers

a) Flashing extension receives transfer dial tone
b) Second extension in conversation
put
on HOLD, and hears music if provided
rings

TRANSFER:
To idle extension:
4

Perform steps 1 and 2 in
CONSULTATION

Third extension

Extension effecting
replaces handset

Extension on HOLD receives ringing
tone, and is connected to third extension
it is answered

transfer

rings

when

To busy extension:
6

Perform steps 1 and 2 in
CONSULTATION
HOLD

Third extension busy, effecting
extension receives busy tone

Extension effecting
replaces handset

Extension on HOLD receives busy
tone and is CAMPED-ON busy line after
10 seconds

transfer

During Consultation:

Page 18

Perform steps 1 to 3 in
CONSULTATION
HOLD

Effecting

extension

hangs

Effecting
extension
up

Extension
nected

extension
converse

and third

on hold and third extension

con-

SECTION

CHART 2-18 (Cont’d)
CONSULTATION
HOLD/TRANSFER/ADD
ACTION

STEP

M ITL9105/911 O-98-320

ON
VERIFICATION

ADD ON:
1

I After

Perform steps 1 to 3 in
CONSULTATION
HOLD

Effecting extension and third extension
connected.
Second extension remains on HOLD

Effecting extension
switchhook

All three extensions

flashes

connected

three way consultation:

L
12

Perform steps 1 to 3 in
CONSULTATION
HOLD

Effecting
verse

Effecting extension
switchhook

flashes

All extensions

Effecting
handset

replaces

Remaining
connected

extension

and third extension

con-

connected

extensions

remain

Page19

r’-

r
SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

AUTOMATIC

sets AUTOMATIC

WAKE-UP

VERIFICATION
(ALARM

Extension

Extension dials Automatic
Wake-Up
access code and Wake-Up time
as a four digit number (24 hour
clock)

Extension

At selected
cancels

lifts handset

replaces
time

AUTOMATIC

a) Extension
WAKE-UP (ALARM

Extension

Extension dials Automatic
access code and 9999

Extension

replaces

in Generic

204 only

Page 20

Dial tone returned

handset

* Available

CALL)
Dial tone returned

Extension

CALL) *

ACTION

STEP
ixtension

CHART 2-17
WAKE-UP (ALARM

lifts handset

handset

Extension is rung
receives a tone or receives
MOH if provided

CALL)

Dial tone returned
Wakeup

Dial tone returned

Wake-Up

call is cancelled

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2.18
MEET-ME CONFERENCE
STEP

ACTION

To set up a MEET-ME
1

VERIFICATION

CONFERENCE:

At a prearranged
time
dial Meet-Me Conference
Access Code from up to seven
extensions

First extension on ho@. First
extension hears warning tone as
second extension is connected.
Extensions in
conference
hear warning tone as succeeding
extensions are connected

Page 21

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-320

AUTOMATIC

CHART 2-19
CALLBACK - DON’T ANSWER

ACTION

STEP
To set up AUTOMATIC

CALLBACK

VERIFICATION
- DON’T ANSWER:

Extension

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

Extension

dials destination

Destination

Extension receives
flashes switchhook

Dial tone returned
Extension dials AUTOMATIC
CALLBACK
- DON’T ANSWER code
and number of extension called

Extension

Called extension
extension

uses

Extension
of call

Called extension
handset

replaces

Calling

Calling extension
handset

Called extension

Page 22

replaces

no answer,

extension

rings

Dial tone returned

handset

lifts
answers

goes busy for duration

extension

rings

Called extension rings; calling
extension hears ring-back tone
Conversation

takes place

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-20
DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP
ACTION

STEP

Any extension

VERIFICATION

is ringing

Extension

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

Extension dials DIRECTED
Extension
CALL PICK-UP code, and the
number of the extension being rung

is connected

to call

Page23

r
SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-21
STATION CONFERENCE

ACTION

STEP

lifts handset

VERIFICATION

Extension

Extension dials first conferee
extension
for STATION
CONFERENCE

Called

a) Calling extension
and called
extension
connected
b) Called extension
goes on hold. Calling
extension
receives transfer dial tone

extension

answers.

Calling extension
informs of
conference,
flashes switchhook
and dials second conferee extension
4

Second

conferee

answers

Calling extension
switchhook

flashes

Any extension
of 7 extensions
CONFERENCE
b) & c)

Page 24

may add up to a tota
to the STATION
by repeating
steps 3

Dial tone returned
party extension

c) Second

conferee

All extensions

rings

extension

connected

rings

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-22
SPEED CALL*
STEP
Extension

programs

VERIFICATION

a Speed Call:

Extension

Extension dials Speed Call
Access Code

Extension

Extension dials Speed
Access Code

Extension dials Trunk Group
Access Code

Note 1

Extension dials digits to be
used as Speed Call Number

Note 1

Extension

To verify

programmed

lifts handset

Dial tone returned

dials 0

replaces

Call Entry

handset

number:

Extension dials Speed Call
Access Code

Extension dials Entry Access
Number and manual digits if
required

Note 1:

ACTION

Generic

* 1 for 5 second
at any time.

If the call is successful
ring back tone
will be returned from the CO and the
correct number will be rung

pause or * 2 for wait for dial tone or*

3nn for user dialed digits

may be entered

205 only

Page 25

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-320

CHART 2-23
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
STEP

Extension
1

ACTION

programs

a last number

After completion
side number the
seconds to dial
store the dialed
number redial.

To use saved number

VERIFICATION

redial:

of dialing
extension
an * . This
number in

an outhas 10
will
the last

redial:

Extension

goes off-hook

Extension dials Speed Call Feature
Access Code

Extension
Number

dials Entry Access

Dial tone returned

Last number

dialed

rings

MlTEL STANDARD

PRACTICE

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
Issue 1, June 1980

SX=lOO* AND SX-200*
SUPERSWITCH”
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
1.

GENERAL
Introduction

............................

CONTENTS

..........................

Basic Troubleshooting
2.

PAGE

Console Maintenance
Functions
........
Console Alarm LEDs and
Maintenance
Aids ....................
Minor Alarm LED. .....................
Console Alarm LED ...................
Major Alarm LED. .....................
Alarm Reset Button ...................
IDENT Button ........................
Error Codes ..........................
Power Fail Transfer Switch .............
Test Line Functions
General .............................
Direct Trunk Access ...................
To Set and Clear Busy Out of Receivers.
Clear All Errors .......................
Select a Speech Path and or
Receiver..............................1
Slot Initialization
Activate ..............
Forced Trunk Release .................

2
.......

Philosophy

CIRCUIT CARD AND MAINTENANCE
PANEL AIDS ..........................

Card Shelf ............................
RAMlCOS Card (Basic). .................
Memory Expander Card .................
PROM CPU Card (Basic) ................
Scanner Card (Basic) ...................
Tone Control Card .....................
Tone Control Thumbwheel
Switches
.............................
................
Maintenance
Functions.
Load Functions ........................
Console Control Card (Basic) ............
Console Control Line and
Data LEDs ............................
Remote Control RMAT ..................
Receiver Card .........................
Trunk Card. .....
! .....................
Trunk Busy/Idle LEDs ...................
Trunk Incoming and Outgoing
Busy Switches
........................
LineCard .............................
Maintenance
Panel ....................
Maintenance
Console Connector.
........
Power Fail Transfer Control Switches .....
....................
Test Line Terminals
The System Power Switch Cards
External to the Shelf. ..................
The SX-200 Interconnect
Card. ..........
The SX-200 Power Fail Transfer Card .....
The Console Interface Card. ............
Shelf Backplane ......................

.I0
.I1
.I1
.I1
.I3

CONSOLE AND TEST LINE
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS

.I8

...........

3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

0 MITEL Corporation
* Trademark

MITEL Corporation

.::

.I8
.I8
.I6
.I6
.I6
.I7
.I7
.I7
.I7
.I8
.I8
.. .I8
.I8
8
.I9
.I9

CONSOLE FUNCTIONS AND ERROR
CODES...............................19
Current Speech Path Display . . . . .
Line and Trunk Status Display . . . .
Table 4-l Access Codes. . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-2 Maintenance
Function
Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-3 Traffic Measurement
Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-4 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-5 Standard Programming
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-6 Extended Programming
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
9
9
9
.9
9

PAGE

SYSTEM OPERATION

. . . . . 20
. . . . . 20
. . . . . 22

. . . . . 24
. . . . . 25
. . . . . 26

_:
L.
y:

. . . . . 29
. . . . . 30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32
Extension Operation
. . . . . . . . . . .-. . . . . . . .32
1980
Page 1

SECTION MITL9105/911

O-98-350

CONTENTS

PAGE

Console..............................3
Dialing a Trunk (Console). ..............
Hook Flash ..........................
Incoming Calls (GSILS Trunks) ..........
TABLES ..............................
Table 5-2 Error Code Procedures
........
Table 5-3 Extension Fault Report
Procedures
.........................
Table 5-4 Console Faults ...............
Table 5-5 Trunk Fault Report
Procedures
.........................
Table 5-8 System Faults. ...............
6.

3
.33
.34
.35
.35
.40

..4 5
.48

in-

Part 1 General - gives a brief outline
practice and a general introduction
troubleshooting
philosophy.

Part 2 Maintenance
Aids - describes
the
maintenance
aids provided by the system
and gives a description
of each indicator,
switch and display.

Part 3 Console and Test Line Functions
-contains a description
of the maintenance
functions which can be dialed from the console or the test line.

of the
to the

SX-lOO/SX-200 POWER SUPPLY .........

.47

AC/DC Convertor
.....................
DC/DC Convertor
.....................
Ringing Generator
....................
Out of Tolerance ......................
Reserve Battery Backup and
Charger ............................

.47
.47
.47
.47

Part 4 Error Code Troubleshooting
describes
the troubleshooting
procedures
to be used in conjunction
with the system
error code displays.

Part 5 Fault Report Troubleshooting
- this
part details troubleshooting
procedures
to
be used when no error code is reported.

Part 8 SX-lOO/SX-200 Power Supply Specifications - defines the electrical and operational specifications
for the SX-100/200
PABX power supplies.

Appendix
(MAPS).

Appendix two - provides
of all system parameters.

Appendix three - provides installation
and
cabling
information
for the SX-100/200
PABX’s.
Appendix four - contains the mechanical
information
pertaining
to the SX-100 in the
form
of MAPS (MITEL
ACTION
PROCEDURES) and Tables.

..4 7

REMOTE MAINTENANCE
ADMINISTRATION
AND TEST SYSTEM ...................
.57
1 MITEL ACTION PROCEDURES

APPENDIX

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

3 SYSTEM CABLING

APPENDIX

4 SX-100 MECHANICAL
INFORMATION
.............

.A4-1

5 SX-200 MECHANICAL
INFORMATION
.............

.A5-1

APPENDIX

8 POWER CHECKS.

.A8-1

APPENDIX

7 TROUBLESHOOTING

APPENDIX

.......

..........

............

. Al-l
A2-1
.A3-1

MAPS ... A7-1

GENERAL

Introduction
.

1.01

is divided

..4 2
.44

APPENDIX

SX-lOO/SX-200 PABX’s. The practice
to six parts and seven appendices:

This section
contains
information
used
when
troubleshooting

Page 2

to be
the

one - Mite1 Action

Procedures

a series of tables

Appendix five - contains the mechanical
information
pertaining
to the SX-200 in the
form of MAPS and Tables.
Appendix six - contains all power checks
pertaining
to the SX-1001200 in the form of
MAPS and Tables.
Appendix
seven - details, in the form of
MAPS, the procedures
required to locate
and fix malfunctions
in the PABX’s.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

1.02

It should be noted that certain sections and
appendices
must be used as interlocking
information
for complete troubleshooting.

also contains
a RAM battery pack with an LED
that will be lit to indicate that the pack is seated
correctly and is charging.

1.03

2.05

Basic Troubleshooting
Philosophy:
The
SX-100/200
PABX’s
employ
automatic
diagnostics
which, in most cases, can pinpoint
faults to a specific printed circuit card. A system
malfunction
is generally corrected by the replacement of an indicated
faulty circuit card with a
known (good) spare. Should the need arise, the actual shelf backplane or power supply may be easily replaced by a new unit. The tables, MAPS and
explanations
in this practice should be sufficient
in most cases to cover any problems which may
arise in the field.
Actual
field repair of components
on cards,
shelves or power supplies is never done.
All defective units should be returned to MITEL as
per Section MITL9105/9110-98-200.
2.

CIRCUIT
AIDS

CARD AND MAINTENANCE

PANEL

2.01

The SX-1001200 PABX’s are equipped
with
various maintenance
aids that will be of
assistance
to the repair person troubleshooting
the system. This part is a card by card description
with specific reference to all indicators,
switches
and fuses on the cards. In addition the connectors
and switches on the maintenance
panel are also
described.
2.02

Card Shelf:
Fig. 2-1 illustrates
the card
locations in the equipment
shelf or shelves.
A visual display of all cards is shown in Fig. 2-2
and Fig. 2-3. Fuses on the backplane
of the shelf
are described
in paragraph 2.22.
2.03

Both the
nine basic
in the card shelf
be used in either
control problems

SX-100 and SX-200 employ only
and four optional types of cards
(Fig 2-2 and Fig.2-3). These may
system, minimizing stocking and
for field maintenance.

Memory Expander Card:
This card has the
capability of carrying 28K bytes of Programmable
Read Only Memory
(PROM) containing
generic programs.
The Memory
Expander
card
holds four diagnostic
LEDs:
.

the top LED, when flashing
indicates
that
the automatic
diagnostics
are running. This
LED will not flash (the diagnostics
do not
run) when the system is in programming
mode, or when less than 4 speech paths are
idle. Under these circumstances,
the LED
may be either on or off, its state has no
special meaning.

the second LED, when lit, indicates that the
system is in the programming
mode.

the third LED, when lit, indicates
that the
RS232 port is in use (Generic 204 and up).

the fourth LED, when lit, indicates
that a
Data Dump or Load is in progress (Generic
204 and up).

2.06

The PROM/RAM
(optional)
Expander card
can be used in place of the Memory Expander.
It contains
an additional
2K of CMOS
RAM. A fifth LED on the battery pack indicating
that the battery .pack is seated correctly and is
charging.
2.07

PROM/CPU Card (basic):
The PROM/CPU
card contains
system generic programs
in
Programmable
Read Only Memory (PROM), and
also contains the microprocessor,
which together
with the generic
program
constitutes
the intelligence
of the PABX. The basic system clock is
also located on this card (See Fig. 2-2).
2.08

2.04

RAMlCOS Card (basic):
This printed circuit card contains
the system
8K byte
scratch pad (volatile) Random Access Memory,
together
with 2K bytes of CMOS (non-volatile)
Random Access Memory which is used for the
storage of customer configuration
data (Class of
Service options,
numbering
plan etc.). No functions other than memory read/write functions
are
performed
on this card. (See Fig. 2.2). This card

Scanner Card (basic):
The scanner card
(Fig. 2-2) contains a two digit display which
is used to display faulty card positions.
It may be
used in conjunction
with the test line to display
the status of selected circuits and to support the
customer
data Load and Dump. The two digit
display is read from top to bottom.
If a card is
malfunctioning,
the display will show the position
number of the faulty card (01-22 for equipment
shelf 1 and 31-42 for SX-200 equipment
shelf 2).

Page3

..‘.

j :

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

LLINES.

lfi

711 71

TRUNKS/
FRONTVIEW

SHELF1
Fig. 2-I

Equipment

When used in conjunction
with the test line, the
display shows the status of the receiver and/or
the speech path which has been selected. The top
display shows the receiver status and the bottom
display
shows
the speech
path status.
The
customer data can be dumped or loaded in blocks
as the data port is divided into blocks (Table 2-2).
The displays used are shown in Table 2-l. This
card also contains
the night bells and night service relays.

The Master Reset button is used in the initial programming
process as part of the RAM clearing
procedure
and may also be used to reset the
system. When the Master Reset button is pressed,
the processor
is momentarily
turned off, all existing calls are dropped,
and all system crosspoints are released. The processor
then starts,
and the diagnostics
begin operating,
in the same
manner as when the PABX power is first turned
on.

The Baud Rate switch selects the RS232 port
baud rate as either 110 or 300 baud (later versions
300 or 1200 baud).

Page 4

Shelf
TABLE 2-l
SCANNER DISPLAYS

DISPLAY

MEANING
Available - not in use.
Conversation
- in use.
Error - found faulty by diagnostics.
Found - in use by test line.
Optional - no specific circuit
selected.

TABLE 2-2

AA
01-99
00-30
EE

Beginning
Data Block
Data Block
Checksum

of Data Load
1-99
loo-130
error on Data Load

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

i,
‘:
#I

I-II,

SCANNER DISPLAY

DIAGNOSTIC
INDICATOR \

Iz II

“.,,,.
BAUD RATE
SWITCH
110/300 BAUb+j

w./,,I

300/12ooRo BAUD

n(1

PROGRAMMING MODE
INDICATOR

SYSTEM MASTER
,.---RESET

IN SERVICE
c

THUMBWH
SWITCHE
HOOK LED
LINE 8
RAM POWER LED

Fig. 2-2

Equipment

Cards

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TWO VERSIONS OF CO TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD 9110-011

9110-011 (N ON-MODULAR)

DO EXIST

9110-011 (MODULAR)

TRUNKSWITCHESON
I

TRUNK1

REVERSEOF:BOARD

("\
\I!

BUSYSWITCHES

MOTHER BOARD

THISISTHE
MODULAR COTRUNKCARD.
FOUR INDIVIDUAL TRUNKS MAY BE SET
FOR EITHER LOOPOR GROUND START.

THIS IS A NON MODULAR CO TRUNK
CARD.ITHASTHEABlLlTYTOMAKEFOUR
INDIVIDUAL TRUNKS EITHER LOOP OR
GROUND START.

TWOVERSIONSOF

E&M TRUNK CIRCUIT 9110-013

DO EXIST

9110-013
I

;-.A9oon
LONG
L"sOW'l+;;lT r-r-:
L L_I
SHORT -

90011

2WIRE:--7

:;:;:60011

4 WIREis-1

Ls9oorr

2/4 WIRE
SWITCH
1

BUSY

MOTHER BOARD

THIS IS A MODULAR E&M TRUNK CARD.
TWO E&M TRUNK CIRCUITS ARE ACCOMODATED. THE TRUNKS MAY BE SET
FOR WINK START, STOP DIAL, 2 OR 4
WIRE OPERATION, SPECIAL GAIN AND
600(10R 900RIMPEDANCE.

Fig. 2.3

Circuit

Cards

SECTION

Card:
This card provides dial
tone, busy tone, ringback tone and miscellaneous tone, along with two DTMF generators
and two rotary dial generators which are used for
diagnostic
tests. The DTMF generators
are also
used when dialling from the console. The four
thumbwheel
switches used with the test line and
programming
are also located on the tone control
card. In addition, the circuits for Page 1 and Page
2 outputs,
and the music on hold inputs are
located on this card. (See Fig. 2-2)
2.09

9110-211

HIGH IMPEDANCES EXTERNAkGROUND

OPEN

Fit
THE9110-211 ISACOTRUNKCARD
ACCOMODATlNG4COTRUNKS

9110-031

BUSY SWITCHES 1

r-r1
TRUNK1 IMPEDANCE ' '
L-L-r
SWITCHES

MOTHER BOARD

THIS IS A MODULAR DID/TIE TRUNK
CARD.TWO DID OR TIE TRUNKS ARE ACCOMODATED. TRUNKS CAN BE SET FOR
WINKSTART. INCOMING DIAL-OUTGOING
AUTO AND DELAY DIAL.

Fig. 2-3

Circuit

Tone Control

Tone Control Thumbwheel
Switches:
The four
thumbwheel
switches on the Tone Control card
are used in conjunction
with programming,
maintenance,
and load functions.
The number
settings read from top to bottom. Programming
functions are shown in Table 2-3.

(a)

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Maintenance
Functions:
The thumbwheel
switches may be used in conjunction
with
the test line to select receivers and speech
paths. The top two switches are used to
select a receiver by setting the switches to
the last digits of the required
receiver
equipment
number (even numbers
only,
90-20). If set to 99, any free receiver will be
selected. The bottom two switches are used to select a speech path (01-31 for speech
paths, or 32 for the music on hold speech
path). If set to 99, any free speech path will
be selected. When not using the test line for
maintenance
purposes,
the switches
should be set to 7780.
TABLE 2-3
SWITCH SETTINGS

Enter Maintenance
Console into
programming
mode
Enter Attendant
Console 1 into
programming
mode
Enter Attendant
Console 2 into
programming
mode
Initialize System Configuration
Take any console out of programm
ing mode (one of the X = any digii
except 7, n = O-9)
Enables reset from test line (n =

Cards Cont’d

Page 7

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

(b)

Load
Functions
(Generic
2041~~): The
Customer Program Dump/Load Function requires the switches to be set to 5623 to initiate a load from, or dump to, an external
storage device.

Console Control Card (basic):
The console control card provides the interface between the PABX and two consoles. Console control card number 1 (position 17) is allocated to the
maintenance
console connector
and the attendant console number 1 connector.
Console control card number 2 (position 16) is allocated to the
attendant
console number 2 connector. The card
provides both voice and data signals to and from
each console. (See Fig. 2-2). To identify the console, the operator may press the IDENT button.
The last segment in the DESTINATION
Display
identifies the console as; 0 for maintenance,
1 for
console 1, or 2 for console 2.

the handshaking
circuitry required to interface the MPU with the external 2-wire line.
TRUNK INTERFACE, to provide the proper
termination
to the line with regard to impedance,
ringing and supervisory
condition.

2.10

2.11

Console
Control
Line
and
Data
LEDs:
LINE 1 and LINE 2 LEDs,when
lit,
indicate that the associated console is active, i.e.
the handset
or headset
is plugged
in. The
designations
1 and 2 refer to the two consoles
handled by the card. The maintenance
console
will appear in slot 17, line 2. Console 1 will appear
in slot 17, line 1. Console 2 will appear in slot 16,
line 1. Line 2 in slot 16 is not used. The data LEDs
indicate voice pair continuity
to the console(s).
The LEDs labelled DATA 1 and DATA 2 flicker
whenever data is transmitted
from the corresponding console to the console control card (Data is
transmitted
when any console button is pressed.)
2.12

Remote Control RMAT:
The Remote Control PABX (RCP) card, can be fitted in slot 16
of the PABX shelf to provide the PABX console
button functions
remotely, under the control of
the RMAT Controller (see MITL9105/9110-98-101).
The main components
of the RCP card are as
follows:
0

MASTER/SLAVE INTERFACE, to enable the
MPU to access the PABX data bus and control lines.
2.13

Receiver Card: The receiver card contains
two rotary dial and two DTMF receivers.
Having received each dialed digit, the receiver informs the processor and prepares for the next
digit. The dual receiver card contains no LEDs or
switches.
The quad receiver card contains four
rotary dial, four DTMF receivers, four dial tone
detectors, and 4 sets (two each) of LEDs labelled
Al Bl, A2 B2, A3 B3, A4 B4. In each case the A
LED indicates
a busy condition.
The B LED indicates a busied out condition.
2.14

Trunk Card:
The Trunk Card contains
either two or four trunks depending
upon
the trunk type. (Fig. 2-3; 4 CO Trunks, 2 E&M Tie
Trunks, or 2 DID Trunks per card). These circuits
provide the interface between the PABX and the
Central Office, other PABX’s, or other equipment.
Each trunk circuit repeats dial pulse signals from
the speech path to the Tip and Ring and passes
DTMF signals directly from the speech path to the
Trunk for outgoing
calls. The busy switches on
the trunk card may be used to make a trunk continuously
busy. If the trunk is in use when the
switch is set, the existing call is not disturbed.
For exact details of the trunk busy switches see
Table 2-4.
l

The Micro Processor Unit (MPU), which acts
on commands
received
from the RMAT
Controller via the modem.
MEMORY PROM/RAM, which contains programmed memory and scratch pad memory
for storage and execution of commands.
MODEM, which
provides
the necessary
tone transmitter
and receiver, and contains

Page 8

Trunk Busy/Idle LEds:
Each trunk circuit
has associated with it an LED which shows
the busy/idle status of the trunk as follows:

Trunk circuit

idle

LED OFF

Trunk circuit

seized

LED ON

LED FLASHING

Trunk circuit busied
out (by switch on
card or from the
console)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-96-350

Trunk
incoming
and Outgoing
Busy Switches:
Associated
with each trunk circuit are
two busy switches, one for making the trunk busy
outgoing and one for making the trunk busy incoming. Table 2-4 lists the switch settings and
describes their effect.

The switches have two positions,
ENABLE
and DISABLE. When set to ENABLE, the
system allows power fail transfer to be initiated from the designated
source. When
set to DISABLE,the designated
source cannot initiate power fail transfer, e.g. with the
COMMON
CONTROL
power fail transfer
control switch set to ENABLE, a common
control
failure will cause a power fail
transfer. The MASTER power fail transfer
switch will set the PABX to power fail
transfer when operated to the TRANSFER
position.
The switches
associated
with
each console must be set to disable when
that console is not in use. If the transfer
switch on a console will never be used, the
transfer enable switch may be left in the
disable position at all times.

2.15

Line Card: The line card contains
8
separate
line circuits.
The line circuit
detects on and off-hook conditions,
which are
recognized
by the scanner, and reported to the
processor
for appropriate
action. Dial signals
(rotary dial or DTMF) are passed over the speech
path selected for the conversation.
(See Fig. 2-2).
The LED on each line circuit provides an indication that the line circuit has detected an off-hook
condition. The LED is driven directly from the offhook detect circuit in the line circuit. It turns ON
when an off-hook condition
is detected and will
flash when dial pulses are sent.

2.16

Maintenance
Panel:
At the top of the
equipment
cabinet
is the maintenance
panel (Fig. 2-4). This panel provides the service
personnel with access to the system through the
maintenance
console connector and test line terminals. Also housed on the maintenance
panel
are the six Power Fail Transfer Control Switches,
a system Power ON/OFF switch and a POWER ON
LED.
l
l

Maintenance
Console
Connector:
This
connector
is provided
to allow the installer/repair
person to plug in a console for
administration
and test purposes,
i.e. to
program changes in system data.
Power Fail Transfer
Control
Switches:
These switches
are used to control the
source of a power fail transfer. A Power Fail
Transfer (PFT) may be caused by a common
control
failure, a power failure,
by the
operation of a failure transfer switch on one
of the consoles, or by operating the Master
Transfer Switch on the maintenance
panel.

.-:
I’..-:

Test Line Terminals:
The test line TIP and
RING terminals may be used in conjunction
with a test set (butt-in) and the thumbwheel
switches on the tone control card, to access individual
speech paths, receivers,
trunks, and lines for test purposes. The test
line also has the capability
of resetting
system errors, initializing
card slots, busying out and de-busying
receivers
and
speech paths and controlling
the printer
port. See section 3 for a full description
of
the use of the Test Line.
The System Power:
This switch has the
ability to turn the shelf power on or off.
Note that this does not turn the power
supply off, but the system will go into a
Power Fail Transfer. The system power
should be disconnected
from the commercial AC source (or DC if - 48Vdc fed) before
any power supply maintenance
is attempted.

Cards External

to the Shelf

2.17

There are a number of cards that are external to the equipment
shelf (shelves). These
cards, and the PABX they are part of, are listed in
Table 2-5.

1
Fig. 2-4

Maintenance

Panel

Page9

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE 2 -4
OUTGOING/INCOMING
SWITCH

SETTINGS

Trunk Busy Switches
I. Outgoing

busy switches

(1 per trunk) can be set for either of the following

Idle Setting

- Normal

Busy Setting
If the switches

conditions:

trunk operation

- Trunk cannot

are not set in this manner,

be seized for outgoing
“Ring

Don’t Answer”,

call
may occur.

2. The “Outgoing
Busy” condition may be set either by the outgoing busy switch, or by the console “Trunk Busy Out” function. When this condition is in effect the incoming busy switch
affects the trunk condition as follows:
Idle Setting

- No answer

Busy Setting

For further

information

will be given to incoming

- A permanent

see Sections

seizure condition

MITL910519113

CO calls

is given towards

the CC

98-200 and MITLS 1051911 o-98-205

TABLE 2-5
EXTERNAL SYSTEM CARDS
c

Card

Interconnect
Power Fail Transfer
Console Interface

sx-200
1 card
1 card
1 card (or 2,
5 x 200)

Card (Fig. 2-5) provides a direct connection
between the consoles (J13, J14 and J15) and the shelf backplane
(P16 and P17). This board also contains the console fuse for protection
of the console. Directly
opposite the fuse is the RS232 printer port P302.
For a complete
description
of this port see
MITL9105/9110-98-450
and Table 2-6. Plugs P301
and P303 are the maintenance
panel connector
and the power supply out of tolerance
monitor
respectively.
All power for the Interconnect
card
is supplied
through the power supply terminal
block TB301 on the board. Plugs J13, J14, and J15
2.18

The SX-200 Interconnect

Page 10

Fig.

sx-1 00

Fig.

2-5
2-6
2-7

1 card
combined

2-8

I(
are the console plugs. Plugs P16 and P17 provide
interconnection
between the Interconnect
card
and the shelf backplane. Plugs P18 and Pl9 provide a connection
between the Interconnect
card
and the Cross Connect Field. P18 carries Night
Bell Contacts, Music on Hold, and Paging access
circuitry. P19 carries Tips and Rings for the card
shelf slots 13 and 14. Thus the Interconnect
card
does as its name implies, by providing an interconnection
between the PABX and external equipment, as shown in Appendix 3. Each component
that terminates
on the Interconnect
card is listed
in Table 2-7.

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

MAINTENANCE
PANEL
P301

J302 RS232 PORT
PRINTER
RECiiOING
DEVICE

TB301
POWER SUPPLY
TERMINAL

6 8-32
3/E" SCREWS

\
- 4aVdc
CONSOLE
FUSE
1.5AMP FAST BLO

Fig. 2-5

2.19

ATT
CONSOLE 2
J15

MAINTENANCECONSOLE
J13

SX-200 Interconnect

The SX-200 Power Fail Transfer Card (Fig.
2-6) provides for the possibility of twelve CO
trunks to be connected
to twelve extensions
in
the event of a commercial
power or equipment
failure. Two amphenol connectors
(P20 and P21,
Table 2-7) are hard wired directly to the cross connect field (Appendix 3) to provide for power fail
transfer.
All power for this card is provided
through the cable harness to the power terminal
block (TBl) at the top of the board. The power fail
transfer LED on this card when not lit indicates

P17
INTERCONNECT
CABLE

ATT
CONSOLE1
J14

P16
INTERCONNECT
CABLE

P18
MISCELLANEOUS

Card

dicates that the system
condition.
2.20

P19
MISCELLANEOUS

is in a power fail transfer

The Console Interface Card (Fig. 2-7) provides static
protection
for the SX-200
system against discharges
to the console and
console cable. This protection
is achieved by
placing a series of transient voltage suppressors
between the console connections
and a chassis
ground. Any transient voltages will be routed to
the ground.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE 2-6
PIN NO.1

CONNECTORS
SIGNAL
Connector

P302, P303
NAMES

P301

2.21

The

SX-100 combines
the Console Interface, Power Fail Transfer, and Console Interconnect
on one card (Fig. 2-8). All plugs on this
card perform the same functions as listed in Table
2-7. All power for the board is provided by the two
terminal blocks (TB301 and TB302) fed by a cable
from the power supply. In the event of a commercial power or equipment
failure, up to six CO
trunks can be automatically
connected
to six extensions.
In addition, the board has a Transfer
LED which will go out when a transfer occurs.
There are three fuses for user ringing,
user
- 48Vdc, and - 48Vdc for the console (Fl, F2, F3).
Shelf

Backplane

2.22

MAINT. RING
Connector

P302

ov
RECEIVE DATA
TRANSMIT DATA
CLEAR TO SEND
DATA SET READY
SIGNAL GROUND
CARRIER DETECT
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
ia
19

iti

DATA TERM READY

Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6

P303

KEY
O/l
-lov
PWR SWB
PWR SWA
SPARE

The same backplane and equipment
shelf
are used in both the SX-100 and SX-200.
Field replacement
of only the backplane
is not
recommended;
rather the whole equipment
shelf
should be replaced (Fig. 2-10). The backplane
essentially
provides
an interface
between
all
printed circuit cards (paragraphs
2.01 - 2.14) and
extensions, trunks and miscellaneous
equipment.
Physically
the backplane
has six 25 pair amphenol type connectors
for equipment,
extensions and trunks. It may have four fuses (Fig. 2-9).
Each fuse is rated at 2 amps, - 48Vdc (UL approved) and has a LED which will light if the fuse
blows and there is a card in one of the associated
slots. All power for the backplane is provided by
terminal blocks TB112 and TB3/4. All PCB cards
are held in position by PCB edge connectors
on
the backplane, and plastic guides on the shelf. In
both the SX-100 and SX-200 the backplane power
is fed by a cable from the output of the power supPlY.
TABLE 2-7
INTERCONNECT
CARD EQUIPMENT
TERMINATIONS
Component

Interconnect
Plug Number

Consoles
Shelf Backplane
Printer/Recording
Device
Maintenance
Panel
Power Out of Tolerance
Cross Connect
Power Fail Transfer
Power Terminal

J13, J14, J15
P16, P17
J302
P301
P302
Pia, pi9
P20, P21
TB301
-

Card

1840

Page 12

SECTION

Fl-2A

P21
POWER
FAIL
TRANSFER
\

MITL9105/9110-98-350

POWER
FAIL
TRANSFER
RELAYS

cl c1 II&l

TOPOFCARD

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER
LED

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER
RELAYS

Fig. 2-6

SX-200 Power Fail Transfer

P20
POWER FAIL
TRANSFER

Board

J24
0
TOPOFCARD
\

P25

Fig. 2-7

SX-200 Console

Interface

Card

Page 13 J

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER CABLE
""n

d-YND

STRAP

MISCELLANEOUS
CABLE

INTERCONNECT
CABLE

MISCELLANEOU

,~lTORI

TB301
PIN1

P303
OOT
CONNECTOR

.
1~~~
“‘\’

\
I

PIN1

POWERTERMlNiLS

Fig. 2-8

Page 14

:
‘.,.

“..
:.
::..

&SES
;302
F11.5 AMP FAST BLO RS232 PoRT
(PRINTER OR
F2.5AMP SLO BLO
RECORDING
F3.5AMPSLO
BLO
DEVICE)

SX-100 Interconnect,

Console

Interface,

;.:.L:
:..
:./,:..
:
..,
‘.I..:.
:..I..

:‘.
@l

J13
ATTCONSOLE

@‘\

J14
ATT CONSOLE 1

Power Fail Transfer

Card

;

KINTENANCE
CONSOLE

SECTION

P5lPll

TB1/3

MITLSI 05/91 I O-98-350

P3/P9

PI/P7

PIN 21

FUSE
Fl
F2
F3
F4

ALL FUSES ARE 2 AMPSLO

LED

Fig. 2-9

Fig. 2-10

SLOTS
1-4
5-a
9-12
13-16

EL0

LED

14482

Backplane

Equipment

Shelf

Page 15

SECTION

lblITL9105/9110-98-350

CONSOLE AND TEST LlNE MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
3.01 The console and test line are of great importance when detecting and locating a fault.
Each may be used individually
or they may be used together in troubleshooting
the system. This
part will discuss first the Console Alarm LEDs and
Maintenance
Aids, and then the Test Line Functions. The Console Alarm LEDs and Maintenance
Aids will include all ERROR, Attendant
Access
and Maintenance
Function Access codes in the
form of tables. The Test Line Function description
will include
an explanation
of all features
available to the test line.
Console Maintenance
Functions
3.02 Console
Alarm LEDs and Maintenance
Aids:
Each attendant
console (Fig. 3-1) is
equipped with a number of maintenance
aids and
keys which are associated
with maintenance
functions. The following paragraphs describe the
function
of each maintenance
associated
LED
and key.
l

Minor Alarm LED: This LED will flash
whenever the automatic diagnostics
detect
a malfunction
which is not sufficiently
serious to cause a complete system failure.
Typical examples
would include receiver

malfunction,
speech path malfunction
or
crosspoint
malfunction.
Console Alarm LED: The Console Alarm
LED flashes to indicate a console malfunction. The LED will go off when the alarm has
been cleared or cancelled.
Major Alarm LED: The LED turns ON to indicate that a malfunction
has occurred
which has caused the power fail transfer
relays to operate:
(a) When the MAJOR ALARM LED is ON
the PABX is automatically
in power fail
transfer mode.
(b) Typical examples of major alarms include Scanner failure or CPU malfunction, Power Supply voltages
out of
tolerance.
(c) The MAJOR ALARM LED, unlike the
other console LEDs, is hardwired from
the PABX cabinet to the console.
(d) A colon in the time display indicates
that the console is receiving
power
and the handset is plugged in. .
(e) A time display indicates that the PABX
and console processors are running. It
also indicates
that the link from the
console control card to the console is
correct.

Alarm Indicators
Call Waiting Indicator
Digital Clock
Trunk Group Busy Indicators
Busy Lamp Field
Calling Number Display
Called Number Display
Dial Pad
Operating Keys and LED’s

Fig. 3-I

Attendant

Console

SECTION
ALARM RESET BUTTON:
This button is
used to reset the flashing Minor Alarm LED
and the audible signal associated with the alarm
indication.
When the button is pressed it:
. resets the flashing LED to steady and extinguishes
the audible
alarm
signal
associated with the alarm condition
3.03

3.04

displays in the SOURCE and DESTINATION
fields details of the alarm condition,
including the location of the printed circuit
card that has malfunctioned.
A typical alarm
display is shown

readout in the SOURCE
in Fig. 3-2.

In addition, with Generic 203 or higher, if
the Alarm Reset button is pressed, the Busy
Lamp Field changes to display lines and
trunks which are locked out or have been
busied out. This display remains for as long
as the Alarm Reset button is held down.

BUTTON:
If the IDENT button is
pressed when the console
is idle, the
SOURCE display will show the installed firmware
3.05

IDENT

MITL9105/911

O-98-350

generic number, and its revision. The DESTINATION display shows an internal firmware code
and the number of the console at which the key
was pressed. See Fig 3-3.
If the IDENT button is pressed when the attendant
is connected to either a source or destination
party, the SOURCE and DESTINATION
displays will
change to show the equipment
numbers
and
speech path number being used. The date will appear in the time display in Generic 2041UP.

::’
2.:
.:-

3.08

ERROR CODES:
Table 4-4 is a list of error
codes displayed on the console, indicating
the card causing the malfunction
and the type of
malfunction.
Fig. 3-2 shows a typical error display
and it’s interpretation.
POWER FAIL TRANSFER SWITCH:
This
switch (on the underside
of the console),
when in the TRANSFER position, manually switches the PABX into power fail transfer (unless the
appropriate
power fail transfer enable switch on
the maintenance
panel is in the DISABLE position). Operation of the switch from the NORMAL
to the TRANSFER position will cause all existing
3.07

GENERIC

REVISION

CLASS
0

0
RCL
SOURCE

0
DID

0
MAN

CLASS
,..
::
-.

.:’
.’

E012
04
031
024

- UNABLETO CONNECT A SPEECH PATH TO LINE CARD IN
-CARD POSITION 04 SHELF 1
-EQUIPMENT NUMBER 31 (SHELF 1 CARD 04, UNIT 7)
-SPEECH PATH IN USE 024

Fig. 3-2

Typical

Readout

INTERNALFIRMWARECODE

Fig. 3-3

Typical

CONSOLENUMBER

Identification

Display

Page 17-I

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

calls on the transferred trunks to be released, and
the MAJOR alarm LED will light. The switch
should only be operated in emergency situations.
For normal operation, the switch should be in the
NORMAL position.

3.12

Test Line Functions
General
The test line is on equipment
number 001, and appears both on connector Pl and on terminal posts on the maintenance
panel. It must be programmed
to be an extension,
and should have full trunk access for use by
maintenance
personnel.

To Set and Clear Busv-Out
Speech Paths
*
The test line (or console)
nnn (set) or 555 + 4 +
“nnn”
is either the 3
number of a receiver, or
speech path number (i.e.

of Receivers

and

dials 555 + 3 +
nnn (clear) where
digit equipment
is 3 + the 2 digit
301-331)

3.08

3.09

As well as its normal facilities as an extension, certain additional
features exist exclusively for the test line. These are the ability to;
directly access a trunk, set and clear the busy-out
conditions
of speech paths and receivers, clear
all errors and busy-out conditions
in the system
(except for trunks), select a specific speech path
and receiver for use and display their status on
the Scanner card.

3.10

Most of these features require a special access code (the Maintenance
Function
code), which will normally be “555”, but may be
different if necessary to avoid number plan conflicts. This document
assumes the use of the
code 555.
NOTE:
The rotary switches on the tone control card (slot
18) should be set to 7780 when the test line is not
being used for maintenance
purposes.
3.11

Direct Trunk Access:
The test line (or console) dials 555 + 2 + nnn where “nnn” is
the 3 digit equipment
number of the trunk including leading zeros. Reorder tone indicates that
the equipment
number is not that of a trunk. Busy
tone indicates
that the trunk is busy, otherwise
the line is connected to the trunk. If the trunk is a
member of a group programmed
“wait for dial
tone”, the connection
is not made until dial tone
is received.

Page 18

Reorder tone indicates
invalid and dial tone
operation is completed.

that the number is
indicates
that the

3.13

Clear
All Errors:
The test
line (or
console)dials
555 + 1. Dial tone is returned.
All outstanding
minor alarms are cleared. All
busied out receivers,
generators,
and speech
paths are set back to normal and the diagnostic
tests are restarted.

3.14

Select
A Speech
Path
and
or a
Receiver:
This procedure is used to select
a speech path and/or a receiver when the test line
goes off-hook.

3.15

The top 2 switches on the tone card select
the receiver to be used, set up as the last
two digits of the receiver equipment
number (even
numbers, 90-20). If set to 99, any free receiver is
used. (Fig. 3-4)
3.18

The bottom two switches select the speech
path to be used, set up as the speech path
number (Ol-31), or the music-on-hold
speech path
may be selected as 32 (in which case no receiver
will be connected).
If set to 99, any free speech
path is used. When the switches are set and the
test line goes off-hook, the system waits for the
selected speech path to become free and seizes
it. It then waits for the selected
receiver to
become free. A busied out speech path or receiver
may be selected; the speech path may be accessed, but the receiver will not respond to dialing. If
an illegal number is set up, no device will be
selected.
_--

SECTION
The two seven-segment
displays
on the
scanner
card show the status
of the
receiver and/or speech path when a specific one
has been selected. The top display is for the
receiver and the bottom display is for the speech
path. The readouts are:

MITL9105/9110.98-350

3.17

A - Available

Hardware
Position Number

- not in use

C - Conversation
E - Error - found

097

105

113 /

090

098

106

114

091

099

107

115

092

100

108

116

093

101

109

117

094

102

110

118

095

103

111

119

(

- in use

::
-:.
.,-:.

faulty by diagnostics

F - Found - in use by test line
0 - Optional

089

- no specific

circuit

selected

Once the test line has obtained a speech
path and a receiver, it does not change its
.selection
until it originates a new call (changing
the switch settings
meanwhile
will cause the
display to change to reflect the status of the
receiver and speech path whose numbers are on
the switches). If a valid speech path is selected,
but an invalid receiver is selected (e.g. 91), then
the line is connected
to the speech path, no
receiver is selected, and no dial tone is introduced. This provides the ability to listen to a speech
path for the presence of noise. The test line, since
it has not been assigned a receiver, will not time
out and revert to reorder tone. It is then possible
to listen to any unused speech path by remaining
off-hook and selecting
the speech path number
with the bottom two switches.

3.18

3.19

Slot Initialization
Activate:
Occasionally,
when circuit cards are plugged
into the
system, the logic circuits on the card may not
reset completely.
In order to guarantee complete
” reset of all card logic, a slot initialization
procedure has been provided. This procedure allows
the service personnel, after inserting a card into a
shelf, to initialize the card slot from the test line.
To intialize the card slot dial 555 + 5 + nn, where
nn is the card slot number ( 1-17 shelf 1, 31-42
shelf 2). Since inserting
a card may cause
diagnostic
errors, this procedure
is normally
followed by dialing 555 + 1 to clear all system errors.

Fig. 3-4
3.20
trunk
dial
trunk
Care
trunk,
even
4.

Receiver

Card Position
Equipment

Numbers

Forced
Trunk
Release:
This feature
allows service personnel
to force a busy
into the idle state. The test line (or console)
* 2+nnn+*#
where nnn is the individual
equipment
number; press the RELEASE key.
should be taken when force releasing
a
as the trunk will be forced into the idle state
if the trunk is legitimately
in use.

CONSOLE

FUNCTIONS

AND ERROR CODES

‘:’
t

4.01

Generic 20411~~ systems may be assigned a
system identifier (1-3 digits) which will be
unique to that system. To display the system ID;
dial * 17; the system ID appears in the SOURCE
display. Press RELEASE to clear the display. To
change or enter the system ID; dial * 17, enter the
l-3 digit system ID, press the RELEASE button
and the display will clear.

Page19

SECTION

MITL91O5/9110-98.350

4.02

Current Speech Path Display:
This procedure is used to display the speech path
number being used by a source or destination
party. If the console has a destination
party, pressing
the console IDENT key causes the number of the
speech path in use to be displayed in positions 7
and 8 of the DESTINATION
display. Similarily, if
the console
has a source party, pressing
the
IDENT key causes the speech path number to be
displayed
in positions
7 and 8 of the SOURCE
display.

status display.
The record must include
any
blanks, dashes, or symbols exactly as shown in
the SOURCE and DESTINATION displays.
4.04

Tables 4-1 through 4-2 are a listing of all
system access codes. Table 4-3 is the Traffic Measurement
Function Codes. For a further
description
see Sections
MITL9105/9110-98-300,
9105/9110-98-305,
9105/9110-98-310
and
9105/9110-98-450.
4.05

4.03

Line and Trunk Status Display:
This function allows the attendant
to display certain
information
regarding the status of selected lines
or trunks. This feature aids MITEL Field Engineers
to diagnose malfunctions
from a remote location.
To display the line or trunk status dial #nnn#,
where nnn is the equipment
number of the line or
trunk. Care should.be
taken when recording the

RMAT

CONSOLE

Table 4-4 is a list of error codes that may appear on the console during operation of the
system. Table 4-5 is a list of programming
error
codes that may occur during standard programming of the system. Table 4-6 is a list of Standard
programming
confirm codes. Table 4-7 is a list of
programming
error codes that may occur during
extended programming
of the system. Fig. 4-l illustrates the three console overlavs
-,-- available for
system programming.

OVERLAY
Pa:, P1100,1m,
IISYL 1

I
LAMP
TEST

I ‘1

DATE

PASX
ATT

PABX
PROG

SET

BELL
OFF

PASX
EXPROG

READ
DIAG

PASX
RESET

PASX
D&AS

CODE
CHANGE

CANCEL

IDENT

EQPT

ENTER

ANSWER

REL

Q
GO

cAAkL

N\y,f!ER

REDlAL

Fig. 4-l

Page 20

Programming

Overlay

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

(a) BASIC PROGRAMMING

Fig. 4-l

Programming

Overlay (Cont’d)

Page21

-I,
j

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE 4-I
ACCESS CODES

These

codes assume

To cancel
a)
b)
c)

the use of * as the Attendant

all call forwarding:

Dial #c 1 (or * 11)
Dial #
Press RELEASE

To access

Function

code (Feature

To change
Code:

the Direct

a)
b)
c)

an individual

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

a)
b)
c)

all system

c)
d)

a)
b)

Dial I 6
Dial trunk group
Dial *
Press RELEASE

Page 22

alarm:

(Note 1)

trunk:

Dial * 9
Dial individual trunk access
(equipment
number)
Dial *
Press RELEASE
an individual

number

trunk:

Dial * 9
Dial individual trunk access
(equipment
number)
Dial #
Press RELEASE

number

To change the status of all occupied clean
rooms to occupied and needs cleaning:
a)
b)
c)

Dial * 5
Dial time (hour plus minutes)
Dial * for p.m., otherwise
a.m.
Press RELEASE

Dial * 6
Dial trunk group
Dial #
Press RELEASE

Access

Dial * 8
Dial #
Press RELEASE

t To de-busy

c)
d)

number

(1 through

Dial * 10
Dial *
Press RELEASE

To change the status of all occupied
rooms
in need of cleaning to occupied clean:

dial access:

12)

a)
b)
c)

Dial I 10
Dial #
Press RELEASE

To set up call forwarding:

To make trunk group attendant
a)
b)
c)
d)

number

callbacks:

a minor

t To busy out an individual
a)
b)

time:

To make trunk group
a)
b)
c)
d)

assignments:

Dial * 4
Dial #
Press RELEASE

To set the clock
a)
b)
c)
d)

night service

a)
b)
c)

number

Dial * 3
Dial individual trunk access
(equipment
number)
Press Night 1 or Night 2
Dial extension
number
Press RELEASE

To cancel

System

trunk:

Dial * 2
Dial individual trunk access
(equipment
number)
Dial #

To make flexible

Inward

18).

Dial * 7
Dial DISA code
Press RELEASE

To cancel
a)
b)

number

access:

(1 through

12)

b)
c)
d)

(Note 2)

Dial * llnnn, where nnn is the extension
number of the forwarding
extension
Dial call forwarding
code (l-3)
Dial mmm, where mmm is the number to
which the calls are to be forwarded
Press RELEASE

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE 4-I (CONT’D)
ACCESS CODES

To cancel
extension:
a)
b)
c)

call forwarding
(Note 2)

Dial * llnnn, where nnn is the extension
number of the forwarding
extension
Dial #
Press RELEASE

To display
a)
b)

call forwarding

b)
c)

b)
c)
f

an extension:

the printer:

the date:

(Note 3)

Dial JC 15 and 3 or 4 digit date (one or two
digit month, two digit day)
Press RELEASE

t To print the room register
a)
b)

(Note 3)

Dial * 14 *
Press RELEASE
(Note 3)

Dial * 14 00
Press RELEASE

a)
b)

the system

current

system

(Note 3)
ID, O-999)

identity:

(Note 3)

Dial JC 17
Press RELEASE

To print the individual
audit:
(Note 3)
a)
b)

(Note 3)

identity:

Dial * 17 n(nn) (1 to 3 digit
Press RELEASE

To display
a)
b)

audit:

Dial Jt 16
Press RELEASE

t To change

(Note 2)

t To purge and ignore the printer:
a)
b)

(Note 3)

Dial * 14 #
Press RELEASE

To change
a)

the printer:

(Note 2)

Dial * 12nnn, where nnn is the number
the extension to be de-busied
Dial #
Press RELEASE

To suspend
a)
b)

a)
b)

set for an extension:

Dial * 12nnn, where nnn is the number
the extension to be busied out
Dial *
Press RELEASE

f To de-busy
a)

t TO enable

Dial * llnnn, where nnn is the extension
number of the forwarding
extension
Press RELEASE

f To busy out an extension:
a)

for an

“room

status”

Dial JC 18
Press RELEASE
.

Note 1

Errors will be sequentially
stacked in
the memory and may be recalled sequentially (most recent first) by repeating the
above procedure.

Note 2 Applies to Generic 203/up
Note 3 Applies to Generic 2041~~
t Requires system option programming

Page 23

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

MAINTENANCE

TABLE 4-2
FUNCTION ACCESS

CODES

To select any of the functions
the access code assigned for the maintenance
function
must be
dialed (Feature Number 19). The code 555 is used in the fotlowing
part, for the maintenance
code
and may be dialed from the test line or console (Generic 2031~~).

Clear all errors:
a)

Dial 5551

Direct
a)
b)

t*System
a)

trunk or station

Dial 5552
Dial individual

access:

equipment

**To

number

Busy out of a receiver:
a)
b)

Dial 5553
Dial equipment

a)
b)

Dial 55533
Dial speech

De-busy
a)
b)

a)
b)

path:

a)
b)
t**To
a)

(01-31)

a receiver:

t**To
a)
number

a speech

Dial 55543
Dial speech

Initialize

of receiver

path number

Dial 5554
Dial equipment

De-busy

**To

number

Busy out of a speech

a)
b)

of receiver

path:

t**To
a)

path number

(01-31)

card slot:

Dial 5555
Dial card slot number

(01-17, 31-42)

reset:

Dial 5556
initiate

system

dump

Dial 555 + 7
Dial * 14 # (console
initiate

system

dump

from the console:

only)
from the test line:

Dial 555 + 7 hang up
Go off-hook dial 555 + 8 # or 82
suspend

printer:

Dial 555 + 8 + it or 1 or
Dial * 14 JC (console only)
enable

printer:

Dial 555 + 8 + #or 2 or
Dial Jt 14 # (console only)
purge and ignore

printer:

Dial 555 + 8 + 00 or
Di,al * 1400 (console only)

SECTION

TRAFFIC

TABLE 4-3
MEASUREMENT
FUNCTION

CODES

Description

Function
Code
*130

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Select
and/or
l
l

start time.
The start time for a Traffic Measurement
set by the console attendant
as follows:

Enter*130
from keypad
SOURCE display shows:

where:

hhmmx

(existing

run may be displayed

time)

hours

mm = minutes
x = P if p.m.
x = space if a.m. or 24 hour clock
l

Enter new start time hhmmy

where:

y = *if

p.m.

y is not required
l

131

*132

w133

(new time)

if a.m. or 24 hour clock

Press RELEASE

The run length (in multiples
Select Length of Run.
and/or set by the console attendant
as follows:
l
Enter*131
from keypad
l
SOURCE display shows: tt (number of hours)
l
Enter new run time tt (01 to 24)
l
Press RELEASE
A run length of 24 means that Traffic Measurement

Print Traffic Data.
Traffic data may be output
follows:
l
Enter *132 from keypad
l
Press RELEASE
The current count held in the storage registers

of 1 hour) may be displayed

will run continuously.

by the console

are output

attendant

to printer

or tape.

Cancel Traffic Measurement.
The traffic measurement
run, if in progress,
cancelled by the attendant
as follows:
l
Enter *133 from keypad
l
Press RELEASE
This function results in resetting the start time to O:OO,the run length to
0, and zeroing the traffic registers. To restart traffic measurement
new
If a new time is entered
start and run times must be entered. Warning:
part or all of the Traffic Measurement
may be missed.
For further

codes see Table 4-l and Table 4-2.

may be

Page 25

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350
TABLE 4-4
ERROR CODES

Code

Major
Minor

Slot

EOOl

major*/
minor

E002

major*/
minor

20 or 21

E003

major

Clock/scanner

E004

minor

Speech path
check circuit
“hi” when
disconnected

E005

minor

E006

minor

(Et
not
known)

E007

minor

E008

minor

E009

EOlO

During

Page 26

First 3 digits
of Destination
Display

Last 3 digits
of Destination
Display

Error in RAM

Hi byte of
address

bits found
error

PROM
checksum

0 if slot 20
1-7 if slot 21
(PROM page
number)

error

1 = 1st interrupt
missing
2 = 2nd
interrupt missing
1.
no

Bias circuit not
connected
to
Speech path

Speech
number

Speech
short

Speech path that
has bias
applied

path

See
Note

path

other speech
path number
on which bias
was seen

Dial tone
circuit not
connected
to
speech path

Speech
number

Receiver
Card

Receiver
receiving
digits

not
tone

Receiver
equipment
number

minor

Receiver
Card

Receiver
receiving
digits

not
pulse

Receiver
equipment
number

minor

Generator

Generator
number (1 and 2
are tone, 3 and 4
are pulse)

PowerUp

Reason

sequence

only

error

path

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE 4-4
ERROR CODES (CONT’D)
Code

Major
Minor

Slot

EOll

minor

Receiver
Card

E012

minor

Line
Card
or Trunk
Card

E013

minor

E014

minor

Receiver
Card

Receiver dialtone detector
not working

E015

minor

Receiver
Card

Probable
receiver error

E018

minor

99
(slot not
known)

Speech
shorted
known)

E019

minor

Reason

First 3 digits
of Destination
Display

Generator/
Receiver error
isolated to a
speech path
NOTE-error
could be on
receiver card or
on tone control
card (slot 18)
Unable
connect
speech
the line
med as
“station”
“trunk”

to
the
path to
programa
or

Supervisory
missing

Speech
number

Equipment
number

See
Note
2.

path

tone

path
out (not

Last 3 digits
of Destination
Display

Speech
number

Path

Receiver
equipment
number

Speech
number

path

16 speech paths
have been found
in error, probably
a fault in the
checking circuit

.
‘__--”

E020

minor

16 or
17

Excessive
in console
circuits

errors
data

Console number
0 - maintenance
console
1 and 2 - attendant consoles

Page 27

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE 4-4
ERROR CODES (CONT’D)
Reason

First 3 digits
of Destination
Display

Last 3 digits
of Destination
Display

See
Note

Code

Major
Minor

Slot

E021
(21)

minor

Check sum error
in RAM Generic
204

E021
(22)

minor

Non-Volatile
RAM check sum
error

E022

minor

Generic 204
Software conflict

NOTES
1.

No more tests using the check
will be performed.

The speech path shown in the first two
digits of DESTINATION
display is busied
out, a maximum of 16 speech paths may
be busied out.

circuit

The receiver is busied out, maximum one
receiver on a Dual Receiver card and two
receivers on a Quad Receiver card.
The generator
is busied out, maximum
1.
No further generator tests are performed.

Page 28

No further tests on this slot are performed at this time. This error will occur if a
card is not installed for a programmed
time.

No further test for supervisory
presence are performed.

No further

E021 will not reappear if the system is reset
or the power is turned off, in Generic 202,
revisions 04 or lower; and in Generic 203,
revisions 02 and lower may be cleared by
initializing
the RAM and reprogramming
the
system.

tone

tests are performed.

SECTION

STANDARD
Error
code

Cause
pressed.

TABLE 4-5
PROGRAMMING

Key
affected

Key
flashing

ALL

None

ALL

None

Invalid

key

Invalid

number.

Key other
than
ENTER
or CANCEL
pressed.

LAMP TEST,
TENANT,
OPTION
COS DEFINE,
FEATURE
EXTN NUMBER,
TRUNK
HUNT
GROUP,
TRUNK
GROUP,
NEXT,
EQPT
NUMBER

ENTER,
CANCEL

Access
code has
not been entered.

HUNT
TRUNK

ACCESS
CODE

The extension
number
or access
code entered
is
already
assigned.

EXTN,
ACCESS
CODE

None

Number
contains
number
conflicting
enabled

entered
incorrect
of digits
or
option
in this COS.

EXTN NUMBER
ACCESS
CODE

None

Incorrect
number

equipment
entered.

EQPT

None

GROUP
GROUP

NUMBER

MITL9105/911

o-98-350

ERROR CODES

Meaning
The last key pressed
is
invalid
at this time.
The number
entered
is out
of range
or contains
corrupted
data.
An attempt
was made to leave
the current
mode after some
parameters
were changed
but before
ENTER
or CANCEL
was pressed.
ENTER
may be
used to write the new programming
information
back to
the non-volatile
RAM or use
CANCEL
to ignore
all programming
changes
made
ssince
the last time ENTER
was pressed.
Attempting
to enter
members
into a Hunt or Trunk
group
before
an access
code has
been assigned
to the group.
The extension
number
or
access
code entered
is
already
assigned
to an
extension,
feature,
hunt
group
or trunk
group.
In Trunk
mode an attempt
is made to delete
a member
of a trunk
group.
Equipment
Numbers
desired
must be entered.
In Trunk
Group
mode an attempt
is made to place
a
trunk
into a trunk group
while
that trunk
is currently
programmed
into another
trunk
group.
Callback
and Executive
Override conflict,
i.e. trying
to
enter a Callback
code while
same
code assigned
to Executive
Busy Override
and
vice-versa.
The extension
number
or
access
code is in conflict
with the existing
numbering
plan. Attempting
to add
an option
to a COS in which
a conflicting
option
is enabled.
Attempting
to add a System
Option
when a conflicting
option exists.
Attempting
to assign
an
equipment
number
that is:
l
undefined
l
defined
as a trunk to
an extension
hunt group
or extension
l
defined
as an extension
to
a trunk group
or a trunk
l
an extension
with message
registration
to hunt group
or pickup
group
An equipment
number
assigned to an extension
must
be
deleted
as an extension
before
being programmed
as
a trunk.
An equipment
number
assigned
to a trunk must
be
deleted
as a trunk before
being programmed
as an extension (Generic
2041~~).

Action

Required

Check
procedure
and press
correct
key.
Press key associated
with
entry and re-enter
number.
Press
ENTER
to transfer
the
data to permanent
store or
CANCEL
to remove
the data
from the temporary
store.

Press
enter

ACCESS
required

CODE
access

key an
code.

Check
code entered.
1 If code is correct,
terminate
entry,
remove
other
appear
ante of code and re-enter
all new data.
2 If code is incorrect,
press
key associated
with entry
and re-enter
extension
number
or access
code.

Check
entry.
Press key
associated
with entry and
re-enter
number.

Remove
conflicting
option
(a) Assign
equipment
number
correctly
(b) E;E;zrew
equipment

.I,?; I

Page 29

MITL91051911

O-98-350

STANDARD
Confirm
Code

Cause

Attempting
equipment
an extension
containing

AttemptIng
to asslgn an
equipment
number for
a trunk to an empty
slot or a slot contamIng
an extension
card

Attempting
extension
exists

to assign
dn
number
for
to a slot
a trunk
card

to assign
that already

The busy lamp
already
exists

assignment

TABLE 4-6
PROGRAMMING
(CONFIRM)

Key
Affected

Flashing
Lamp

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

EQPT
NUMBER

CONFIRM

EXTN
NUMBER

CONFIRM

BUSY
LAMP

CONFIRM

CODES
Action
Check
assignmentl
if correct
press
CONFIRM
key. Equipment
number
entered
is accepted
as the number
for the equipment
type being
programmed.
All data associated
with the original
appearance
of the equipment
number
is removed
l
if incorrect
press
EQPT NUMBER
and re-enter
new equipment
number
Check
assignmentif correct
press CONFIRM
key.
The extension
number
entered
is
accepted
as the extension
number
for the equipment
being defined.
All data associated
with the
original
appearance
of the
extension
number
is removed.
l
if incorrect
press
EXTN NUMBER
and re-enter
extension
number.
l

Check
assignmentl
if correct
press
CONFIRM
key. Busy
lamp assignment
is accepted
for this
equipment.
All data,associated
with
original
assignment
is removed.
l
if incorrect
press
BUSY LAMP and
re-enter
busy lamp assignment

‘0

TABLE 4-7

Absorb Plan mode
Trunk Group mode
Control Plan mode

Number is not within the range of the
parameter
being defined. Press
parameter
key defined, and enter new
correct number.
An attempt was made to leave the current mode
after some parameters
were changed but before
ENTER or CANCEL was pressed. ENTER may be
used to write the new programming
information
back to the non-volatile
RAM or use CANCEL to ignore all programming
changes made since the last
time ENTER was pressed.

Control

Plan mode

The table number entered is not valid for the
current configuration.
Re-enter a number which
ists for the configuration
of the extended
nonvolatile customer
RAM.

ex-

SECTION

EXTENDED
Applies

Error
E4

TABLE 4-7 (CONT’D)
PROGRAMMING
ERROR CODES

to:

Table mode

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Meaning
The table entry code is invalid for the table programmed. This occurs in the following
situation:

Table mode

A code of more than 3 digits
800-entry or 20-range table.

A code not in the range of 200-999 for an
800-entry table.

A code which already exists or a code which
would be ambiguous
in conjunction
with the
existing table entries, for a 4-entry table.

The table

is full and cannot

in length

for an

hold the entry.

Configuration

mode

Configuration
is not allowed because the Tone
Control card switches are not 7776 or the system
is not idle.

Configuration

mode

A hardware failure
extended customer

was detected
non-volatile

while
RAM.

clearing

the

TABLE 4-8
CONFIRM CODES
Applies

Error
C5

Control

to:

Plan mode

Table

mode

Table

mode

Meanina
An attempt was made to assign a table which is
currently assigned elsewhere.
Pressing the confirm key will de-assign the table
from wherever it was previously assigned to
assign it to the specified
place.
A request has been made to delete all entries in a
table. If CONFIRM is pressed all entries will be deassigned. The old data in the non-volatile
RAM will
not be destroyed
until the ENTER key is pressed,
and the table itself can be reprogrammed
as
desired before the ENTER key is used.

Page 31

-.
I;

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE 4-9
Error

Applies

SPEED CALL ERROR CODES

To:

Meaning

EQPT
NUMBER

The equipment
numbers

NUMBER
REDIAL

An invalid

TABLE

ACCESS
NUMBER

An attempt was made to enter an access
common-use
table

NUMBER
REDIAL

An attempt was made to enter a number
common-use
table

ACCESS
NUMBER

The access number entered already exists for another
assigned to the same equipment
number

NUMBER
REDIAL

Number redial already exists for another table assigned to
the same equipment
number, (only 1 number redial attribute
per user is allowed)

SPEED
CALL

number

General

is assigned to a specific
equipment
number on a specific Line card
(Fig. 5-l). When an extension goes off hook, it will
complete
a circuit and draw loop current. This
loop current will cause the LED (on the line card)
associated
with that equipment
number to light.
At this time there are up to 31 speech paths
available for assignment
to the off hook extension. Each line card has an 8 x 32 switching
matrix, providing access to 31 speech paths and 1
Music on Hold (MOH) path (Fig. 5-2). The Scanner

Page 32

is outside

the range of valid

redial value was entered

The Configuration
of the extended
the speed call feature

This part will discuss events which occur
within a SX-100/200 PABX during the operation of
extensions,
trunks and consoles.
From this part
the repair person should be able to discern a
basic working knowledge
of the PABX. Also in
this part is a series of tables which list error codes
and problems that may occur. These tables will
provide a solution to each problem, or reference a
MAP in the appendices
for the appropriate
remedial action.
Extension Operation
5.01 Each extension

entered

The table number entered is not consistent
with that allowed
for the current Configuration
of the extended NV RAM

SYSTEM OPERATION
5.

number

for

redial digit for a

table

NV RAM does not include
184.

card will detect the off-hook condition on the Line
card and report the equipment
number to the Central Processor Unit (CPU). The CPU (through its
Random Access Memory or RAM) will find a free
speech path and test it, using circuits on the tone
control card. After the speech path is tested, the
CPU connects
it to the line circuit and a free
receiver is located. The selected receiver, and dial
tone from the tone control card, are then connected to the free speech path (Fig. 5-2).
5.02

When the first digit is dialed, it is detected
by the receiver card. (The Scanner card
reports to the CPU that the receiver card has a
digit. The DTMF or DP information
is decoded by
the receiver card.) The digit is read by the CPU.
Upon reception of the first digit, the CPU will inform the Tone Control card to drop the dial tone.
The Receiver card will continue to monitor and
decode digits until the CPU recognizes a digit sequence or determines
an invalid sequence. This
digit sequence may access a feature, trunk, the
attendant,
or another extension.
If the option
selected is busy, the extension will receive busy
tone from the Tone Control card.

SECTION
5.03

When an extension
dials a sequence
that
requires the use of a feature the CPU must
first
check
that
extension’s
COS.
If the
extension’s
COS does not allow access to that
feature it will be assigned
(by the CPU) reorder
tone from the Tone Control card. If feature access
is permitted,
the CPU will act according
to the
memory stored in the PROM RAM. All information
will be stored in the system’s COSlRAM or PROM
RAM EXPANDER by the CPU. It should be noted
that the Scanner card informs the CPU that the
Receiver card has a digit decoded for each digit
the extension
dials. The CPU controls
all tones
(i.e. supervisory
tones that the extension
may
receive) switching
them on/off
at the correct
rates.
5.04

If the call is an inside call (within the PBX),
the extension
must access a speech path
as per paragraph
5.01. The receiver will decode
the first digit dialed. The Scanner card will inform
the CPU the Receiver has a decoded digit for it.
The CPU will consult the RAM as per paragraph
5.02 to determine
the validity of the digit and the
action required. Until the CPU is able to confirm
an action to be performed with the digits received,
all digits will be stored in the RAM. Should the
first digit or digit sequence be considered
invalid
by the CPU, reorder tone, from the tone control
card, is connected
to the speech path. A valid extension number causes the tone control card to
provide either ringback or busy tone (all tones are
controlled
by the CPU) to the calling extension.
Before actually ringing the called extension
the
CPU consults
its RAM to check for any form of
call forwarding,
Do Not Disturb
or extension
restriction
i.e. originate
only. In these cases the
calling
extension
will be forwarded
or it will
receive reorder tone (from the tone control card).
5.05

If the call is an outside call with no dialing
restriction,
the extension must be assigned
a speech
path (paragraph
5.02). The CPU will
locate a free trunk corresponding
to the access
code dialed (see SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-205).
If there is not a free trunk the CPU will connect
busy tone (from the Tone Control card) to the
speech path which the extension
is assigned to.
After recognition
of a legitimate access code, the
receiver will be dropped if tone to pulse conversion is not required. If tone to pulse conversion
is
required the receiver will decode the tones. The
CPU will cause the trunk card to outpulse
the
equivalent
in pulses on the trunk.

MITL9105/9110-98-350

5.08

If the call is an outside call (Fig. 5-4) with
digits, 0, 1, #, or it dialing restriction the extension
must
be assigned
a speech
path
(paragraph
5.02). The CPU will then locate a free
trunk corresponding
to the access code dialed
(see Section MITL9105/9110-98-205).
If there is not
a free trunk the CPU will connect busy tone (from
the Tone Control card) to the speech path. The
receiver will decode the first and second digit
dialed into the trunk if System Option 155 (First
Digit Toll Deny) is selected only the first digit is
monitored
on the trunk. The CPU will then decide
if the digit that has been decoded is a 0, 1, #, or * .
If it is, then reorder tone (from the Tone Control
card) will be supplied to the speech path that the
extension
is assigned
to and the trunk will be
released.
If the second digit is something
other
than a 0, 1, # or * the call will be allowed. The
receiver will be dropped at this point if tone to
pulse conversion
is not required (see 5.03).
5.07

For an Outside call, with SMDR or Multi
Digit Toll Control in effect (Fig. 5-5) the extension
must
be assigned
a speech
path
(paragraph
5.02) The CPU will then locate a free
trunk according
to the access code dialed (see
Section MITL9105/9110-98-205).
If there is not a
free trunk, the CPU will connect busy tone (from
the Tone Control card) to the speech path. The
receiver will decode all digits for the CPU until the
last digit or a maximum
of 26 digits is dialed
(Generic 203/dawn 20 digits). In the case of SMDR
(Section MITL9105/9110-98-451)
all digits dialed
will be stored in a special trunk buffer until they
may be output to a printer or similar device. In the
case
of Multi
Digit
Toll Control
(Section
MITL9105/9110-98-212)
the CPU will consult
its
memory (PROM/RAM expander) to see if the digits
dialed are permitted.
If they are, the call will go
through.
If not, reorder tone (from the Tone Control card) will be returned to the extension, and the
trunk will be released.

5.08

The circuit operations
described
above are
similar to those required for Tie-Trunk circuits; with the following
exception.
For DP extensions to DP tie-trunk circuits the requirement
exists to inhibit dial train distortion
arising as a
result of tandem operation
through one or more
tie trunks. For this reason, when the trunk processor receives the input data it causes the output to the tie-trunk to be a regenerated
train of dial
pulses.
The trunk
processor
will isolate
the
speech path to prevent dial pulses from feeding
back to the extension.

Page 33

.‘:

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Console
5.09

The console does not have a switchhook,
rather the console is off-hook whenever the
console handset is plugged in. To originate a call
it is only necessary
to press the button of the
figure
number
or feature.
The console
communicates
through
the Interconnect
card to the
system via the Console Control card. The Scanner
card will then inform the CPU that the Console
Control card has information
for it. Note that a
Receiver card is not used for dialing from the console. As in the case of an extension
the console
must be assigned a free speech path. This is done
after the first button (l-9, #, * or feature) is pressed. If an invalid digit or digit sequence is entered
the console
will receive reorder tone from the
Tone Control
card. If all speech paths are occupied the console will receive no tones or audio
from the system. The Tone Control card will also
provide ringback or busy tone for the console.

LINE CARD
NUMBER1
‘1
1
2
3
4

SPEECH
PATHS

5.10

The dialing of a valid extension number prompts the CPU to select a particular
extension on a particular
line card (as determined
by
the programming
in the non-volatile
RAM). The
CPU sends a command to turn ringing current on,
and off to the extension.
When the extension
is
answered, the line circuit detects an off-hook and
disconnects
ringing. The CPU then connects the
called extension
to the speech path of the console.

Dialing

17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28

a Trunk (From Console)

5.11

The console
dial pad produces
digital
signals which are stored by the CPU. After
the trunk access code has been dialed the subsequently keyed signals are forwarded
to the CPU,
where, after decoding,
they are forwarded
to the
trunk card and outpulsed
to the trunk line. Note
that a receiver card is not required for this configuration.
If the circuit is programmed
as a DTMF
trunk circuit a tone generator
will be inserted.
This results in the signals being translated
into
DTMF tone pulses which are then placed on the
speech path (not into the trunk card) and forwarded to the trunk circuit for outward transmission.
The audio path is isolated back to the console
when the DTMF transmission
takes place.

Page 34

Fig. 5-1

Speech Paths

I-

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

which
first checks
its memory
to determine
whether a flash is legal at that point. If not, the extension is disconnected
from the speech path and
a subsequent
off-hook is interpreted
as the beginning of a new call. However, when a flash is determined to be a legal operation,
the CPU starts a
timer. If the exte.nsion goes back off-hook within
the specified
time period, it is considered
to be
flashing.
An on-hook of less than 200ms is considered to be a noise glitch while an on-hook
greater than 1500ms (700, 900 or 1100ms alternatively) is considered
as a call termination
(hangup).

5.12

The console indicators are refreshed and/or
updated
continuously
every
100 milliseconds by the CPU. These indicators
include the
seven segment displays for the time-of-day clock,
the source and destination
readouts and the callswaiting display as well as over two hundred LEDs.
The status of each of these indicators
is maintained in the volatile
RAM on the RAMlCOS card.
Every 100 ms, the processor addresses
the RAM
on the console control card and sends it information for each of the two consoles.
This data is
then sent along a pair of wires to the console. In
the console, the information
is stored in a RAM.
At this point, the console’s CPU takes control and
sorts this input “file” into the form required to
turn the LEDs and the console ringer on/off.

5.14

When a flash is detected,
the processor
disconnects
the flashing extension from its
speech path, finds a free speech path which it
tests, and connects the extenson to it. It then provides transfer dial tone (from the Tone Control
Card) and connects a receiver to the speech path
allowing
the extension
to dial and converse
privately with a third party. If the extension
had
flashed out of a conference,
the conference
is
unaffected.
However, if the other party was not in
conference,
it is disconnected
from its speech
path and connected
instead to HOLD.

Hook-Flash
5.13

A hook-flash
is defined for the PABX as an
on-hook condition
of between
200ms and
1500ms (700,900 or 1lOOms may be used in some
Generics as a system option). A flash may occur
in an off-hook condition
where a speech path has
been established
between
an extension
and a
trunk or between two extensions.
When an extension goes on-hook, the Scanner informs the CPU

r-l
t

SCANNER
CARD

DETECTS
OFF-HOOK

CPU

SUPPLIES
DIAL TONE
BUSYTONE
'REORDERTONE

TONE
CONTROL CARD

Fig. 5.2

RCVR
CRK!
CARD

Select a Speech

Path

OECOOES
FIRST DIGIT

Page

SECTION

M~ITL9105/9110-98-350

IST DIGIT
ON SPEECH
PATH
4
RCVRCARD

DECODES DIGITS
FORCPU

f
CPU

+
RAMCARD

ACCESS TO
SYSTEMSOPTIONS

1 OF 8
EOUIPMENT NUMBERS

LINECARD

TONE
CONTROLCARD

CONSOLE

BUSYTONE
REORDER TONE

VACANT/ILLEGAL
INTERCEPTTO
THE ATTENDANT

ACCESS

SPEECH PATH
I,..,

Fig. 5-3
Incoming

Calls (GSILS Trunks)

5.15

When the trunk circuit
detects
ringing
voltage, forward or reverse current or a tip
ground
(ground
start
trunks),
the trunk’s
microprocessor
informs the CPU. The LED on the
trunk card will light and the CPU reads a status
report from the trunk. The CPU finds and tests a
speech path and notifies the programmed
equipment. The CPU then connects it, and the trunk to
the speech path, and sends a command
to the
trunk card. The trunk card then terminates
the
trunk circuit and enables the audio. If the trunk
has been programmed
for DISA the system processor waits 10 seconds before answering
and
then
connects
a receiver
and a dial-tone
generator.
This allows the trunk to appear as
though it were an extension. A DISA card enables
to dial internal stations and features.
5.18

Fig. 5-6 identifies
all equipment
numbers
that may be assigned in a SX-100 or SX-200.

Page 36

Inside Call

This figure will aid the repair person in the
association
of equipment
numbers to specific
slots and thereby specific cards. There are 8 extensions per line card slot. Two E/M or tie trunks
per trunk card slot or four CO trunks per trunk
card. All trunk equipment
numbers will appear as
even numbers i.e. 50. For the explanation
of the
error codes and their meaning see part four of this
practice.
TABLE
TABLE

5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6

5-l
TITLE

Error Code Procedures
Extension Fault Report Procedures
Console Faults
Trunk Fault Report Procedures
System Faults

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

DIGITS
RCVRDECODES
FOR CPU

VACANT/ILLEGALACCESS
INTERCEPT
TOTHEATTENDANT

r-l
TRUNK
CARD

IF NECESSARYCPU
INFORMSTRUNKCARD
TO OUTPULSE DIAL PULSES
CORRESPONDINGTOTONES

CALLCOMPLETED
I
,716 I

Fig. 5-4

Outside

Call 0 and 1 Dialling

TABLES
5.17

Table 5-1 is a list of all tables to be used in
the actual troubleshooting
of the SX-1001
SX-200 PABX’s. Table 5-2 is a list of the error
codes that may appear on the console during
regular operation, Table 5-3 is a list of extension
faults, Table 5-4 is a list of console faults, Table
5-5 is a list of trunk faults and Table 5-6 is a list of

Restriction

system
faults.
All tables suggest
immediate
remedial action or provide a direct reference to a
MAP that will incorporate
the proper actions.
5.18

In the following tables (5-2 - 5-6) a STOP indication should be taken as: STOP, contact your nearest
authorized
MITEL Service
representative.
.-

Page 37

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.350

Fl
DIGITS ON
SPEECH PATHS

RCVR

DECODES DIGITS
FOR CPU

1
CPU
1
1
TONE
CDNTROLCARD

1
REORDER
TONE

7
.

TRUNK
BUFFER

FOR
SMDR

p;&!g$$NG

RAMCARD

gT;F

t
TRUNK
CARD

REORDER
TONE

CALL
COMPLETED

ALLOWED

Fig. 5-S
Outside Call Multi Digit
Toll Control or SMDR in Effect

Page 38

CONSOLE

VACANT/ILLEGAL
ACCESS INTERCEPT
TOTHE ATTENDANT

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

2 2
x 55 55
zs DE
Y =E
g”
r=
:!z
3.3.
PLUG7

185 193

162 170 178

1 2El163
\

171 179

164
E
F

PLUG9

161 169 177

209 217

225 233 241 249

186 194

202

210 218

226 234 242 250

187 195

2031211
204

212 220 228 236

165 173 181 189 197

205

213 221

214 222 230 238

166

174 102 190 198

206

167

175 183

2071215

1 1
31

191 199

176 184 192

200 2081216

229 237 245 253

246 254
247 2551

224

248 2561

6 I

232 240

12 I

PLUG10

7
A

1613121

I
I

Etz

244 252

223 231 239

PLUG8

219 227 235 243 2511

172 180 188 196

1168

PLUG11

201

PLUG12

SHELF2(SX-2000NLY)
RECEIVER NO. 1

PLUG1

PLUG3

FOR
9 1005

013 021 029

037 ~I451053

061 069 077 085 0931101

1091117

14121

L
2123456

12345678
PLUG2

CARD POSITION

22 1

SLOT NUMBER

PLUG4

PLUG6

642

DU ,LANDOR QUAD
RE EIVEREQUIPMENTNUMBERS

SHELF1

QUAD RECEIVER
EQUIPMENTNUMBERS

NOTES: 1. EQUIPMENTPOSITION001 IS RESERVEDFORTHETEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFOREBE EQUIPPEDWITH A LINE CARD.
2.TRUNKEQUlPMENTNUMBERISSAMEASlNDlVlDUALTRUNKACCESSCODE.

Fig. 5-8

Equipment

Numbering

Page 39

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE 5-2
ERROR CODE PROCEDURES

source

Reason

Display

Alarm

EOOl-22

major’/
minor

Error

major’/
minor

PROM
error

major

Clock/scanner

minor

Speech
path check
circuit
not “hi”
when disconnected

Change
Tone
card (slot la)

E00518

minor

Bias circuit
connected
path

not
to Speech

E006-99

minor

Speech

short

E007-la

minor

E008Receiver
Number

minor

E009Receiver
Number

minor

EOlO

minor

E002-20

(21)

E003-19

E004-1

step

minor

step

Change
RAMICOS
card (slot 22)
and reprogram

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

STOP

Change
PROM/CPU
card (slot 20)
or Memory
Expander
(slot 21)

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

STOP

Change
Scanner
card (slot 19)

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

STOP

Control

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

STOP

Change
Tone
card (slot la)

Control

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

STOP

Change
Tone
card (slot la)

Control

Perform
Speech
Path test
MAP350-702

STOP

Supervisory
tone
circuit
not connected
to speech
path

Change
Tone
card (slot la)

Control

Change
Receiver
Cards
one at a
time

Perform
Speech
Path test
MAP350-702

Receiver
receiving

Replace
Receiver
card specified
in
SOURCE
display

Replace
Control

Replace
Receiver
card specified
in SOURCE
display

Replace
Control
(slot

Replace
control

Change
card

Receiver

Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701
STOP

Change
Control

Tone
card

Perform
Speech
Path
MAP350-702
STOP

the card
in the
display

Perform
Common
Control
test
MAP350-701
STOP

in RAM

checksum

Receiver
receiving
digits
Generator

error

path

not
tone

digits

not
pulse

error

(slot

EOll

Tone
card

(slot

Tone
card

STOP

Tone
card

STOP

ia)

Generator/Receiver
error isolated
to a speech
path
NOTE
- error could
be on receiver
card
or on tone control
card (slot la)

Replace
specified
display

Receiver
in SOURCE

(slot

ia)

E012

minor

Unable
to connect
the speech
path
to the line programmed as a “station”
or “trunk”

Ensure
that there
is
a card in the slot
and it is programmed
correctly

Change
specified
SOURCE

E013

minor

Supervisory
missing

Replace
card

Replace
Receiver
cards
one at a
time

Perform
Speech
Path test
MAP350-702

E014

minor

Receiver
detector

Change
Control

STOP

Page 40

tone

dial-tone
not working

Tone

Replace
Receiver
card specified
in the
SOURCE
display

(slot

Tone
card
ia)

SECTION

TABLE 5-2
ERROR CODE PROCEDURES
Source
Display

Alarm

E015

minor

Probable
error

E018

minor

Speech
out

E019

minor

16 speech
paths
have been found
in error,
probably
a fault in the
checking
circuit

minor

E020

Reason

Excessive
console
circuits

receiver

path

minor

Check
Sum
the RAM

E022

minor

Generic
conflict

Note:

Power-Up

E021
levels
Generic
Generic

sequence

Rev.
Rev.

Step

Replace
Receiver
card specified
in the
SOURCE
display

Replace
the Tone
Control
card
(slot 18)

Perform
Speech
test
MAP350-701

Perform
Common
Control
test
MAP350-701

Perform
Speech
Path test
MAP350-702
STC

Perform
Speech
Path test
MAP350-702
STOP

Change
console
Control
card
specified
in the
DESTINATION
display

Change
specified

Check
voltages
on interconnect
card MAP350-60

If the system
presented
error
during
normal
operation change
RAM/
COS card (slot 22) or
PROM/RAM
Expander
(slot 21) and
Initialize
Memory
as
per MAP SECTION
MITL9105/911098-210.
This error will
occur
on a (new)
unprogrammed
RAM
card

Replace
RAMlCOS
card and
reprogram
the
system
STOP

Wait
error
in

Path

Step

Replace
tone
control
card
Perform
Common
Control
Test
MAP350-701

Dial maintenance
code followed

Error

(CONT’D)

to see
returns

by 1

console
in

MAP350-501
STOP

software

Initialize
program

and
RAM

STOP

only

will be lost if the
are installed:
202
203

shorted

errors
data

E021-21
or 22

During

Step

MITL9105/9110-98-350

04 and
02 and

system

is reset

or the

power

is turned

off,

if the

following

Generics

of the

following

revision

lower
lower

Page41

I
j

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

EXTENSION
Fault

Reported

Extension
dead no
battery
(side tone)

No dial tone at the
extension,
battery
(side tone) present

Busy
stays

lamp on line
on permanently

Extension
cannot
break
PABX dial

Extension
calls
but
calls

Page 42

card

tone

can receive
cannot
make

Step

TABLE 5-3
FAULT REPORT PROCEDURES

Step

Check
the equipment
number
locate
the line card. See
if the line LED is lit
If it is check
with a
butt-in
at the frame
to verify
set and house
wiring.
Buzz
the pair. If the system
is
Generic
2031~~ ensure
the
console
has not busied
out
the extension

At the console
check
that the extension
programming
is correct

Check
the equipment
number
LED on the line card. If
it is lit check
the
extension
wiring
by dialing
with a butt-in
at the frame.
Buzz the pair

Check
other extensions
on the same
card for
dial tone. If dial tone
is missing
on all card
extensions
replace
the line
card. If dial tone is absent
system
wide replace
the tone
control
card Note: Dial tone
delays
will occur
if all
receivers
are busy

STOP

Check
out

Buzz
short

STOP

extension

for

locked

Change

STOP

extension

for

cable

Check
extension
with a
butt-in
at the cross
PABX dial
tone the cross
connect
field
From the test line use the
thumbwheel
switches
on the
Scanner
card to select
each
receiver
and verify
dial tone
can be broken

Replace

the

line

card

STOP

At the console
check
the
extension’s
COS to ensure
it is not receive
only
Check
the extension
with a
butt-in
at the cross
connect
field

Replace

the

line

card

STOP

Step

the

line

card

SECTION MITLSI 051911 O-98-350

TABLE 5-3
FAULT REPORT PROCEDURES

EXTENSION
Fault

Reported

step

b (tension can make
in ternal calls but can
nc)t access a Trunk (busy
or intercept tone returned)

E>(tension
fe ature

cannot

access a

Ex:tension
di,al tone

cannot break CO

step

Check for all trunks
busy condition
At the console check the
extension’s COS

In systems Generic 203/up
check that the Controlled
Outgoing Restriction is not
in effect (see MITL91051911098-l 05)
Ensure that the trunks are
available and working by accessing them directly from the
the test line or console

At the console check the
extension’s COS, ,check the
feature access code

step

Check that the Trunk
Group is not Attendant
Access only
STOP

STOP

At the cross connect
field check that the trunk is
returning CO dial tone and
can be broken. If the
extension is DTMF, check that
the CO trunks are capable of
DTMF or that the trunk group
is programmed for DTMF to
DP conversion

Check that the 3rd wire
trunk switch settings are
closed.
If open ensure that there
iS no ground on the XT lead

Replace
STOP

W rong numbers after
accessing a trunk

If CO trunk can accept
DTMF ensure that the DTMF
to DP conversion is not programmed in the trunk group

Replace trunk card

STOP

W rong numbers

Do Receiver card test
from the test line

STOP

local

Cr‘osstalk on most
ex tensions and trunks

Note:

trunk card

-48Vdc bad, replace
power supply

1760

Some problems

that line card replacement

may cure; no ring, noisy battery, noisy lines.

Page 43

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE 5-4
CONSOLE FAULTS
Fault

Reported

step

Step

Console
dead except
for
for colon
in time display
and minor
alarm
or

Try that the handset
is
properly
inserted
in the jack
Try the other jack

Replace
card

Console

Check
that the console
is plugged
firmly
into
console
and interconnect

Check
interconnect
voltages
SX-100
MAP350-605
SX-200
MAP350-601
Replace
console
MAP350:501

dead

no displays

Check
that the
cable
is plugged
correct
position
nect card
Dial or feature
inoperative

button

Console

noisy

Console

displays

Incoming
coming

trunk calls
to the console

cable
the
card

console
into the
on Intercon-

At the console
check
that
this feature
button
is
programmed

or no audio

garbage

not

Change
the
Change
the
other jack

handset/headset
handset
to the

Step

Console

Control

Check
voltages
SX-100
SX-200
STOP

card

Replace
Control

Replace
Replace

STOP

control

card

Unplug
console
control
card
and plug it back in. If the
console
returns
to normal,
it
has been affected
by static
discharge.
Ensure
the system
has a console
interface
card
(SX-200
only)

Perform
the
Test
MAP350-701

Check
Service

Check
that the console
handset
is plugged
into the
console
and the console
power
fail transfer
switch
is
set to normal

console

for

Night

Common

interconnect

card

MAP350-605
MAP350-601

STOP

Press
a console
button
and
observe
the console
control
card to see if the Data
LED flickers
If it doesn’t
there
may be a
console
problem
MAP350-501
console
console

Control

the
card

Console

Replace
the
MAP350-501

console

STOP

Check
ensure
direct
STOP

programming
trunk
is not
in line

to
a

1761

SECTION

TRUNK
Fault

Reported

step

Step

Check
the trunk
at the cross
connect
field with DTMF
and
DP. Ensure
that the system
is not programmed
to outpulse
both DTMF
and DP to a
DTMF
trunk
Check
that DTMF
pulses
are
not going
into a DP Trunk

Check
Check
Check
group

Always
receives
busy tone
Ifter dialing
a trunk
access
:ode

Check
access
Check
Check
Attendant
Check
Automatic

Check
tip and
Check
Check
trunks
Check

;annot

break

Check
the trunks
at the
cross
connect
field for
DTMF
and DP
switches,
check
trunk card,
SECTION
MITL9105/9110-9%
200. If there
is tone to pulse
conversion
replace
the
receiver
card

If the trunk tests
good
the line card
Check
the dial dictation

rrunks
;ystem

dropped

Check
for intermittent
extension
switchhook
At the cross
connect
field
check
the trunk with a
butt-in,
ensure
this is not
a CO problem

On the trunk card check
that
the 50ms switch
is not
in position
Program
for longer
switchhook
flash
(System
Options)
114, 180, 181, 182)

Replace

Check
trunk type and trunk
group
programming
i.e. tie
trunk
to CO trunk
connections
or loop starts
trunks
together
Ensure
there
is a good ground
for ground
start trunks

Check
release
Replace

STOP

rVrong numbers
runk card

rrunks
jystem

Note

CO dial

by the

being

tone

hung

These

on the

are

other

trunk

Calls

One

Noisy

trunks

Trunk

card

Dropped

Station

Collisions

Trunks

Low

ring

card

in, but

way

for correct
trunk
code
for Call Blocking
Trunk
Group
for
Access
only
for full trunk
buffers
Wakeup
and SMDR

problems
don’t

that

show

may

for reverse
the PABX
trunk and
type

or open
ground
trunk

tip

Replace
the
Replace
the
card if there
DTMF
to DP
STOP

3
trunk card
receiver
is
conversion

:.
:
::
I

for reverse
or open
ring on trunk
PABX ground
for two loop start
connected
together
for ground
start open

the trunks
supervision
the trunk

Replace
card
STOP

replace

suspect

trunk

STOP

the

trunk

card

STOP

provide
card

occur:

up on the console

transmission
(eliminate
alarm
calls

LED

from

conference
due

induction

CO trunk

with

a butt-in

at the

CO trunk

with

2 or more

trunks

cross

connect

field

first)

lit

the

CO (eliminate

oscillations
to 1 loop

start

with
trunk

being

seized

a butt-in

at the

same

at the

time

cross

connect

i.e. incoming

field

and

first)

outgoing

on trunks

out

by one

ringing

current

pair

when

(from

the

punched
CO)

down

at the

TABLE 5-5
REPORT PROCEDURES

FAULT

Step

M ITL91051911 o-98-350

cross

connect

,1762

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE 5-6
SYSTEM FAULTS

Fault

Reported

System
completely
no power

step

dead

Check
power
AC outlet

Shelf 2 dead
no power
Calls
within
power

step

at commercial

Check
Shelf
MAP350-603

Check
Power

that the
switches

Step
system
are on

Go to Appendix
A6.03
STOP

2 power

can not be made
the system
on

Perform
Common
Test
MAP350-701

Control

STOP
Meaningless
or system

diagnostics
resets

Error

E012

speech

Error

E008

Double

path

Perform
Common
Test
MAP350-701

Control

Intermittent

cables

shelf

Change
tone control
card
dial tone or if the problem
intermittent
change
shelf

connections

Replace

Scanner

card

Lockout
shown
on console
while station
conversing

Replace

Scanner

card

Shelf
come

P301

power
up

wihl not

Apparent
CPU
recent
software
Calls with
(at console)
Low

problem,
change

no one

console

there

volume

Replace

Console

STOP

powered
down
new programming

RAM

118A ringing

fuse

can

Night

bells

don’t

Music
audible

on Hold

blows

not

page

ring

is not

STOP

System
requires

not

Console

Trunk

to night

rev levels

Replace

Conference

Console
goes
no reason

STOP
is

interconnect

Software
compatible

Station
oscillates

Extension

STOP

Bad

Short
leads

limitations

battery

STOP
dead

STOP

handset

on external

STOP
ringing

Check
programming
Check
extension
COS
Checkaccess
codes

Go to MAP350-704
STOP

Check
9OVdc

user 48Vdc
fuses

Check

Check
connect
butt-in

input at cross
field by clipping
on incoming
pair

and

Change
card
STOP

trunk

tone

programming

Go to MAP350-705
STOP

control

1763

Page 46

SECTION

SX.iOO/SX-200

POWER SUPPLY

Out of Tolerance
All voltage levels are
regulated
25%
except for the -48Vdc
which
may vary
f 10%.
An Out-OfTolerance (OOT) circuit monitors all levels
continuously
(white/green
wire of P303).
Should a deviation occur, an OOT signal
will activate the power fail transfer circuit
through the Interconnect
card. It should be
noted that if a - 48Vdc reserve power supply is used, the power fail transfer will not be
activated in the event of a power failure. In
the SX-100 and SX-200 there are provisions
to program a port as a Contact Monitor
(MITL9105/9110-98-105)
This monitor
may
be used to alert the attendant
that the
system is on battery power (Wiring Appendix 3) by wiring it to a contact monitor port
(at the cross connect field).

The SX-lOO/SX-200 power supplies form an
integral part of the equipment cabinets. The
SX-100 power supply is housed immediately
to the
right hand side (front view) of the equipment shelf
(Fig. 6-l). In the SX-200 the power supply is housed in a metal cabinet forming the lower rear door
of the system (Fig. 6-2). Both supplies are fully
R.F. filtered and may be operated from either AC
or DC inputs to produce multiple DC output rails
as well as ringing voltage. This part will discuss
the power supplies in 4 parts. There is also a section on the Reserve Battery Back-Up.
6.

AC - DC Converter
Control
verter

Voltage

Ringing

Generator

Out of Tolerance

DC/DC

con-

Circuit

DC/DC Converter
The converter output is
fed to the main DC/DC converter and Control Voltage Supply. The DC/DC converter
may also be fed by a 48Vdc reserve power
supply. The battery supply may be connected permanently
and will allow instantaneous cut over should the AC power fail.
The control voltage section provides the
following voltages:
+ 8Vdc

- 5Vdc
OVdc

- 10Vdc

- 48Vdc

and

AC/DC
Converter
The SX-iOO/SX-200
AC/DC Converters are designed to operate
with a AC power source in the range of 100
-130Vac or 200 - 250Vac with an internal
modification
for the SX-200 and a converter
for the SX-100, (see MITL9105/9110-98-200).
The SX-200 converter has an output of - 60
to -64Vdc while the SX-100 converter has
an output of -5OVdc to -56Vdc.

Supply

Ringing Generator
The ringing generator
uses a -48Vdc output from the main converter to produce a SOVac, 20Hz (optional
17Hz, 25Hz) supply for the system ringing.

MITL.9105/9110-98-350

6.02

Reserve Battery Backup and Charger.
The
SX-100 and SX-200 both accept a -48Vdc
source fed to the terminals
indicated on the terminal blocks shown in Figs. 6-2, 6-3. The installation of the reserve supply in the systems
is
described
in MITL9105/9110-98-200.
A pictorial
view of the power supply is shown in Figs. 6-2 and
6-4. The MITEL reserve battery and charger (MITL
part number 9110-014) has an OOT circuit which
may be used to alert the attendant that the system
is on reserve battery power. The indicator is a dry
relay contact that may be used to ring an external
alarm or it may be wired to a system port as a Contact Monitor.
6.03
.

Fusing
The SX-200 is protected by fuses which are
located on the back door of the cabinet
(Fig. 6-5). The back door has imprinted upon
it a circuit description
defining each fuse
and the circuit breaker. In addition to these
fuses there are a series of LEDs which also
are defined by the circuit on the back door.
These LEDs will be lit if there is power in
the area that they designate, or in the case
of the reserve battery backup, if the battery
is connected.
In addition
to the cabinet
door fuses, there are fuses located on the
backplane,
interconnect
card and power
fail transfer
card. The fuses
on the
backplane are for - 48Vdc and have an LED
which will be lit if the fuse blows and there
is a card in one of the associated slots. The

Page 47

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

fuse on the interconnect
card protects the
console’s
-48Vdc
and the fuse on the
power fail transfer card protects the power
fail transfer - 48Vdc.
l

Note:

The SX-100 has the same backplane as the
SX-200 hence, the same fusing appears on
the backplane. There are three fuses on the
interconnect
card for; user SOVac, user
- 48Vdc and the console - 48Vdc (Fig. 6-3).
The front panel of the power supply has two
circuit breakers; one is for the DC battery
supply, the other is for the AC supply (Fig.
6-l).

Some early versions of the SX-100/200 do
not have all the fusing of later models.
This point should be taken into account
when troubleshooting
the system.

If the system is equipped with a reserve battery backup
(MITLgllO-014
SX-200 or
9105014 SX-100) separate fusing is included in the charger unit itself, Fig. 6-6 There
are three fuses; a one amp charging fuse, a
five amp output fuse and a two amp AC
fuse. In addition there are two 20 amp circuit breaker (one on the battery pack, one

Page 48

on the charger unit) for the battery protection. All reserve battery and charger connections are shown in (Fig. 6-2 and Fig. 6-3).
Installation
of the reserve battery back-up is
described in MITL9105/9110-98-200.
6.04

When troubleshooting
the systems
for
power failures
the Power Supply Block
Diagram (Fig. 6-7), and Charts 6-1 through 6-10
should be consulted.
The Charts outlined cover
the trouble and it’s effect on the System. In most
cases the repair person will be directed
to a
specific
MAP for remedial
action.
Under the
heading “Check”
a yes answer to the question
asked, is an indication to go on to the next question in the “Check” column. If a no answer is encountered the repair person should go to the “Action” column and follow the instructions
listed
there. There is also a column indicating
by a X to
which system the action applies. Above all it must
be remembered
that fuse replacement
is not a
remedy. The cause of a power failure should be
determined
before the system is powered
up.
Utilizing the information
provided in this section
and the MAPS referred to in Charts 6-1 through
6-10, the repair person should be able to pin point
faults and take proper replacement
action. At all
times the repair person should follow all safety
precautions
suggested
in the MAPS to ensure
maximum personal and equipment
safety.

MAINTENANCE PANEL
: ..:
:
:,

-::
:

AC/DC CIRCUIT BREAKERS

-. .- .._ .EQUIPMENTSHELF

Fig. 6-1 SX-100 Equipment

POWER SUPPLY

Cabinet

and Power Supply

Page49

-I
:s

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~96-350

BAT1

<
<

BATT

4avdc 112~ FUSED
Vat l/BA FUSED

HASSIS GROUND

‘OWER CABLE

--HEATSINK
ASSEMBLY

BAT.TER;

CABLEENTRY

BATTERYCHARGER

Fig. 6-2 SX-200 Power Supply

Page 50

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER CABLE
P?O

MISCELLANEOUS
CABLE
P18

qRAp

INTERCONNECT
CABLE
P16

INTERCONNECT
CABLE
P17

MISCELLANEOUS
CABLE
P19

POWER FA
6 TRANSF
RELAYS

TRANSFER
LED

,APAC'TOR

P301
MAINTENANC
PANEL
CONNECTOR\

POWER
RESISTOR

TB301
2

PIN1
P303
OOT
CONNECTO,
\

PIN1

F2
I

RESERVE BATTERY BACK-UP
TB-302
PIN 1 -48Vdc
PIN 2 +48Vdc

vi
I

POWERTERMIN,iL;

FUSES
J'302
F11.5 AMP FAST BLO RS232 PoRT
(PRINTER OR
F2.5AMP SLO BLO
RECORDING
F3SAMPSLO
BLO
DEVICE)

.d@\
a

Jl3
ATTCONSOLE

J14
ATT CONSOLE1

J15
MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE

SECTION MITL91051911

O-98-350

EQUIPMENT
SHELF
POWER
LED \

COVERTER INPUT LED

DC/DC CQNVERTER

EQUIPMENT SHELFPOWER
IS CONTROLLED BY SYSTEM
POWER SWITCH ON
RINGING
MAINTENANCE PANEL
VOLTAGE

d
182.5

TB2.4

CONNECTED
782.1

-+--:
OPTIONAL
RESERVE
BATTERY

I-F

AC
. POWER
LED

250V 4A

~pL;J,
115~8~

SLOBLOCIRCUITBREAKEA

,113

Fig. 8-4

SX-200 Back Door Electrical

Schematic

SUPPLY

Fig. 8-5
Page 52

SX-100 Reserve Battery

Back-Up

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

1111

Fig. 6-6
LINE-

Reserve Battery
1

NEUTRAL-

FILTER

AC/DC PRE/REG
AND
DC/DC
CONVERTOR

7
POWER
SUPPLY
COUPLER

RESERVE
POWER
AND
CHARGER

RINGING
GENERATOR

Charger

CONTROLVOLTAGE
AND MAIN
CONVERTOR

OUTOF
TOLERANCE
CIRCUIT

Fig. 6-7

Power Supply

Block Diagram

II ;‘

Page 52

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

CAUTION
Trouble

/stem
completely
?ad. Suspect
,imary
power
failure.
D reserve
battery
backup

sx-100

Check

1. Is the AC
power
LED lit?

2. Is the
LED lit?

3. Is the
maintenance
LED (power

converter

5. Replace
Heat
Sink assembly
MAP350-506
Replace
SX-200
power
supply
MAP350507

VOLTAGES

sx.200

Action

On the SX-200
check
the rear
door, bottom
right hand corner
for the AC power
LED

Check

Check
the
the system

Check
the AC power
at the commercial
source
with a suitable
AC meter
or by
plugging
another
device
into the outlet
,

that

the

system

AC power

is plugged
fuse

There
is a 20 AMP circuit
back door of the SX-200.
position
the LED beside

If the circuit
breaker
trips
MAP350-403
MAP350-507

Check
panel

Ensure
that
is connected
card

Check
backplane
MAP350-603

on the

in
back

There
is a 5.5 AMP converter
LED circuit
breaker
on the front
of the SX-100 power
supply.
If it is in the on position
the LED
beside
it should
be lit

panel
on) lit?

4. Replace
SX-100
power
supply
MAP350-403

Page 54

CHART 8-1
DANGEROUS OR LETHAL

breaker
again,
SX-100,
SX-200

breaker
on the
If it is in the on
it will be lit.

is off,
replace

reset it. If the
power
supply

that the maintenance
power
on switch
is on

the maintenance
correctly
to the

voltages

panel cable
interconnect

as per

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

CHART 6-2
Trouble
System
power
on but
no LEDs lit on
console.
Appears
to be
no power
to the console

sx-100

Check
1. Is handset
plugged
into
console?

the

2. Is the console
cable
secure?
3. Is the fuse
the interconnect
card good?

4. Is the
interconnect
card
passing
- 48Vdc
to
the console

Plug

Secure

Check
the fuses
on the
interconnect
cards
and
replace
if blown.
Power
system
Replace
cable
if the fuse blows.

CHART
Major Alarm
on
console,
System
appears
to operate
normally,
ie. calls
can be processed.

1. Check
the master
transfer
switch
on
the maintenance
panel are in
operating
position

2. Check
the power
Fail Transfer
LED
on the PFT board.
Is it not lit?

3. Disable
all
console
switches
the system
remove
itself from Power
Fail Transfer

4. Replace
maintenance
as per
MAP350-511
MAP350-405

Action

sx-200
in handset

console

cable

MAP350-605
MAP350-601

Set all switches
paragraph
2.13

up.
Try

again.

SX-100
SX-200

6-3

Change
card
MAP350-401

as per

X
did

the

X
X

panel

OOT condition
may exist
refer to Appendix
6
Ensure
that the console
is in the correct
plug
Change
the console
as per MAP350501
Change
the console
cable as per
MAP350-501
Change
the maintenance
panel
MAP35051
1 SX-200
MAP350-405
SX-100

SX-200
SX-100

5. Replace
the power
supply
harness
as
per
MAP350-512
SX-200
MAP350-403
SX-100

Page 55

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-350

CHART 6-4
Check
1. Ensure
PFT LED

I sx-100

I sx-200

Set all switches
paragraph
2.13

Paragraph

Go to Appendix

that the
is not on

Action
as per

tone
2. Check
that all
PFT switches
are
normal
position

CHART
sx-100

Check
Check
telephones

low

sx-200

CHART
sx-100

;

Action
I
Go to MAP350-603

6-6
sx-200

6-5

I I

9OVac

2.13

Action
GO to System
Appendix
6

Power

test

CHART 6-7
Trouble
Shelf

2 dead

Check

sx-100

sx-200

Is all power
on
shelf
2 present?

CHART
Trouble
Apparent
radical
power
fluctuations

Action

sx-100

Check
Under
heavy (or
light) traffic
conditions
system
power
remains
unstable

Go to MAP350-603

6-8
sx-200

Action

GO to Appendix

CHART 6-9
sx-100

Check
I
System
released

can not be
from PFT

Reset
the PFT
switches.
Is the
system
returned
normal?

X
to

Page 56

sx.200
I

Action
I

Check
fuse on interconnect
card as per
MAP350-605
SX-100
MAP350-601
SX-200
Go to Chart

6-2

SECTION

M ITL91051911 O-98-350

6-10
Reserve
battery
not holding
the
up?

sx-201

Check

Trouble
backup
system

1. Are all reserve
battery
backup
connections
as per
Figs. 6-2 and 6-3?

Make connections
as shown
in Fig. 6-2 and 6-1. Give
batteries
time to charge
(24 hours)

2. Is the battery
circuit-breaker
on position?

Reset

Go to MAP3507604
SX-200
MAP350-606
SX-100

Go to MAP350-604
SX-200
MAP350-606
SX-100

5. Are the batteries
less than 4 years old

Replace
batteries
as per
M ITL9105/911
o-98-200

6. Unplug
the
system
AC power
cord. Is there an
audible
click from
the charger
unit or
does the system
indicate
an “on battery
condition”
(i.e.
CONTACT
MONITOR
MITL9105/911098-105)

OOT not properly
hooked
OOT not functioning
replace
charger
unit

3. Is the
charging

Remote Maintenance,
Test System

battery
LED lit?

Administration

and

RMAT System

A Remote Control - PABX (RCP) Card installed in slot 16 of Shelf Unit 1 of each
SX-100 or SX-200 PABX.

(c)

The interconnecting
facilities
between the
RMAT Controller
and the RCP - installed
PABX’s. This communication
link is in most
cases provided by the public switched network, with the RMAT Controller
dialing up
the required PABX. Access to each PABX
may be provided
by dialing a dedicated
number
(trunk), or by dialing
the listed
directory
nur,lber for the PABX. A user
defined
security code within each PABX
provides
protection
against
unauthorized
access.

Note:

The RCP Card occupies
slot 16, which
might otherwise
have been used for a second console control card. The PABX then
has a single
attendant
console.
If,
however, a second attendant
console is required together
with the RMAT facility,
then the second console is connected
to
the maintenance
port. Under these conditions certain limitations
are imposed such
,as:

The RMAT System was designed to be used
by personnel
at Maintenance
Centers to
remotely access systems installed at a customers
Those
personnel
may
obtain
premises.
maintenance
information
or cause programming
changes. The System provides a means of rapidly
identifying
potential
PABX problem
areas and
allows programming
changes to be done without
the necessity of visiting the users premises.

(a)

The facility

is provided

by:

A Remote Maintenance
Administration
and
Test (RMAT) System Controller
installed at
the Maintenance
Center.
It consists
of
SX-100 or SX-200 hardware with a Generic
290 RMAT PROM, and includes a Remote
Control - Central (RCC) Card and a standard
operating
console.

(b)

7.01

7.02

breaker

in the

4. Are fuses
Fl,
and F3 good?

Action

Page 57

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

shared HOLD
consoles

shared

no timeout
console

audio connection
between
soles when both are idle

separate console configuration
installation
is not possible

positions

conference
to night

between

call setting
service

the two

If the RCP is connected
as a PABX extension the PABX attendant,
or any other PABX
extension,
has the facility of originating
a
RMAT call to the RMAT Controller.
In addition, if the RCP extension
has the COS option “Flash
for Attendant”
enabled,
the
RMAT operator
can re-enter into speech
mode with the PABX attendant
after being
in the Remote Administration
Mode.

(e)

The
card
has
code

The RMAT Controller’s
receiver and trunk
cards may be programmed
by its console
for the type of operation required to access
the
remote
PABX equipments;
local
features such as time or date display can
also be programmed
from the console.

(9)

The RMAT Controller
equipment
includes
the capability
of displaying
and clearing
diagnostics
registers for its own or for the
remote PABX RCP Card.

capability

on the second

attendant

con-

in a tenant

7.03

Once the RCP Card has been accessed the
RMAT Controller
can perform the following
functions
at the PABX:
(a)

Duplication
by the RMAT Console operator
of the PABX normal
attendant
console
functions
and displays. (NOTE: No speech
path is available
to the RMAT console
operator once the RCP is accessed.)

(b)

Programming
functions
for the remote
PABX including extended programming
for
Multi-Digit
Toll Control purposes.

(c)

Detection
of alarm conditions
at the PABX
and the ability to clear alarms, to busy-out
lines and trunks and perform
reset and
PABX disable conditions.

Page 58
58 Pages

7.04

RMAT Controller
can access the RCP
by dialing the RCP access code, and
the capability
to change the access
when required.

For further information
see SECTION MITL9105/911 O-98-1 01 and 9105/911 o-98-301.

SECTION

APPENDIX
MITEL ACTION

GENERAL

MITL91Q5/9110-98-350

PROCEDURES

Al.08

Task oriented functions
in this section are
implemented
using
MITEL
ACTION
PROCEDURES
(MAP’s). Also there is a brief
discussion
of tools and safety practices.

Al.02

Al.09

Al.01

A MAP is a step by step procedure using a
flow
chart
principle,
written
and
illustrated where necessary to a level of detail that
allows both experienced
and inexperienced
personnel to carry out the tasks detailed. A MAP contains two levels of information
as follows:
(a)

For experienced
personnel,
a series of
steps (level one) each numbered
[n] and
annotated
with minimal information.

START/FINISH/JUMP
TO Block:
Used to
indicate
the start and finish of a MAP.
Also used to indicate ‘jump to’ points within the
MAP, for example
“go to [n]” or “from [n]” or
“return to [n]“. The symbol is a rectangle
with
semi circular ends. Text is centred in the symbol.

THE OPERATORS
Experienced

(b)

Al.b3

For inexperienced
personnel,
each step
referred to in (a) above is amplified
by a
connected
series of numbered
substeps
[nA] (level two).
A typical
Fig. Al,

example of a MAP is shown in
with the two levels detailed.

MAP SYMBOLS

USE OF MAP’S

Operator

Al.10

For the experienced
operator to complete
a task using a MAP, reference to the sequential short form level one steps is usually all
that is necessary. Using Fig. Al-l as an example,
the experienced
operator
would
proceed
as
follows.

Al.04

There are four basic symbol shapes which
may
be used
in a MAP,
and
are
defined as follows.

Al.05

Al.12

AND Block:
Used to indicate a level one
step
that
must
be performed.
Consists of a square with the word AND centred in the
block.
Al.06

OR Block:
Used to indicate a choice of
level one steps, one of which must be
performed.
Consists of a rectangle, with the text
centred in the block, and with the word OR appearing between the alternative
operations.
Al.07

The rectangle
is also used to border instructions
which imply that the operator
must perform
a task outside the scope of the
MAP. The text is centred in the rectangle.

Al.11

At [2] if the decision is NO there is no requirement
to proceed further and the test
is abandoned.
This naturally results in a FINISH
block. If the decision
is YES the operator
proceeds to [3] and [4] in succession,
i.e. dials the DID
station
number
and completes
the call to the
check extension.
Al.13

that
such
cient
only
tom

The description
of the instructions
carried
out in Al.05 and Al.06 have assumed
the level of competence
of the operator
is
that short form level one steps contain suffiinformation,
and therefore the operator reads
the centre column of the MAP, top to bot,of the page.

Al-l

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-215

ANSWER

DID TRUNK

CALL

MAP215152

Issue 1, January

Sheet 1 of 2

YES

Go to MAP215.151

Is system

Abandon

with’s
equip
DI g” trunk

AT MAINTENANCE

[SA]
[;B]

@Cl
.

Test

HANDSET

Set switch to OFF-HOOK
Dial tone
Dial CO trunk access code
CO dial tone
;i;
YID number for check extenRinging

tone
STATION

NUMBER

AT CHECK EXTENSION, 1
[4p]
Lift check extenslo? 1 handset
Two way conversatton,
check extension 1 and maintenance
set
[4B] F&&ye
handset on check exten[4C]

F;.;$$enance

set switch

to
-

AT MAINTENANCE
HANDSET
[5A] Set switch to OFF-HOOK
.
Dial tone
[5.B] Dial CO trunk access code
CO dial tone
[5C] ;;li,SII
number for Station
.

Ringing

tone
DIAL STATION
fLE;;;NT
DID

Go to [S]

A%25

Fig. Al-1

Al-2

Typical

MAP Page

SECTION

Inexperienced

TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTIONS

Operator

If the operator’s
experience
is such that
the level one instructions
do not contain
sufficient
information,
the level two substeps
should be referred to as follows.

MITL9105/9110-98-350

AND SPECIAL

Al.14

Al.15

(a)

(b)

Using Fig. Al-l
followed should

as an example
be:

the path

At [l] and [2] make the decisions
at these steps as before.

called for

Al.18

Any tools, test equipment
or special instructions
that the operator
requires or
needs to know are stated on the first page of each
MAP. If the MAP is long, and contains a number of
sub procedures,
these are listed in synopsis form
on the first page.

Al .17 Caution:
is necessary, during ins talla tion
and maintenance
of the PABX to avoid
possible damage to the system electronics
by static discharge.
A simple means of
avoiding the possibility
of such damage, is
the use of a “Static Protection
Wrist Strap”
attached
to the system Ground, as shown
below (Fig. Al-2).

At step [3] dial the DID station number by
performing
substeps [3A], [3B] and [3C].

In terms of steps and substeps,
the operator
follows
a decision,
decision
then step andsubstep paths in the example shown.

STATIC PROTECTION
WRIST STRAP

SYSTEM CARD
SHELF

Fig. Al-2

Static

Protection

Al -314

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

APPENDIX 2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
General
CO TRUNKS (INCREMENTSOF

The SX-100 and SX-200 are advanced electronic PABX’s employing digitally controlled solid-state,
space-division
switching
with
stored program control. The capacities
of the
PABX’s are as follows:
A2.01

4 612162024263236404446525660646672766084669296100104
a
_^
24 1
32
40
46
56
64
72
60
88
96
104
112
120
126
136
144
152
160
166
176
164
192
200
206

SX-100. 112 ports are available for assignment to lines, trunks
and additional
receivers.
SX-200. 208 ports are available for assignment to lines, trunks
and additional
receivers.
Each line requires 1 port, each
quires 2 ports and additional
quire 4 ports each. E&M Tie
and Transformer
Trunk Cards
ports.

CO trunk rereceivers reTrunk Cards
require four

---SX-100.
-TWO

SINGLESHELF SX-200 SYSTEM
SHELF SX-200

NOTES:

The maximum
possible
combination
of
trunks
and lines which
can be accomodated
is dependant upon the number
of receivers installed and is illustrated
in
Fig. A2-1.

LINES

1 PORT REQUIRED PER LINE

TRUNKS-ZPORTS/COTRUNK
4 PORTS/E&M.TlETRUNK
4 PORTS/DID, TIE TRUNK
2 RECEIVER CIRCUITS/RECEIVER CARD
4 RECEIVER CIRCUITS/QUAD RECEIVER CARD

Compatibility
Fig. A2-1 Maximum

A2.02

The systems

are compatible

Line cards of IAl/

Standard Dial Pulse and DTMF telephone
sets equipped
with or without
message
waiting lamps.

Commonly
used step by step, crossbar
and electronic central office equipment.

PHYSICAL

A2.03

telephone

Line and Trunk

Configuration

with:
key system.

OVERVIEW

SX-100 Cabinet (Basic Version) is of metal
construction
and has the following dimensions:
Height
16.62in.
(422mm),
width
25in.
(635mm), and depth 18.5in. (470mm). The weight of
a fully equipped
PABX is approximately
70lbs
(31.8kg).

A2.04

The SX-100 Primary
Power Supply
is
mounted
to the right of the equipment
shelf (total weight 15lbs, 35kg) and provides all
system power from a 1 ISVac, (or a 220V adapter),
48Hz to 64Hz commercial
supply OR from - 44 to
-56V DC supply.
A2.05

The SX-200 Equipment Cabinet is of metal
construction
and has the following dimensions:
Height
38in. (965mm),
width
23.5in.
(600mm), and depth 27.5in. (700mm). The weight of
a fully equipped
PABX is approximately
290lbs
(131.7kg).
A2.08

panel,

The SX-200 Primary
Power Supply
is
mounted
directly
on the cabinet
back
(total weight 701b 31.8kg) and provides all

A2-1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

system power from either a 115Vac, or a 220Vac,
44Hz - 64Hz commercial
supply, OR a -44 to
- 56Vdc supply.
A2.07

The SX-lOO/SX-200 Equipment Shelf holds
up to 22 printed circuit cards which plug
into the shelf backplane.
On the rear of the
backplane are a number of Amphenol type plugs
providing interconnections
between the shelves
and external equipment.
In addition to the plugs
are a number of screw down terminals, allowing
shelf connections
to the primary power supply
unit. The equipment
shelves measure 10.75in.
(273mm)
high, 19in. (480mm) wide, 15375in.
(415mm) deep and weigh approximately
271bs
(12.3kg) fully equipped. Equipment Shelf 2 (SX-200
only) is identical
in construction
to equipment
shelf 1 and holds up to 12 additional line or trunk
cards.
A2.08

A2-2

The Reserve Power Supply in the PABX’s
provides a -48Vdc
source. The supply

consists of a shelf unit containing
8 Globe Gel Gc
6200A batteries providing
-48.3Vdc
nominal at
20 C. A separate
temperature-compensated
charging
unit maintains
the correct
battery
voltage level. The SX-200 reserve battery power
supply measures 7in. (178mm) high, 19in. (483mm)
wide, 15in. (381mm) deep and weighs 1lOlbs
(43kg). The SX-100 reserve battery power supply
measures 8.2in. (200.9mm) high, 25.0in. (635mm)
wide, 18.5in. (40mm) deep, and weighs 125lbs. The
SX-lOO/SX-200
charging
unit measures
5in.
(127mm) wide, 7in. (178mm) high, 14in. (355mm)
deep and weighs 14lbs (6.4kg).
The Attendant
Console weighs approximately 13lbs (5.9kg) and its dimensions
are: 13.75in. (350mm) wide, 6.8in. (176mm) high,
9.25in. (236mm) deep.
A2.09

A2.10

Table A2-1 lists all the tables that comprise the remainder of this appendix.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-1
TABLES
TABLE
NAME

TABLE
NUMBER

Features

DESCRIPTION

A2-2

Generic

A2-3

SX-lOO/SX-200
Characteristics

A2-4

System

A2-5

Timeout

A2-6

Dial Pulse limits

Lists all dial pulse information

A2-7

PABX Tones

Lists all the PABX tones

A2-8

DTfvJF Tones

Lists DTMF information

A2-9

System

Lists general

A2-10

Environmental

A2-11

Supervisory

A2-12

Electrical Characteristics
SX-lOO/SX-200 RMAT
Controller

Lists all the electrical characteristics
SX-lOO/SX-200 RMAT Controller

of the

A2-13

Electrical Characteristics
Remote Control - PABX (RCP)
Card

Lists all the electrical
card

of the RCP

Electrical

Limitations

Information

Power
Condition

Data

System

feature

availability

Lists general electrical
sx-1 oo/sx-200

as per Generic

characteristics

of the

Describes the SX-lOO/SX-200 general
number of callbacks, etc.
Lists the timeout
features

information

power supply

Outlines environmental
sx-1 oo/sx-200
Provides

general

limitations

of various

i.e.

system

information

conditions

supervisory

level

for the

data on the PABX

characteristics

~2.3

:.’

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-2
GENERIC FEATURES
202
Alphanumeric
Display
for Attendant
Position
Attendant
Camp-On
Attendant
CCSA Access
Attendant
Console
(Maximum
2)
Attendant
Control
of Trunk Group
Access
Attendant
Controlled
Conference
Attendant
Flash Over Trunks
Attendant
Lockout
Attendant
Position
(2 Max.)
Attendant
Transfer
- All Calls
Automatic
Callback
BusvlDon’t
Answer
(Station
to Station
Cal&)
Automatic
Callback
. Busy (Station
to Trunk)
Automatic
Night Service
Switching
Automatic
Queuing
to Attendant
Position
Broker’s
Call
Busy Lamp Field
Busy Verification
of Station
Lines
Call Forwarding
- All Calls
Call Forwarding
_ Busy And Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding
- Busy Line (DID)
Call Forwarding
- Don’t Answer
(DID)
Call Hold
Call Pick-Up
Call Waitina
Service

Date Display
on Console(s)
Diagnostics
_ Automatic
Dial Access
to Attendant
Digital Clock on Attendant
Position
Direct
Department
Calling
(DDC)
Direct
Inward
Dialing
(DID)
Direct Outward
Dialing
(DOD)
Direct Termination
of Miscellaneous
Circuits
On Attendant
Position
(Paging)t
Direct
Trunk Group
Selection
(DTGS)
Directed
Call Pick-Up
Hold-For-Pick-Uo
Ootion
Distinctive
Ringins
DTMF And/Or
DCKP On Attendant
Position
DTMF Calling
DTMF To Dial Pulse Conversion
Dump and Load of Customer
Data
Executive
Override
Flash for Attendant
Flexible
Numbering
of Stations
Foreign
Exchange
(FX) Access
t Requires

A24

external

customer

provided

equipment

203

204

.
.
.

0
.
.

.
.
.

.
l

205

.
.
.
.

.
e
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
._

.
.
.
.
.
.
._

.
.
.
.
e
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
0
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Fully Restricted
Station
Identified
Trunk Group
Immediate
Audible
Ring on Attendant
Handled
Calls
Immediate
Ring
Incoming
Call Identification
(ICI)
Indication
of Camp-On
Intercept
Treatment
Attendant
Intercept
Intercept
Tone
Interposition
Calling
Interposition
Transfer
Inward
Restriction
Line Lockout
With Warning
Listed
Directory
Number
(LDN) Service
Loudspeaker
Pagingf
Direct
Access
by Attendant
Dial Access
Multizone
Priority
Paging
Main/Satellite
Service
Manual
Originating
Line Service
Manual
Terminating
Line Service
Meet Me Conference
Message
Waiting
(Audible)
Message
Waiting
(Lamp)
j Trunk Restriction
Multiple
Listed Directory
Numbers
(LDN)
h, lultiple
Access
Codes
for a sinale
trunk group (10 max.)
Music
On Holdf
Music
on Attendant
Position
Holdf
Night Console
Position
Night Service
Fixed
Flexible
Night Station
Service.
Fixed Service
Night Station
Service.
Full Service
Origination
Restriction
Outgoing
Trunk Call Back
Outaoina
Trunk Camo-On
Outgoing
Trunk Queueing
Outward
Restriction

Radio Paging
Accessf
Recall Dial Tone
Recorded
Telephone
Dictation
Accessf
Remote
Access
to PBX Services
Remote
Administration
and Maintenance
(hardware
option)
Rering
From Toll (on Toll Terminal)
Reserve
Power (hardware
option)
Room
__ Alhit
__
Room Status
Rotary
Dial Calling
Route Advance
Serial Call
Sharing
(4 Tenant)
Shared
Attendant
Service
Single Digit Dialing (Non-conflicting)

202
.

203
.
.

204
.
.
.

205
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IB

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
e
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
l

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
*
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

133?3

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-2 (CONT’D)
GENERIC FEATURES
202
Single Digit Dialing
(Conflicting)
Speed Call
Splitting
One-Way
Manual
Splitting
Two-Wav
Manual
Solittina
One-Way
Automatic
Splitying
Two-Way
Automatic
Splitting
Station
Hunting
Terminal
Hunting
Circular
Hunting
Secretarial
Hunting
Station
Message
Detail Recording
Station
Message
Register
Service
Electronic
Storage
and Display
Internal
Charging
Station
Override
Securitv
Station-to-Station
Calling
Straightforward
Outward
Completion
Switched
Loop Operation
Tandem
Tie Trunk Switching
Termination
Restriction
Threewav
Conference
Transfer
Through
Dialing
Tie Trunk Access

t Requires

externa-I

customer

provided

203
.

204
.

205
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Timed
Reminders
Toll Restriction
Battery
Reversal
011 Access
Multi Diait
-a.Toll Terminal
Access
Total “Do Not Disturb”
Display
Total “Message
Waiting”
Display
Total “Room
Status”
Display
Traffic
Data Collectionf
Traffic
Display
to Customer
Transfer
into Busy
Trunk Answer
From Any Station
Trunk Group
Busy (TGB) Indicators
on
Attendant
Position
Trunk Status
Field
Trunk-To-Trunk
Connections
Trunk Verification
by Customer
(TVC)
Trunk Verification
by Station
(TVS)
Uniform
Call Distribution
(UCD)
Wake- Up Service
WATS Access
Wideband
Data Switching
Wide Frequency
Tolerant
Power Plant

202
.

203
.

204
.

205
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

equipment

A2-5

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98:350

SX-lOO/SX-200

Station Loop Limit
Maximum
Number of
Ringers per Line
Ringing
Standard
Special
Ring Trip
Dial Tone
Transfer Dial Tone
Busy Tone
Special Busy Tone
Standard Ringback Tone
Special Ringback Tone
Callback
Reorder Tone
Conference
Tone
Camp-On Tone
Override Tone
Crosstalk
Insertion Loss,
Station-to-Station
Station-to-Trunk
Trunk-to-Trunk
Longitudinal
Balance
Return Loss
idle Circuit Noise
Impulse Noise
Envelope Delay
System Impedance
Traffic Capacity
Primary Power
Central Office
Trunk Loop Limit
Maximum Distance of
Console from Equipment
Operating
Environment

A2-6

TABLE A2-3
ELECTRICAL
CHARACTERISTICS

1200 ohms including

set

7
9OV, 20Hz - immediate
ringing
1s on, 3s off
0.5s on, -0.5s off, 0.5s on, -2.5s off
During silent or ringing period
350/440Hz, continuous
350/440Hz, 3 bursts of looms, then continuous
480/620Hz, interrupted
at 60ipm
350/440Hz interrupted
at 60ips
440/480Hz, Is on, 3s off
440/480Hz, 0.5s on, 0.5s off, 0.5s on, 2.5s off
6 rings of standard ringing
480/620Hz, interrupted
at 120ipm
440Hz, 1 burst of 1s
440Hz, one or two burst of 200ms
440Hz, one burst of 800ms followed by a 200ms
burst every 6s
75dB minimum
5dB + 0.5dB at 1004Hz
0.5dB -+ 0.3dB at 1004Hz
0.5dB f 0.3dB at 1004Hz
54dB minimum, 200-3000Hz
14dB minimum
16dBrnC maximum
No counts over 46dBrnC
150 us maximum
600 ohms nominal for lines
600 or 900 ohms nominal for trunks
7.5ccs/line minimum at 100 lines at P = 0.01
lOO-125V, 47-63Hz, 4A maximum
1600 ohms
lOOOft. (300m) of 26AWG cable
0°C to 40°C 10% to 90% Relative

Humidity

SECTION

SYSTEM
calls

MITL9105/9110-98.350

TABLE A2-4
FEATURE LIMITATIONS

Maximum

number

of simultaneous

= 31.

Maximum
Maximum

number
number

of speech paths used by any call = 2
of simultaneous
consultations
= 15

Maximum

number

of simultaneous

add-on

(3 way) calls

Maximum

number

of simultaneous

station

controlled

Maximum
number of calls that can simultaneously
or hunt group = 30

= 30

conference

calls

be camped

= 30

on to an extension,

trunk group

Maximum
Maximum

number
number

of simultaneous
of simultaneous

callbacks that can be enabled = 32.
call forwards that can be enabled = 208 (SX-200); 112 (SX-100)

Maximum

number

of simultaneous

“dial

Maximum

number

of hunting

Maximum

number

of calls that can be simultaneously

Maximum

number

of stations

in a station

Maximum

number

of stations

in a call pick up group

Maximum

number

of dial call pickup

Maximum

number

of trunks

assignable

Maximum

number

of trunks

in a trunk group

Maximum

number

of trunk groups

Maximum
Maximum

number
number

of calls that can override a given extension
of calls that can be simultaneously
parked

Maximum

number

of simultaneous

groups

0” calls

hunting

groups

number

connected
group

to music on hold

= 31.

= 208 (SX-200); 112 (SX-100)

= 208 (SX-200);.112

(SX-100)

= 50.

to night stations

= 100 (SX-200); 52 (SX-100).

= 104 (SX-200); 56 (SX-100).

= 12.

meet-me

Maximum
number of simultaneous
attendant
(Two if tenanting
with separate consoles)
Maximum

= 31

= 12.

conferences
controlled

of calls that can be simultaneously

= 1
= 31

= 1
conferences

= 1

held by one attendant

Maximum number of simultaneous
incoming calls that can be separately
= 6. (Recall, Dial 0, LDN 1 through LDN 4)
Maximum
Maximum

number
number

of LDNs that can be identified at the attendant’s
of simultaneously
ringing Wake-Ups = 10

Maximum

number

of tenants

= 4.

identified

console

by the attendant

= 4.

= 4; 2 with consoles

PABX numbering
schemes may be 1, 2, 3, or 4 digit or a combination
there are no conflicts
in the first digits.

of 1, 2, 3 and 4 digit, as long as

A2-7

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

TABLE A2-5
TIMEOUT INFORMATION
Attendant
Timed Recall (Don’t Answer)
Attendant
Timed Recall (Camp-On)
Attendant
Tlmed Recall (Hold)
Automatic
Night Switching
Automatic
Wake-Up Ringing
Dial Tone Timeout
Interdigit Timeout
Lockout Timeout
Callback Clear Timeout
Callback Don’t Answer Reset
Call Park Recall
Call Hold Recall
Call Forwarding
Don’t Answer Timeout
Switchhook
Flash
Ringing

2Os, 30s
2Os, 3Os,
2Os, 3Os,
2Os, 30s
6 rings
15s
15s lines,
45s
8 hours
6 rings
2, 3, or 4
2, 3, or 4
2Os, 3Os,
minimum
maximum
5 minutes

Timeout

or
or
or
or

40s
40s
40s
40s

10s trunks

minutes
minutes
or 40s
200ms,700ms,
1500ms

900ms,

1100ms or

TABLE A2-8
DIAL PULSE LIMITS
PARAMETER

MIN.

MAX.

(Accept)
Pulse Rate (pps)
Break Duration (percent)
Break Interval (ms)
Make Interval (ms)
Interdigit Time (ms)

8.0
50.0
52.7
32.7
300.0

12.0
80.0
80.0
52.5

9
58
800

11
62

(Generate)
l
l
l

Pulse Rate (pps)
Break Interval (percent)
Interdigit Time (ms)

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

’

TABLE A2-7
PABX TONES
3501440H2, continuous,
- 13dBm
350/440Hz, 3 bursts 1OOms on - 100ms off followed by continuous
350/440Hz, -‘13dBm
480/620Hz, interrupted
at 60ipm, - 24dBm
3501440Hz at 6Oips, - 13dBm
440/480Hz, 1s on, 3s off, - 19dBm
480/620Hz, interrupted
at 120ipm, - 24dBm
440Hz, one burst of 200ms, - 16dBm
440Hz, one burst of 800ms followed by a 200ms burst every 6s,
- 16dBm
440Hz at 1Oips for 400ms, - 16dBm
440Hz, one burst of Is, - 16dBm
440Hz, - 16dBm

Dial Tone
Transfer Dial Tone
Busy Tone
Camp-On Busy Tone
Ringback Tone
Reorder Tone
Camp-On Tone
Over-ride Tone
Attendant
Error Tone
Conferencing
Tone
Miscellaneous
Tone
DTMF Dialing Conditions
l
Frequency Deviation
l
On Time
l
Interdigit Time
l
Level, Low Group
l
Level, High Group
l
Level, DTMF Signal
l
Level, Third Frequency
l
Twist

+ 1 percent
Greater than 40ms
Greater than 40ms
Greater than - 1OdBm
Greater than -8dBm
Greater than +2dBm
Less than -4OdB
Less than 4dB
16OP.I

TABLE A2-8
DTMF TONE LIMITS
High Frequency

Low Frequency
(Hz)
697
770
852
941
Notes:

\’

(Hz)

1209

1336

1477

1
4
7
*

2
5
8
0

3
6
t

1. Tolerance

of call progress

2. Individual

tones

3. Tolerance

of individual

tone

of any compound
tones

Frequency deviation:
+ 1%
- Signal interval (2 frequency):
40ms (minimum)
Per frequency,
minimum
level:
- 17dBm on line
circuit
Twist, maximum (at - 10dBm):
+4 to -8dBm
(High f relative to low f)

levels is & 1.5dBm.
tone are within

1dB of each other

are + 1% of the frequency

stated.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-9
SYSTEM POWER
Characteristic

sx-100

sx-200

AC Power Supplies
Input Voltage

115Vac or 230Vac,

Frequency

44Hz to 64Hz

Hold-over
Time

Momentary
interruptions
in commercial
power up to
250ms duration

Input Current

2.5A maximum

4A maximum

Talk Battery
Reserve

Noise

Battery

Does not exceed

Battery

Holdover Time
Battery Life Time
Ringing

28dBrnc

115Vac or 230Vac,

48.3V to 52V
2 hours minimum
4 to 6 yrs

4 weeks
4 years

9OVac + 10 O/O
20Hz I 1Hz

9OVac + 10%
20Hz f 1 Hz

Pack

-20%

at 115Vac

Does not exceed

Supply

Output Voltage
Frequency

A2.10

at 115Vac

to +lO%

Supply

Voltage Range
Holdover Time
Battery Life Time
RAMlCOS

-20%

28dBrnc

to +lO”/

SECTION

MlTL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-10
ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Storage

Conditions

Temperature

Relative

Range:

Humidity:

-50°C

UP to 100%

RH at 18°C (i.e. 15mm Hg water vapour

. Shock:

Up to 30 inch drop

* Low Pressure:

87mm

Temperature

Environmental

Shock:

-50°C

pressure)

Hg (50,000 feet)
to +25X

in 5 minutes

Conditions

Acoustic

Vibration:

Electrostatic

Noise:

The systems do not radiate acoustic noise greater than 45dB
SPL, “A” Weighted, measured 47.2in. (1200mm) from the
center of the cabinet.
The systems operate satisfactorily
when subjected
to a continuous vibration of 5-200Hz with an acceleration
of 0.59.

Discharge:

The systems meet the following
electrostatic
discharge test.
With the common equipment
grounded,
a voltage of 15kV
placed to various parts of the equipment
such as faceplates,
switches, etc, has no noticeable
effect on the operation
of
the system. With all the exposed metal of the peripheral
equipment
grounded,
a voltage of 15kV applied to various
parts of the peripheral equipment,
has no noticeable
effect
on the operation
of the system.
Note:

to +71 “C

Electromagnetic

Susceptibility

The high voltage DC is derived from an induction
type generator with an output capacity of 25OpF and
a series resistance of 3.9ohms.

The systems are able to work in an electric
without major degradation
of service.

field of 5Vlm

A2-11

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-11
SUPERVISORY DATA
l The PABX responds
to hookswitch
flashes with a duration
maximum time (0.7, 0.9, 1.1 units or 1.5s) in order to activate
features

An open tip lead conditon
PABX connection

of 500ms (optional

l
Momentary
on outgoing

PABX station

hookswitch

PABX station

on-hook

Station Loop.
1200ohms

50ms) or more duration

open loop conditions
of up to 350ms (optional
PABX calls, will not release PABX calls

flashes

conditions

The station

will not be repeated
will release

towards

the station

Attendant
Console Range.
The attendant
imum of (300m) 1000 ft with 26AWG cable

console

CO Trunk
resistance

with CO trunks

Group.

CO Trunk Seizure.

The PABX will operate

The PABX nominal

seizure

the Central

by the Central

Office

after the selected

apparatus

can be remoted

resistance

on a CO trunk will release the

40ms) generated

a trunk connection

loop range, including

of between 200ms and a programmable
the Transfer/Consultation/Hold/Add-On

flash

time

can be up to a maximum

from the cabinet

up to a maximum

is 2700hms

up to a max-

of 16000hms

loop

at 30mA

l
CO Trunk Resistance.
In the idle state the resistance towards the PABX from the trunk circuit is
20Kohms tip to ground and 20kohms ring to ground for ground starts, and not less than 10Mohms for,
loop start trunks

Tie Trunk

A2-12

Resistance.

2Kohm

for Loop

3Kohm

for E&M

The maximum

resistance

towards

the tie trunk is:

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-12
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SX-lOO/SX-200 RMAT CONTROLLER
Modem

Signaling

Operation

Parameters:

Mode

Full or half duplex over 2 wire public switched
originate mode

network,

300 baud asynchronous

Data Rate
Transmit

Tones

Mark 1270Hz; Space 1070Hz

Transmit

Level

Nominal
- 10dBm with automatic
gain to - 3dBm, OdBm, or
+ 0.4dBm for loop attenuation
compensation

Receive Tones

Mark 2225Hz; Space 2025Hz

Receive

-4 to -45dBm

Sensitivity

Line Interface:

NOTE 1:
Primary

See Section

CO Trunk, loop/ground
(NOTE 1)
MITL9105/9110-98-210

start (rotary dial or DTMF signaling)

for CO Trunk Card full capabilities.

Power Supply:

SX-100 Cabinet

90 to 125Vac (optionally

200 to 250Vac); 44 to 64Hz; 24

SX-200 Cabinet

90 to 125Vac or 185 to 250Vac; 44 to 64Hz, 4A

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A2-13
ELECTRICAL
CHARACTERISTICS
REMOTE CONTROL - PABX (RCP) CARD
Modem

Signaling

Operation

Parameters:

Mode

Full or half duplex over 2 wire public
automatic
answer feature

Data Rate

network

Transmit

Tones

Mark 2225Hz; Space 2025Hz

Transmit

Level

Nominal - IOdBm with automatic
gain to -3dBm,
+ 0.4dBm for loop attenuation
compensation

Receive

Tones

Mark 1270Hz; Space 1070Hz

Receive

Sensitivity

- 4 to - 45dBm

DC Resistance

Minimum

10 megohm

On-hook

Impedance

10kohms

in series with ~JJF

Minimum

30Vrms at 20Hz

Ringing
Off-hook

DC Resistance

2600hms

at 20mA (line reversal

Off-hook

Impedance

6000hms

in series with 2yF

Minimum

14dB at 200Hz
25dB at 1kHz
35dB at 3kHz

Loss

Common

6OVrms maximum

Mode Rejection

Longitudinal

Transient

OdBm or

Parameters:

On-hook

Return

with

300 baud asynchronous

Line Interface

Minimum

Balance

and Digital

ignored)

at 60Hz

63dB at 1kHz
56dB at 3kHz

Withstands
1OOOV of 10/1000us and 220hm source
between Tip and ground or Ring and ground

Protection

Power Supply

interface

resistance

Parameters:
Compatible

A2-14

switched

with Console

Control

Card (Mite1 P/N 9110-006)

SECTION MITLSI 051911 O-98-350

APPENDIX 3
SYSTEM CABLING

Cabling

and Cross-Connections

General
A3.01 This part details the cabling and crossconnections
required when installing
the
SX-100 or SX-200 PABX’s.
Telephone

Set and Trunk Cabling

A3.02 Telephone set and trunk cabling terminates
on the building cross-connection
terminal
in the normal manner. The cabling requirements
and limits for stations and consoles are shown in
Fig. A3-l(a) and (b).
Cable Terminations,

SX-100

A3.03 All interconnecting
cables must be terminated in accordance
with Tables A3-1,
A3-2 and Fig. A3-2.
Cable Terminations,
SX-200
A3.04 All interconnecting
cables must be terminated in accordance
with Fig. A3-3 and
Tables A3-1, A3-2, A3-3, and A3-5. In addition if
Shelf 2 is installed
the interconnecting
cables
listed in Table A3-4 must be terminated.
Cross-Connections
A3.05 Jumpers should be run using Z type 24AWG
cross-connecting
cables or equivalent.

A3.06 Connection
between
the equipment
cabinet,
cross connect
field,
stations,
trunks
and consoles
should be made using
26AWG connector
ended cable in accordance
with Tables A3-1 through A3-5.

A3.07 Cabling connections
between Shelf 1, the
interconnect
board, and cross connect field
are shown in Figs A3-7 and A3-3.

A3.08 Figs A3-4 and A3-5 illustrate typical block
and wiring
diagrams
for a power fail
transfer circuit. Fig. A3-6 illustrates
typical night
bell wiring connections
and Fig. A3-7 shows the
connections
for music and PA requirements.
A3.09 When backplane translator boards are used
with the lines and trunk circuits different
terminal connections
result. In this case the cabling arrangements
must conform to the termination connections
shown in Fig. A3-8 and Table
A3-6 of this Appendix.
A3.10

Figures A3-9, A3-10 and A3-11 are in depth
wiring explanations.
These figures outline
the card position in relation to a specific Amphenol type connector
to the cross connect
frame.

A3-1

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.350

TWO CONDUCTOR WIRE
OR EQUIVI

cABLEcrc

. 1-l
STATIONSET

i;;J;CTlNG

CROSSCONNECT -/
FIELD

SHELF PLUG1
25 PAIR
CABLE

EQUIPMENT
CABINET

NOTE:STATION LOOPLlMlT1200OHMS(INCLUDINGSTATlONSET)
(a)STATlON CABLING & LIMITS

CABLE
CONNECTORS

INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT
BOARD
\

PLUG-ENDED CABL
2

SHELFCONNECTOR-/

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE

CONSOLE INTERFACE
BOARD

EQUIPMENT
CABINET

NOTE: CABLING LIMIT IOOOFT. (305m)- 26 AWG MINIMUM
CABLECONSOLETO EQUIPMENTCABINET.
(b)ATTENDANTCONSOLECABLlNG&

Fig. A3-1

A3-2

Station

and Console

LIMITS

Cabling

Requirements

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCONNECT

0
P301
(14 PIN)
P302
(25 PIN)

BACKPLANE

BOARD
SHELF
BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR
NO.

DESTINATION

P4
FZ

X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
P17
P16

I
1

BOARD

CONNECTOR
NO.

INTERCONNECT

J13
J14
J15

NOTE: ALL PLUGS AND CONNECTORS
EXCEPT AS NOTED ARE STANDARD 25
PAIR (AMPHENOL TYPE). THE MALE AND
FEMAIF OESIGNATI-IRS RFFFA TO THF

P16
PI7
PI6
P19
P20
P302

MENT.NOTTOTHECABLECONNECTORS.

P301

CijN,,&(j~~~~~&f&)

ii THE’&jii:

Fig. A3-2

SX-100 Connector

Locations

DESTINATION
MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE 2
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE1
P6
!" CONNECT
X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT
PRINTER OR
RECORDING DEVICE
MAINTENANCE
PANEL

‘.. :
Y.---G
,,.
:
_.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

(6 PIN)

t--iiid

p301

(14 PIN)

P302
25 PIN)

NOTES:
1 ALL PLUGS AND CONNECTORS EXCEPT AS NOTEDARE STANDARD 25 PAIR
(AMPHENOLTYPE)
THE MALEANDFEMALE DESIGNATORS REFER TOTHE
CONNECTORSMOUNTEDON THE EQUIPMENT, NOT TO THE CABLE CONNECTORS

I
Pll
piq

(-iEq

NOTUSED
SHELF2
NOTUSED
[MALES

piiF-

piq

PI2
J13

PI0

J14

P5
MALE

ki
2
c

PI6

SHELF1
P17

TiiINTERCONNECT BOARD

I I

fYlNNFi-.TnR

LUNNtLI

21 I I zl-l

J15

P16

Pi7

POWER FAILTRANSFER BOAR0

P18
P19
P301
P302

i--CONNECT
X-CONNECT
POWERSUPPLY
PRINTER OR
RECORDING

nFVICF
L - . , - L

Fig. A3-3

A34

P: 103

MAINTENANCE
PANEL

P20
P21

X-CONNECT
X-CONNECT

SX-200 Connector

1
1

Locations

.,oc
,‘"" ,‘

SECTION

TABLE
PLUG

Pi (Connects

A3-1

to Cross
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

001

30
5
31
3:

w-s
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O

009

7
33
8

O-R
R-G’
G-R

34
9
35

017

;:
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

025

42
17
43
18
44
19

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

46
21
47
22
48
23
49

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR

50
25

v-s
s-v

002
003
004

010
011
012

018
019
020

026
027
028
033
034
035
036
041
042
043
044

SHELF

1 EXTERNAL

Connect

PLUG

AND

JACK

MITL9105/911.0~98-350

CONNECTIONS

Field)

Lead Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

Tl reserved for
Rl test line
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

002 *

Tl
Rl
T2
T3
R2

010 *

004

012

R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
T2
XT1

Tl
Rl

Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

018*

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

026 *

020

028

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

034 *

Tl
Rl
T2

042 *

E
R3
T4
R4

044

036

SPARE
SPARE

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
El
RR1

Card
Positions

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Al

Tl
Rl

;;2
XT1
T2
R2

Trunks
E&Mt

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

F-z?

SPARE
SPARE
1121

RR and TR leads

A3-5

SECTION

MITL910519110-98-350
MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE A3-1 SHELF 1 EXTERNAL

PLUG P2 (Connects

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

005

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

013

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

021

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

029

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

037

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

045

50
25

v-s
s-v

006
007
008

014
015
016

022
023
024

030
031
032

038
039
040

046
047
048

(CONT’D)

Field)

Lead Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

T5
I35
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

006 *

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

014*

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

008

016

022 *

024

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

030*

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

038 *

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

046 *

032

040

048

SPARE
SPARE

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-6

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE
T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

Trunks
E&Ml
T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Card
Positions

SPARE
SPARE
RR and TR leads

1i24

SECTION

TABLE A3-1 SHELF
PLUG P3 (Connects

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

049

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

057

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

065

3;
6
32
3:
8
34
10
36
11
37
12
38

050
051
052

058
059
060

066
067
068

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

073

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

081

089

49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

;“5

s-v

;9”
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19

46
21
2427
2438

v-s

1 EXTERNAL

074
075
076

082
083
084

090
091
092

Lead

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

MITL9105/9110-98-350

(CCNT’D)

Field)

Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

050 *

052

XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

058*

Tl
Rl
T2

066 *

E
R3
T4
R4

068

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

074 *

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

082 *

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

090 *

060

Tl
Rl

xR:2
XT1
T2
R2

Trunks
E&Mt
Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Card
Positions

Tl
TR&
RR1
El
Ml

sx-

076

084

092

SPARE
SPARE

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Ii;

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

xR:2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
xR:2
XT1
T2
R2

iii
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

:.:.

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

-.,.
2:.
._ .-a:
..

12
See Note

SPARE
SPARE

Note:
Position
12 can be used for lines, trunks, or receiver #4 card.
t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
RR and TR leads
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-7

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE A3-1 SHELF

PLUG P4 (Connects

Pair

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

053

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Lead Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

055

-7;
R7

056

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

061

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

062 *

064

XT3
T4
R4

069

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

070 *

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

077

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

078 *

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

085

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

086 *

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7

094 *

50
25

v-s
s-v

062
063
064

070
071
072

078
079
080

086
087
088
093
094
095
096

T2
Fi2

;:4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Card
Positions

072

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

I
8

9
I

080

088

096

SPARE
SPARE

T2
R2

z4
XT3
T4
R4

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

7:
R8

Note:
Position
12 can be used for lines, trunks or receiver card #4.
t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect RR and TR leads
* Trunk Eauipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-8

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DlDillE
E&Mt

054 *

054

(CCNT’D)

Field)

T5
R5
T6

3:
10
36
11
37

1 EXTERNAL

SPARE
SPARE

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2
TR2.RR2
E2
M2

T2
TR:2
RR2
E2
M2

12
See Note

SECTION
TABLE
PLUG P5 (Connects

A3-1 SHELF

1 EXTERNAL

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

MITL9105/9110-98-350
(CGNT’D)

to Plug P17)
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

RECEIVER

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T (A)
R (4
S DATA OUT T (A)
S DATA OUT R (A)
S DATA IN T (A)
S DATA IN R (A)
PA2 Control
B
PA2 Control A

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
s-v

-f (4
R (4
S DATA OUT T (A)
S DATA OUT R (A)
S DATA IN T (A)
S DATA IN R (A)
PA1 Control
B
PA1 Control A

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

MUSIC
MUSIC

v-s
s-v

097
098
099
100
105
106
107
108

Lead Designation
Line
Tl
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks
098 *

100

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

106*

108

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE
Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Trunks

E&MT

No. 1

Card
Positions

Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

13
See Note

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

14
See Note

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
No. 2

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
No. 1

IN B
IN A

TEST LINE
MUSIC
E%lF3E
PA1 OUT A
PA2 OUT B
PA2 OUT A
SPARE
SPARE

SPARE
SPARE

ON HOLD

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TABLE A3.1 SHELF

PLUG P8 (Connects

Pair
Color

1 EXTERNAL

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Lead Designation
Line

101

2;
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

109

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T (4
R (4
S DATA OUT T (B)
S DATA OUT R (B)
S DATA IN T (B)
S DATA IN R (B)
R Wl)
Kl

42
17
43
18
44
19
4:

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BP-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T (4
R (4
S DATA OUT T (B)
S DATA OUT R (B)
S DATA IN T (B)
S DATA IN R (B)
UART IN
UART OUT

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

R (K5)

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

102
103
104

110
111
112

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

T5
R5
T6
R6 Lines
T7
R7
T8
R8

102*

T5
R5
T6
R6 Lines
T7
R3
T8
R8

110*

RECEIVER

108

112

Lead Designation
CO
DID/TIE
Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R7

Tl
Rl

Trunks
E&Mt
Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

No. 1

Card
Positions

13
See Note

14
See Note

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
SPARE
16
NOT USED
NIGHT

BELL

MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE

NIGHT

::K4)

NIGHT

BELL

SERVICE

:4K3)

NIGHT

BELL 3

!;K2)
K2

NIGHT

BELL 2

Note:
Positions
14 and 13 can be used for lines or trunks, or for receiver
t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
RR and TR leads
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-10

to Plug P18)

w-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

26
1
27
2
28

(CCNT’D)

SPARE
SPARE
cards

#2 and #3

respectively,

1111

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A3-2 INTERCONNECT
BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
CONNECTOR
513 MAINTENANCE
CONSOLE
CONNECTOR
514 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
(Connected
To Maintenance
Panel)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER
SWB
CUTOVER
SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
33
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

46
21
47
32
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
?5

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BP
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GFiOUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

NO 2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-350

TABLE A3-2 INTERCONNECT
BOARD PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
CONNECTOR
J15 ATTENDANT
CONSOLE NO 1

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

w-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTRaSTATIC
ELFCTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

A3-12

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

(CONT’D)

SECTION
TABLE A3-2 SHELF
PLUG PI (Connects

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

161

337
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

177

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

185

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

193

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

50
25

v-s
s-v

3:
6
32

2 (SX-200 ONLY) EXTERNAL

Lead Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks
162*

169

170*

170

7;
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

172

163
164

171
172

178
179
180

186
187
188

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
I T4
R4

164

178*

180

186*

188

194*

194

Tl
Rl
T2

195

196

7:
R4

201

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

202
203
204

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Field)

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

162

MITLSI 051911 O-98-350

202 *

204

SPARE
SPARE

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE
Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

SPARE
SPARE
RR and TR leads

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
TRAl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Card
Positions

Tl
TR:1
RR1
El
Ml

;;2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Trunks
E&Mt

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A3-2 SHELF 2 (SX-200 ONLY) EXTERNAL
PLUG P8 (Connects

I
I

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

Lead

PLUG AND JACK CObiNECTlCNS

Field)

Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

Lead
co

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29

W-EL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR

165

166*

166
167

?i
R6
T7

168

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

173

174

175

TR76
R7
T8
R8

176

34
9
35
10
36

181

182*

182

183

F
R7
T8
fl8

184

!!+4
XT3
T4
R4

;:
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

xl
is
39
14
40
15
41
16

&$
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

190”

192

Iz4
XT3
T4
R4

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

197

19a*

198

7:
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

200

;:4
XT3
T4
R4

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

205

206 *

208

;;4
XT3
T4
R4

50
25

v-s
s-v

RK-G

176

184
189

190
191
192

199
200

206

T5
R5
T6
?Y

207
208

174*

SPARE
SPARE

12
R2

T2
R2

Trunks
E&Mt
T2
R2
TR2
RR2

Card
Positions

!z4
XT3
T4
R4

SPARE
SPARE
RR and TR leads

Designation
DID/TIE

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

7:
R8

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-14

(CCNT’D)

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
TR:2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2

T2
TR;2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
?:2
RR2
E2
M2

SECTION
TABLE A3-2 SHELF 2 (SX-200 ONLY) EXTERNAL
PLUG P9 (Connects

Pair
Color

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

MITL9105/9110-98-350

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Field)

Lead

Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

Trunks
E&Mt

Card
Positions
1

26
2:
2;
2;
4
I

30
3;
6
32
3;
a
34
9
35
10
36
::
12
38

14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
ia
44
19
40”
47
47
22
4:

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

210
211

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3

210*

212

7:
R4

w-s

217

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

218

219

220

7:
R4

225

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

226*

228

XT1
T2
R2

234 *

236

XT1
T2
R2

242 *

s-w

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

226
227
228

2la*

220

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

233

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

241

242

243

7:
R3
T4
R4

244

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

249

Tl
Rl
T2

250 *

?i
R3
T4
R4

252

s-v

Tl
Rl

;;2
XT1
T2
R2

212

v-s
2”:

209

Tl
;+2
XT1
T2
R2

236

244

250
251
252

R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

SPARE
SPARE

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
*Trunk
Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

;;2
XT1
T2
R2

TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl

Iz2
XT1
T2
R2

El-1

234
235

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1

Tl
Rl

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

SPARE
SPARE
RR and TR leads

1111

A3-15

SECTION

MITL9105/9!10-98.350

TABLE A3-2 SHELF 2 (SX-200 ONLY) EXTERNAL
PlO (Connects

PLUG

to Cross Connect
Equipment
Numbers
Lines

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

221

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

229

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

237

238

239

240

7;
R7
T8
R8

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

245

246*

246

7:
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

248

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

253

254 *

254

7:
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

50
25

v-s
S-V

215
216

222
223

Designation
Line

Equipment
Numbers
Trunks

214

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

214*

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7

222*

216

224

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE
T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
A4

T2
R2

Trunks
E&MT

Card
Positions

T2
R2
TR2
RR2

224
R8

230
231

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7

I
230 *

232

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

232

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

-1
I
9

247
248

255
256

I
238*

256

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

F4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
10
L??

T2
TR:2
RR2
E2
M2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
12
I

SPARE
SPARE

t For 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
DO NOT connect
* Trunk Equipment
Number for 2 Trunk Card

A3-16

(CONT’D)

Field)

Pair
Color

213

Lead

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

SPARE
SPARE
RR and TR leads

_.I,JI

I
SECTION
TABLE A3-2

INTERCONNECT

P18 (Miscellaneous

PLUG

BOARD

Connections

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

to Cross

ain

Pair
Color

!6
1
27
2
?8
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-GR
GR-R

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-0
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

MUSIC IN B
MUSIC IN A
PA2 OUT B
PA2 OUT A
NIGHT BELL 28
NIGHT BELL 2A
PA1 OUT B
PA1 OUT A

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

NIGHT BELL 1 B
NIGHT BELL 1A
PA 1 CONTROL
PA 1 CONTROL
PA 2 CONTROL
PA 2 CONTROL
NIGHT SERVICE
NIGHT SERVICE

50
25

v-s
s-v

NIGHT BELL 38
NIGHT BELL 3A

Connect

M ITL91051911 O-98-350
(CONT’D)

Field)

Note:
(1) Night service relay operates permanently
in night service.
Night Bell continuous
rating:
Open circuit voltage 12OVrms
Closed circuit current 75mArms

Lead Designation

when

(2) Music in 100mV
Impedance
600 Ohms
(3) PA Output
Impedance

Level 100mV
600 Ohms

B
A
B
A
B
A

A3-17 I

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE m-2 PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
PLUG P19 ON INTERCONNECT
CARD PN9110-02A
(Miscellaneous
Connections
to Cross Connect Field)

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

Pair
Color

Lead Line
Designation

26
1

W-BL
BL-W

SPARE
SPARE

27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5

w-o
o-w

31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9

R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R

T6
R8
T7
R7
T6
R6
T5
R5

T4
R4
XT3
XT4
T3
R3

35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13

R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK
BK-G
G-BK

T8
R8
T7
R7
T6
R6
T5
R5

T4
R4
XT3
XT4
T3
R3

39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17

BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y

43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21

Y-G
G-Y

47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w

RECEIVER

BOARD (CONT’D)

Trunk
E&M+

T2
R2

E2
M2
TR2
RR2
T2
R2

T2
R2

M2
TR2
RR2
T2
R2

Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V

T2
R2
XT1
XT2
Tl
Hl

v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
s-v

T4
R4
T3
R3
T2
R2
Tl
Rl

T2
R2
XT1
XT2
Tl
Rl

DO NOT connect

CARD
POSITIONS

T4
R4
T3
R3
T2
R2
Tl
Rl

tFor 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation
A3-18

TO INTERCONNECT

Tl
Rl

El
Ml
TRl
RR1
Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl

El
Ml
TRl
RR1
Tl
fii

RR and TR leads

SECTION

TABLE

A3-2 INTERCONNECT

BOARD

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

MITL9105/9110-98-350

(CONT’D)

CONNECTOR
5302
DATA PORT (SEE NOTES)

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Note 1.
2.

Lead
Designation
ov
TRANSMIT DATA
RECEIVE DATA
CLEAR TO SEND
DATA SET READY
SIGNAL GROUND
CARRIER DETECT

P303 sx-100
PIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Key
OOT
- 1OVdc
Power B
Power A
Spare

P303 sx-200
PIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

- 10Vdc
Power A
Power B
OOT
Key
Spare

DATA TERM READY

Connector
J302 is common to the SX-100 and SX-200 PABX.
See Section MITL9105/9110-98-450,
Traffic Measurement,
for applications

of the connector.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350
TABLE A3-3

PLUG P20
(Power Fail Transfer
Connect
Field)

POWER FAIL TRANSFER

Connections

BOARD

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

PLUG P21
(Power Fail Transfer
Connect Field)

to Cross

Connections

to Cross

Pair
Color

Lead
Designation

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-GR
GR-W
W-BR
BR-W

STATION .Tl
STATION Rl
LINE CARD Tl
LINE CARD Rl
TRUNK Tl
TRUNK Rl
TRUNK CARD Tl
TRUNK CARD Rl

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

STATION T7
STATION R7
LINE CARD T7
LINE CARD R7
TRUNK T7
TRUNK R7
TRUNK CARD T7
TRUNK CARD R7

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

STATION T2
STATION R2
LINE CARD T2
LINE CARD R2
TRUNK T2
TRUNK R2
TRUNK CARD T2
TRUNK CARD R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

STATION T8
STATION R8
LINE CARD T8
LINE CARD R8
TRUNK T8
TRUNK R8
TRUNK CARD T8
TRUNK CARD R8

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

STATION T3
STATION R3
LINE CARD T3
LINE CARD R3
TRUNK T3
TRUNK R3
TRUNK CARD T3
TRUNK CARD R3

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

STATION T9
STATION R9
LINE CARD T9
LINE CARD R9
TRUNK T9
TRUNK R9
TRUNK CARD T9
TRUNK CARD R9

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

STATION T4
STATION R4
LINE CARD T4
LINE CARD R4
TRUNK T4
TRUNK R4
TRUNK CARD T4
TRUNK CARD R4

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

STATION TlO
STATION RlO
LINE CARD TlO
LINE CARD RlO
TRUNK TlO
TRUNK RlO
TRUNK CARD TlO
TRUNK CARD RlO

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

STATION T5
STATION R5
LINE CARD T5
LINE CARD R5
TRUNK T5
TRUNK R5
TRUNK CARD T5
TRUNK CARD R5

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

STATION Tl 1
STATION Rll
LINE CARD Tll
LINE CARD Rll
TRUNK Tll
TRUNK Rll
TRUNK CARD Tll
TRUNK CARD Rll

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

STATION T6
STATION R6
LINE CARD T6
LINE CARD R6
TRUNK T6
TRUNK R6
TRUNK CARD T6
TRUNK CARD R6

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

STATION T12
STATION R12
LINE CARD T12
LINE CARD R12
TRUNK T12
TRUNK R12
TRUNK CARD T12
TRUNK CARD R12 _-

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

A3-20

Note:

-.
Plug

21 is not installed

on SX-100 equipment.

SECTION

PLUG P7 (Connects

TABLE A3-4 SHELF
to Cross Connect

2 EXTERNAL
Field)

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Line

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

TI
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
Rl
T2
R2’
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation

DO NOT connect

MITL9105/9110~98-350

Trunks
E&M?

Card
Positions

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

: T.
‘:,
.::.,

Tl
RI

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

RR and TR leads
A3-21

SECTION

MlTL9105/9110-98.350

TABLE A3-4 SHELF 2 EXTERNAL
PLUG P8 (Connects to Cross Connect Field)
Pin

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Lines

Lead Designation Trunks
co
DID/TIE E&W

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V’BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

50
25
-

4-For

83-22

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

v-s
s-v
- .__. --_-

z-wire

E&M

TrUnK

OperatlOn

SPARE
SPARE
-- _.-..
UO

NOT

SPARE
SPARE
Connect

RR and TR leads

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

(CONT’D)

Card
Positions

SECTION
TABLE A3-4 SHELF
PLUG P9 (Connects

to Cross

2 EXTERNAL
Connect

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

(CONT’D)

Field)

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Line

Lead Designation
co
DID/TIE

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

TI
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

tFor 2-Wire E&M Trunk operation

MITL9105/9110-98-350

DO NOT connect

Trunks
E&Mf

Card
Positions

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

Tl
Rl
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

RR and TR leads
A3-23

r
SECTION

MITL9105/911

O-98-350

TABLE A3.4 SHELF
PLUG PI0

(Connects

to Cross Connect

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

(CONT’D)

Field)

Pair
Color

Lead Designation
Lines

Lead Designation
Trunks
co
DID/TIE
E&M?

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

tFor P-Wire E&M Trunk operation
A3=24

2 EXTERNAL

DO NOT connect

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Card
Positions

RR and TR leads

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

SECTION
TABLE A3-5 CONSOLE
JACK 522
(Connects to Attendant

INTERFACE

Console

BOARD

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-E3L
BL-R
R-O
O-R

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS
PLUG P23
(Connects
to Jack J15)

MITL9105/9110-98-350
(SX-200 ONLY)

Pair
Coior

Lead Designation

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

‘6
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUND

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

!
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND

GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

A3-25

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

TABLE A3-5 CONSOLE
JACK J24
(Connects to Attendant

INTERFACE
Console

BOARD

--I

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

?6
1
?7
2
28
3
?9
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G

G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROL
ELECTROSTATIC
GROL
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROC
ELECTROSTATIC
GROL

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER
SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25

v-s
s-v

83-28

__~..

(SX-200 ONLY) (CONT’D)

PLUG P25
(Connects to Jack J14)

ov
~~~ -48V

PLUG AND JACK CONNECTIONS

GROU
GROU
GROU
GROlj
GROC
GROC
GROC
GROl

IND
IND
IND
IND
IND
JND
JND
JND

IND
IND

JND
JND

GROL JND
GROl JND

GROl JND
GRO: JND

GROl
GROL
GROl
GROl
GROl
GROl

JND
JND
JND
JND
JND
JND

GROl JND
GROl JND

1->
11
I3
33

Pair
Color

Lead Designation

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R

R-G
G-R

DATA IN COMMON
DATA IN
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUNI
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUNI
DATA OUT COMMON
DATA OUT
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUN’
ELECTROSTATIC
GROUN

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
CUTOVER SWB
CUTOVER SWA
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
MAJOR ALARM
MAJOR ALARM

36
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

TIP
RING
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSJATIC
ELECTROSTATIC

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y

ELECTROSTATIC
ELECTROSTATIC
ov
-48V
OV
-48V
ov
-48V

46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

OV
-48V
ov
-48V
ov
-48V
OV
-48V

50
25
____

v-s
s-v

ov
-48V

GROUNC
GROUN[:
GROUNC
GROUN[
GROUNI
GROUNI
GROUNI
GROUNI D

D
D

1
D
D

GROUNI D
GROUNI D

GROUN
GROUN
GROUN
GROUN
GROUN
GROUN

D
D
D
D
D
D

GROUN D
GROUN D

--I
i

SECTION

JUMPERC

TIP
COTRUNK

JUMPERB

RING
/c-POWER FAIL
TRANSFER BOARD

JUMPERD
PABX
TRUNK
CARD EQUIPMENT
CABINET

STATION
JUMPERA

RING
1

FROM
P20orP21

F
D

Fig. A3-4

Power Fail Transfer

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER BOARD

TO
INTERCONNECT BOARD
RlNG(LINECARD)
RlNG(TRUNKCARD)
TIP(TRUNKCARD)
TIP(LINE CARD)
x

LINE CARD RING
TRUNKCARDRING
TRUNKCARDTIP
LINE CARDTIP

TIP

k;rD

JUMPER

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Block Diagram

RELAYS SHOWN IN
TRANSFER POSITION

TRANSFERCABLE

PABX EQUIPMENT CABLE

Fig. A3-5

Power Fail Transfer

Wiring

Diagram
A3-27

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

NIGHT BELL CONNECTION AUXILIARY RELAY
AI
V'
1

CROSS

INTERCONNECl

1 NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAXCURRENl
75mA

-48V OSA max

NIGHT BELL RELAY DIRECT DRIVE

NIGHT
BELL R(K)

CROSS
CONNECT

w
300!1

;

SCANNERCARD

INTERCONNECT
BOARD Pla

POWER
SUPPLY
TB2

---

NIGHT
BELL K

-----

Ol
NIGHT
BELL

O3
-4av FUSEDO.~A
9OV RINGING
FUSEDO.lA

NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAX CURRENT
75mA

"4
O5
~&?::I()~

%,,,',
----

CARD
---

O7
'8

INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG Pia
PIN

DESTINATION

NIGHT BELL 3 K3
NIGHT BELL 3 R(K3)

NIGHT BELL 1 Kl

NIGHT BELL 2 K2

NIGHT BELL 1 R(K1)

NIGHT BELL 2 R(K2)

Fig. A3-8

Night

Bell Connections

DESTINATION

SECTION

TABLE A3-8

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR
BOARD CONNECTIONS
TO CROSS-CONNECT
FIELD

Line
Pin

Pair
Color

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

W-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

50
25

v-s
s-v

SPARE
SPARE

Note:
t For

co
Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

Position
12 can be used for
2-Wire
E&M Trunk
operation

and

Trunk

Connections

Shelf

DID/lie

E & Mt

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T2
R2

Tl
Rl

T2
R2

Tl
Rl

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

1 Translator

Board

MITL9105/9110-98-350

(SHELF

Plug

Numbers

001’

025’

049’

073

002

026

050

074

003

027

051

075

004

028

052

076

005

029

053

077

006

030

054

078

007

031

055

079

008

032

056

080

009

033

057

081

010

034

058

082

011

035

059

083

012

036

060

084

013

037

061

085

014

038

062

086

015

039

063

087

016

040

064

088

017

041

018

042

066

090

019

043

067

091

020

044

068

092

021

045

069

093

022

046

070

094

023

047

071

095

024

048

072

096

065

’

089

lines, trunks
or receiver
#4 card.
DO NOT connect
RR and TR leads.

A3-29

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TABLE A3-8

BACKPLANE TRANSLATOR
BOARD CONNECTIONS
TO CROSS-CONNECT
FIELD
Line

Pair
Color

Connections

Shelf

Extn

DID/Tie

E & Mt

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Fil
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

Tl
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
Rl

Tl
Rl
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

T3
R3
XT4
XT3
T4
R4

T2
R2

T2
R2
TR2
RR2
E2
M2

w-BL
BL-W
w-o
o-w
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
w-s
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16

R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-0
0-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8
R8

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24

Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
v-o
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR

Tl
Rl
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4
T5
R5
T6
R6
T7
R7
T8

50
25
Note:
Position
12 can be used for
t For P-Wire
E&M Trunk
operation

Trunk

2 Translator

Board

Plug

Numbers

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

A3-30

and

(SHELF

lines, trunks
or receiver
#4 card.
DO NOT connect
RR and TR leads.

PlO

SECTION

INTERCONNECT
BOARD P18

SPEECH PATH
32

CROSS
CONNECT

----------

r-----

MITL9105/9110-98-350

I
I

MUSIC
SOURCE

;

FROMJUNCTOR
SEIZED FOR PA

I
'
]

ACTIVATE
PAI CONTROL

CONTROL
PAIR 1

I
>

FROM JUNCTOA
SEIZED FOR PA

----------------------~

)
*

A
ACTIVATE
PAZCONTROL

I
I

CONTACT RATING
MAX. 75mA
300R

I
I
I
I

8 48

CONTROL
PAIR 2

CUSTOMER
’L---------------SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT

TONE CONTROL CARD’

Fig. A3-7

Music

and PA Connections

PA
SYSTEM
2

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

HARDWARE/EllUIPMENT

NUMBERING

SHELF 2 (SX-200)

PLUGPl

PLUGPE

PLUGP4

PLUGP3

002

010

018

I 026

034

042

/ 050

058

066 1 074

082

090

003

011

019

1 027

035

043 j 051

059

067 1 075

083

091

008

016

024

032

040

048

056

064

072

080

088

096

I
1118

SHELF 1 SX-lOO/SX-200
NOTE:

EOUIPMENT POSITION 001 IS RESERVED FOR THE TEST LINE AND MUST
THEREFORE BE EDUIPPEDWITH A LINE CARD TRUNK EQUIPMENT NUMBER IS
SAMEASIN‘DIVIDUALTRUNKACCESS
CODE.

Fig. A3-8

Backplane

Translator

Board Plug Appearances

A3-32

SECTION
CARD

LEAD DESIGNATION

POSITION

/----TRUNKS----,
LINE
CO
DID/TIE
Ti
RI
T2
R2
T3
R3 .
T4
R4

LINE
A;
T2
R2
53

Ti
Rl
XT2
XT1
T2
RE

Tl
RI

P17

J14

Ji5

P18

P19

P25

P24

MITL9105/9110-98-350

P22

P23

DESTINATION

E&M
Tl
RI
TRl
RR1
El
Ml

!6
1
!7
2
28
3
29
4

X-CONNECT

-TRUNKS-&
CO

DID/TIE

Tl
RI
XT2
XT1
T2
R2

Tl
RI

Tl
RI
TRI
RR1
El
Ml

,
I

‘to,
-“,I

\
!

6
32
7
33
a

X-CONNECT

RECEIVER 1
NOTCONNECTED
TO CABLE

CONSOLE 2

T(A)
R(A)

DATA OUT T(A)
DATA OUT R(A)
DATA IN TIA)
DATA IN R(Aj
PA2 CONTROL B
PA2 CONTROL A
CONSOLE 1

WV
R(A)
DATA OUT T(A)
DATA OUT R(A)
DATA IN T(A)
DATA IN RiAj
PA1 CONTROL B
PAICONTROLA
MISCELLANEOUS
MUSIC IN B
MUSIC IN A
PA1 OUT B
PA1 OUT A
PAZOIJT B
PA2 OUT A

ITE

COh
COh

LE 1 CONNECTEDTOJ22
,THROUGH
LE 2 CONNECTED TO J24 ,THROUGH

P
P

Fig. A3-9

Interconnect

Board Cabling

A3-33

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350
SOURCE fINTERCONNECTBOARD)

J13

J14

Fig. A3-10

J15

Interconnect

P23

,177

Board Cabling

(Cont’d)

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

NIGHT BELL 1 Kl

MAINTENANCE CONSOLE

Fig. A3-11

Interconnect

Board Cabling

(Cont’d)

A3-35136

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

APPENDIX 4
SX-100 MECHANICAL INFORMATION
1.

GENERAL

A4.01 The MAPS contained

in this Appendix detail the procedures to be performed in all mechanical work
on the SX-100. These MAPS are used in conjunction
with the MAPS outlined in other sections of this
practice.
A4.02 Due to the similarity
both systems.

of the SX-100 to the SX-200, MAPS 350-501, 350-510, 350-511 are common

for

A4.03 There are three versions of the SX-100; rack mounted,
wall mounted
and cabinet mounted.
MAP350-400 deals with exposing each of the three versions of the system for mechanical
work.
A4.04 The basic synopsis of these MAPS is: a component
has been found to be defective, replace
MAPS in this appendix describe how to replace a part which is known to be defective. Location
the defective components
is the topic of Appendices
6 and 7, Parts 5 and 6.

it.
of

TABLE A4-I
SX-100 MECHANICAL
PROCEDURE
Title

Expose

Reference

System

M AP350-400

Replace

Interconnect,

Power Fail Transfer

Replace

Equipment

Replace

Power Supply

Replace

Reserve Battery

Replace

Maintenance

Replace

220V Adapter

Replace

Console

or Console

Replace

Translator

Board

Replace

Cards in Shelf

Shelf

and Console

Interface

Card

MAP350-401
MAP350-402
M AP350-403

Back-Up Supply

Panel

MA P350-404
MA P350-405
MAP350-406

Cable

MAP350-501
MAP350510
MAP350-51.1

A4-112

,I
I

SECTION
EXPOSE

TOOLS

THE

MITL9105/9110-98-350
SYSTEM

SX-100

REQUIRED

1 Screwdriver,

118 inch

1 Screwdriver,
% inch
flat blade
1 Phillips
screwdriver

AT THE FRONT
OF THE CABINET
(FIG. 400-l)
[2A]
Turn shelf power
off by turning
the svstem
Power Switch
off. on
maintenance
panel
[2B]
Turn both primary
power
switches off. If there
is a reserve
battery
pack turn the battery
pack switch
off (also)
[2C]
Remove
all AC power
cords
from
their receptacles

e---

AND

,
J

1
-

THE

SYSTEM

THE

AT THE FRONT
OF THE CABINET
(FIG. 400-l)
[3A]
Open the front
equipment
cabinet
door
[3B]
Turn shelf power
off by, turning
the system
power
switch
off
[3C]
Turn both
rimary
power
switches off. I P there is a reserve
battery pack turn the batterv . pack
switch
off also.
f3Dl
Remove
all AC Dower cords
from
their receptacles

SYSTEM

0 Is the system
rack mounted

YES

AT RACK
MOUNT
(FIG. 400-2)
[5A]
Remove
the eight,
6-32 binding
head screws
[5B]
Remove
the cabinet
cover

SWING

DOWN

16Dl

It-

[6E]

Unlock
top cover from cabinet
Remove
the cabinet
top cover
If the cabinet
is wall mounted
(Fig. 400-3) release
the strikes
and allow the svstem
to swina
down gently
Remove
the four. lo-32 bindina
head screws
from the back
cabinet
cover
Remove
the back cabinet
cover.

(G-)
A43

SECTION
1 EXPOSE

MITL91051911
THE

SYSTEM

O-98-350

SX-100

1 MAP3507400

I
I

Issue

1, March

Sheet

2 of 7

1980

SYSTEM SHELF POWER

MAINTENANCE PANEL
RETAINING SCREWS (4)
MAINTENANCE PANEL

PRIMARY POWER SWITCH

SHELF RETAINING SCREWS (8)

--_

146-3

EQUIPMENT SHELF

Fig.

400-l

SX-100

Cabinet

Mount
i

6 x 6-32 UNC

2 x

6-32"NC
1033745-02
'MOUNTING
BRACKET

INTERCONNECT

MALNTENANCE
PANEL
RETAINING SCREWS 14)

SHELF RETAINING
SCREWS (8)

Fig. 400-2

SX-100

Rack

Mount

_~
->

SECTION
EXPOSE

Fig. 400.3

Wall Mounting

THE

MITL9105/9110-98-350
SYSTEM

SX-100

SECTION
1 EXPOSE

M1TL9105/9110-98.350
THE

SYSTEM

SX-100

rack
AT THE REAR OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 400-4)
[8A]
Release
all cable
ties from the
cable
bar to allow 10 inches
(254cm)
of slack
[SB]
Disconnect
cables
Pl, P2, P3, P4,
P18, P19, P20, J13, J14, J15
[8C]
Disconnect
J302 (optional),
the
maintenance
panel connection
,a;a,;he
Out Of Tolerance
(OOT)
18Dl
(BE]
[8F]

IYES

[llA]

Remove
the 8, lo-32 retaining
screws
and washers
from the
equipment
shelf
11B
Remove
the ground
lug wire
the equipment
shelf and
I 11C I Remove
power
supply.
Note that the
power
supply
must be supported
-

3’
191A-

AND

ATTHE
REAR OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 400-4)
[9A]
Loosen
the cable
clamp
to allow
10 inches
(254cm)
of slack
[9B]
Disconnect
cables
Pl, P2, P3, P4,
P18, P19, P20, J13, J14, J15
[9C]
Disconnect
J302 (optional),
the
maintenance
panel connector
and the OOT cable
[SD]
Disconnect
the four cable
clamp
screws
from the power
supply
(Fig. 400-5)
[9E]
Remove
the power
cables
from
the back of the power
supply
[9F]
Disconnect
ground
wires
(from
system
cable
harness
and power
supply)
on system
ground
lug
[9G]
If system
was wall mounted
swing
back into position
(Fig.
400-2)

1 NO

181

Disconnect
the four cable clamo
screws
from the power
supply
’
(Fist. 400-5)
Reri-rove
the power
cables
from
the back of the power
supply
Disconnect
ground
wires
(from
system
cable
harness
and power
supply)
on system
ground
lug

AT THE FRONT
OF THE EQUIPMENT
(FIG. 400-3)
[lOAl
Remove
the four. lo-32
maintenance
panel retaining
screws
and washers
[lOB]
Remove
the maintenance
cable
tie from the side of the cabinet
[lOC]
Remove
the maintenance
Panel

mounted

AND

I-+
t

REMOVE MAINTENANCE

PANEL

1111
AND
r-l
REMOVE EQUIPMENT

SHELF

,’

84-6

:-.
,” ;

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

J15
CONSOLE 1

FAIL

Fig. 400-4

Rear Cable View

POWER SUPPLY
RETAINING SCREWS (3)

CABLESkWS

(4)

Fig. 400.5

Power Supply Cable Harness

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98~350

FRONT
[13A]

rIl4li

I
[15A]

[15B]

If the system
was wall
release
clips
on strikes
it to swing
down
gently
Connect
cables
Pl, P2,
P18, P19, P20, J13, J14,

mounted
and allow

[15D]
[15E]

[15Fl
[15G]

[13B]

Place equipment
supply
in position
Secure
equipment
8, lo-32 retaining

[14A]

Place

11481

Secure
lII:and
;;cure

EQUIPMENT
shelf

and

shelf
screws

power

with
and

SHELF

,
’

!-{

[14C]

MAINTENANCE

P3, P4,
J15 (Fig.

Connect
J302 (optional),
the
maintenance
panel connector
and the OOT cable (Fig. 400-5)
Pluft power
supply
connectors
to t e back of the power
supply
(Fig. 400-8)
Secure
power
supply
connectors
with four retaining
screws
Connect
cable
ground
lug
Secure
power
cable with new
cable ties

/NSTALL
EQUlPMENT

ANL

400-5)
[15C]

OF THE

the

maintenance

panel

with

four, lo-32 retaining
wasners
cable with a new cable

PANEL

1151

AND

in-

--u

CONNECT

CABLES

Was the system
rack mounted

YES

AT THE RACK MOUNT
LOCATION
(FIG. 400-4)
[17A]
Place cover
in position
[17B]
Secure
cover
with eight,
6-32
ding head screws

-WI 1
bin

-1181

’

AND

,
L\r
EvkFE

A48

AT THE CABINET
LOCATION
[18A]
Replace
rear cover
[18B]
Secure
the rear cover
lo-32
retaining
screws
[18C]
Replace
top cover
[18D]
Secure
top cover
by
[18E]
If the equipment
was
mounted,
swing
the
gently
and secure
in
with the clips on the

Y
I

(&ii--)

REPLACE
TOP
BACK
COVERS

A ND

with
locking
wall
cabinet
position
strikes

four,
it
up

SECTION
1 EXPOSE

THE

M ITL9105/911 O-98-350
SYSTEM

SX-100

1 MAP350-400
Issue

1, March

Sheet

7 of 7

I
1980
I

Was the system
rack mounted

YES

[20A]
[2OB]
&C]
[20D]

Connect
AC power
receptacles
I%:?“, pnth primary

cords
power

to the7

-m

swit-

LED on power
supply
panel lights
Turn battery
pack switch
on (optional)
Turn shelf power
on by turning
the system
shelf power
switch
on

[21A]
[21B]

AND

[2;C]
[21D]
[21E]
-

Connect
the AC
their receptacles
Turs “,o,th primary

power
power

cords

swit-

LED on power
supply
panel lights
Turn battery
pack switch
on (optional)
Turn shelf
power
on by turning
the system
shelf
power
switch
on
Close
and lock front door

SYSTEM

A4-9110

I..

SECTION

@I’

issue

1, March

Sheet

1 of 3

MITL9105/9110-98-350

1980

,
RETAINING SCREWS (I 1)

[lA]

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 9C of

AND

EXPOSE

SYSTEM

AT THE TOP OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 401-l)
[ZA]
Remove
P16, P17 and the
maintenance
panel connector
[2B]
Remove
power
cables
from the
power
terminal
blocks.
Also
remove
reserve
battery
backup
connection

[3Al
[3Bl

I21

’

AND
F

l-4

-TREMOVE

Fig.

401-l

Interconnect

Card

131 A-

Remove
the 11, 6-32 screws
that
secure
the interconnect
card to
the chassis
Remove
the interconnect
card

POW& TERMINAL
BLOCKS

CABLES

AND
I

REMOVE

INTERCONNECT

UNPACK
AND INSPECT
NEW lNTERCONNECT

CARD

-I
A4.11

i,.’

SECTKIN

Sheet

MITL9105/911

O-98-350

2 of 3

Fig.

A4-12

401-2

interconnect

Card

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE
INTERCONNECT,
POWER
FAIL TRANSFER
AND CONSOLE
INTERFACE
CARD
SX-100
1 MAP350-401
Issue

1, March

Sheet

3 of 3

I
.

1980

(
1 YES

(

[7A]
[7B]

Place new interconnect
tion (Fig. 401-l)
Secure
new interconnect
with 11, 6-32 screws

car!%A?ged

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

)qq[

in posicard
It-INSTALL
NEW
/NTERCONNECT

[BA]
[BB]

Connect
power
cable on power
blocks.
Also connect
reserve
battery backup
cables
if included
Connect
cables
P16, P17

C$JA;$z?;-?;;eps

11 to 20 of

CARD

AND

I--

-TCONNECT

-PI
[9A]

‘-.

CABLES

AND

FINISH
WORK

MECHANICAL

A4-13114

j‘

SECTION
REPLACE

-111 ’
[lA]

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 9F of

MITL9105/9110-98-350
EQUIPMENT

SHELF

W-100

POWER SUPPLY
RETAINING SCREWS (3)

AND
I
EXPOSE

AT THE
(FIG.

i2A].
[28]

REAR

OF THE

SYSTEM

402-i)

R&&e
the three screws
that
hold the power
supply
to the
equipment
shelf
Remove
the power
supply

THE

SYSTEM

1
4
1

REMOVE
SUPPLY

POWER

LE SCREWS (4)

AT THE FRONT
OF THE EQUIPMENT
[3A]
Remove
the eight,
lo-32 retaining
“,“,‘:,::,~,“,,~~~~h,~~o~~r~rs
l-p3
[3B]
Remove
the equipment
snelf

POWER SUPPLY
RETAINING SCREWS (3)

REMOVE

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Unpack
Inspect
Check
against

THE

EQUlPMENT

SHELF

new shelf from
new shelf for damage
shelf type and quantity
invoice
UNPACK
AND /NSPECT
NEW ECMPMENT
Fig.

402-l

Power

Supply

Mounting

A4-15

SECTION

3,
REPLACE

MITL9105/911
EQUIPMENT

O-98-350

SHELF

Sx-100

From

[4]

Was the correct
type of shelf
received

she!%$ged

)lqqi

AT THE FRONT
OF THE
(FIG. 402-2)
7A
Slide new shelf
into position
new shelf with four,, 10-32
I 78 I Secure
retaining
screws
and finishrng
washers

[8A]

[9A]

[lOA]

Secure
three,
402-l)

the power
supply
with
6-32 retaining
screws
(Fig.

Transfer
all cards
MAP350-510

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

AND

as per

15 to 22 of

I
A4-18

container
completed

and
sec-

(

IRepack
item in original
return
to sui pplier,
with
tion of Damage
IReport
c

COMPLETE
MECHANICAL
WORK AND POWER
UP THE SYSTEM

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and
return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

SECTION
REPLACE

MITL9105/9110-98-350
EQUIPMENT

SHELF

SX-100

MAP350-402
Issue

1, March

Sheet

3 of 3

1980

SYSTEM SHELF POWER

MAINTENANCE PANEL
RETAINING SCREWS (4)

'MAINTENANCE

-PRIMARY

,POWER

PANEL

POWER SWITCH

SUPPLY

SHELF RETAINING SCREWS (8)

EQUIPMENTSHELF

745
-3

FRONTVIEW

Fig.

402-2

Shelf

Mounting

Position

A4-17118

SECTION
1 REPLACE

MITL9105/9110-98-350

POWER

SUPPLY

SX-100

1 MAP350-403
) issue

1, March

[Sheet

lof2~

1980

g1
1 Screwdriver,

Complete
MAP350400

steps

l/8

inch

slotted

111
+----clI

1 to 9F of

POWER SUPPLY
RETAINING SCREWS (3)

AND

EXPOSE
SYSTEM

THE

REMOVE
SUPPLY

POWER
CABLES

AT THE REAR OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 403-l)
[2A]
Remove
four, lo-32 retaining
screws
that secure
the power
supply
cables

[3A]
[38]

Remove
the three,
6-32 power
supply
retaining
screws
Remove
the power
supply
to the
rear of the system

REMOVE
SUPPLY

[4Al
[4Bl
[4Cl

CABLE SCREWS(4)

Unpack
new power
supply
container
Inspect
new power
supply
damage
Check
Dower
SUDDIV tvDe
quantity
against
invoice

from
for
and

POWER SUPPLY
RETAINING SCREWS (3)

POWER

AND
I
UNPACK
AND /NSPECT
NEW POWER
SUPPLY

Fig.

403-l

Power

Supply

Mounting

A4-19

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

From

[4]

return

supplier,

with

completed

sec-

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

AT THE REAR OF THE
(FIG. 403-l)
(7A]
;b”,“e
new power
[7B]

Secure
three,

the
6-32

SYSTEM
supply

in posi-

AND

power
supply
with
retaining
screws
INSTALL
POWER

[8A]
[8B]
[8C]

Install
power
positions
Secure
power
4-40 retaining
Install
power

cables

in former

cables
screws
supply

with

NEW
SUPPLY

-181 ’
4

four,

AND

ground
IcNAsBT;9:sL POWER

ml
[9AJ

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

14 to 22 of

AND

COMPLETE
ALL
MECHANlCAL
WORK
AND
POWER
UP THE SYSTEM

A420

SECTION

M ITL91051911 o-98-350

REPLACE RESERVE BATTERY
BACK-UP UNIT SX-100

[lA]

Complete steps 1 to 5 of
MAP350-400

-cl
PI

AT THE TOP OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 404-l)
[2A] Remove the battery back-up
power cable from the terminal
block on the interconnect card

AND

Check
reserve
Check
battery

CAUTION
that the BATTERY switch on the
battery pack is set to OFF.
that the three switches on the
charging unit are set to OFF.

131
[3AJ

Remove reserve battery back-up
unit from existing location. Note
that the charger and batteries
are supplied as one unit
-

REMOVE

[4A]
48
t 4C I

Unpack new battery back-up unit
from container (Fig. 404-2)
Inspect new battery back-upunit
Check battery back-up unit and
quantity against invoice
-t-

RESERVE

IY
7
AND

INSPECT

Was the correct

NEW

RESERVE

Repack item in original container
return to supplier, with completed
tion of Damage Report

and
sec-

A4-21

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

J15
CONSOLE 1

FAll

I
TB301

I
BATTERY +EVdc

-5Vdc

BATTERY SPARE
I

I
SPARE

RESERVE BATTERY
BACKUP

/
TB302

~R$$~

I
-4BVdc

GROUND

I
9OVac

USER
-4BVdc
9OVac

1591
I

.Fig. 404-l

A4-22

SX-100 Power Terminal

Blocks (Interconnect

Board)

SECTION

VI
[7Al

Install new reserve battery
back-up unit in position

AND
i

J
INSTALL
BATTERY
UNIT

AT THE TOP OF THE CABINET
(FIG. 404-l)
[8A] Connect the reserve battery
back-u.p power cable to the terminal block on the interconnect
board

RESERVE
BACKUP

161

AND
i

Ti
1
CONNECT

CABLES

I11
[BA]

Complete steps 15 to 22 of
MAP350-400

AND

COMPLETE
MECHANICAL
WORK
AND POWER
UP THE SYSTEM

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACERESERVEBATTERY
BACK-UP UNIT SX-100

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

Fig.

A4-24

404-2

Example

of Reserve

Battery

Back-up

Unit

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98~350

REPLACE MAINTENANCE
PANEL SX-100
1MAP350-405
Issue 1, March 1980
Sheet 1 of 3

START

[lA]

Complete steps 1 to 8A of
MAP350-400

EXPOSE THE SYSTEM
AT THE TOP OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 405-l)
[2A] Unplug the maintenance panel
connector from the interconnect
board
[2B] Release the maintenance
Panel
cable tie from side of cabinet
[2C] ;~;ze
marntenance panel con-

I
AT THE FRONT OF THE SYSTEM
(FIG. 405-2)
[3A] Remove four, 8-32 retaining
screws and finishing washers
[3B] Remove the maintenance panel
to the front of the system

REMOVE THE MAlNTENANCE
PANEL CONNECTOR

REMOVE THE MAINTENANCE
PANEL

Repack

item in original

container

and

A4-25

J15
CONSOLE 1

TB301

Fig.

405.1

Maintenance

Panel

Connector

,
MAINTENANCE PANEL
RETAINING SCREWS (4)
MAINTENANCE PANEL

PRIMARY POWER SWITCH

_-a

-..__

/
EQUIPMENT SHELF

-.i
746.3

Fig.

4052

Maintenance

Panel

146-3

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

REPLACE
MAINTENANCE
PANEL
8.X-100

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and
return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

AT THE FRONT
OF THE EQUIPMENT
FIG. 4052)
6A]
install
new
maintenance
panel in
t
position
[6B]
Secure
maintenance
panel with
four, lo-32 retaining
screws
and
finishing
washers
MAINTENANCE

AT THE TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT
(FIG. 405-1)
[8A]
Install
the maintenance
panel
connector
on the interconnect
board
88
Secure
cable
with new cable
tie
maintenance
panel con-I 8C I_ Connect
nectar

034

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

AND

fNSTALL
PANEL

MAINTENANCE
CONNECTOR

14 to 22 of

COMPLETE
ALL MECHANICAL
WORK
AND POWER
UP THE SYSTEM

(,,,,,,

A427128

SECTION
IREPLACE

220V

MITL9105/9110-98-350
ADAPTER

SX-100

lMAP350-406

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 Screwdriver,
slotted

118 inch slotted
::
.,
::’

J---cl
111

[lA]

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 5 of

AND

AT THE TOP OF THE SYSTEM
[2A]
Remove
the three,
6-32 retaining
screws
of the 220V adapter
[2B]
Remove
the ground
strap from
the system
ground
lug
[2C]
F;$o;;
system
AC cord from
[2D]

[3Al
[3Bl
I3Cl
_ _

Remove

the

220V

-PI
4

THE

SYSTEM

REMOVE

THE

ADAPTER

’
AND

the

adapter

Uw ‘ack new 220V adapter
container
Inspect
new 220V adapter
dati rage
Che ck 220V adapter
type
quantity
against
invoice

EXPOSE

from
for
and
I-

UNPACK AND INSPECT
NEW

220V

Was the correct
type of 220V adapter

ADAPTER

Repack item in original container
b return to supplier, with completed
tion of Damage Report

and
sec.

YES

A4-29

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

Tag defective item, repack in original
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report
YES
AT THE TOP OF THE
(FIG. 406-l)
[6A]
;b”,“e
the 220V
[6B]
[6C]
[6D]

SYSTEM
adapter

361

in posi-

Secure
the 220V adapter
with
three,
6-32 retaining
screws
Secure
the ground
strap on the
system
ground
lug
Plug system
power
cord into the
220V adapter

AND

INSTALL
ADAPTER

[7A]

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

15 to 22 of

’ .
NEW

220V

-+-----~A:D

L-

b
COMPLETE
ALL MECHANICAL
WORK
AND POWER
UP
THE SYSTEM

A430

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

ZOVADAPTER

RETAINING
SCREWS(3)

Fig.

406-l

220V

Adapter

SECTION

MITL91051911

O-98-350

APPENDIX 5
SXm200MECHANICAL PROCEDURES
1.

GENERAL

A5.01 The MAPS contained

in this Appendix detail the procedures to be performed in all mechanical work
on the SX-200. These MAPS are used in conjunction
with the MAPS outlined in other sections of this
practice. They will facilatate ease of replacement
of component
parts.
A5.02 The basic synopsis
MAPS, replace it.

of this part; a component

part has been judged

to be defective

by the use of the

TABLE A5-1
SX-200 MECHANICAL
PROCEDURE
Title

or Console

Cable

Reference

Replace

Console

Replace

Interconnect

Replace

Power Fail Transfer

Replace

Console

Replace

First or Second

Replace

Heat Sink Assembly

MAP350-506

Replace

Power Supply

MAP350-507

Replace

Reserve Battery

Replace

Translator

Replace

Cards in Shelf

Replace

Maintenance

Replace

Wiring

MAP350501

Card

Interface

MAP350502
Card

MAP350-503

Card

MAP350-504

Shelf

MAP350-505

Assembly
Back-Up

Board

Supply

MAP350-508
MA P350-509
MAP350-510

Panel

Harness

MAP350-511
MAP350-512

A5-1 I2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

REPLACE
CONSOLE
OR CONSOLE
CABLE

AND
SX-200

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 Screwdriver
0.25 inch blade

AT NEW CONSOLE
[2A]
Remove
fiberglass
tape from top
of packing
case
[2B]
Open
packing
case and remove
foam sheet
[2C]
Remove
foam inserts
from ends
of console
(if installed)
12Dl
Remove
console
accessory
_ baa_ _
from insert
from oackina
-12El . Remove console
case
sheet
from
.12Fl - Remove oolvethvlene
console
.
[2G]
Place all packing
materials
in
paec,:‘ng
case for use in reshrp-

(A--)

--cl
PI

AND
I

UNPACK
NEW CONSOLE

AT NEW CONSOLE
[3A]
Remove
the two cradle
hooks
and four panhead
screws
from
accessory
bag
[3B]
Place console
face down
on desk
[3C]

13Dl
- .
[3E]
[3F]

%ition
one cradle
hook as
shown
in Fig. 501-l.
(Cradle
hook
may be placed
at other
end of
console
if preferred)
Attach
cradle
hook to console
usina
two oanhead
screws
Position
remaining
cradle-hook
(Fig. 501-l)
Attach
cradle
hook to console
with two panhead
screws

Fig. 501-l
INSTALL
HOOKS

NEW CRADLE
(FIG.

501-l)

,: ...
j.-:
.:.
_-

A5-3

;

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

1
TO SYSTEM

AT NEW CONSOLE
[4A] Remove the four screws securing
the connector cover plate (Fig.
[4B]

“ve

connector

cover plate
REMOVE NEW CONSOLE
CONNECTOR
(FIG. 502-2)

COVER

PLATE

Fig.

[5A]

Remove the four screws securing
the connector cover plate (Fig.

[5B]

%k%e

connector

cover plate

REMOVE
OLD
CONNECTOR
(FIG. 507-2)

CONSOLE
COVER
PLATE

[7A]

Construct and run a new console
cable as per Appendix 2

CONSTRUCT
NEW

A5-4

CABLE

501-2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

REPLACE CONSOLE AND
OR CONSOLE CABLE SX-200

fSA]
_ [SB]
f8Cl
. -

Remove the securing screw from-I
the console connector
Position and press home console
connector
Secure connector to console with
the securing screw
/

9
4

From [fl
:,t-;._

AND

NTBp_LcEHCONNECTOR

PI ‘I

1
9A

Replace connector

cover plate

I98 I Replace the four cover plate
screws

AND

ON NEW CONSOLE
REPLACE
CONNECTOR
COVER
PLATE
-1101

[liA]

Place console

in correct

AND

posit

I
[12A] Remove handset

-r

’

POSITION

CONSOLE

from accessory

[12B] #ce

handset

plug into console

(12C] %e

handset

on cradle hook

AND

:
::

PLUG IN
HANDSET

(Xi-)

A5.5

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.350

From 1121

[i3A]

Repack the defective console
per M ITL9105/911 o-98-200
[13B] Return to MITEL

FINISH

A5-8

SECTION
REPLACE

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 Screwdriver
0.25 inch blade

[lA]
1B
I 1CI
[lD]
[lE]
[lF]
[lG]

MITL9105/9110~98-350

INTERCONNECT

CARD SX-200

Unlock and open front door
Unlock and open rear door
Unlock and open rear panel
assembly
z;t SYSTEM POWER switch to
Set all power switches on rear
door to off
Set battery switch to off
Remove power cable(s) from
commercial AC source

POWER

SYSTEM

AT REAR OF CABINET
[2A] Remove cables J13, J14, J15,
P16, P17, P18, P19 (Fi . 502-l)
[2B] Remove cable from R ti 232 Port
(optional)
[2Cl Remove OOT cable and
maintenance
panel connectors
[2D] Remove power cable from terminal block

AND

REMOVE

CABLES

AT THE REAR OF THE CABINET
[3A] Loosen cable clamps so that the
cables have approximately
10 inches (254cm) of slack (Fig. 502-l)
AT THE FRONT OF THE CABINET

(FIG.

Fli2)Unscrew
8 8-32 x 318 inch retaining sciews from the front of
the equipment shelves
[3C] Pull equrpment shelves forward
approximately
two inches

[4A]
[4B]

Remove six, 8-32 x 318 inch
screws that secure Interconnect
card
Remove the Interconnect card

I-

I
PULL

141

SHELVES

FORWARD

‘I

AND
~~iM;VE

(,.,,,)

INTERCONNECT

A57

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

ui
REPLACE

INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-200

_Fig.

B-8

502-l

Rear

Door

Cable

Locations

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

MAINTENANCEPANEL

EQUIPMENTSHELF

SHELF 1
- RETAINING SCREWS (8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 1

RESERVE POWER SHELF

Fig. 502-2

Equipment

Shelf

‘T’
From [S]

[5A
[5B
[5C]

Unpack
Inspect
damage
Check
against

card from container
card for physical
(Fig. 502-3)
card type and quantity
invoice

UNPACK AND
INSPECT CARDS

SECTION
IREPLACE

MITL9105/9110-98-350
INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-200

MAP350-502
issue

1, March

Sheet

4 of 5

1980

MAINTENANCE
PANEL
P301

OUT OF
TOLERANCE
P303
\

6 a-32
3180 SCREWS

TB301
POWER SUPPLY
TERMINAL

ATT
COlr'dOLE 2
J15

P17
INTERCONNECT
CABLE

ATT
CONSOLE1
J14

P19
MISCELLANEOUS

!w
CAPACITOR

J302 RSi32 PORT
PRINTER
RECi-fDING
DEVICE

- 48VdC
CONSOLE
FUSE
1.5 AMP FAST BLO

\
MAINTENANCECONSOLE
J13

Fig.

502-3

P16
INTERCONNECT
CABLE

interconnect

Was the
correct
type
of card received

Pia
MISCELLANEOUS

Card

Repack

item

original

container

YES

Go to

A51 0

[8]

""*

and

SECTION
REPLACE

MITL9105/9110-98.350

INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-200

[8A]
[8B]

Place Interconnect
tion (Fig. 502-l)
Sme+;~~;~
wrth

card
six,

8-32

in posix 318
--I--

181
5
AND

1 Issue

1, March

Sheet

5 of 5

1980

INSTALL

NEW

lNTERCONNECT

AT THE FRONT
OF THE CABINET
[9A]
Push shelves
back into original
position
[9B]
Secure
the shelves
with 8, 8-32
x 3/8 inch finishing
screws
and
washers
[9C]
Secure
cables
in cable clamps
REPOSITION

[lOA]
[lOB]
[lOC]
[lOD]

Plug in cables
J13, J14, J15, P16,
P17, P18, P19 (Fig. 502-l)
Replace
cable
from RS232 Port
(optional)
Replace
OOT cable
and
maintenance
cable connectors
!$p$ce
power
cable
in terminal
-

Turn SYSTEM
POWER
switch
on
Close
and lock front door
Set
battery
switch
on
[llC]
!
[llD]
(Close and lock rear panel
assembly
and rear door
[ll E] Replace
power
cables
into commercial
AC source
[llF]
Set atl power
switches
on rear Idoor to on

-u

SHELVES

1101

AND

CABLE
CARD

NEW

INTERCONNECT

IllA]

El
[*.I1 -,

CLOSE
AND
;;iT;gWER

LOCK
UP

DOORS

FINISH

A5-11112

I
i

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE
POWER
CARD
SX-200

FAIL

MAP350503

TOOLS
1 Screwdriver,

REQUIRED
.25 inch

flat

blade

(,,,,)

[lA]
[l B]
[lC]
[ID]

_flE] _
[lF]
[lG]

Unlock
and
Unlock
and
Unlock
and
assembly
S$ SYSTEM

open
open
open

front
rear
rear

POWER

Ill
+--cl

door
door
panel
switch

AND

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to-off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

POWER
DOWN

SYSTEM

PI
AT REAR OF CABINET
[2A]
Remove
power
[2B]
,m,inJfborzrzrrom

cable from terPower
Fall

AND

--I

AT REAR OF THE CABINET
[3A]
Loosen
all cable clamps
so that
the cables
have aooroximatelv
10
inches
(254cm)
of slack (Fig. ’
503-l)
;J3;yE
[3B]
[3C]

[4A]
[4B]

FRONT

OF THE

CABINET

REMOVE
CABLES
(FIG. 503-l)

i
I

(FIG.

Unscrew
8, 8-32 x 3/8 inch retaining
screws
from the front of
the equipment
shelves
Pull equrpment
shelves
forward
approximately
two inches

PULL

SHELVES

FORWARD

Remove
six, 8-32 x 318 inch
screws
that secure
the Power
Fail Transfer
card
;$ove
the Power
Fail Transfer

REMOVE
TRANSFER

POWER
CARD

FAIL

Issue

1, March

Sheet

1 of 5

1980

TRANSFER

SECTION

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98-350

2 of 5

P21

I’
-7-n

CABLECiAMP

Fig.

A5-14

503-l

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

REPLACE POWER FAIL TRANSFER
CARD SX-200

MAP350-503
issue 1, March 1980
Sheet 3 of 5

MAINTENANCE PANEL

- RETAINl?l~Es'~FfEWS (8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 2

SHELF 1
- RETAINING SCREWS (8)

- EQUIPMENT SHELF 1

RESERVE POWER SHELF

Fig. 503-2

Equipment

Shelf

‘-i

From 141

t5A58 I
[5C]

Unpack card from container
Inspect card for physical
damage (Fig. 503-3)
Check card type and quantity
against invoice

.“‘.
::,r,
.;

AND

UNPACK AND
INSPECT CARD

Goto[61

’

)

A5-15

SECTION

1 Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98.350

4 of 5

P21
POWER

Fl-2A

POWER
FAII
.._
TRANSFER
RELAYS

3
l

4
5
6

c
\

1 cI 0
6

\
POWER FAIL
TRANSFER
LED

POWER FAIL
TRANSFER
RELAYS

Fig. 503-3

From [5]

(

car%r!?ged

)=dj

)

Repack item in original container
return to supplier, with completed
tion of Damage Report

and
sec-

Tag defective item, repack in original
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

1 Sheet 5 of 5

[8A]
(861

Place new Power Fail Transfer
card in position (Fig. 503-l)
~~mre;cJ
with SIX, 8-32 x 318

INSTALL
NEW
FAIL TRANSFER

POWER
CARD

AT THE FRONT OF THE CABINET
[9A] Push shelves back into original
position
[9B] Secure the shelves with 18, 8-32
x 318 inch finishing screws and
washers
[9C] Secure cables in cable clamps
REPOSITION

SHELVES

Plug in cables P20, P21
1OB I Replace power cable in terminal
t10A
block on Power Fail Transfer
card

-TE;M3bE

Turn SYSTEM POWER switch on
Close and lock front door
Set battery switch on
Close and lock rear panel
assembly and rear door
[ll E] Replace power cables into commercial AC source
[llF] Set all power switches on rear
door to on

NEW

INTERCONNECT

AND

LOCK
UP

4111
4

AND
i
CLOSE
iliT;;WER

DOORS

A517118

SECTION

REPLACE
INTERFACE

MITL9105/9110-98.350

CONSOLE
CARD

SX-200

MAP350-504

TOOLS
REQUIRED
1 Screwdriver
0.25 inch blade
1 Wrench
7116 inch

[lA]
[lB]
IlCl
[lD]
[lE]
[lF]
[lG]

[2A]

Unlock
and
Unlock
and
Unlock
and
assembly
zf”f’ SYSTEM

open
open
open

front
rear
rear

POWER

cables

P22,

1, March

Sheet

1 of 4

1980

door
door
panel
switch

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

Remove

Issue

P23,

P24,

POWER
DOWN

SYSTEM

P25

ZNDCONSOLE
NTERFACE CARD

REMOVE
CABLES
‘F/G. 504-l)
lo-32 SCREW HOLES

AT REAR OF THE CABINET
[3A]
Loosen
all cable
clamps
so that
10
the cables
have a proximately
inches
(254cm)
o P slack
(Fig.
504-l)
AT THE
g&2’
[3C]

FRONT

OF THE

CABINET

J24

/
INTERFACECARD

(FIG.

Unscrew
8 8-32 x 3/8 inch retaining
sc;ews
from the front of
the equipment
shelves
Pull equipment
shelves
forward
approximately
two inches
-

‘ULL SHELVES
‘OR WARD

GROUND
STUD

Fig.

504-l

Console

Interface

Card

Position

A5-19

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE CONSOLE
INTERFACE CARD SX-200

MAINTENANCE PANEL

- RETAdl!E~~FfEWS

(8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 2

SHELF 1
RETAINING SCREWS (8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 1

1ESERVE POWER SHELF

Fig.

[4A]
[4B]

Remove six, 8-32 x 318 inch
screws that secure the Console
Interface card
Remove card ground from ground

[4C]

%move

Console

504-2

Equipment

Shelf

AND
4

Interface

REMOVE
CONSOLE
fNTERFACE

Unpack cards from containers
Inspect cards for physical
damage (Fig. 504-3)
[5C ;] Check card-type and quantity
against invoice

CARD

ISI ’

[5A]
[5B]

P25

AND

Fig.

I
UNPACK
fNSPEC1

(

AS-20

Goto[6]

AND
CARDS

504-3

Console

Interface

Card

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98~350

Issue 1, March 1980
Sheet 3 of 4

161

Was the
correct type
of card received )

YES

Was the
card damaged

completed

section

of Damage Report

[8A]
[8B]
[8C]

Place new Console Interface card
into position (Fig. 504-l)
Secure Console Interface card
with four, 8-32 x 318 inch screws
Secure card ground on system
ground lug

I I
PI
l---cl

PLACE NEW CONSOLE

INTERFACE
CARD
INTO POSITION

AT THE FRONT OF THE CABINET
[9A] Push shelves back into original
position
[9B] Secure the shelves with 16, 8-32
x 318 inch finishing screws and
washers
[9C] Secure cables in cable clamps

AND

[lOA]

Plug in cables

P24, P25

REPOSITION

SHELVES

AND

A5-21

I
’

SECTION

[llA
[llB I
11C
111 D I
[llE]
[llF]

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Turn SYSTEM POWER switch on
Close and lock front door
Set battery switch on
Close and lock rear panel
assembly and rear door
Replace power cables into commercial AC source
Set all power switches on rear
door to on

AND

CLOSE
JM;;WER

(

A5-22

FINISH

AND

LOCK
UP

DOORS

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

1 Sheet 1 of 5

[lA
[lB I
[lC]

Unpack new shelf
Check backplane for cracks and
bent pins
Check hardware against packing 4

[lD]

%$ck

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 - Screwdriver 55 blade
1 - Screwdriver No. 10 Phillips

AND

fuses (if suppled)
A

UNPACK
CHECK

AND
SHELF

Complete
Damage Report Form
and return with defective item to
the Supplier

AT REAR OF CABINET
[3A] ;;b($NVERTER
381
I 3C]

INPUT switch

Set BATTERY switch to OFF
Remove power plug(s) from outlet

AND

POWER

,G&RN(I;T
4A
I 48 I

DOWN

SYSTEM

OF THE EQUIPMENT

Unlock front door
Open front door
LOCK

FRONT

DOOR

A523

SECTION
REPLACE
SECOND

[5A]
[5B]

MITL9105/9110-98-350
FIRST
SHELF

Unlock
Unlock
assembly

and
and

OR
SX-200

open
open

rear
rear

door
panel

ANQ

AT REAR OF EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 505-l)
[6A]
If shelf
1 is to be replaced,
unplug
cables
Pl, P2, P3, P4, P5,
P6. If shelf 2 is to be replaced
unplug
P7, P8, P9, PlO, Pll, P12.
[6B]
Disconnect
the power
cable from
TBl and TB2
[6C]
Remove
shelf to shelf cables
if a
two shelf system
(JlOl,
J102,
J103, J104)

[7A]

Remove
all cards
MAP350510

as per

UNLOCKBACKDOORS

AND
I
REMOVE
ALL
FROM
SHELF

CARDS

461
AT FRONT
OF THE EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 505-2)
[8A]
Remove
four, 8-32 x 318 inch
finishing
screws
and washers
[8B]
Remove
shelf

AND
I

I--

REMOVE

SHELF

UNPACK

NEW

[9A]
[9B]

Unpack
Inspect

new
shelf

[SC]

%r!%?helf
against

invoice

A5-24

shelf from
for physical
type

and

container

quantity
SHELF

SECTION
REPLACE
SECOND

MITL9105/9110-98-350

FIRST
SHELF

OR
SX-200

ALL FUSES ARE 2 AMP FAST BLO
FUSE
Fl
F2

YELLOW

5-a

9-12
13-16

/
IOV

.
.::85
5:;I
9ov
RINGJNG GND

SLOTS
1-4

SHELF2

-4BV

TB2

(

P12

> (

PI0

> (

)

--BROWN

TBl
Pi

WN3Y

/CARiSLOT19
C

CARDSLOT 20
/

PIN 43
CARD SLOT17

PIN 44
SLOT 16

SHELF1

wlv

FUSES

SECTION
REPLACE
SECOND

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-96-350
FIRST
SHELF

OR
SX-200

4 of 5

MAINTENANCE PANEL

- RETAINl%%R’EWS

(8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 2

SHELF 1
- RETAINING SCREWS (8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF 1
I

RESERVE POWER SHELF

.Fig.

155-26

505.2

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

return
to supplier
with
tioh of Damage
Report

;I;,RNF;T
[12A]
[12B]

OF THE

EQUIPMENT

Slide new equipment
shelf into
position
Secure
new shelf with 8, 8-32
x finishing
screws
and
washers
LL NEW

AT REAR OF THE EQUIPMENT
CABINET
[13A]
Replace
shelf to shelf cables
if a
two shelf cables
(JiOl,
J102,
J103, J104)
[13B]
Connect
cables
Pl, P2, P3, P4,
P5, P6 if shelf
1 is replaced.
Connect cables
P7, P8, P9, PlO, Pll,
P12 if shelf 2 is replaced
[13C] +Xx$?;;
power
cables
to

[14A]

Replace
cards
per MAP350-510

in original

slots

[15Al
‘;$I
I15D I

Turn SYSTEM
POWER
switch
on
Close
and lock front door
Set battery
switch
on
Close and lock rear panel
assembly
and rear door
Replace
power
cables
into commercial.
AC source
Set all power
switches
on rear
door to on

NNECT

[15El

CABLES

P5Fl

SHELF

1 REPLACE

ALL

CLOSE
AND
AND POWER
SYSTEM

(

FINISH

)

CARDS

LOCK
UP

DOORS

A5-27128

;

SECTION
REPLACE

MITL9105/9110~98-350

HEATSINK

ASSEMBLY

SX-200

MAP350-506

I
llA1
]lCj
[lD]
[lE]
[lF]
[lG]

Unlock
and
ock and
Unlock
and
assembly
S$ SYSTEM

-. .

open
open
open

front
rear
rear

POWER

TOOLS
1 Screwdriver,

REQUIRED
% inch

switch

SYSTEM

l-l

AND

from

Remove
10,8-32
screws
and
lockwashers
from heatsink
assembly
Remove
heatsink
assembly

REMOVE
CABLES
FROM
HEATSINK
ASSEMBLY

I
[4Al
14Sl
[4Cl

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

13Sl

slotted

door
door
panel

AT REAR OF CABINET
(FIG. 506-l)
[2A]
Remove
Canon
type connector
from heatsink
assembly
block
strip
WI Remove terminal
TB3

[3Al

blade

REMOVE
ASSEMBLY

HEATSINK

UNPACK
HEATSINK

AND /NSPECT
ASSEMBLY

Unpack
new heatsink
assembly
from container
Inspect
heatsink
for physical
damage
Check
heatsink
assembly
type
and quantity
against
invoice

Repack
item in original
return
to supplier,
with
tion of Damage
Report

container
completed

and
sec-

SECTION
REPLACE

rIssue

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98-350
HEATSINK

1, March
2 of 3

ASSEMBLY

SX-200

1980
I

RETAINING SCREWS (4)

TERMINAL

BLOCK

CANNON POWER
SUPPLY CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEF

Fig.

506-l

SECTION
REPLACE

MITL9105/911

HEATSINK

O-98-350

ASSEMBLY

SX-200

MAP350-506
1 Issue 1, March 1980
1 Sheet 3 of 3

Tag defective item, repack in original
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report

[7A]
[7B]

Install new heatsink assembly in
position
Secure heatsink assembly with
10, 8-32 x 318 inch screws and
lockwashers

-VI
4

AND
INSTALL
ASSEMBLY
-

[8A]
[8B]

Return Canon type connector to
original position
Secure terminal block strip TB3

NEW

[al ’
AND

CONNECT

[llA]
[ll B
11C I
t llD]

-PI
4

HEATSINK

CABLES

’

AND

CLOSE
;;iT;;WER

AND

LOCK
UP

DOORS

I.
‘.

AS-31 132

SECTION
REPLACE
ASSEMBLY

MITL9105/9110-98-350

POWER
SX-200

SUPPLY

MAP350-507

I
[lA]
[l B]
[lC]
[lD]
[lE]
[lF]
[IG]

Unlock
and
Unlock
and
Unlock
and
assembly
z;t SYSTEM

open
open
open

TOOLS
REQUIRED
1 Wrench,.7116
inch
1 Screwdnver
316 inch
1 Nutdriver
11132 inch

Issue

1, March

Sheet

1 of 4

1980

front door
rear door
rear panel

POWER

switch

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

I-

AT THE REAR DOOR OF THE CABINET
(FIG. 507-l)
[2A]
Remove
rear panel with a 1:/32
inch nut driver
[2B]
Repeat
steps
2 and 3 of
MAP350-506
[2C]
it7ccnnect
Ground
Lug (Fig.
[2D]

Disconnect
nections

(Fig.

Reserve
507-2)

[3A]
[3B]

Release
the four retaining
screws
from the rear door retaining
bar
Slz;er,;;;;:g
bar up, releasing

[3C]

F;,;,“J;;

power

supply

REMOVE
ASSEMBLY

Battery
Conif connected

unit

d31

AND

final
RELEASE
RETAlNlNG

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

HEATSINK

REAR DOOR
BAR

Unpack
new power
supply
assembly
from container
Inspect
power
supply
assembly
for physical
damage
Check
power
supply
type and
quantity
against
invoice
NEW

Was the correct
type of power
supply
assembly
received

POWER

SUPPLY

Repack
item
in original
return
to supplier,
with
tion of Damage
Report

container
completed

and
secI

A5-33

I
;:

SECTION

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98.350

2 of 4

RETAINING SCREWS(4)

/
1:2:

CANNON POWER
SUPPLY CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEF

CAELECiAMP

Fig.

A534

TERMINAL BLOCK
STRlPTB3

507-l

SECTION

MITL9105/911

O-98-350

Issue 1, March 1980
Sheet 3 of 4

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-008

/CHARGING

UNIT

RED LEAD
-BLACK

LEAD

HtU
LEAD
CHARGING UNIT I

I( ,I .I

I
LEAD

BLACK
LEAD

STUD

/L
./

r”YYCfl

GRdUND
U”LLlY

STUD

SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-108

LEAD
L.

tlg.

-^-

WI-Z

-I
A5-35

SECTION MITL91051911

O-98-350

REPLACE POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY SX-200

cs)Y= ,=,

Tag defectwe item, repack In orlgmai
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report

[7Al
[7W

Place new power supply
assembly in place
Lower power supply retaining bar
and tighten four, 8-32 x 318 inch
retaining screws
I-

AND
INSTALL
SUPPLY

w41
PBI
KU
WI

install heatsink assembly as per
MAP350-506 steps 7 and 8
Connect Ground Lug (Fig. 507-2)
Connect Reserve Power Supply
(Fig. 507-2) if supplied
Secure rear panel with 11132 inch
nutdriver

-4

AND
4
INSTALL
ASSEMBLY

Turn SYSTEM POWER switch on
Close and lock front door
Set battery switch on
Close and lock rear panel
assembly and rear door
Replace power cables into commercial AC source
Set ail power switches on rear
door to on

HEATSINK

AND
CLOSE
AND
$fiT;iWER

FINISH

A5-35

NEW POWER
ASSEMBLY

)

LOCK
UP

DOORS

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACERESERVEBATTERY
BACK-UP
SUPPLY
SX-200

TOOLS
1 Wrench,.%
1 Screwdrrver,

[lA]
[lB]
flC1
.
[lD]
[lE]
[l F]
[lG]

Unlock
and
Unlock
and
Unlock
and
assembly
zf”t SYSTEM

open front door
open rear door
ooen rear oanel
’
POWER
switch

Disconnect

[2C]

f3YZ%k!t
all reserve
power
supply
connections
Loosen
the cable
clamp
and
remove
the AC power
cord

[2D]

reserve

power

Check
reserve
Check
battery

that the BATTERY
switch
on the
battery
pack is set to OFF
that the three
switches
on the
charging
unit are set to OFF.

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

[2B]

inch
3/8 inch

AT THE REAR OF THE EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 508-l)
[2A]
2:r-r battery
pack circuit
breaker

REQUIRED

CAUTION
The
reserve
battery
pack
125lbs.
Care must
be taken
the battery
pack.

POWER
DOWN

SYSTEM

weight
is
when
lifting
I

-l

supply

AT THE
FRONT
OF THE
EQUIPMENT
(FIG. 508-2)
[3A]
Remove
the four, 8-32 x 3/8 inch
finishing
screws
and washers
from the front
panel of the battery pack
[3B]
Remove
the reserve
battery
backup supply
by sliding
it forward
carefully

REMOVE

BATTERY

PACK

AT THE
REAR
OF THE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 508-3)
[4A]
Remove
the two reserve
charger
retaining
screws
[4B]
Remove
the charger
to the rear
of the system

REMOVE
THE
(FIG. 508-3)

CHARGER

A5-37

SECTION MITL9I05/9110-98.350

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-008

LEAD
2

BLACK LEAD

\ \

CHARGIN G UNIT
\
\
I
\
I

’ I

LEAD

STUD

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-108

POWER
SUPPLY

Fig. 508-l

A538

SECTION

MITLSI 051911 O-98-350

MAINTENANCE PANEL

EQUIPMENT SHELF 2

EQUIPMENT SHELF 1

I--

RESERVE BATTERY BACK-UP
RETAINING SCREWS (6)

RESERVE POWER SHELF

Fig. 508-2

[5A]
[5B]
[5CJ

Unpack new reserve battery
back-up from container
Inspect new reserve battery backup for damage
Check reserve battery back-up
type and quantity against invoice

/181-

I
t

UNPACK AND /NSPECT
RESERVE BATTERY BACK-UP

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

Issue 1, March 1980
Sheet 4 Of 5

Fig.

508-3

YES

Was the
reserve
battery
back-up
damaged

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

I
NO
v

I88 1

Install new charger unit
Secure with two retaining

screws

AND

MSTALL
UNIT

AS-40
:

(FIG.

NEW CHARGER
508-3)

SECTION

AT THE
FRONT
OF THE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 508-2)
[9A]
Install
new battery
pack. Carefully slide into position
[9B]
Secure
new battery
pack with
four. 8-32 x 3/8 inch finishina
scre’ws
and washers

BATTERY

AT
REAR
OF
THE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET
(FIG. 508-l)
[lOA]
Connect
ground
lug
[lOB]
;;c&ect
all wrrrng
as per Fig.

[lOD]

[llA]
11 B
t 1 IC I
[liDI

PACK

Feed AC cable
through
cable
duct and secure
with the cable
clamp
Turn battery
pack circuit
breaker
on

Turn SYSTEM
POWER
switch
Close
and lock front door
Set battery
switch
on
Close
and lock rear panel
assembly
and rear door
[ll E] Replace
power
cables
into commercial
AC source
[liF]
Set all power
switches
on rear
door to on

O-98-350

AND

INSTALL

[lOC]

MITL9105/911

Allow
reach

Note
24 hours
for battery
a full charge

pack

to
I

CABLES

AND

!...
i.
i-

A5-41142

1
I

SECTION

I
I
[lA
1B
t lC]
flD1
. [lE]
[l F]
[lG]

Unlock and open front door
Unlock and open rear door
Unlock and open rear panel
sembly
2 t SYSTEM POWER switch to
off
Set all power switches on rear
door to off
Set battery switch to off
Remove power cable(s) from
commercial AC source
-

AT THE REAR OF THE EQUIPMENT
CABINET (FIG. 509-l)
[2A] Unscrew the two 4 x 40 screws
from the amphenol type connector
[2B] Unplug cables in pairs: P2 or P8
and Pl or P7, P3 or P9 and P4 or
PlO

[3A]
[3B]

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

/ ;s;It

TOOLS REQUIRED
1 Screwdriver.

:‘Jt,“‘“h

MITL9105/911

O-98-350

1980

‘A inch

Ill
--cl I
AND

POWER
DOWN

-0

SYSTEM

AND

DISCONNECT

CABLES

Remove the four, 4 x 40 slotted
retaining screws
Remove the translator board

Unpack new translator board
from container
Inspect new translator board for
damage
Check new translator board type
and quantity against invoice

UNPACK
AND
MdR;RANSLATOR

INSPECT

Repack item in original container
return to supplier, with completed

CA3
Go to 161

and
sec-

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

PI/P7

4 x 4-40

SLOTTED RETAINING SCREWS 0.75in.

LONG

,J31/J35
2 x 4-40 SLOTTED SCREWS 0.75in.LONG
\

\
BACKPLANE

SECONDTRANSLATOR

PLASTIC'SPACER

Pl/P7

FlRSTTRANSiATORBOARO

BOARD
10522

Fig.

A5-44

509-l

SECTION

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98-350

3 of 3

Tag defective item, repack in original
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report

board damaged

[7Al
[7Bl

Place new translator
board
firmly
in place (push
in firmly)
Secure
translator
board
with
$ur,;s
x 40 slotted
retaining
1-r:

INSTALL

WI
IW

Connect
P3/P9,
Secure
slotted

cables
P91PlO
all cables
retaining

PllP7,

P21P8,

with
screw

one,

NEW

TRANSLATOR

4-40

CONNECT

Turn SYSTEM
POWER
switch
on
Close
and lock front door
Set battery
switch
on
Close
and lock rear panel
assembly
and rear door
Replace
power
cables
into commercial
AC source
Set all power
switches
on rear
door to on

CABLES

AND
4
CLOSE
AND
;;tT;$WER

LOCK
UP

DOORS

(+-)
A545146

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-350

REPLACE
CARDS
SHELF
SX-200

,A;BA;ETFRONT
[lA]
[lB]

Unlock
and open
Swing
front
door
allow easy access
shelf (Fig. 510-l)

THE

EQUIPMENT

front door
open so as to
to cards
in

[3A]

Turn shelf
power
on the maintenance
510- 2)

off with switch
panel (Fig.

Unpack
Inspect
Check
against

new card from container
new card or damage
card type and quantity
invoice

OPEN

DOOR

AND

POWER
DOWN

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

SYSTEM
v

1.
2.
3.

UNPACK

AND

Note
Do not handle card by gold inlay
contacts
Beware of static, service person
should wear round strap
Do not store t atteries for cards,in
place,on cards,while in storage

INSPECT

510-l
CONTROL CARDS

TABLE

COMMON

--.-.
_-__ I

Type

Part
Number

Card Extractor
Color Code

RAMKOS
Card
Memory
Expander
PROM/RAM
Expander
PROM/CPU
Card
Scanner
Card
Tone Control
Card

911 O-002
9110-018
9110-119
911 O-003
911 O-004
911 O-005

White
. . ...--

Brown
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow

A547

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

MAINTENANCE PANEL

EQUIPMENTSHELFP

EOUIPMENT SHELF1

3ESERVE POWER SHELF

Fig.

510-2

Maintenance

Panel

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE
CARDS
SHELF
SX-200

MAP350-510
Issue

1, March

Sheet

3 of 3

1980

(Yyi-)
151

Was the correct
type of card
received
)

Repack item in original container
return to suppher, with completed
“O’l,i........;..,j

and
set

card damaged

[7A]

Remove
extractors
card

card by prying
back
and gently
remove

card

17
1----r-l
AND

-CAUTION
NOTICE

REMOVE
CARD

[8A]

Insert
new card
card extractors

gently
fiat

and

push

I-

NUMBER

AND

,PART

INSERT
NEW
CARD

-PI
[9A]
1961

Turn
Close

shelf
and

power
back on
lock front door

TRANSPARENT
FRONT PANEL

AND

POWER UP SY
,

Fig. 510-3

Typical Circuit

CARD EXTRAC :TOR

Card

AS-49150

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE
MAINTENANCE
PANEL
SX-200
MAP35051

Issue

1, March

Sheet

1 of 2

I
1980

[lA]
[lB]
[iC]

11Dl
[lE]
[lF]
[lG]

Unlock
and
Unlock
and
Unlock
and
assembly
Set SYSTEM

[2B]

front
rear
rear

POWER

-..

door
door
panel
switch

nff

Set all power
switches
on rear
door to off
Set battery
switch
to off
Remove
power
cable(s)
from
commercial
AC source

$TTHETREAR
[2A]

open
open
open

THE

Disconnect
maintenance
cable
from interconnect
Cut tie wrap
from top

SYSTEM

EQUIPMENT
panel
card
of cabinet
REMOVE

CABLE

REMOVE

MAINTENANCE

AT THE FRONT
OF THE MAINTENANCE
PANEL
[3A]
Remove
the four retaining
screws
from the maintenance
panel
[3B]
Remove
the maintenance
panel

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Unpack
new maintenance
from container
Inspect
new maintenance
for damage
Check
maintenance
panel
and quantity
for damage

panel
panel
type

(

AND
7

-I

UNPACK
AND /NSPECT
NEW MAINTENANCE
PANEL

A5-51

:i.

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

REPLACE
MAINTENANCE
PAN EL SX-200
1 MAP35051

Issue

1, March

Sheet

2 Of 2

I
1980

7
From

[4j

Was the correct
type of maintenance
panel received

Tag defective
item,
repack
in original
container
and
return
to supplier
with
completed
section
of Damage
Report

YES

eTTTETFRONT

WI
WI

THE

Place new maintenance
place
Secure
the maintenance
with four, 3-32 finishing
and washers

EQUIPMENT
panel

1
in

#I61 ”

t
E
AND

panel
screws
-

‘171 ’

Install
the maintenance
panel
connector
on the Interconnect
card
Secure
with new cable
tie

AND

CONNECT

Turn SYSTEM
POWER
switch
on
Close
and lock front door
Set battery
switch
on
Close
and lock rear panel
assembly
and rear door
Replace
power
cables
into commercial
AC source
Set all power
switches
on rear
door to on

CABLE

I
*I81

’

AND

L
CLOSE
AND
~bfV;WER

LOCK
UP

DOORS

SECTION M ITL9105/9110=98-350

REPLACE WIRING HARNESS

I Sheet

[lA
Unlock and open front door
[l B 3 Unlock and open rear door
[lC] Unlock and open rear panel
assembly
[lD] E$t SYSTEM POWER switch to
[lE]

-. .

Set all power switches on rear
door to off
Set battery switch to off
Remove power cable(s) from
commercial AC source

AND

POWER
DOWN

421.
$;BT;;TBACK
2A]
I 281

OF THE

-t11 ‘I

EQUIPMENT

Unscrew canon connector
Cut all cable ties associated
the power cable

AND
with
lDISCONNECT
CONNECTOR

[34

[3Bl

SYSTEM

CANON
(F/G. 572-1)

Disconnect all terminal blocks
on; Power Fail Transfer cards, Interconnect card and Shelf
Backplanes (Fig. 512-2)
Cut all cable ties
TERMINAL

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Unpack new power cable from
container
Inspect new power cable for
%r.?!zower
cable type and
quantity against invoice

1 of 4

SX-200

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

RETAINING SCREWS (4)

TERMlNAL BLOCK

CANNON POWER
SUPPLY CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEF

_Fig. 512.1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

1 Sheet 3 of 4
From [4]

i->

Repack item In original container
return to supplier, with completed
tion of Damage Report

and
sec-

YES

Tag defective item, repack in original
container
and return to supplier with
completed section of Damage Report

NO
17AJ install new power cable in car-rect position using new cable
ties
[7Rl Secure terminal blocks on;
back lanes, Interconnect card
and Bower Fail Transfer card
(Fig. 512-l)
[7Cl Secure cable with new cable ties
-

-VI
4

’

AND
.
NEW POWER

INSTALL
CABLE

(FIG.

512.1)

m41 Connect canon type connector
(Fig. 512-1)

-l-

CONNECT
CONNECTOR

WI
WI

AND

CANON
(FIG.

LOCK

TYPE
572-1)

DOORS

AS-55

I
”

-.-

SECTION

MITh9105/9110-98-350

REPLACE

WIRING

HARNESS

SX-200

MAP350-512
Issue

1. March

Sheet

4 of 4

1980

OOTCONNECTOR

BROWN

V
f4

BLUE WHITE/BLUE

BROWN

ORANGE

YELLOW

BLUE

CUTOVER CARD
I

GRAY

BROWN

BLUE

.Fig.

A5-56

512-2

Wiring

Diagram

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

APPENDIX 6
POWER CHECKS
General

This appendix consists of a series of MAPS which will be directly referenced
six, SX-lOO/SX-200 Power Supply. The appendix is also referenced directly
five, Fault Report Troubleshooting
and Cross Reference.

by the charts of part
by the tables of part

A8.01

These MAPS describe how to measure the electrical voltages in key areas of the SX-100 or SX-200.
The measurements
will aid the repair person in the location of a specific fault. At all times the
repair person should follow the safety precautions
suggested in the MAPS to ensure personal and equipment safety.
A6.02

A6.03

Table A6-1 is a listing
or SX-200.

of all power checks that may be performed

when troubleshooting

MAP350-600,
Power Supply Check deals with the SX-200 power
primarily with the system not running or a major power failure

MAP350-601

MAP350-602 deals with a suspected
power failure
system may or may not be in a transfer condition

MAP350-603 deals with the voltages
SX-100 or SX-200

MAP350-604
up

MAP350-605 outlines the procedure
power fail transfer and interconnect

for checking the voltages
card of the SX-100

MAP350-606
up

for checking

deals with a suspected

outlines

the procedure

power failure

that appear
for checking

supply

only. This map deals

on or at the interconnect
on the Power

on the terminal
the voltage

the voltage

card of the SX-200

Fail Transfer
blocks

an SX-100

card where

of the backplanes

in an

on the SX-200 Reserve Battery
to the combined

console

the

Back-

interface,

on the SX-100 Reserve Battery

Back-

TABLE A6-1
POWER CHECKS
sx-200

Power Supply Check
Interconnect
Card
Power Fail Transfer Card
Backplane(s)
Reserve Batterv Back-Up

MAP
350-600

350-601
350-602
350-603
350-604

sx-100
Interconnect
Card
Backplane
Reserve Battery Back-up

MAP

350-605
350-603
350-606

A8-1 I2

SECTION

POWER

MITL9105/9110-98-350

SUPPLY

CHECK

SX-200

MAP350-600
Issue

1, April

Sheet

1 of 5

START

I
[2A]
[2B]

[2C]

CAUTION
System

Power

will

be on

Is the AC
power
LED on
(Fig. 600-l)

Check
that the AC power
cord i7
plugged
in
Check
the AC power
fuse (Fig.
600-l).
If the fuse is blown
replace
it with one of equal
value.
If it blows
again
replace
the power
supply
as per
MAP350-507
Plug a trouble
light (or other
piece of eauipment)
into the
butlet
as a’t&st
for ihe presence
of AC voltage.
If no voltage
is
present
check
for a faulty
AC
outlet
-

YES

NO
I

Is the

converter

ON THE
[4A]

POWER

SUPPLY

DOOR

Check
that the converter
20 Amp
circuit
breaker
is in the on position. If it is off flip it to the on
position

AND

CHECK
C/RCU/T
BREAKER

A8-3
:

SECTION

YES

MITLSI 05/9110.98-350

Replace
the
per MAP350.506

heatsink

assembly

(--Lk-)
El /

[7Cl

[7Dl

Unlock
and open front
door
Ensure
that the maintenance
power
switch
is on
Unlock
and open the back door
of the system
Measure
for 64Vdc
(reference
to
round)
at TB3 on the backdoor
of
t8, e system
as per Fig. 600-2

J
CHECK

FOR

64Vdc

TB3

NO
-BATT
-64VDC

-0

YES
Replace
the
MAP350-507

--48VDC
-90VAC

power

supply

.ov

-ESG
-NC

Fig.

600-2

Terminal

Block

Go to [9]

(hi--)
,-

per

SECTION

POWER

MITL9105/9110~98-350
SUPPLY

CHECK

SX-200

MAP350-600

PA1

Check
the
@&ence

backplane
to ground)

voltages.
as per Fig.

AND

YES

t11Al

If the system
still has an apparent
power
fault, contact
your
nearest
authorized
MITEL
service
representative

Replace the heatsink
per MAP350-505

assembly

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

BLUE
\

GREEN

ORANGE

YELLOW

POWER
SUPPLY

VIOLET

GRkY

TG
TBI
TBI
TBI
TBI
TB2
TB2
TB2

PIN
l
2
:
4
2

WIRE
COLOR

SIGNAL
NAME

ORANGE
BROWN
YELLOW
VIOLET
BLUE
BROWN
GREY

avoc

MINIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

-Y/DC
-1ovrlc
-48VDC
GNO OR OV
SOVAC

YELLOW

BROWN

EiRoiYN

ORANGE

BLii

MAXIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

7.6VDC
-4.7VDC
-9.5VDC
-45.OVDC

B.4VDC
- 5iVDC
-10.5VDC
-52.OVDC

85;AC

95;AC

1631-1

Fig. 600-3

Backplane

Voltages

I;
I

SX-200

A8-?I8

SECTION

INTERCONNECT

MITL91051911

O-98-350

CARD

START

.:.:
..

mill
[lA]
[lB]

Unlock
$r~~~co;

and
and

open
open

the
the

rear panel
power
supp-

(

,t.‘
_:._:

AND

EXPOSE

[2A]

Check
the
terconnect

console
fuse on the
card (Fig. 601-l)

in-

THE

/NTERCONNECT

AND
I
1 CHECK

Was

[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Power
down
the system
by turning the convertor
input breaker
on the rear door off
Carefully
remove
the fuse and
replace
it with one of equal value
Power
up the system
by turning
the convertor
input breaker
on

the

FUSE

(FIG.

601-7)

console

Go to Step

[8]

Ll
Go to [51

86-9

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

GREEN

ORANGE

BLUE

LUE WHITE/BL

YELLOW

NGE

OUTOF
TOLERANCE
P30\3

YELLOW

MAINTENANCE
PANEL
p3/01

P302
PRINTER .
RS232
PORT

VIOLET

- 48Vdc
CONSOLE
FUSE

GRAY

YELLOW

BROWN

ORANGE

BLUE

MEASURE
-48VOC
(WITH RESPECT
TOGROUND)

M AINTENANCE
J13

CONSOLE 2
J14

ALSO MEASURE -48VDC

Fig.

A6-10

601-l

(-45VDC

TO -5ZVDC)AT

Interconnect

Card

TEST POINT 1.

1611!

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCdNNECT

CARD

1 MAP350-601

[6A]
[6B]
[6C]
[6D]

Unplug
the console
cable
Power
down
the system
by turning the converter
input breaker
on the rear door off
Carefully
remove
the fuse and
replace
rt with one of equal value
Power
up the system
by turning
the converter
input breaker
on
1

Issue

1, April

Sheet

3 of 6

I
80

AND
I

7
NO

[8A]

Install
the
Disconnect
cable

Replace
the
MAP350-502.
is in place

interconnect
Ensure
that

card as per
a new fuse

console
cable only.
the console
from the

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

From

IS]

Did the

[lOA]

Replace
the
MAP350-501

console

cable

trouble

as per

-I-

REPLACE
THE CONSOLE

THE

Is there

still
NO

interconnect

YES
1r
AT THE INTERCONNECT
CARD
[13A]
Measure
all voltages
(respect
iroy,nd)
on TB301
as per Fig.

4131
to
4

AND

1
CHECK

VOLTAGES

YES

A6.12

[llA]

Replace
the
MAP350-501

console

as per

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98.350

I INTERCONNECT
I

CAR

MAP350-601

[15A] Perform all power checks in
MAPSO-600

[17A] Replace the cable harness
MAP350-512

as per

REPLACE

CABLE

MEASURE

CONSOLE

[18A]
[16A] Measure the console -48Vdc at
test point one (- end of large
capacttor to ground) on the mterconnect board as per Fig. 601-l

- 48Vdc

A8.4 3

j.-:

SECTION

Sheet

MITL9105/9110-98.350

6 of 6

Was the
- 48Vdc

console
present

YES

[20A]

Replace
the interconnect
per MAP350-502

card

as
-t-

[21A]

If the system
still has an appare!t
interconnect
card power
problem
contact
you nearest
authorized
MITEL
service
representative

A6-14

SECTION

r
[IA]
[1B]

CAUTION
System

Unlock
rfo;7

and
and

Power

will

be on

open
open

the
the

rear panel
power
supp-

EXPOSE
TRANSFER

[2A]

Check
transfer

the fuse on the power
card Fig. 602-l

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TOOLS
1 AC-DC

REQUIRED
Voltmeter

POWER
FAIL
CARD

fail

Was
Power
Transfer

the
Fail
fuse

/
‘ES
[4A]
[4B]
[4C]

Power
down the system
by turning the converter
input breaker
on the rear door off
Carefully
remove
the fuse and
replace
It with one of equal value
Power
up the system
by turning
the converter
input breaker
on
the rear door on

YES

f-i

Go to (61

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

161
AT THE POWER FAIL TRANSFER CARD
[6A] Measure all voltages with respect
to ground as per Fig. 602-l
It-

AND

a power

problem

YES

Replace the power fail transfer
card as per MAP350-503

AND
t

4
CHECK

VOLTAGES

Were all the
volta
es within
to Berance

c5
Go to [X3]

[lOA] Perform Power Checks in
MAP350-600

PERFORM
POWER

CHECKS

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Sheet 3 of 4

GREEN

ORANGE

BLUE

[BROtiN

BLUE WHITE/BLUE

RiO

YELLOW

ORA‘NGE

YELLOW

TBl
/

POWER FAILTRANSFER

WIRE
COLOR

SIGNAL
NAME

TBl

YELLOW

-5VDC

Fig. 602-l

MINIMUM
ACCEPTABLE
-4.7VDC

Power Fail Transfer

MAXIMUM
ACCEPTABLE
-5.3VDC

Card

A8-1 i

SECTION
POWER

MITL9105/9110-98.350
FAIL

TRANSFER

MAP350-602
Eue

1, April

Sheet

4 of 4

[12A]

Replace
the Wiring
per MAP350-512

Harness

as
I-

REPLACE
HARNESS

P3Al

WIRING

If the system
still has an apparent
power
fault in the power
fail transfer
card contact
your
nearest
authorized
MITEL
service
representative

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

BACKPLANE(S)
MAP350-603
1 Issue

1, April

Sheet

1 of 3

I
[2A]
[2B]

Unlock
pto;F

and
and

open
open

rear panel
the power

EXPOSE

I--

supp-

THE

AND

BACKPLANE(S)

EXPOSE
I

(5A]
[5B]
[5C]

Power
the system
ing the converter
Replace
the fuse
equal value
Power the system
the converter
input

down
by turninput switch
off
with one of
up by turning
switch
on

YES

TOOLS
1 AC-DC

REQUIRED
Voltmeter
I

[3Al

THE

BACKPLANE

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 6 of

SECTION

MITL9105/9110~98-350

YELLOW

PIN1

Pll

2 3 4 5

.
rB
5

SHELF2

12345
TB2

+
F41Fm

PIN39
p
CARDSLOT 20 1

(

PlO
F21

P8
VEZXI

PIN 21
/CARD~LOT~~

?a
5
B
5J1

SHELF1

PIN1 2 3 4 5
-FUSES

L
c
.

/-BROWN

ALL FUSES ARE 2AMP FAST BLO
FUSE
SLOTS
Fi
1-4
F2
5-8
F3
9-12
F4
13-16

A8-20

TBl
TBl
TB2
TB2
TB2

4
2

VIOLET
ORANGE
GREY
BROWN
BLUE

Fig.

603-l

-1OVOC

+aVDC
SOVAC
ov
-48VDC

Backplane

-9.5VOC
+7.6VDC
81 VAC
-45VDC

Voltages

I
1

-lO.SVDC
+8.4VOL
99VAC
-52VDC

I CrlP

SECTION

[9A]

r$rrn

MITL9105/9110-98-350

::.

the power checks in

350-600 SX-200
350-605 SX-100
PERFORM

IPOWER SUPPLY CHECK 1

r[l l]J=

PlAl Replace the power supply as per
MAP350-507
MAP350-403

SX-200
SX-100

AND

WA1 Replace the wiring harness as
per MAP350-512

SX-200

I
[13A] If the system still has an apparent power fault, in the
backplane(s) contact your
nearest authorized MITEL service
representative

A8-21122

SECTION

RESERVE
sx-200

MITL9105/9110-98-350
BATTERY

BACK-UP
I

MAP350-604

Issue

1, April

Sheet

1 of 2

TOOLS

REQUIRED

1 AC-DC

Voltmeter

111

::.‘
:

[lA]

lJJ:eyk

and

open

the

rear

door

BATTERY
AT THE RE AR OF THE RESERVE
BATTERY
BACK UP
[2A]
Ensure
that batteries
have been
charaina
for at least 24 hours
[2B]
r14twe
voltages
as per Fig.
I
MEASURE

VOLTAGES

directing

[4A]

Replace
as per

reserve
battery
MAP350-508

section

back-up

REPLACE
BATTERY

RESERVE
BACK-UP

UN/T

A8-23
:

/.
i

SECTION
RESERVE
sx-200

M ITL9105/911
BATTERY

O-98-350

BACK-UP

MAP350-604
Issue

1, April

Sheet

2 of 2

RED
LEN

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-008

POWER SUPPLY TYPE PN9110-108
TB

WIRE
COLOR

SIGNAL
NAME

MINIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

MAXIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

TB2
TB2

2
3

RED
BLACK

-4BVDC
-48VDC

-45VDC
-45VDC

-52VDC
-52VDC

Fig.

604-l

Resenre

Battery

Back-Up

SX-200

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-100

MAP350-605
Issue

1, April

Sheet

1 of 7

Is the AC
power LED
on Fig. 605-l
YES

K-41
[.=I
PC1

[3Al

Check
that the AC power
cord ifl
plugged
in
Check
that the AC circuit
breaker
is in the on position
Plug a trouble
light (or other
piece of equipment)
into the
outlet
as a test for the presence
of AC voltage.
If no voltage
is
present
check
for faulty
AC
power
outlet

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 6 of

THE TOP
] C$e;k
[4B]
.
.
.

OF THE
all fuses

EQUIPMENT
as shown

In Fig.

Replace
any fuse that is blown
with one of equal value by;
Powering
down the system
by
turning
of the maintenance
panel
system
power
switch
Carefully
replace
the fuse
Power
up the system
by turning
the system
power
switch
on

F3
TESTPo'NT

EXPOSE THE
SYSTEM

--El
41

AND

SOVAC USER

-48VDC USER
YFZ
\\
rF1
-48VOC CONSOLE

Fig. 605-2

fuses blown
;
; !

Fuses

A8-25

1
-1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-100

MAP350-605
Issue

1, April

Sheet

2 of 7

SYSTEM SHELF POWER

RETAINING SCREWS (4)
MAINTENANCE PANEL

PRIMARY POWER SWITCH

‘SHELF

POWER SUPPLY

RETAINING SCREWS (8)

EQUIPMENT SHELF

746
-3

FRONT VIEW

c4
Fig.

605-l

SX-100

A8-26

SECTION

461
[6A]

[8A]
[8B]
[8C]

Troubleshoot
recommended
turer of the

the user device
by the manufacuser device

as
.:

Remove
all console
cables
Power
down
system
and replace
;,“nseole
fuse with a fuse of equal
Power

MITL9105/9110-98-350

AND

up system
.

*
ISOLATE

INTERCONNECT

91
console

fuse

v
NO
Replace
the
MAP350401

[lOA]

Plug in one console
cable at a
time until all are in. Ensure
that
there
are no consoles
attached
to the cables

t-i

AND

I
CHECK
CABLES

CONSOLE

interconnect

card

per

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

1 INTERCONNECT

CARD

SX-100

m-605

Issue

1, April

Sheet

4 of 7

[124

Connect
one console
at a time to
the good cables
and observe
the
fuses after each connection

AND

1 CHECK
[13A]
[138]

[14Al

Replace the cable that caused
the fuse to blow as per
MAP350401

CONSOLE

Replace
the console
that caused
the console
fuse to blow as per
MAP350-501
Replace
the fuse with one of
equal value

Measure
605-3

all voltages

as per

VOLTAGES

A8-28

SECTION

MITL9105/911

INTERCONNECT

CARD

O-98-350

SX-100

MAP350-605

TG
TB301
TB301
TB301
TB301
TB301
TB301
TB301
TB302
TB302
TB302
TB302
TB302
TB302
TB302
TB303

PIN
:
3
4
i
7
:
3
4

Issue

1, April

Sheet

5 of 7

WIRE
COLOR

SIGNAL
NAME

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

ACCEPTABLE

WHITE
ORANGE
YELLOW
BROWN
GREEN
BLUE
GREY

BATT
+8VOC
-5VDC

+7.6VDC
-4.7VDC

+8.4VDC
-5.3VDC

I
-48VDC
SOVAC
BATT
OOT 8VDC

-45.OVDC
8OVAC
-45.OVDC
+7.6VDC

-52.OVDC
99VAC
-52VDC
-8.4VDC

ii
USER -48VDC
USER SOVAC
OOT 8VDC

-45.OVDC
80VAC
+7.6VDC

-52.OVDC
99VAC
+8.4VDC

BLUE/WHITE

z
;

1
I

1638-I

Fig.

605-3

Interconnect

Card

A8=29

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-9.8-350

Were the
voltages
within
tolerance

Replace
MAP350-403

the

Power

Supply

I?
1

(T&T)

P61

[ISA;

Assure
white/green

+8Vdc
wire

COOT) on the
of P303

AND

I
CHECK

FOR

OOT

A8-30

per

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCONNECT

CARD SX-100

System is in Power Fail transfer.
Remove it by setting all
maintenance
panel switches to
disable, master to Normal. If still
in Transfer, replace interconnect
card.

[19A] Measure the console -48Vdc
(with respect to ground) at test
point one as per Fig. 805-2

Was console
- 48Vdc present
YES

[21A] Replace the interconnect
as per MAP350-401

board

AND
.
+

[22A] If the system still has an apparent power fault, on the interconnect card contact your
nearest authorized MITEL service
representative

THE /NTERCONNECT

BOARD

A8-31132

SECTION
RESERVE

MITL9105/9110-98-350

BATTERY

BACK-UP

SX-100

START
,;

-111
[lA]

Complete
MAP350-400

steps

1 to 6 of

AND

EXPOSE

[2A]

Measure

voltages

per

Fig.

::
.-..=:
1“

THE

SYSTEM

AND

606

MEASURE

VOLTAGES

directing

[4A]

Replace
as per

Reserve
MAP350-404

Battery

Back-Up

section

AND

REPLACE
BACK-UP

RESERVE

BATTERY

FINISH

A6-33

SECTION

RESERVE

MITL9105/9110-98.350

BATTERY

BACK-UP

SX-100

MAP350-606
Issue

1, April

Sheet

2 of 2

SX-100 PABX

OVdc
R

INTERCONNECT
CABLE
HARNESS

TO ALARM INDICATOR
IF REWIRED

TBl

, RESERVE BATTERY
0

LYLY

GROUNOSTUO

--I

WIRE
COLOR

SIGNAL
NAME

MINIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

MAXIMUM
ACCEPTABLE

TB302

BLACK

-48VDC

- 45VDC

- 52VOC
.-

Fig.

A6-34

606-l

Reserve

Battery

Back-Up

1641.1

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98.350

APPENDIX 7
TROUBLESHOOTING MAPS
1.

GENERAL

The MAPS contained
in this Appendix detail the procedures to be performed
in all actual card
troubleshooting
on the system. These MAPS are used in conjunction
with the MAPS outlined in
other sections of this practice. Due to the similarity of the SX-iOO/SX-200 PABX’s all the MAPS of this appendix are common to each system.
A7.01

A7.02

Table A7-1 is a listing

of all MAPS contained

in this section.

TABLE A7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING

Title

~Common Control Test
~Speech Path Test
Cabling Test
Paging Test
Night Bell Test
Music On Hold Test

Reference

MAP350-701
MAP350-702
MAP350-703
MAP350-704
MAP350-705
MAP350-706

A7-l/2

SECTION

PAI

COMMON

MAP350-701

MITL9105/9110-98.350

CONTROL

Issue

1, June

Sheet

1 of 3

I
I

1980

Unless
immediate
required
this test
performed
during

Complete
all voltage
measurements
in MAP350-fX3~~~[1’~~

TEST

Note
remedial
action
should
not be
traffic
conditions.

CHECK
BACKPLANE
VOLTAGES

Take the remedial
MAP350.603

action

suggested

retaining

bar

YES

mounted

Unlock
Remove

and open
the card

the front
retaining

door
bar

AND

system

AND

[5A]

Remove

the

card

EEE

!Ff
.-_
:/:I-

SECTION

[6A]

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Remove
all line, trunk,
and console
control
cards
reference
MAP350510

REMOVE
COMMON

ALL CARDS
CONTROL

BUT THE
CARDS

[7A]

Press the MASTER
RESET
on the Scanner
card

button

RESET

problem

[9B]

[9C]

[9B]

The problem
is in one of the
cards
removed
Plug each card in and press
the
MASTER
RESET button
on the
Scanner
card. Replace
the card
that causes
the problem.
If the problem
persists
with a
known
(good)
card replace
the
equipment
shelf SX-100
MAP350-402.SX-200
MAP350-505
Return
to step 10 if the problem
persists

[lOA]

Change
the Common
Control
cards
one at a time with the
system
power
off at each card

[lOB]

%&?he
on the

[lOC]

MASTER
RESET
Scanner
card after

button
each

%~&%
steps
[lOA] and [lOB]
until all cards
have been replaced
-

SYSTEM

remain

NOI

[9A]

THE

YES

r191
AND

NOTE

I
I

CHECK
THE COMMON
CONTROL
CARDS

Ignore

E012

errors
I

SECTION
COMMON

MITL9105/9110-98-350
CONTROL

’

TEST

MAP350-701

From

Issue

1, June

Sheet

3 of 3

1980

[lo]

If the
itialize

RAM
and

COS card
reprogram

was replaced,
the system

In-

YES

Disconnect
all and push
the MASTER
RESET
button
on the Scanner
card.
If
the error
persists
go to step [14], if it
does
not,
replace
Shelf
2 as per
MAP350-505
and
install
new
Shelf
Cables
YES
-1131
Replace
the equipment
per MAP350405

shelf

AND

REPLACE

[14Al

If the system
still
parent
card fault,
nearest
authorized
representative

i
1

EQUIPMENT

SHELF

has an apcontact
your
MITEL
service

j. :

FINISH

A7.518

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

Note
be
This
test
requires
that
the s stem
turned
off..lf
possible,
it shou r d be perf;med
durmg
a period
of low (or no) traf-

[2A]
[2B]

Unlock
Remove

and open
the card

the front
retaining

door
bar --I-

Remove

EXPOSE

CARDS

EXPOSE

[4B]

Remove
all Receiver
cards
reference
MAP350610
Press the MASTER
RESET
on the Scanner
card

card

retaining

bar

CARDS

[IJ
:

[4A]

the

Ignore

all E012

errors

that

may

button
--I-

the

error

Insert
one Receiver
card and press
the
MASTER
RESET
button
on the Scanner
card. If no error appears
on the Scanner
card repeat
this step for each
Receiver
card.
If the
error
persists
after
the
replacement
of all Receiver
cards
go to
MAP350.701.

return

YES

WV
WI
WI

Leave the Receiver
cards
out of
the system
Turn off the system
power
on the
maintenance
panel
Re lace the Tone Control
card
(re Perence
MAP350-510)
with a
known
(good)
spare

r'"1

AND

I-

REPLACE
CONTROL

THE TONE
CARD

A7-7

SECTION

1SPEECH

MITL9105/911
PATH

Issue

1, June

Sheet

2 of 3

O-98-350

TEST

1980

Return

[8A]
[8B]

that

were

Return
all good cards that
to their
original
positions.
defective
card to MITEL.

were

YES

Remove
half the line and trunk
cards
(reference
MAP350-510)
Press the MASTER
RESET
button
on the Scanner
card
1-i

AND
1

REMOVE
TRUNK

A7-8

removed

Replace
the Console
Control
card (reference
MAP350-510)
with
a known
good spare
Press the MASTER
RESET
button
on the Scanner
card
-

I
[lOB]

cards

YES

Did the error
return
within
2 minutes

[lOA]

all good

L/NE
CARDS

AND
(NOTE

removed
Return
the
I

SECTION
SPEECH

PATH

MITL9105/9110-98-350

TEST

Did the error
return
within

V3Cl

The problem
is in the line or
trunk cards
that were removed
Replace
half the removed
cards
Press the MASTER
RESET button
on the Scanner
card
If the error appears
the problem
is in the cards
replaced.
Remove
half of them and perform
step
[13C]. Alternate
between
[13B]
and [13C] until the defective
card
is located
through
a process
of
elimination

Return

defective

]13Al
V3Bl

[12Al
[1W

The problem
is in the remain
line or trunk
cards
Repeat
step [14] for the remaining cards
until the defective
is located
through
a process
elimination

AND

(

Doe;Jz;rror

)No

]]I

cards

to MITEL

YES

-1151
[15A]

Perform
the Common
test MAP350-701.
This
Speech
Path problem

Control
is not

’

AND

PERFORM
CONTROL

COMMON
TEST

A7-9110

SECTION
CABLING

WI
[l Bl
WI
UDI

Disconnect
the suspect
cable
from the backplane
Disconnect
a known
good cable
on the backplane
Plug the suspect
cable
into the
good cables
connector
on the
backplane
Press the MASTER
RESET button
on the Scanner
card

TEST

Note
Disregard

(::F)NO,o,
This
next

MITL9105/9110-98-350

is not a cable
stop of MAP

all E012

errors

i
problem
or chart

return
to the
that dwected

YES

I31
[3A]

Replace

or repair

suspect

cable

1
ii

I-

AND

REPLACE
CABLE

A7-11112

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

PAGING TEST

MAP350-704

Issue 1, June 1980
Sheet 1 of 3

AT THE CROSS CONNECT FIELD
[lA] Clip a butt-in on the check points
indicated b Fig. 704-l and listen
for audio a Yter dralrng
.’
the access
code
[lB] Check the continuity of the cable
by measuring the DC resistance
of the circuit. The resistance of
the paging transformer is 40 R
(test pt 1, Fig. 704-l)

[3Al

Measure for 3000 DC resistance
test pt 2 Fig. 704-1, after the paging access code has been dialed

[5A]

Turn off the system power at the
maintenance
panel
Replace the Scanner card
reference MAP350-510
Turn on the system power at the
maintenance
panel
Reset the system by pressing the
MASTER RESET button on the
Scanner card
t

)

Change
the
MAP350.510

Tone

Control

card

reference

AND

YES

[5B]
[5C]
[5D]

A7-13

;

SECTION
PAGING

MITL9105/9110-98-350
TEST

MAP350-704
Issue

1, June

Sheet

2 of 3

1980

Frnm

53
[6A]

Access
PAGE

the pager
by pressing
button
on the console

(51

161
AND

TEST
PAGER

FINISH

Replace
the interconnect
card
and all interconnect
cables
as
per MAP350-401
for the SX-100
MAP350-502
for the SX-200

3--[Ag

REPLACE
/NTERCONNECT
CARD AND
CABLlNG

FINISH

YES

[l W

A7-14

If the system
still has an apparent
paging
fault, contact
your
nearest
authorized
MITEL
service
representative

(

SECTION MITL9105/9110-98-350

INTERCONNECT
BOARD PI8

CROSS
CONNECT

--------_------

SPEECH PATH
32

FROM JUNCTOR
SEIZED FOR PA

ACTIVATE
PA1 CONTROL

FROM JUNCTOR
SEIZED FOR PA

SYifEM
2

ACTIVATE
PA2 CONTROL

TONE CONTROL CARO'

-----------------------I
TEST POINT

PIN NUMBERS

20.
45
22,
18. 43
47

23. 48

Fig. 704-l

:SJJJPL'EO
EQUIPMENT
- -----------~~,
VCHECK

FOR 300f1CONTINUlTY

*CHECK

FOR AUDIO

Music and PA Connections

A7-15116

SECTION

TOOLS REQUIRED
AC-DC Voltmeter
OHM Meter

[lA]

Check the user 48Vdc and 9OVac
fuses on: the back door of the
SX-200, on the interconnect card
of the SX-100

AND

CHECK FUSES

YES
[3A]
[3B]
[3C]

[4A]
[4B]

Disconnect external equipment
Replace the fuse with one of
equal value
If the fuse does not blow again
connect the external equipment.
If it blows again, there is an
external equipment problem

Measure all voltages on P18 as
per Fig. 705-i
Activate night bell and measure
for 3000 continuity on P18 K
and R contacts as per Fig. 705-l

AND
I

MEASURE VOLTAGES
& CONTINUITY

23
Go to 151

MITL9105/9110~98-350

’

SECTION

MITL91051911

NIGHTBELL

O-98-350

TEST

) MAP350-705
Issue

1, June

Sheet.2

1980

of 3

YES

[6A]

[7Al

Replace
Scanner
MAP350410

card

reference

If there still is an apparent
bell problem
contact
your
nearest
authorized
MITEL
representative

II---

night
4
1

A
FINISH

A7-18

SECTION

MITL9105/9110-98-350

NIGHTBELL

TEST

M AK350705

Issue 1, June 1980

1 Sheet 3 of 3

NIGHT BELL CONNECTION AUXILIARY RELAY

NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAX CURRENT
75mA

I
I

I-----l

MEASURE VOLTAGES
AND CONTINUITY

NIGHT BELL RELAY DIRECT DRIVE
CROSS
CONNECT

sx-200

INTERCONNECT
BOARD Pi8

POWER SUPPLYTBZ

---

-------

Ex
aa4

I
I
I
I

4avdc ’

I
I

4
I

f)GK
9OVac

1 O.lA
I MAX.

I
I
I
I

NIGHT
BELL

0.5A 6
MAX. 1 (NOTE 1) I!
I

NIGHT
BELL K

NIGHT
BELL R(K)

1 3~~~NN~~
SCANNER CARD
L-------------

I
I
I

{V)

MA
30011

NIGHT
BELL
CONTACT
MAX CURRENT
75mA

MEASURE VOLTAGES
I
AND CONTINUITY
!{+NNECT

BOARD

INTERCONNECT BOARD PLUG PlB
PIN
46
21

DESTINATION

1 NIGHT BELL 1 R(KI)

DESTINATION

NIGHT BELL 2 KE

NIGHT BELL 3 K3

1 NIGHT BELL 2 R(K2)

1 NIGHT BELL 3 R(K3)

NIGHT BELL 1 Kl
11

DESTINATION

1
1120

NOTE 1:

THE FACILITYISWIREDTO
EITHER THE SX-100 OR THE SX-200 TERMINAL
BLOCKS, AS INDICATED BYTHE DASHED LINES.
MITEL DOES NOT RECOMMEND A DIRECTGROUND
PIN 4 OFTHE NIGHT BELL RELAY DIRECT DRIVE

Fig. 705-l

Night

Bell Connections

‘I

A7-19120

SECTION

[IA]

MITL9105/9110~98-350

Check
music
source
at cross
connect
field with a butt-in
to ensure music
is supplied

CHECK

the

cross

MUSIC

connect

I fES

Trouble
equipment

shoot
customer
and cables

music
provided
.

[3A]

Check
for music
with a butt-in
pins 17 and 42 of P18

l-i AND1
on

Buzz cable
pair back
connect
field. Replace

to the cross
if necessary

Go to [5]

AI-21
-

;.
z.:. :

SECTION

MUSIC

MITL9105/9110-98.350

HOLD

TEST

c .. I.,

MAP350-706
Issue

1, June

Sheet

2 of 3

[5A]
[5B]

1980

Disconnect
P18
Measure
for approximately
40 (1
DC or pins 17 and 42 of J18
(receptacle
for P18)

AND

Was 42 II DC
present
on J18

Disconnect
P17
Check
for 40 II DC on pins
and 21 of P17

AND

CHECK
FOR
ON P17

40 II DC

Was 4011 DC
present
on P17

Replace

(Yz-)
A7-22

the interconnect
card
MAP350.502
- SX-200
MAP350.401
-SX-100

as per

SECTION
MUSIC

MITL9105/9110-98-350

ON HOLD

TEST

MAP350-706
Issue

1, June

Sheet

3 of 3

I
1980

T
From

[9A]
[9B]

[aI

Disconnect
P5
,“,“d”“:,
f;;‘J”5” I1 DC on pins46
?”

-l--CHECK
ON P5

FOR

40 II DC

147.23

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 729
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:12 23:44:41-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:02:04 10:41:09-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat 4.0 Scan Plug-in for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:12 23:44:41-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:02:04 10:41:09-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:12 23:44:41-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

PDF Mitel SX 100 & 200 Gen. 205 Vol. 2

SX-100 & SX-200 Gen. 205 Vol 2 SX-100 & SX-200 Gen. 205 Vol 2

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation